HINDUSTANI MANUAI
I
. &.--C. PlllLLOTT
" Tauba tauba I
HINDUSTANI MANUAL
BY
LIEUT.-COLONEL D. C. PHILLOTT, M.A., PH.D., F.A.S.B.
HINDUSTANI LECTURER, CAMBBIBOE UNIVERSITY ; LATE SECBETAKY
AND MEMBER, BOARD OF EXAMINERS, CALCUTTA • LATE FEL-
LOW, MEMBER OF THE SYNDICATE, PERSIAN LECTURER,
AND PRESIDENT OF THE BOARD OF STUDIES
IN ARABIC, PERSIAN AND URDU. OF THE
CALCUTTA UNIVERSITY; AUTHOR
OF ' HINDUSTANI STUMB-
LING-BLOCKS,' ETC. ;
Translator of the Nafhatu'LYamah. the Baz-Nama-yi Nasirl, and
the Faras-Nama-e Rangln, etc. ;
Editor of the Persian Translation of Hajl Baba and of the
Qawaninu's Sayyad, etc. , etc.
s. JJ5
Third Edition.
Calcutta
PUBLISHED BY THE AUTHOR.
1918.
[All rights reserved].
Calcutta : Printed at the Baptist
Mission Press, 41 , Lr. Circular Rd.
TO
THE THIRD PUNJAB CAVALRY, P.F.F.
(NOW 23rd CAVALRY, F.F ),
THIS LITTLE BOOK 13 AFFECTIONATELY DEDICATED
BY THE AUTHOR.
2004710
PREFACE.
THE success of "Hindustani Stepping-Stones " has induced
the author to bring out the present Manual, which is merely
a revised edition of the former work with some useful ad-
ditions. The "Stepping-Stones" was intended to be read
in conjunction with certain portions of Forbes' Manual.
As, however, students have complained of the inconveni-
ence of using two books, the present Manual has been made
complete in itself; no reference to Forbes' Manual is now
necessary.
In the present work no word or phrase is used that an
uneducated but intelligent native of Delhi does not use ;
further, no word or phrase is used that an uneducated but
intelligent Muslim of the Punjab does not understand. The
author, after completing the work, tested every sentence with
an illiterate Punjabi bearer, from the Murree Hills, who has
been in his service for more than twenty years ; and any word
or phrase not readily understood, was at once erased. Still,
the student that masters this little book will be possessed of
a vocabulary sufficient for all practical purposes and will
have acquired a wealth of idiom that will carry him through
even the exercise for the "Proficiency." Special attention
has been paid to the many idiomatic meanings of the com-
mon everyday verbs, and in the examples given, their mean-
ings are nearly, if not quite, exhausted. The student should
master the shades of meaning in the various compound verbs,
Lessons, 21, etc., and, in his written exercises and in his
speech he should practise using these idiomatic intensives,
etc., as much as possible. For instance, it is much more
vi PREFACE.
idiomatic to render " to elicit information " by bat nikal-
chhorna or nikdlkar rahnd [vide Lesson, 23, (d) and (gr)], than
by simple bat nikdlnd. Note too that chhat-lend is "to
choose, select," but chhat-dalna " to eliminate." The work
has also been based on the recurring mistakes of L.S. and
H.S. candidates at the monthly examinations.
Owing to want of space, many of the meanings of the words
given in the vocabularies, have not been illustrated in the
examples. It is, therefore, the work of the student, with
the help of the Munshi, to frame sentences illustrating the
missing meanings. Paragraphs in smaller print are not
necessary for Lower Standard candidates, and should not
therefore be studied till the matter in larger type has been
mastered.
The many editions through which Forbes' Manual has
passed are a sufficient proof of its popularity. This popularity
is largely due to the fact that it is printed in the Roman
character. Though the Roman character with its short vowel s
and capitals is, for a beginner (especially for the student
that wishes to learn the colloquial only), a great advantage,
it must be regarded as a go-cart, to be gradually discarded
as more and more progress is made. Before the student has
mastered this little book, he should be in a position to dis-
card the Roman alphabet. To a beginner, it is often an aid
to memory, to see a new word written both in the Roman
and in the foreign character.
Lastly, the beginner should practise as much as possible
aloud, but this subject is fully dealt with in the Introduction
that follows.
My thanks are due to Shamsu'l 'Ulama Muhammad Yiisuf
Ja'fari, Khan Bahadur, Head Mawlavi, Board of Examiners,
for substantial help in the preparation of this little book.
PREFACE. Vii
My acknowledgments are also due to the various grammars
and dictionaries, but specially to Forbes and Holroyd.
D. C. P.
). J
CALCUTTA,
September, 1910.
NOTE TO SECOND EDITION.
The gratifying welcome accorded to this Manual has in
duced me to issue this Second Edition.
LONDON,
October, 1913.
NOTE TO THIRD EDITION.
At the suggestion of my pupils, the Nagari character has
been added to this Edition, vide Appendix G. Three other
Appendices D, E and F have also been added.
D. C. P
CAMBRIDGE,
1917.
INTRODUCTION.
PART I.
A PRACTICAL METHOD OF ACQUIRING A NEW
LANGUAGE.
THERE are several modern schools or systems of acquiring
a new language, but the best is probably that of Professor
Rosen thai.
Under the old-fashioned system, the student was first
taught the grammar. He learnt to decline and conjugate,
and was laboriously taught rules and exceptions. He was
taught the theory of language, not the language itself. He
was then made to study the literature with the aid of a
dictionary7, colloquial being generally ignored. After three
or four years of such drudgery, not a single student, unless
he had been abroad or practised talking with foreigners, was
able to carry on the simplest conversation.
If waiters in Continental hotels, who talk English so
fluently, be questioned, it will be found that they have
acquired all their knowledge by residing in England for
frequently not more than six months. Something therefore
must be wrong in a system that in several years fails to
teach as much as can be picked up without teaching in six
months.
Now to learn a new language easily and quickly, it should
first be learnt colloquially, the systematic study of grammar
X INTRODUCTION, PART I.
and literature being taken up only when a degree of col-
loquial proficiency has been obtained.
The Professor's system is based upon the following facts : —
For the first two years or so of its life, an infant listens. It
understands a good deal that is said to it, but it does not
speak. About the third year, it begins to speak. This shows
that, in Nature's method, the ear is the first organ appealed
to. The child, however, has to acquire new ideas as well as
speech, so its progress is slow. Immigrants into America,
who know no English, are at first bewildered by the many
foreign sounds. That state of unpleasant mental confusion
lasts for two or three weeks. By that time the ear has
grown accustomed to a few of the sounds. The phrase heard
oftenest, probably connected with eating and drinking and
perhaps picked up in a restaurant, is instinctively imitated
and a simple phrase such as "Please bring me a beef -steak
and potatoes," is acquired. The learner expands this phrase
and builds on it, till in a few months only, he is able to speak
English fluently, often with perfect accuracy. This is what
is going on every day in America, instancing also the truth
that languages are learnt by sentences and not by isolated
words. Now every organ has a memory. If a person
cannot spell a word, he hastily writes it down and finds that
the memory in his fingers is better than that in his head.
In acquiring a language, more than one organ is brought
into use. An actor who learns his part in the quiet of his
room, repeating.it over in his own mind till he is word-
perfect, finds that at rehearsal he is unable to repeat his
part aloud without considerable effort. The reason is that
he has learnt by eye only, and has not practised the memory
in his tongue and ear.
Bearing all these points in mind: the Professor gives his
INTRODUCTION, PART I. XI
first lessons on a phonograph. The first lesson is a simple
but rather long sentence. In a book, this is arranged in
tabular form with an interlinear English translation. The
beginner, the open page before him, turns on the machine and
places the ear-cup to his ear. When the sentence has been
delivered by the machine three or four times, the ear will
have learnt the accent and the intonation of most of the
words, while the eye will have mastered the meaning. The
lesson must then be repeated aloud with the machine, and in
a short time the tongue and ear will work together. The
beginner has drunk in knowledge by several channels at the
same time — ear, eye, tongue, and memory. Necessary gram-
matical information is imparted with each sentence. After
the main sentence with its correct pronunciation has been
mastered with the machine, the student should take up, by
means of a little book, the study of variations on the main
sentence, no word or phrase that the student has not already
acquired being used in the variations. He first reads the
foreign exercise aloud, and then, looking only at the English
side, tries to translate. No effort of memory is to be made.
If a word escapes him, he must at once refresh his memory
from the page. These short exercises should be repeated at
least three or four times a day. " In a few days the phrases
will become second nature to the learner. He will no longer
think about them but in them." Study, which should not
exceed 15 or 20 minutes at a stretch, must always be carried
out aloud. Mere repetition imprints the sentences on the
ear and memory, in much the same manner as the Morse
alphabet is learnt for signalling. Olendorf well knew the
value of repetition, and if his ridiculous and inconsequent
sentences had not been so repugnant to the youthful mind,
his popularity might never have waned.
xii INTRODUCTION, PART I.
A systematic study of the grammar, and exercises in read-
ing and writing, can be taken up after the sentences
been mastered.
Now as regards the vocabulary and the number of J
sons on the phonograph. For Italian, there are only 24
lessons on the phonograph, i.e. there are 24 " records
and the vocabulary acquired in these 24 lessons is sufficient
for all practical colloquial purposes. The most necessary
words are contained in the first lessons. It has been esti-
mated that an ordinary English villager, from the day
he is born to the day he dies, uses in speech no more than
350 words. (Of course he understands far more). Profes-
sor Rosenthal estimates that the average educated man uses
4,000 words in conversation on all general subjects. Lep-
sius the Egyptologist limits the necessary vocabulary to
600, while another authority fixes it at 1,500. However,
be that as it may, arithmetically speaking, "with 40 words
we can form 1,024,000 sentences of 20 words each." (In
practice, though, most of these sentences would have to be
eliminated owing to the forced and unnatural order of the
words).
Now, the natives of India use a larger vocabulary than
ordinary English villagers, for not only are they naturally
more fluent, but Muslims and Hindus generally use different
words for all common objects: for a "key" the former
usually say kunji, the latter chabl.
Further, Oriental idiom and thought differ so widely from
European, that it would be extremely difficult to arrange, as
gramophone records, a series of long sentences (with inter-
linear translation) easily intelligible to a beginner. Short
sentences, however, could be satisfactorily arranged. As
regards idiom, take the simple sentence, "It is a fine day."
INTRODUCTION, PAET I. xill
Now an Englishman by this means "a sunny day," and if
he wants to translate this thought he must say, " The sky is
cloudless." However, an Indian's idea of a fine day is a
"soft day," and the phrase "fine day" calls up in his mind
a vision of a drizzly day in spring, a garden, and a summer-
house. To talk Hindustani, or to translate it, it is first
necessary to think like a Hindustani; and such thought
can only be acquired by, first constantly talking with natives
and, secondly, by reading their colloquial language, the early
reading lessons being written in pure colloquial language.
No action is performed well till it is performed unconsciously,
and no one knows a foreign language till he can think in it
and talk in it unconsciously, i.e. without thinking over the
translation. Continental waiters learn to do this in English
in six months, and it is absurd to suppose that an Englishman
with sufficient education to pass into and out of Sandhurst
cannot do the same. What is required is a proper system,
and proper teachers. Let the beginner, as far as possible,
follow Professor Rosenthal's practical method. A Munshi,
who soon tires, is not a good substitute for a gramophone,
but still he is the best substitute available, and work with
him can be done aloud.
A few words as regards the use 0f the text -book. The
old method of preparing, say 30 lines of Virgil, was to give a
boy a dictionary and an hour to prepare the task. The boy
spent an hour in laboriously looking up every word in a large
dictionary and as often as not in selecting the wrong meaning.
(Dictionaries are for people who know something of a lan-
guage ; not for beginners who cannot even talk). Next, the
boy spent an hour in class with a master, a first-class scholar,
in unlearning most of what he had acquired in his hour of
solitary and painful labour. This is the reason that few
xiv INTRODUCTION, PART I.
grown men who have not been to the Universities, have any
real acquaintance with the classics.
The modern system, and a wise system it is, is to use a
translation. In an hour, instead of 30 lines, 100 lines are
read, and the meaning of the author being intelligibly ex-
pressed, is at once understood : nothing has to be unlearnt,
and a great deal of the day's lesson sticks in the memory.
However, a translation to be of any use must be good ; it
must be idiomatic, not literal and bald. With a bald transla-
tion, the student is unable to compare the differences in
structure of the two languages, while the baldness of the
translation nauseates him. Literal translations do more
harm than good.
In studying the text-book, too, the easiest portions should
be selected and read first. When going over the text-book
for the third time, the student should keep the English open
before him and read an English sentence first ; the Munshi
should then read out aloud the corresponding sentence
from the text-book. The advantage of this will soon be
apparent.
A beginner must recollect that the minds, of illiterate
people usually work slowly, and that however well he speaks,
he has probably a strong foreign accent. When driving in a
tam-tam, do -not suddenly turn round and ask a question from
the sais. First call to him and wake him out of his reverie,
and then put your question.
When I first landed in India, I remember walking on the
fringe of Lucknow Cantonments with a noted oriental scholar,
whose instructive conversation had been making a deep im-
pression on my mind. He suddenly turned to a squatting
villager and said: "Are there any black partridges about
this spot ? " To me, newly landed, the question seemed a
INTRODUCTION. PART I. XV
natural one ; for I of course thought that tigers could be shot
on the outskirts of cities, though for elephants it might be
necessary to make a long journey of several hours. To the
villager, the question seemed appalling ; it acted like a spell,
for he refused even to open, or rather to shut, his mouth.
Now, admitting that "the fool didn't know his own langu-
age," what would be your first thought if you were suddenly
stopped in Piccadilhr by a Chinaman and asked if you could
direct him to the nearest grouse-moor ?
With some of the more vigorous and alert villagers of the
North, extreme caution is unnecessary, but even in dealing
with these it is advisable to lead gradually up to a subject,
first asking the villager his name, then the name of his village,
etc. Study, too, the way natives express the simplest sen-
tences ; for idiom consists in using simple expressions as a
native does, and not as most candidates imagine, in collecting
and learning by heart out-of-the-way words or expressions
such as "to become camphor" and "the parrot of my hand
flew away." Why write, "These two rocks exhibit con-
siderable petrological consanguinity to each other," ' when
you can express the same idea by some such simple and
idiomatic sentence as " These rocks are very much alike" ?
The other day an engaging-looking European suddenly put
his head into my railway-carriage and said : "Are you alone
in here ? " His English was perfect, still I at once decided
he was a foreigner, for an Englishman would probably have
said "Is there only one in this carriage ? " My questioner,
it turned out, hailed from America, though he had no
American accent.
A native, squatting by the roadside, might be asked what
1 This sentence actually occurs in a certain Government report.
Xvi INTRODUCTION. PART I.
he was doing. He would probably reply: "I am doing
nothing," and such a sentence would certainly be rendered
by a H. S. candidate, Mai kuchh nahl karta hti. The native
idiom, however, would be [Mai] Aise hi baitha M "I'm just
seated like this."
Those interested in the modern methods of studying
languages should refer to Professor Rosenthal's pamphlet,
from which I have so freely borrowed.
D. C. P.
CALCUTTA, ~i
September 1910. J
INTRODUCTION.
PART II.
THE HINDUSTANI ALPHABET AND THE SYS-
TEM OF TRANSLITERATION FOLLOWED
IN THIS BOOK.
URDU, like Persian and Arabic, is written and read from
right to left, and the first page of an Urdu book would usually
be the last page of an English book.
i n '.
COMBINED FOBM.
MJG-
Kame. j tached
• form.
1
L rau» -
liter-
ation.
Pronunciation.
Final.
Medial.
Initial.
alif
]
a, etc.
t
1
t
this at the commence-
ment of a word is a
mere prop for the
letter hamza, and has
no sound of itself;
after a consonant it
serves merely to pro-
long the vowel fatkah.
be
V
6
V
*
•r. '.
as in English.
pe
V
P
<«*
A
^
as in English.
te
0
t
hfi*
1
r">
a soft dental, like the t
in the Italian words
sotto. petto.
ta
£.
t
* I
tr J
something like the t in
tin-tack. 'Vide' (1),
p. xxiii.
INTRODUCTION, PAHT 11.
Name.
De-
tached
form.
Trans-
liter-
ation.
OOMBINJBD FORM.
Pronunciation.
Final.
Mfdial.
Initial
se
A S
^
A
Jl
like s in st7.
jim
£
j
t
91
*
like j in ?'az7.
die
£
ch
»
a.
like ch in church.
he
r
h
f
aR
*
a strong aspirate, some-
thing like the h in
huae.
khe
j- M
f
». s.
guttural, like the Scotch
C
ch in Zoc^.
dal
* d
j*.
> ,5
soft dental.
da
3 d
3-
a 3
something like the d
in dog ; ' vide' (1), p.
xxiii.
zdl
^>
z
&
A i
as in zeal.
re
;
r
j
^ ;
a distinct lingual like
the French r.
ra
3
r
J
> 3
a hard r ; 'vide' (6), p.
xxiii.
ze
3
z
J-
J1 J
as in zeal.
zhe
J
zh
}
> J
like the z in azure.
sin
e*»
s
LT
- *.
as in sit.
shin
uS
sh
(_f
^ ^,
as in s^ttf.
sad
O*5
s
LJ^
«a ^,
as in sit.
zad
L>
z
0^
-i ^
as in sea?.
toe
•fc
t
t
t J,
like t in iie.
zoe
j»
jf.
L •*
. "
Ja S>
as in zeal.
'ayn ^
t
*• c
a guttural ( consonant) .
lhayn\ i
yh
e
A
£
a guttural, something
like the g in the Ger-
.1
man word sagen.
INTRODUCTION, PART II.
De-
Trans -
GOMBlNtJl iOKU.
Name
t ached
liter-
form.
r^ o uucia ion.
Final.
Medial.
Initial.
fe
«J
/
(_ft
&
*
as in fin.
qaf
«3
q
<>
a
ji
like ck in ,<tfwc&, pro-
nounced very gut-
turally.
kaf
^J
k &
i: r
as in English.
gaf
J
9
Ji
i
t
hard, as in give.
lam J
I
J
i J
as in lane : often more
dental than in Eng-
lish.
mim /•
m \ r
-^*
/o
as in English.
nun &
n v
i
**
sometimes as in Eng-
lish but often more
dental ; sometimes
nasally, vide (14), p.
xxiii.
waw )
w,etc. y
^
3
as hi war, at the begin-
ning of a word or
syllable.
he »
h *
t«
A
as in hand ; vide (15), p.
xxiii.
ye <JT
y, etc. ^
i
«.i
as in yard, at the begin-
ning of a word or syl-
lable.
All these letters in Arabic are consonants. There are also
three short vowels: a ( _^_ ), i ( "7 ) and u ( _L ). The
a and u are written (or understood) over the consonant to
which they may belong, the i under; and they are pro-
nounced after their consonant.1
In practice the short vowels are seldom written or printed.
xx INTRODUCTION, PART II.
Alif ( t ) at the beginning of a syllable is. practically speak-
ing, merely a prop for a short vowel..
The consonants t - j ^ are weak consonants or semi-vowels,
and are allied respectively to the short vowels a, u, and i.
When a weak consonant is preceded by its allied short vowel,
it becomes a letter of prolongation, i.e. it prolongs the short
vowel, or, in other words, it ceases to be a consonant, but com-
bines with its short vowel to form a long vowel. In this case
it is equivalent to a long accent over a vowel in the Roman
character.
Supposing it is desired to transliterate bd into the Persian
character. First take the consonant v ; *nen mark it with
its vowel, i.e. a ; lastly, to show that the sound of the vowel
is prolonged, add the weak consonant that is allied to the
vowel a, viz. alif, thus ^ ; here alif is no longer a consonant
but is merely the long accent over a.
When a weak consonant is preceded by an unallied short
vowel, the two form a diphthong (Hindi).
When a consonant has no vowel, it is " silent." and is pointed
with a jazm, which is like a circumflex accent ( _A_ or _^_ ), i.e.
speaking practically, when two consonants come together, the
first is pointed with the jazm. When a consonant is doubled,
it has the mark tashdtd ( * ) placed over it.
The following examples illustrate the system of transliter-
ating the vowels and diphthongs. It will be noticed that
whenever a Hindustani word begins with what is considered
a vowel in English, the first letter is always the consonant
alif :—
wt ab now, «Jf ag fire, X <j»[ is ka of its, his, *<&>[ Ikli sugar-
INTRODUCTION, PART II.
cane, «-X>l ek one, K ^ us ka of that, his, ^"f ud otter,
s
os dew, L~J| aisa such, ;y crar (or awr) and,
jj-j 6as enough, ctb 6aZ word, i- be (prep.) without, cw din
day, n*!i> dm religion. ^ ^ ?^6» lady, ^ lo take ye, «^-» bed
t ^9
willow, cuJ but idol, ->J^ 6wd f. drop, *~»^> 6osa kiss, ^j bu scent
(in Urdu, j> bo). <J*J bail (really bayl1) "ox," ^L ^a» "is,"
^ hi (an emphatic particle), J^J baul ( or 6«t<;/) urine, j~* sau
(saw*) a hundred.
The letter 'ayn (^ 8) :—
Jlic 'agZ sense, unite 'adat habit, ^JLc 't7m knowledge, «x^ 7«!
*
A/ ^
religious festival, _>w> 'wwrage, ^* 'ud aloes, w*j.c 'a*6 * defect..
o;y= 'aural6 woman, •>*? 6a'd after, t***mi'da (Ar.) stomach.
/
g>»«/o mu'jiza miracle, ^_^ s^ar' sacred law, gl-o zt7' district,
' ^
aUi shu'a' rays of the sun, fj^j rai')?' name of a month, ?yLt>
^w?w' rising of the sun.
This system of transliteration is that employed in most
grammars and dictionaries. It is not, however, quite logical.
I But in the Nagari character it is bail.
* But in transliterating from the NagarT character sau would be
correct.
* This consonant is represented by an inverted comma above the
line. * Or 'ayb 5 Or 'atvrat.
Xxii INTRODUCTION, PART II.
For instance, v** an^ &)}* should be transliterated 'uyb and
'awrat, for ^ and 3 are consonants, except when they are
letters of prolongation (i.e. equivalent to a long accent over
a Roman vowel) .
According to Arab grammarians, a syllable cannot begin
with a vowel. Hamzah ( ? and f ), the first letter of their
alphabet, is not a vowel, vide Appendix D. No syllable in
Arabic can begin with two consonants; Smith becomes
Ismith. In Hindi, however, some words do begin with two
or more consonants, as : stri " woman."
PRONUNCIATION.
(1) The hard letters t ( & } and th ( *«> , d ( 5 ) and dh
( 4*5 ), and r ( } } and rh ( **j ) are peculiar to Hindi. Any
word containing a hard letter is therefore Hindi. So, too,
are the soft compounds ph ( A$J \ th • &#> ), dh ( &*s ) and
chh ( £«* ).
(2) The letter zh ( $ ) is peculiar to Persian. The letters p
( sj ). ch ( g ), and g ( ^ ) are common to Hindi and Persian.
(3) The letters s ( £• ), h ( c ), M ( £ )• s (•>'),?( u° >-
z ( u« ), « ( i ), 2 ( £ ). '( £ ), and 9 or & ( i5 ). are peculiar
to Arabic.
(4) Hamza ( * ), which in Arabic is in reality an additional
letter with a peculiar sound of its own, is in Urdu generally
the equivalent of a hyphen, as : Fd,ida 8^l» [fa-ida] :; bene-
fit" ; ;a,o V^- [fa-o] "go." Vide Appendix D.
(5) When enunciating the Urdu soft sounds t, d,1 and their
compounds th and dh, the tip of the tongue should touch
the upper front teeth. When, however, pronouncing the
corresponding hard letters, the underside of the tip of the
tongue should touch the palate above the upper front teeth.
(6) When pronouncing r ( j ,3 the tip of the tongue must
be turned much farther back, so that the underneath may
strike the roof of the mouth.
1 In a few Persian words, £ is sometimes found, as in ^
2 These two letters are properly softer and more dental than the
corresponding English letters.
3 The letter r is not found at the beginning of a word, nor is it ever
doubled.
xxiv PRONUNCIATION.
Soft r 0) is a lingual as in French.
(7) £» 5, cr *, u° ?> are ™ Urdu homophones, though not
so in Arabic. They are all pronounced like the a in ait.1
(8) c fc is often pronounced like » A, but should be more
guttural than the h in huge.
(9) i 2, 3 z, i> ?, * z are in Urdu homophones and are pro-
nounced like the z in zeal.{
(10) t is a strong palatal, but vulgarly is pronounced like
(11) a (') is a strong guttural (consonant), difficult for a
European to distinguish. The Indians and the Persians
pronounce it differently from each other, but neither pro-
nounce it as do the Arabs.
(12) i gh. is a guttural g accompanied by a rattling. The
r in the French grasseye is an approximation only.
(13) <3 <? is a strong guttural, like the ck in stuck when pro-
nounced in the throat.
(14) o n as in not but more dental. In certain cases it is
nasal as in the French bon (Vide Appendix F). In Urdu a
final nasal n may be distinguished by the omission of its
dot, as u In the Roman character nasal n is generally
transliterated n or ~ . in this edition by the latter sign. Be-
fore b and p, it is often pronounced ra. (There is practically
no nasal n in Persian and Arabic).
(15) X h as in hand. As a final letter in Urdu and Persian
(not in Arabic) * generally ' silent ' or ' imperceptible ' and is
then pronounced like a, as : *il^ khanci. »AXJ banda. It is
I In reading the Qur'an, an attempt is made to give these letters
their Arabic pronunciation.
* There is no silent h in Arabic. The aspirated final h of Arabic
becomes a in Persian and Urdu, thus tnalikah "queen" becomes
malika.
PRONUNCIATION. XXV
aspirated in such words as »t; rah "way. road," »^ shah
"king," *Ji dih " village," and their contracted forms *> rah,
A«» shah, »i dih. This letter is generally written in its
"butterfly" form when used to aspirate the consonants b,
p, t, t, j, d. d, r, k, g,} as in ^V bhi " also " : but in its ' hang-
ing ' form when a separate letter, as ^. bihl " quince."
This convention is not universal.
(16) y w or v. In a few Persian words, it is silent ^"de-
viated ") after a £ kh, as : *tj^- khwdh " whether," ^^ khtid
"self," i-fy^- Wdrak "food." It is also used to prolong
/
the short vowel u as in y bu. Further it is made to do
duty for the Hindi vowel o.2 which is not found in the Arabic
alphabet.
(17) The Hindi letter chh (in Urdu a double letter &#*.) is
an aspirated ch as in the English ivatch-him pronounced
without a hyphen.
(18) <j> y as in yard. It is also used to prolong the short
vowel i as in ^ bi. Further it is made to do duty for the
Hindi vowel e 2 ( *Z), for which there is no equivalent in the
Arabic alphabet.
(19) These letters should be practised, i.e. pronounced
aloud, at first under the direction of a Munshi. In a short
time, not only will their pronunciation cease to be an effort
to the tongue, but the ear also will learn to distinguish the
1 These strongly aspirated consonants (Hindi) are in the Nagari
character single letters and not compounds as in Urdu. If the Eng-
lish word up-hill be pronounced uph-ill, the sound of ^j (15) ph can
be ascertained.
* There is no o or e sound in Arabic. When the Persians adopted
the Arabic character, they extended the use of the consonants j and
^ to represent the sounds "unknown" to Arabs, viz. o and e. In
modern Persian, however, these sounds no longer exist, their place
being taken by u and I.
xxvj PRONUNCIATION.
difference in sound, and thus many spelling mistakes (which
are frequently mistakes of pronunciation) will be avoided.
(20) The short vowel a is pronounced like the u in the
English word " gun " ; i as in " fin " ; u as in " put " ; a as
in "father": i as in "marine"; u as the doubled o in
" boot " ; e as in " they " ; o as in " go." The Hindi diph-
thongs ai ' and an l as the ai in " aisle " when pronounced as
a diphthong and as ow in " how," but vulgarly more like o or
the aw in chaw.
(21) Pronounce every syllable and every letter of each
word : say sa-kib, and not saib or sdhb. Above all, do not
shorten a final short vowel that should be long : say pant
and kawwa, and not pant and kawwa or worse still kawa.
Accent is less strong than in English and is subordinate to
quantity.
(22) The same consonant doubled must always be pro-
nounced twice as pat-ta m. "leaf." In Urdu, a consonant
that is doubled is written once only. The mark tashdid
" strengthening," may be placed over it to indicate it is
di •"
doubled, as in lL. Say pat-thar j%^t ("stone") and not
path-ar. Vide also Appendix G.
(23) When a consonant is ' quiescent,' that is when it is
not followed by a short vowel, it may have the sign ° or *
O '
placed over it. as in «X»~A> masjid " mosque."
l Note that the diphthongs are Hindi, and are represented in the
Persian character by the equivalents of ay and aw. Vide also Appen-
dix G
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
INTRODUCTORY GRAMMATICAL NOTES.
I. ARTICLE.
Hindustani has no word which corresponds exactly with
our definite article the : occasionally, the demonstrative pro-
nouns yih "this," and wuh "that," are employed as articles.
The place of our indefinite article a or an is supplied by the
numeral ek "one," or by the definite pronoun ko,l "some, a
certain" ; thus, ek adrm or ko,i adml "a man, some man, or
a certain man."
II. SUBSTANTIVES.
(a) — Gender. — All substantives are either masculine or
feminine, except a few which are of both genders. Males
are masculine., and females feminine. With regard to life-
less things, practice must determine their gender. As a
general rule, however, all abstract nouns and names of
things and irrational beings ending in » are feminine ; those
in t are also feminine., if derived from Arabic roots; and
those in ish, if derived from Persian verbal roots. All
nouns in t and ish, not restricted as above., and all nouns in
sh, are uncertain. (Paw, water, ghi, clarified butter, daht
curd, hathi, elephant, mott, a pearl, and jl, mind, are mas-
culine).
2 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(b)—Declen.non.—The various cases are expressed by means
of terminations, called postpositions. These answer the same
purpose as our prepositions. The following scheme shows
the postpositions and their signification. One example will
suffice for all substantives.
Declension of a Hindustani Noun.
Singular. Plural.
Nominative (and Ace.) mard.1 mard, men, the men.
man, the man.
Genitive mard-ka, -ke, -H, of mardd-ka, -ke, -«, ot
man.
Dative and Ace mard-ko, to mardo-ko, to etc.
man. or man.
Ablative mard-se, from or with mardo-se, from etc.
\ man.
f mard-me, in man. mardo-me, in etc.
J£ ) mard-par, on man. mardo-par, on etc.
•— j *
(. mard-tak, up to man. mardo-tak. up to etc.
Agent mard-ne, by man. mardo-ne, by etc.
\Vocative ay mard, 0 man. ay mardo, 0 men.
(c)— The above example with slight modifications is appli-
cable to all the substantives of the language. It will be
observed that the nominative singular mard remains unaltered
as a root. The nominative plural is the same as the singular.
The vocative plural always ends in o, having dropped the
nasal n ( ~ ) of the preceding cases.
1 For pronunciation, vide Introduction Part II.
SUBSTANTIVES.
Exception 1.— Feminine nouns (even some ending in 5) are
declined exactly like mard, except that they add the syllable
e in the nominative plural, or a if the singular ends in ? (or
u Hindi); thus, mez "a table"; nom. plural meze; bu.at
bo P. "odour," pi. bH,e; roil "bread, a loaf"; nominative
plural, rotiya.* In the oblique cases plural, they add 5 as in
the example already given; thus, mezo Ico, to the tables,
rotiyo-se, from the loaves. A few peculiarities are dealt with
in Lesson 53.
Exception 2.— Masculine nouns ending in a or a, if purely
Indian, and many masculines ending in the unmarked a or
imperceptible h (by Hindus often written with a long a),
change their final vowel into e in the oblique cases singular
and nominative plural, and into 5 for the oblique cases plural.
Thus, kuttd "a dog"; gen. sing, kutte-kd, -ke, -kt : voc. sing.
ay kutte : nom. plur. kutte ; gen. plur. etc. kutto-ka, -ke, -ki ;
voc. plur. ay kutto: baniya'1 "grain-merchant"; gen sing'
baniye kd ; nom. plur. baniye'; gen plur. baniyo kd. So,
banda&sl&ve; gen. sing, bande-kd, -ke, -ki: nom. plural bande ;
gen. bando-kd, etc. Masculine nouns in d, not purely Hindi,
but borrowed from the Arabic, Persian, or Sanskrit, are not
necessarily subject to this inflection. For example, da,na P.
"a sage," pita S. "a father," are not inflected; the gen.
sing, is ddnd-kd, etc. ; nom. plur. ddnd ; gen. plur. dana,o kd,
etc. Again dddd, paternal grandfather, may or may not be
inflected as : gen. sing, ddde-kd or dadd-kd ; plur. dddo-kd or
dddd,o-kd; etc. ; but the inflected form is now rarely used
Vide also L. 59.
1 Note this euphonic change from I in the sing, to iya. Masculine
nouns in * make no change for the nom. plur., as: moti nom. sing,
and plur. ; gen. plur. motiyd ka. 2 Or baniya.
4 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(d) The nominative can always be used as a vocative, as :
kutta "0 dog," instead of ay (or ai) kutte.
Remark. — In Hindi ta,l is sometimes substituted for ko, and
talak or tori or Id for tak.
III. ADJECTIVES.
(a) — Adjectives are generally placed before their substan-
tives and agree with them in gender. Adjectives ending in
any letter except a, are indeclinable Bechari (f.) is an ex-
ception to this rule.
(6) — The termination a is used before a masculine noun
only, and in the nominative case singular (or the accusative
case, if under the nominative form). The termination e is used
before a substantive masculine, in any case singular, where a
postposition or interjection is used or understood, or before
any masculine in the plural number. Lastly, i is used always
before a feminine noun. Thus, bara ghar "a large house";
bare ghar ka "of a large house"; plur bare ghar, "large
houses " ; bare gharo par "on the large houses." Again, kitab
"a book," being feminine, we say, bari kitab " a large book ";
ban kitab me, " in a large book " ; ban kitabe " large books,"
etc. Adjectives purely Arabic, Persian, or Sanskrit, and
ending in a, are not necessarily subject to any change or
inflection.
(e) — In like manner, the genitive case of a noun or pro-
noun generally precedes the word which governs it; and
the use of ka, ke, or H; ra, re, or n; and na, ne, or m,
in the formation of such genitives, is determined by the
same rule that regulates the a. e and I of the adjective.
Hence, in Hindustani, the application of all genitives, nouns
PRONOUNS. D
and pronouns, is precisely that of the declinable adjective ;
thus, mard ka is used when the noun belonging to it is
mascuKne. and in the nom case singular ; as. mard ka beta,
mard ka ghora, etc " the man's son, horse," etc. When
the word belonging to mard is masculine, but not in the
nom. singular (or the sing. ace. form without ko), then ke
must be used; as, mard ke bete ko, "to the man's son";
mard ke beto ko "to the man's sons." When the word be-
longing to mard is feminine, in all cases H is used ; as. mard
H joru "the man's wife"; mard ki beti ko "to the man's
daughter " ; mard H betiyfi, '•' the man's daughters."
(d) — In English, when we use the verb 'to be' in making
an assertion, we put the nominative first, then the verb, and
lastly the thing asserted : as, ' my father is wise ' ; ' that
man is ignorant.' In Hindustani the rule is. first the nomi-
native, then the thing asserted, and last of all the verb ; thus,
mera bap dJana hai " my father wise is " ; so wuh admi nd
dan hai, " that man ignorant is."
IV. PRONOUNS.
(a) — The personal pronouns are thus declined : —
Sing. First Person. Plur.
Nom. mat, I, ham (always m.), we.
Gen. mera, mere, men, " ham-drd, -are, -art.
D. and A. mujh-ko or mujhe, ham-ko, or -e.
Ab. mujh-se, ham-se.
Loc. mujh-me, -par, -tak. ham-me, -par, -tak.
Agt. mai-ne, ham-ne.
6 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Sing Second Person. Plur.
Norn. tu, turn, you.
Gen. tera, tere, ten, tum-hara. -hare, -hari.
D. and A tujh-ko or tujhe, tum-ko or, -he.
Ab tujh-se, tum-se.
LOG. tujh-me, -par, -tak, tum-me, -par, -tak.
Agt. tu-ne, tum-ne.
(b) — It will be observed that the first and second personal
pronouns, 'I' and 'thou,' have a declension peculiar to
themselves.
In the first place, the gen. sing, ends in ra, re, ri, and the
gen. plur. in ara or hara, are or hare, an or hari instead of the
ka, ke, kl of the substantives. The other cases singular are
formed by adding the requisite postpositions to the oblique
forms or inflections mujh and tujh ; at the same time, the
dative and accus. may optionally add ko or e. The cases
denoting the agent sing, are formed by adding ne to the
nom., as, mal-ne and tu-ne, and not mujh-ne, etc.1
(c) — The rest of the pronouns are simple in their declen-
sion ; all that is requisite is to remember the nom. and oblique
form or inflection of each ; thus, yih, he, etc., inflect, is-ka.
ke, -kl.
Sing. Third Person. Plur.
Nom. yih? he, she, it, or this, yih (old ye) they, these.
Gen. is-ka, -ke, -H, in-kd, ke, -kl.
Dat. is-ko or is-e. in-ko, or inhe.
1 But when a noun in apposition comes after mat and tu, they are
changed into mujh and tujh, as mujh ghar'tb ne ; tujh nadan ne.
2 Properly yah and wah ; compare yaha "here" and waha "there."
PRONOUNS. ?
Sing. Third Person. Plur.
Ac. yih, is-ko, or is-e. yih. in-ko, inhe
Ab. is-se. in-se.
LOG is-me, -par, -tak, in-me, -par, -tak.
Agt. is-ne, inho-ne.
(d) — Exactly like yih are declined the four following pro-
nouns. It will be sufficient here to give the nominative and
inflection of each, singular and plural.
Nom ivuh,1 he, she, it, that. wuh (old we), they or
those.
Inflec. us-kd, -ke, kl. etc., un-? -kd, -ke, -H
Interrogative.
Nom. kaun, who ? kaun, who ?
Inflec. kis-kd, -ke, -kl, etc., kin-kd, -ke, -H.
Relative.
Nom. jo, he who, etc., jo, they who.
Inflec. jis-kd, -ke, -H, etc., jin-kd, -ke, -In.
Correlative.
Nom. so 8 (old) that same, so (old) those same
Inflec. tis-kd, -ke -ki, etc. tin-led, -ke. -H.
(old): (old).
1 Properly yah and wah ; compare yaha "here" and waha "there.
2 Agent case, unhd ne ; and jinhd ne.
3 In Modern Urdu wuh is used.
8 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(e) — The following interrogative is applicable, either to
the singular or plural : —
Nom. kya, what ? : Inflec. kdhe-kd, -ke, -fce, of what ? etc.
In pure Urdu, however, the oblique cases of kaun are used
for those of kya. The forms, kdhe-kd, and kdhe-ko, may
occasionally occur, but not the others.
(/) — The word dp. self, gives, as a possessive adjective,
ap-nd, -ne. -m "of or relating to self, own." The word dp
is also employed when addressing respectable persons of any
position in life, or speaking of a superior, in the sense of
Your Honour. Your Worship, His Honour, etc. Vide L. 31.
(g) — The indefinites are ko,i, and kuchh "some, a, any."
The inflection of ko,i is kisi or kisu, of which kisu is the
older form. The plural is ka,i (or kaj, ek) "some, several."
To these may be added har, or har-ek " every," which has no
inflection. Sab "every, or all," when accompanied by its
substantive, is indeclinable; but when used by itself, in an
emphatic sense, it has sabho (or sab) for the oblique cases
plural; as, sab log kahte hoi "all people say"; sabho ne
kahd "by all it was said" ; but in modern Urdu sab ne or
sabhi ne kahd is preferred. The compound jo-ko,l " whoso-
ever." has a double inflection, jis-kisi-kd, -ke, -kl.
V. VERBS.
(a)— The Hindustani verb is very regular. The accent
always falls on the root syllable, as : gir-nd. The infinitive
or verbal noun always ends in m; as girna "to fall," also
"falling" — a masculine noun subject to inflection ; as, girne
kd "of falling"; girne ko "to" or "for, falling." Bv
VERBS. 9
striking off the syllable nd, we have the root of the verb,
which is also the second person singular of the imperative ;
as, gir "fall thou." By changing nd into td we have the
present participle, as: girtd (hu.d) "falling," By leaving
out the n of the infinitive we have the past participle, as :
gird (hu,d) "fallen." But when either of the long vowels a
or o precedes the nd ; the n is changed into y ; as land " to
bring," Idyd "brought." From these three principal parts
of the verb, viz. gir, girtd and gird, all the other parts are
formed, either by the addition of terminations or by means
of the following two auxiliary tenses : —
1st. PRESENT TENSE.
1. mat hu, I am. Jiam hat, we are.
2. tu hai, thou art, ' turn ho, you are.
3. wuh hai, he, she, or it is. wuh hai, they are.
2nd. PAST TENSE.
1. mai thd or thi,1 I was. ham the* we were.
2. tu thd or thi,1 thou wast. turn the or thl,1 you were.
3. wuh thd or thl,1 he, she wuh the or thl,1 they were.
or it was.
(6) — In the first of the tenses there is no distinction
between the masculine and feminine, but in the second or
past tense, the forms thd and the are masculine, and thi and
thl are feminine. Tn the first person plural, the* is also used
for the feminine instead of thl. It is a universal rule, that
except in the Aorist and the Imperative, the verb agrees with
its nominative in gender as well as in number ; thus, the
l Thl and thi feminine. * Ham is always masc,
10 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
masculine singular is a, the feminine singular is I, the masc.
plur. e, and the fern. plur. ! (contracted for iya). As a
general rule, it is sufficient to add the nasal n ( ~ ) to the last
word of the feminines in the plural ; as, girtl thl, not girffi
thV
VI. ADVERBS.
(a)— Adverbs present little difficulty. The following are
a few examples: Aj, "to-day"; kal, "yesterday"; turant.
"quickly"; jhat, "instantly": yaha, "here." These are
original Hindi.
(&) — Some prepositions are also adverbs : as, age " ahead " ;
(but as a preposition "in front of"). [In VII it will be seen
that prepositions are really substantives].
(c) — Zor se, Urdu, "by force "= ba-zor, Persian, which
latter also occurs in Urdu: dur tak, "far"; ban dwdz se,
"loudly." These are substantives with a preposition or
postposition.
(d) — Rat din (Hindi) or shab o roz (Persian) "night and
day," i.e. all the 24 hours ; roz roz (or har roz) "every day " ;
zabardasti [se] " by force " ; jaldl [se] = jald " quickly." These
are merely substantives.
(e)—J<M. " quickly " : dur, " far " ; wuh bard phurtlld hai,
"he is very smart, active." These are simply adjectives.
Vide L. 61 (c).
(/)— The adjectives aisd, waisd, Una, jitnd (uninflected),
etc., are also used as adverbs qualifying verbs, as : jaisd kiyd
waisd pdyd= " as he sowed, so he reaped." Sometimes they
are inflected adverbially, as : aise, waise, etc.
1 For paradigm of verb vide Lesson 7.
PREPOSITIONS 11
(g) — Niz, "also"; hamesha, "always" : ahistaahisa, "slowly,
silently " ; rafta rafta, " by degrees." These are real Persian
adverbs.
(h) — Ittifdq-an. " b}^ chance," is an Arabic substantive in
the Ar. ace. case.
(i) — Adjectives in ana. are especially adverbial : as, Sipa-
hiyana "soldier-like, in a soldierly manner": shahdna, "royal;
in a royal manner."
(j) — The Con j . Participle is sometimes adverbial: as, Jan
bujhkar. " knowingly, on purpose"; is se barh-kar, "more
than this " ; dthupke ana, " to come secretly." [Dida o
ddnistaP. "on purpose."]
(k) — Other adverbs are ab kl daf'a, " this time " ; aur kahl, "some-
where else" ; jaha kahl, " wherever" ; kahl no kahl, " somewhere or
other"; kdbhl nahi, "never"; kabhi kabhl, "sometimes"; fab
kabhi, " whenever " ; kabhi na kabhl, " at some time or other." Vide
also L. 61 (c) (4).
VII. PREPOSITIONS.
(a) — Strictly speaking there are none. Their place is taken
by masculine and feminine nouns followed by a postposition
sometimes expressed but usually understood. Thus, ghar he
age, "before the house" really stands for ghar ke age me,
"in the front of the house." This explains why some
prepositions are masculine and some feminine.
(6) — Prepositions may precede or follow the nouns they
govern, and occasionally when they follow their noun, the
postposition ke or H that precedes them is omitted, as : us
pas, for uske pas. The ke is usually omitted before par,
" across, the other side."
(c) — Manand, "like," if it precedes its noun, is masculine
and takes ke ; if it follows, it is feminine and takes H.
12 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(^) — Us ke sdth or — hamrah means "in company with
him," but us ke samet = " taking him along with (me)":
samet is used of lifeless things, animals, children, servants,
prisoners, etc. ; it cannot be applied to superiors. Sipdhl
paltan ke sath (not samet} gayd. Mai naukar samet (or ke sdth)
gayd. Sath and hamrah are never used for lifeless things.
(e) — A few Persian and Arabic prepositions occur. These
precede their substantive, which remains in the nominative
form, as : be-hukm " without an order " ; be-chdra " helpless."
Hindi nouns in a are, however, inflected, as : be-samjhe '
" without understanding (it) " ; be-thikdne " without trace."
(/) — The Hind! preposition or postposition bind, contracted
bin, usually precedes (but may follow) an inflected noun as :
bin samjhe1 "without understanding"; bin ddne pdm =
"without food"; bin jane1 adv. "without knowing, un-
willingly."
Bin is also a negative prefix, as : bin-boyd, adj. " unsown."
VIII. INTERJECTIONS.
The following are common :—Shdbdsh " well-done ! " (ad-
miration); kyd khubl "how excellent!" (astonishment and
denial) ; wdh wdh ! (for admiration and astonishment) : lo
and lijiye (lit. " take ") = " lo ! ", " behold ! ", and, " hulloa ! " ;
hai "hulloa!" (surprise); hay hay "alas!" but hai hai
"what a pity!", "what a difficulty!" and also "alas!";
chhi chhi 4 " fie fie ! " ; " uff ! (expresses disgust) ; uh " I don't
care ! "
here Pa8t P"*'01'?168 (inflected), used as
among8t half-ca8tes; hence "the chhi chhl
LESSON 1.
13
Mard, m.
Admi, m.
Insan, m.
Bat, f.
Bat-chit, f.
Khayal, m.1
Safed, adj.
i, f.
P*Za, adj., Hindi.
Pila-pan? m., Hindi.
Zard, Persian.
Zardi, f., Persian.
Razi, adj.
Na-rdz, adj.
LESSON 1.
Man (as opposed to woman).
A human being (from Adam) ;
sometimes a servant; vulg.
husband or wife.
Man (in the sense of man-
kind).
A word, talking ; matter,
affair.
Conversation.
Idea, thought ; imagination
(and hence mind).
White.
Whiteness ; whitewash ; also
the white of an egg.
Yellow ; also pale from sick-
ness, etc.
Yellowness.
Yellow.
Yellowness; also the yolk (of
an egg).
Pleased, satisfied ; (in Punjab
also well, in good health).
Displeased, dissatisfied.
1 Vulgarly MiiyaL The short vowels, especially of Arabic words
are often incorrectly pronounced in Urdu.
2 All nouns ending in pan (= English —ness) are masculine.
14 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Raza-mandi, f. Consent.
'A jab, adj. Strange (also as an expression
of astonishment).
Wonderful, strange, rare.
Wonder, astonishment.
An atom ; a little ; please ;
just.
'A jib, adj.
Ta'ajjub, m. subs.
Zarra, subs., adj., and adv.
(when used as an adjective
pronounced zara).
Zara-sa, adj.
Su,l, f.
Gharl, f.
Gora, adj.
Chauki, f.
Pdya, m.
Hisab, m
Wildyat, f .
Wilayati, adj.
Lambd, adj.
Lamba,i, f.
, adj.
A smallish quantity.
A needle : also the hand of a
watch.
Watch.
Fair ; hence a British soldier
or sailor.
Chair, bench ; also a police
outpost.
A leg of a chair, table, etc. ;
a pillar; also leg of a
slaughtered animal (used as
food).
Account, reckoning.
A foreign country; hence
Kabul; hence also England
English; also belonging to
Kabul.
Long.
Length.
Short, or small.
LESSON 1.
Bal, m., used in sing, or pi. Hair.
Ma'lum, Ar., past part, (from What is known, known
15
'Urn, knowledge).
Chihra, m.
Khidmat, f.
Khidmat-gar, m.
Iman, m.
Be-tman, adj.
Be-din, adj.
Diyanat, f .
Diyanat-dar , adj.
Bad-diyanat, adj.
(used for abstract ideas only).
Countenance.
Service.
Any personal servant ; (a-
mongst Europeans) a table-
servant.
Trust ; religious belief ;
honesty.
(Lit. without faith), dishonest.
Without religion, irreligious.
Honesty.
Honest.
Dishonest.
Qissa, Ar., m., Kahani, H., f. Tale, story, narrative.
Ki, conj.
To,1 conj. and adv.
Nahl to, conj.
Afsos, subs., m.
Afsos! inter j.
Pasand, adj. and subs.
Na-pasandi, f.
That.
Then, in that case ; at least ; as
for ; I admit ; also used as a
correlative of agar and jab.
Otherwise.
Sorrow, grief.
Alas!
Approved, liked: approval.
Disapproval.
1 Often use 1 as a particle of emphasis ; there is no exact equiva-
lent in English. The use of this very idiomatic particle can be learnt
from the examples.
lft HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Andesha, pi. andeshe, m. Anxiety, anxious thought.
J-Or, f. (and m.) Thought, reaction, and
sometimes = andesha.
RanjS no pi., m. Grief, sorrow, pain of mind,
displeasure.
- . Your Honour (requires a verb
in the third person plural).
Kam. Work., business.
Shikayat, f Complaint, accusation ; (also
in high Urdu, ailment).
Bhari. adj. Heavy; important, serious.
Der, f. subs., and adj. Late ; lateness ; delay
Deri, f . subs, (nob good Urdu) . Lateness.
Itnl der me. In the meanwhile ; while this
was going on.
Ear, pron. Every, each.
Ear ek, pron. Each one.
Risala? pi. risdle, m. Native cavalry ; a pamphlet.
Ab. Now.
Abhi. This very moment.
Larnd (kin se) . To fight (with).
And, int. To come.
Taiydr, adj. Ready, prepared.
Hdzir, adj. Present.
Sdth (sang), prep, and subs. With ; accompaniment.
' Ranj aur gharri, sing. = various kinds of affliction.
2 Most nouns ending in the silent Persian h are masculine.
LESSON 2.
17
Banda, pi. bande, m. ;
(fern, bandi and bdndi).
Khudd kd banda, m.
Kuttd.
Kutti or kutyd.
Hdthi, m., Hathm, f.
Lom,n, f. (^Y. and /?gr.)
Gay.
Beta.
Betl
Qusur, m.
Na
Hu,d, m., etc.. 7tw,t, f.
Yaha, adv.
Fa/if, adv. (emphatic).
Servant ; slave ( = your hum-
ble servant, with verb in
3rd. pers. sing.).
God's creature, i.e. man ; vulg.
applied also to animals.
Dog.
Bitch.
Elephant.
Fox.
Cow.
Son.
Daughter.
Fault.
Not, no.
Not.
Became (past tense of hond
"to be" and "to become").
Here.
In this very place.
LESSON 2.
(a) — The difference between hotd hai " is, is becoming," and
hai "is, exists," is that hotd hai indicates (1) what is habi-
tually happening, as : Eoz roz (or liar roz) is trup me jhagrd
hotd hai " there are (always) daily quarrels in this troop " ;
Garmiyo me is na,dl me pdni pdydb hotd hai '' this river is
1 The fern, is used by women, only when they speak of themselves,
as : bandl ab chali=" I am now going." Vide also L. 53 (/) (2).
2
18 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
fordable throughout the hot season " ; substitute hai and
the meaning is " This river is fordable now." f Continuous
action, however, without a break, is expressed by rahtd hai,
as : Is nadt me pant paydb rahtd hai " this river is fordable
throughout the year "] ; (2) present action, as : Abht bdrish
hoti hai " it is now raining " ; (3) a general truth, as : Ghan
me, do su,iyn hoti hai " watches have two hands." Hai
indicates a particular thing or existence, as : Yurap ke
rahne-wdle gore hote hai (not hai) " Europeans are fair " ; but
mera bhd.t gord hai " my brother is fair " ; Chauki me char
pd,e hote hai (not hat) " chairs have four legs " ; but is
chauki me pach pd,e hat (not hote hat) "this chair has five
legs"; Khudd hai "there is a God, God exists"; Wuh
darakht ab tak hai "that tree still exists."
Note.— Ma'lum hai "it is known"; ma'lum hotd hai "it
appears, it seems."
(b) — Thd signifies "was" at a particular moment; 7m ,5
signifies "became." The English "was" has often to be
rendered by hud and not by thd ; when in English " became "
can be substituted for " was," it must be translated by hu,a.
(c) — To, as an Enclitic, is not always translatable : vide
note 1, page 15. Dekho to "Just look"; yih to sach hahl
"now that's not true."
(d)— Is the (your) master Sahib ' hat (vulg. hai) ?
at home ?
My account (or reckoning) is Hamdrd1 hisdb thtk hai,
right and yours is wrong. tumhara a '
1 Sahib as a term of respect requires a plural verb.
2 In Lucknow and Delhi mera would be used. In Delhi tera for
small children or menial servants ; but in Lucknow the singular tera
is only used in poetry or in addressing the Deity.
That man's hair is long.
He is pale.
Is your khidmatydr (table-
servant) a dishonest man ?
the
LESSON 2. 19
Us mard ke bdl lambe hai.
Us kd rhihra zard hai.
Kyd, tumhdrd khidmat-gdr
be-vmdn (or bad-diydnat)
hai*
Wildyat me yih bat nahl hai
(or hofi hai).
Wuh zard bhl ' nd-rdz na hu,d.
This is not
England.
He was not in the least
annoyed, put out.
This is a wonderful story, tale Yih kahdm bahut *ajib hai.
I think about this a great deal. Mujhe is bdt kd bard khaydl
hai.
The funny thing is that he 'Ajab to yih hai ki wuh is bdt
agreed to this (or was par rdzi hu,d.
pleased at this).
don't like this, I don't Yih bdt mujhe pasand nahl*
[hai}.
Mujhe is bdt kd bard (or bahut)
andesha hai.
I don't like this, I don't
like such behaviour, or I
don't like this affair.
I am very anxious (nervous)
about this matter.
I am full of thought, anxiety. Mujhe ban fikr hai.
This is a very astonishing Bare ta'ajjub kl bdt hai.
thing.
I am very sorry for this. Mujhe is bdt kd bard afsos hai.
I am very sorry for him. Mujhe uske hdl par bard afsos
This is a sad affair.
Yih bare afsos ki bdt kai.
Bhl " also, even. "
Vide L. 18 (e).
20
About what is Your Honour
grieved ?
He has a complaint against
you (your Honour).
Of what matter (or ailment)
do you complain ?
This is a serious, important
matter.
He has some business to do.
What business have you here ?
You have no business here.
This is the case in every regi-
ment of native cavalry.
It is now finishing, being com-
pleted.
He is always ready to quarrel
with me at the least thing.
I will be ready directly.
How is it he does not come ?
He won't recover, get well,
(lit. where, or when, is he
getting well?).
How could he get well (lit.
when was he getting or be-
coming well) ?
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Ap ko kis bat kd ranj hai ?
Us ko dp se shikdyat hai.
Kis bdt Li shikdyat hai ?
Yih (to) bhdri bdt hai. or
yih (to) bart bdt hai.
Us ko kuchh kdm hai.
Yaha tumhdrd kyd ' kdm hai ?
Yaha tumhdrd kuchh kdm
nahl hai.
Yih har ek risdle me hold hai.
Ab tamdm hotd hai.
Wuh zara si bdt par mujh se
larne ko taiydr * hotd hai.6
Mai abhi taiydr hotd hu
Yih kyd bdt hai ki uruh hdzir
nahl, hotd \ha>] ?
Wuh kaha (or kab) achchhd
hotd hai ?
Wuh kab achchhd hotd thd ?
1 Note spelling and pronunciation of kya "what?", and kiya (ki
ya) " he etc. did."
2 More correctly tayyar. 3 Or more forcibly ho-jata hai.
LESSON 3.
21
You are never in time.
I ( your slave) have committed
a fault (lit. from your slave
a fault has occurred).
I didn't succeed at all, in the
least (lit. nothing at all
was done by me).
You are very late, you have
come verv late.
Turn kabhi waqt par hazir
nahl hote [ho].
Bande ' se ek qusur hu,d.
Mujh se kuchh bhi na-hu,d.
Turn ko ane a me ban der
hu,i or tumhare ane me ban
der hu,i or turn ne 8 ban der
laqa.t.
LESSON 3.
(a) — (1) On the degrees of comparison. — When two objects
are compared, that with which the comparison is made is
put hi the ablative ; but no alteration is made in the adjec-
tive : thus, " this house is higher than that house," is Yih ghar
us ghar se ucha hai " this house than that house is high."
Sometimes, however, the adverb ziydda or aur bht "more,"
is used as in our own language ; as, Yih ghar us ghar se
ziyada ucha hai, " this house is more lofty than that house " :
aur kola " blacker " ; aur bhi kola "even blacker." For the
superlative, a universal comparison is made: thus, "This
house is the highest " yih ghar sab se ucha hai ; literall}7 " this
1 Or fern, bandl se. Laudl=girl, bondmaid, etc., is also used as a
feminine for bandl.
2 Infinitive.
8 Ne, sign of the Agent case ; used with past tenses of transitive
verbs.
22 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
house is higher than all." Sometimes, the adjective is repeat-
ed and se is inserted between ; as, achchhe se achchhd makh-
mal dekhld,o " show me the best velvet."
(2) Note the following intensives : Bahut achchhd '' very
good " ; bahut hi achchhd " very good indeed, exceedingly
good"; nihdyat1 sard "extremely cold"; kahl bihtar " far
better." Also the Persian phrase ba-darjaha bihtar " l>y
(many) degrees better." Vide also L. 48 (6) (2), L. 61 (k),
and last Example in L. 62.
(3) W uh sab se shauqin hai "he is the most enthusiastic
of the lot " ; sab me hoshydr hai " he is the most intelligent ";
us H nisbat to yih achchha hai "compared to that, this one
is good."
(&)— There is no word to express " too " before an adjec-
tive ;. the simple adjective is used, as : Yih ziydda hai " this
is too much."
(c) — Aur is both a conjunction, and a pronominal ad-
jective : in the latter sense it means " more, other, another."
Auro se ivuh achchhd hai " he (or it) is better than the
others." Aur to aur = "not to speak of others."
(d) — Irdda, m. Intention.
Makdn, m. Place ; house.
Bhi? adv. Also ; at all, even.
Bhi bhi, adv. And also ; both.
Dorio or dono. adj. The two, both.
Hi* particle. (Used for emphasis).
1 Nihayat, subs. f. " extremity " : also used as adj. and adv.
* For nlz " also," vide Lesson 57 (c) (2).
8 Sunte hi " immediately on hearing." Numerous examples of the
use of hi are given in Lesson 51 (e) and (/).
LESSON 3. 23
Yihi, pron.
This very, the same
Wuht, pron.
That very, the same.
Billa, m.
Tom-cat.
BilR, f.
She-cat.
Tez, adj.
Sharp ; swift ; hot (to the
taste, as spices, etc.).
^ezt, subs.
Sharpness; swiftness, etc.
Jo, gen. jiska ; relat. pron. ;
and conj.
Who, which, that ; he who ;
that which : also if. when,
as.
5f*r/, adv.
Only.
Faqat, adv.
Only.
Bih-tar, Pers. comp.
Better.
Pas, H., prep, and adv.
Near.
Nazcfik, P., prep.
Near.
Jfsrcfc, f.
Chilli ; pepper.
Lai.
Red.
Gol; [subs, grofii and gola].
Round.
Got mirch, f.
Pepper-corns.
Z>aZ mirch, f.
Red chillies ; red pepper.
^an mirch, f.
Green chillies.
Garm, adj.
Hot.
Garml, f.
Heat, warmth, summer ; and
"ulg., syphilis.
^a/?,1 adj.
Sufficient
Kifayat,1 subs.
Sufficiency ; economy.
£«.§, adj. and adv.
Enough; sufficient.
These two words are derived from the same Arabic root.
24 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
La,iq, adj and prep. Fit, able, competent, quali-
fied.
Liyaqat,1 subs. Ability, qualification, capa-
city, merit.
Ziydda ; barhkar. * More.
Kam, adj. Less.
Kami, subs., f. Deficiency.
Dcha, adj High.
Uchaji. subs., f. Height.
'Umr, f. Age.
Barabar* adj., adv., and prep. Equal; continuously; all
along ; and vulg., opposite.
Jhuth, f subs., and adj. Falsehood ; false.
Jhuthd, adj. False; liar. [sub*, leavings of
food].
Hosh, m. Senses, proper senses.
Hoshyar. Clever, sensible ; sober (not
drunk) ; alert (of sentries).
Hoshyan, f. Cleverness ; carefulness ;
soberness ; alertness.
Dil, subs. Heart, mind (lit. and fig.).
Rohm, subs. Pity, mercy.
Rahm-dil, adj. Of pitiful heart.
Sakht-dil. Hard-hearted.
Sang-dil * Stony-hearted.
1 Lu,iq and liyaqai are derived from the same Arabic root.
2 The Conjunctive Participle of barhna " to increase."
3 Lit. bar-a-bar, P., « breast to breast."
LESSON 3.
Narm-dil.
Nisbat, f., and prep.
Men nisbat (me).
Makkhan, m
Shorba, m.
Namak, m.
Namkm, adj.
Shauhar.
Khdwind.
Joru.
BibL
Bhaj.
Bahin.
Larka.
Larkl
Bhul f.
Bhulna. int (i.e. does not take
ne).
Qalam, m.
Qalam karna.
Bar ha, i. m. ^
Barha.l mistri, m. )
Mistn.
Lohar.
Lohar mistri.
Soft-hearted
Proportion ; betrothal ; con-
nection ; with reference to .
Compared to me, in com-
parison with me.
Butter.
Broth' or soup.
Salt.
Salty, salted ; savoury.
Husband.
Husband, or master.
Wife.
Wife, or lady.
Brother ; chum. etc.
Sister.
Boy.
Girl.
Mistake, error.
To forget ; also to make a
mistake.
Reed ; pen ; cutting of a plant.
To strike off with one blow,
to cut right off aslant.
Carpenter.
Carpenter, blacksmith, or
mason.
Blacksmith .
Mere pas (lit. near me)
Shod*, f.
Kabhi.
Kabht nahl.
warn.
Wohl (emphatic).
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
I have. [FwteL. 20 (e)].
Marriage or any celebration
(in writing, "gladness").
Ever.
Never.
There.
In that very place.
LESSON 4.
(a) — Bahut (adj., adv.), when it means "many," takes
either a singular or a plural noun, as : bahut din tak. bahul
mahine tak, or bahut dino tak, bahut mahino tak : but bahut
mdl hai "there is much wealth" It has a plural, as:
bahuto se puchhd "he asked (from) many."
(6)— This butter is too little. Yih makkhan thofd hai.
No, it is plenty
It is sufficient.
There is too little salt in the
soup.
Give (me) one more.
These two are different, not
Nahl, bahut hai.
Kdfi hai, or bas hai.
Shorbe (or vulg. shurwe) me
namak kam hai.
Ek aur do.
Yih aur hai, aur wuh aur.
alike.
This is some other man.
Yih aur admi hai.
Oh! I've come to the wrong Hai! bhulese] aur makdn pur
place (house) by mistake !
I have changed my mind [lit.
now my intention is other
(than it was)].
a-gaya.
Ab merd irada. aur hai.
Bhiile se, idiomatic for bhiil *c.
LESSON 4.
I have more pens and books
than your munshi has.
He has more planks than the
carpenter has
This pepper (or chilli) is very
hot.
This tea is too strong.
It is quite near.
I too am here.
It is not at all, not in the
least, hot here.
Only this one is good ; this
one alone is good.
This is the same torn that was
here yesterday.
His house is high, but mine is
still higher, is even higher.
Both are of equal length (lit.
both are equal in length).
She is not old though she
is older than 1 am, not
younger.
Mere pas qalam aur kitdbe
tumhare munshi (ke ' qalam
aur kitabo ') se ziyada hat.
Us ke pas barhaj, mistri se
takhte ziyada hat.
Yih mirch bahut tez hai.
Yih chd bahut tez hai.
Pas (or nazdik] hi hai.
Mai bhi yahd, hu.
Yaha kuchh bhi qarmi
hai
Sirf yihi achchha hai.
Yihi wuh (or yih wuhi] billa
hai jo kal yaha tha.
Uska makan ucha hai, lekin
mera (makan us ke makan
se) aur bhi ucha hai; or
Uska makan ucha hai, lekin
mera makan us ke makan
se bin ucha hai.
Lambaj me dorio barabar hai.
Wuh ziyada 'umr kl nahl hai,
go-ki mujh se ban hai chhoti
1 Here ke as qalam is masculine ; the substantives following are of
different genders. Note that the second substantive only is inflected.
2g HINDUSTANI
He is a greater liar.
Which is nearer Delhi or
Lahore ?
The son is less sharp, clever,
than the father.
He is not in his right senses
(he is mad or drunk, etc.).
He is in a swoon.
He came to himself.
You had better go (lit. your
going is better, or is good).
Compared to him I am pitiful,
soft-hearted.
He has more ability, merit.
Has his marriage ever really
taken place ?
Stop!, Sufficient!, Cease!
I have only one book.
I have just the one book.
Nice* warm milk.
MANUAL.
W uh ziyada jhutha hai.
Ydha se kaun< nazdik Itai,
Dilti ya Lahor? ; or Dilti
yaha se nazdtk* hai ifi
Lahor ?
Beta bap se hoshyan me kam
hai.
Wuh hash me nahi hai.
Wuh be-hosh hai.
Wuh hosh me ay a.
Tumhara jana& bihtar hai (or
achchha hai).
Us H nisbat to. mal r<ilnn-<HI
hu.'
Wuh us se liydqat me bafhknr
(or ziyada) hai.
Us H shadt kabh* hu,i bhi
hai?
Bos karo.
Mere pas sirf ek kitdb hai.
Mere pas sirf ek hi kitab
hai.
Garm garm* dudTi.
1 Kaun " who, which ? " Kya could not be used.
2 Or is jagah ke pas, but not yaha ke pas.
3 Jana, infinitive used as a noun, " going."
* Note that the noun in this case is sing. The root idea in this
repetition is niceness and not warmth.
LESSON 5. 29
LESSON 5.
(a) — In asking a question, Hindustani does not. like Eng-
lish, invert the words ; the tone of the voice alone marks the
interrogation. There are, however, a few interrogative words,
such as kaun " who ? ", kya " what ? ", kaha " where ? •" , etc.
the use of which cannot be mistaken. When a sentence
contains no such interrogative word, kya or aya may be used
at the beginning, as: Kya yih tumhara qalam hai ? " Is this
your pen ? " This word kya is not necessary in speaking, as
the tone of the voice indicates interrogation.
(6) — The Interrogative pronouns are both substantives and
adjectives.
1 oKaun means " what ? ", as well as " who ? " and " which ? " :
but kya means only " what ? " The difference between the
two is that kaun is used before real nouns, while kya is used
before abstract nouns and adjectives, as : Yih kaun kutta hai
" what dog is this ? " ; but Yih kya bat hai ' what is this,
what's all this ? " ; Puchhne me. sharm kya hai "what shame
is there in asking ? " Kya khub = " how nice ! "
Note. — Yih kya chtz hai ? " what (thing) is this ? " appears
to be an exception to the rule.
(e) — Note the force of kya in the sense of "rather."
Admi kya ? deo hai " man you call him ? he is a devil " = admi
nahl, balki deo hai "he is not a man but. nay, a devil."
(d) — Kaun and kya (as also kaha) are used in indirect as
well ?is in direct questions, as : Mai janta hu ki wuh kaun hai
"I know who he is/' and mai nahl janta hu ki wuh kaun
hai "I don't know who he is"; mat janid hu ki wuh kaha
hai (—jaha wuh hai mujhe ma'lum hai) "I know where
he is."
30 HINDUSTANI .MANUAL.
Remark. — According to Platts the first example is " un-
idiomatic and wrong ": according to him the governing clause
in such sentences must be either directly or indirectly nega-
tive. This is. I think, a mistake : vide also last examples in
lesson 6.
(e)— Interrogation often expresses a strong negation, as :
Mere pas rupiya kahS, hai ? "I have no money " (lit. where
have I any rupees ?).
(/) — To indicate a question, kyfi, ( = " well ? ") can be sub-
stituted for kya at the beginning of a sentence, and can pre-
cede it Kya indicates a little surprise but kyu merely draws
attention to a question: Kya wuh awega* "what! will he
come?"; Kyti wuh awega ' "well, will he come?"; Kyti?
kya wuh awega ' " well ? is he going to come ? "
(g) — Yih " this" and wuh "that" are, in modern Urdu, the sarao
in the nominative singular and plural ; ye and we are not now used
(except in Hindi).
(h)—Kaun ? (gen. sing. Who ? Which ? What ?
kiska, and gen. pi. kinka
"whose ").
Kya ? indeclin. [but vide p. What ? also How ? How !
7 (e)].
Kaisal; adj. and adv.
Kalml
Kidhar ?
Kitnal ad
Kitne ?, masc. pi.
£0*1
' Or a,ega.
1 adv.
Of what kind ? ;
How ? ; How !
Where ?
Whither ?
ladv.
How much ?
«
I.
How many ?
How many ?
LESSON 5.
31
Kab*
Kis waste (or -liye).
Is waste (or -liye).
KyU-kar ?
Kahe-ko » ?
Kahe-kd ?
Dana, m.
Ghana, m.
Lo<7 (gen. Zogo M), pi.
JVam, m. ; (narni, adj.)
Be-wuquf.
Khelnd, tr. and intr.
Khilond, subs.
Bajna, intr.
Bajdnd, tr.
<?•*, m.
Gana, intr.
), m.
Di/er, adj.
When?
Why? Well?
For what ? Why ?
For this, therefore.
How?
For what ? Why ?
Of what ?
Grain ; vw/gr . " gram . "
"Gram/' the chick-pea.
People.
Name.
(Lit. "without sense"), fool-
ish.
To play.
To play cards
Toy, plaything.
To sound, be played.
To play, make music.
Song.
To sing.
To sing a song
Heart," mind (lit. and fig.).
Brave, bold.
1 The nominative kaha = kya is used only in the Braj dialect of
Hindi, and not in Hindustani.
2 Cognate accusative, as kud kudna " to jump a jump."
32
Jan, f.
Men Jan.
Jan-war, m
Zikr, m.
Tarah, f. ; gen. a prep
To rah tar ah ke or H.
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Life ; soul.
My life ; my dear.
Animal.
Mention.
Manner., way, like.
Of various kinds.
LESSON 6.
Kaun hai ? Mai hu.
Wuh kaun log hai ?
Yih kaun kitab hai?
Tumhdrd kyd ndm h"i
Turn kyd be-wuquf ho !
Us kd rang kyd hai ?
Yih kyd hu,d ?
Who is it ? It is I.
Who are those people ?
What book is this ?
What is your name ?
How foolish you are !
What colour is it ?
What's all this, what has hap-
pened.. what's the matter ?
Where (or when) can this thing Aist chtz kaha (or kab]
be obtained ? (simple ques- milegi ? *
tion) ; or such a thing can-
not be got again.1
How much grain have they Un ke pas kitnd ddna ha: ?
got?
To what people do these Yih ghore kin logo ke hai ?
horses belong ?
1 If the latter meaning be intended, stress should he laid on the
word kahS or kab.
2 Future tense of milna " to be obtained, etc."
LESSON 6.
What relation is he of yours ?
You (Your Honour) here and
why ? How is it you are
here?
Of what is this toy, play-
thing, made ?
How can you ' fight with me !
or Who are you to fight
with me ?
What kind of animal is this ?
What is the milk like ?
How big it is !
How ill he is !
However brave he may be.
Not to mention his playing
(setting aside his playing),
his singing is excellent.
The train must have come in
a long time ago.
How could the gait of the
chakor partridge compare
to hers? (i.e. it could not
compare).
Wuh tumhdrd kaun hold hai ?
Ap yahn kaha ?
Yih khilond kdhe-kd hai ?
Turn mujh se kya laroge ?
Yih kaisa jdnwar hai ?
Dudh kaisa hai ?
Kaisa (or kitna, or kis-qadar)
bard hai !
Wuh kaisa bimdr hai! (also
= kis tarah bimdr ho saktd
hai "how can he be ill ? ").
Wuh kaisa hi diler ho*
Uske bajdne kd kya zikr, uskd
gdnd bhi bahut Tchub hai.
" Rel" kab kl d-ga,i hogi ?
Chakor uski chal kl tarah kya
chalegd? 8
1 But with a difference in intonation : Kya, mujh se turn laroge ?
" What ! do you want to fight with me ? "
2 Aorist or Pres. Subj. of hona.
3 Future, 3rd per. sing. masc. of chalna " to move, be in motion."
34 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
I know what I have to do. Mai jdnta hU ki mujhe Toy a
kya karna chdhiye.1
Now I understand what deci- Ab mat, samjhd* ki kya jaisala
sion to give. karna chdhiye.1
Black you call him ? he's a Kdld kya ? tawd hai.
griddle (i.e. as black as the
bottom of a griddle).
I know who the thief is. Ma'lum hai (or hu,d) ki chor
kaun hai.
I know what is in this box. Mujhe ma'lum hai ki is baks
me kya kyd* chize hat.
LESSON 7.
The following is a paradigm, or example of the conjuga-
tion of the neuter or intransitive verb, girna, " to fall." It
may be observed that the tenses naturally divide themselves
into three groups of three tenses each.
(a) — ROOT, gir, fall thou ; Pres. Part, girtd (hu,d) falling ;
Past Par. gird (hu,d) fallen; Conj. Part, gir-kar or gir-ke
(rarely gir*) having fallen; Adv. Part, girte hi immediately
on, or in the very act of, falling, as soon as — fell ; Noun of
Agency and Future Part, girne-wdld, faller, or about to fall.
(I) Tenses of the Root.
AORIST. I fall, or may fall, etc.
1 Mai gir-ft, I may or should Ham girJi, we etc.
fall, were I to fall.
' Chahiye " is necessary." 2 Preterite.
3 Kya kya, ' what various (things).'
* This shortened form often indicates more haste than the full form.
Vide also L. 55 (d).
LESSON 7. 35
2 Tu gir-e, thou etc. Turn gir-o, you etc.
3. Wuh gir-e, he etc. Wuh gir-e, they etc.
Note that, though in Greek the Aorist is a past tense, in Hindi
and Urdu it corresponds to a Present Subjunctive. .
The FUTURE. I shall or will fall etc. is formed by adding
to the Aorist, ga for the mase. and gl for the fern. sing. ; and
ge for the masc. and gl for the fern. plur.
*' •
m. f. m. f.
1. Mai gir-u-gd -gl. Ham gir-e-ge -ge.{
2. Tu gir-e-gd -gl. Turn gir-o-ge -gl.
3. Wuh gir-e-gd -gl. Wuh gir-e-ge -gl.
IMPERATIVE. Let me fall. etc. ; differing from the Aorist
in the second pers. sing. only.
Sing. Plur.
1. Mai gir-u, let me fall. Ham gir-e, let us etc.
2. Tu gir, fall thou. Turn gir-o, fall ye.
3. Wuh gir-e, let him fall. Wuh gir-e, let them etc.
(2) Tenses of the Present Participle.
The CONDITIONAL. Had I fallen, or I would have fallen.1 etc.
m. f. m. f.
1. Mai girtd, or girtl. Ham gir-te (m. or f.) '
2. Tu girtd, or girtl. Turn gir-te, or -ft.
3. Wuh girtd, or girtl. Wuh gir-te, or -ti.
1 Ham is always masc. , except in the i 'unjab.
2 Refers to time past, present, or future, but usually for past.
36 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
PRESENT. I fall, or am falling, etc.
m, 1 m. f-
1. Mai girta hu,1 or girtt hu. Ham girte9- hat.
2. Tu girta hai. or girtt hai. Turn girte ho, or girtt ho.
3. Wuh girta hai, or girtt Wuh girte hat, or girtt hai.
hai.
IMPERFECT. I was falling or used to fall, etc.
m. f. m. *•
1. Mai girtd tha, or girtt tin. Ham girte the.
2. Tu girta tha, or girtt thi. Turn girte the, or girtt ttft.
3. Wuh girta tha, or girtt thi. Wuh girte the, or girtt thi.
(3) Tenses of the Past Participle.
PRETERITE or PAST TENSE. I fell,
m. f. m. f.
1. Mai gira* or girt. Ham gire.
2. Tu gira or gin. Turn gire, or girl.
3. Wuh gira, or girt. Wuh gire, or gift.
PERFECT. I have fallen,
m. f. m. f.
1. Mai gira hu, or girt hu. Ham gire hat.
2. Tu gira hai, or girt hai. Turn gire ho. or girt ho.
3. Wuh gira hai, or girt hai. Wuh gire hat, or girt hat.
1 An old form of the Present, still used locally, is formed by adding
hu, etc., to the Aorist, as: mat giru hu, etc. ; haiya, m., and haigl, f.,
are sometimes used for hai.
2 Ham is always masc., except in the Punjab.
3 In verbs like mfcoZ-no, intr. " to come out, turn out," the Preterite
is nikla and not nikal-a as would be expected, so too aamafhna, aamjha.
LESSON 7. 37
PLUPERFECT. I had fallen,
m. f. m. f.
1. Mai giro, tha, or gin thl. Ham gire the.
2. Tu gird tha, or girl thl. Turn gire the,, or gin thl.
3. Wuh giro, tha, or girl thl. Wuh gire the, or girl thl.
(b) Additional Tenses.
1. Future Imperative 2nd pers. sing, and pi , Tu or turn qiriyo
"fall" (in the future). (This form is also used as a 3rd pers. sing.
Precative, for the Deity).
2. Respectful Imperative, Respectful Aorist, or Impersonal Aorist
2nd person pi., (&p) giriye please fall (now), one should fall (now).
(In this form there is a slight idea of command).1
3. Future Precative 2nd or 3rd persons pi., (Ap) giriyega please fall
(in the future). (In this form the e is no command).
4. Wuh girta ho he may be falling ; wuh girta hoga ho will or must
be falling ; wuh girta hota had he been (or he would have been) falling,
etc. (of time past or present, not of future); giro, ho he may have
fallen ; giro, hoga he will or must have fallen ; agar wuh giro, hota had
he fallen, etc. (of past time only).
5. In transitive verbs, tenses formed from the Past Part, require
the agent case (ne).
The personal pronouns, except when emphasis is required, may be
omitted, especially in those tenses in which the endings clearly indicate
the number and person, such as the Future.
(c) The Negatives. These are mat, na, and nahl. The first,
prohibitive only, precedes or follows the Imperatives : it is
imperious and so the modern tendency is to discard it.
Instead of mat, na can precede or nahl follow the Impera-
tives (or the Infinitive when the latter is used as an Impera-
tive).
' In ap gir there is no command.
38 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Nahf alone is used with the Present Tense.
With the Aorist and the Past Conditional, nn is preferred,
but nahl may be used.
(d) The next is a verb of extensive use and is conjugated
precisely like the preceding : —
Hond, to Be or Become.
ROOT, ho ; Pres. Part, hotd (hu,a) ; Past Part, hu.a ; Con-
junc. Part. Jio-knr or ho-ke (rarely ho ') having become : Adv.
Part, hote hi immediately on becoming or happening, as
soon as etc. ; Noun of Agency and Fut. Part, lione-wnJn be-er.
or about to be or become.
( I ) Tenses of the Root.
AORIST. I may be or should be. etc.
1. MathU^ Ham ho.
2. Tu ho. Turn ho.
3 Wuh ho. Wuh ho.
FUTURE. I shall or will be. etc.
1. Mai hugd, or -gi. Ham hoge.
2. Tu hoga, or -gi. Turn hoge, or -gi.
3. Wuh hoga, or -gi. Wuh hoge. or -gi.
IMPERATIVE.8 Let me be, etc.
1. Maihu. Ham ho.
.2. Tu ho. Turn ho.
3. Wuh ho. Wuh ho
1 Vide also Lesson 55 (d).
2 Compare with the P»es. (Aux.) Tense, p. 9.
3 In this verb, identical with the Aorist.
LESSON 7. 39
(2) Tenses of the Present Participle.
INDEFINITE. Had I been, or (would that) I had been.
1. Mai -\ 1 Ham hote
2. Tu \. hota, or hotl. 2. Turn i
yhote, or hotl.
3. Wuh J 3. Wuh
PRESENT. I am, or become etc.
1. Mai hota,-, or hotl hu. ] Ham hote hai.
2 Tu hota-, or hotl hai. 2. Turn hote- or hotl ho.
3 Wuh hota-, or hotl hai. 3. Wuh hote- or hotl hai
IMPERFECT. I was becoming, or used to become.
1. Mai ^ Hotatha, 1. Ham Hote the.
2. Tu or 2. Turn Hote the
or
hotl thl. 3.
(3) '/'erase.* o/' ^//,6 /'a,s/5 Participle.
PRETERITE or PAST TENSE. I was or became.
1. Mai ^Thaorhu,a, 1. Ham. Theorhu;e.
2. Tu I or 2. Twm i The or hu,e
or
3. JTwA J thi or /iw,t, 3. tf ttfe. ) Thl or AM,?
PERFECT. I have been or become.
1. Mai hu.a-, or hu,l-hu. 1. Hamhu,ehai.
2. Tw hu,a-, or hul-hai. 2. Twm /i-w,e-, or hu,l-ho.
3. VKwA hu,d-, or hu,l-hai. 3. PTw^ M,e-, or hu,l-hai.
40
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
PLUPERFECT. I had been or become.
Hu,atha, 1. Ham Hu,e the
or 2. Turn
huj th%. 3. Wuh
I Fut. Impera. Hujiyo (irregular).
2. Respect. Impera, etc., Hujiye (irregular)
3. Future Precative Hujiyega (irregular).1
Hue the.
or
hu,t ih\.
(0) — Chtz, pi. chize.
Ko~% (with noun in sing.),
gen. fast kd; pi. ka,i.
Ka,i ek, or ka,i.
Ko,i naM.
Kuchh.
Yih kuchh, or Una kuchh.
Kitnd kuchh.
Ko,l chiz.
Kuchh nahi.
Ko,i koji, pi.
Ba'z-e, or ba'z, pi.
Ohar, H'., m.
LESSON 8.
Thing.
Some-one ; any one ; some ;
any ; one ; a certain one •
about, nearly.
Several.
No-one.
Something ; somewhat ; at
all ; some, a few.
All this, so much.
However much.
Something.
Nothing.
A few.
A few some (persons or
things).
House, home ; family.
The other additional tenses are regularly formed.
Khana, P., m.
Kdbutar-khana.
Sau, or sai.
Derh.
Bis.
Adiia, adj.
Ek do, or ek adh.
Maujud, adj.
Hazir, adj
KhvU, adj. and adv.
Ghafi* f.
Dam. m.
Ek-dam .
Ek-dam se.
Be-dam.
Fursat, f .
LESSON 8. 41
Compartment, case ; (alone it
does not mean "house").1
Pigeon-house, dove-cot.
One hundred.
One and a half.
Twenty.
Half.
One or two.
Existent ; also present ; avail-
able.
Present; ready.
Empty; vacant: only.
An hour ; a watch or clock.
Originally a thatched house :
now any one-storied house
(of European fashion) ; also
the Bengali language.
Breath, life; a moment, a
breath.
At once, immediately (vulq.) ;
direct ; completely.
All together.
Out of breath.
Leisure : opportunity.
Except in Persian constructions
! Originally there were 60 gharls in one day and night (r$t <ftn) so
one ghart was about 24 minutes.
42 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Fursatpani. To get an opportunity.
Kabutar,m. APigeon;acock.Pigeo
Kabutan,i. Hen-pigeon.
Ma/^a,adj. Dear in price.
MaMgi, f. Scarcity of provisions, fa
Sastd, adj. CheaP-
Tta^a, m. sing. A rupee ; money.
Rupai,v\. Rupees; money.
Ray,L
(&)_(!) Koj when it means "about, a few, nearly,"
inflected as • Ko,ida*minitm~ea,o = dasekminitm~ed,o "com;-
in about ten minutes " : grammatically this should be km to*
minit me, but this latter is not the idiom. A'oJ dam me
few minutes " ; kin dam (me) " some time or other.
The plural of ko,i is to,.' " several," but ba<z-e often takes
its place: ba'z-e may be used with or without a noun, but
kaj always requires a noun after it ; ba'z-e kahte hm IH
hoi.
(2) ^o,t requires the noun and verb to be in the singular.
as: ko,i din aisa a,egd ''some such day will come"; wuh
ko.l ghan me mara chdhtd lial " he will die in a few hours."
3. Koj, " a certain," can also be substituted for the in-
definite article ek " a. one " ; vide (e).
(c}—Kuchh is sometimes used before persons, vide l;i>i
examples in lesson 9 (6). In Yih bhi kuchh ddmi liai " he too
is somewhat of a man," kuchh = kisi-qadr, adv.
(^) _ Hogd, " will be." also signifies -i must be," as : WahS
ek aur sher bhi hogd "there must be. will be. yet another
tiger there."
LESSON 9,. 43
(e) — Ek placed after number signifies " about/' as : Sau ek
ic about a hundred," but ek sau ek " one hundred and one " ;
das ek "about ten" Ek also takes the place of the in-
definite article in English, "a."
Ek ddh means " one or two."
LESSON 9.
(a) — In the sense of "present," hdzir is used for inferiors ;
and maujud for superiors or inferiors, and also for things.
Das rupiya maujud hai=" there is a sum of ten rupees in
hand " ; but das rupiya hdzir hai — " I have ten rupees at your
service." Hdzir for things is used only to superiors.
(6) — Is there any one ? (i.e. Ko,l hai ?
is any one in ?)
Some one or other must be at Ko,l na ko,i ghar me hogd.
home.
There is no one (at home).
There is nothing, or it is
nothing
There must be something in
the house.
There must be something or
other.
There must be about 150
rupees in hand.
There is some little salt.
Ko,i nahi hai.
Ko,l chtz nahl hai, or Kuchh
nahl hai.
Ko,i chtz ghar me hogi.
Kuchh na kuchh hoga.
Ko,i derh sau rupiya ' maujua
hogd.
Kuchh kuchh a namak to hai.
1 A collective noun takes a singular verb.
* Note the force of repeating the word. This matter is fully dealt
nth in Lesson 48.
44 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
There were about twenty Bis ek adml waha maujud the.
persons present.
About half a seer of milk. Ko,\ ddh ' ser dudh,
One or two horses. Bk adh ghora.
Some bungalow or other must Ko,i na ko,l bagla khaK to
be vacant.
In a few hours.
In a few moments.
What else 1 or Of course.
I have no leisure now.
hoga,
Ko,\ ghafi me?
Ko,t dam me.
Aur kya ?
Is waqt mujhe fur sat kahn .'
Some say one thing and some Ba'z-e kuchh kahte hai. ba'z-e
another. kuchh.
This is nothing. Yih kuchh bat nahl.
It is not so. Yih bat nahl Jiai.
Some people are of one opin- Ba'zo 8 kl kuchh ray hai, 6a'»o
ion and some of another. ki kuchh.
There are a few people here. Ko,\ ko,i ddmi yaha hal.
There is a little grain. Kuchh ddna hai.
What is the matter ? Nothing. Kya hai ? Kuchh natil.
This is not at all good. Yih kuchh achchha nahl hai.
I have no more ; (lit. near me Mere pas aur kuchh nahl hai.
is nothing more).
They have several pigeons. Unke pas ka,t (or ka,i ek)
kabutar hai.
How many ? Kitne ?
1 Colloquial for adha.
* Ko,i eh ghari me = In about an hour.
PI. of ba'z.
LESSON 10.
Ever\7thing is ready.
Of those summoned, some
have come and some not.
I will buy some of those
bullocks.
He is suffering all this afflic-
tion for your sake.
However much you exert
yourself (still) your object
won't be obtained.
Does such a thing ever8
happen ?
He does not get angry with
his servants, when they
commit (only) one or two
faults.
Sab kuchh ' taiyar hai.
Jo log buld,e ga,e the, un me
se kuchh * a.e hai aur kuchh
nahl.
Un me se kuchh i bail mol-
lugd.
Wuh tumhdre waste yih sab
kuchh dukh uthdtd hai.
Kitnl kuchh koshish karo
magar tumhdri murdd pun
na hogt.
Ko,i, 3 (or katii) aisa bhl hold
hai ?
Ek ddh bhul ho-jane par, wuh
apne naukaro par ghussa
nahl hotd.
LESSON 10.
(a) — We shall next introduce a few verbs.
Day.
Din. (m.).
Night.
Rdt(L).
City.
Shahr (m.).
A boat.
Nd,o (f.).
River.
Darya (m.).
A tree.
Darakjit (m.).
Forest.
Jangal (m.).
A road.
Rdh (f.).
A plain.
Maiddn (m.)*
Fruit.
Mewa, Phal (m.).
1 Sab ko,l=sdb log, is vulgar.
2 Kuchh here=" some," an indefinite number; but ka,l,or ka,\
several, a few."
3 Note this use of ko,l for kahl.
46
Water.
Fish.
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Pant (m.).
MachhE (f.).
row street.
To
To come.
Togo.
To run.
To sleep.
To arrive.
Bird. Parind (any bird) (in.).
Chlryd (small bird) (f .) .
Name. Ndm (m.).
People. Log (in. pi.).
Intransitive Verbs.
«;(M- To flow'
To proceed, j ^ tarA,,-
^4na. advance. J
./ana, chalnd. To retreat, fall back. Hain't.
Daurnd. To sit down. Rnithna.
Sond. To return. Phirnd.
Pahuchnd. To die. Marrid (Past P.
and WM,a or wm,a).
(6) — A sentence formed by an active or transitive verb
consists of three parts, — the nominative, the verb, and the
object; as, "The tiger eats flesh " = *for gosht khdia Imi.
Here sher is the nominative, gosht the object, and khdtd hai
the verb. Generally speaking, the Hindustani arrangement
is, first the nominative or agent, then the object, and lastly
the verb. The nominative and object may of course be
much more complex than in the foregoing sentence; thus
"The tiger of the forest eats the flesh of all other animals
= jangal kd sher aur sab jdnwaro kd gosht khdtd hai. In
languages with regular cases, like Latin, the object is put
in the accusative case, which has generally a termination
different from the nominative. In English always, and in
Hindustani often, the accusative is the same as the nomina-
tive, and is to be determined merely by inference or pnsi-
LESSON 10.
47
tion. There are, however, in
it is necessary to distinguish
.the post-position ko.
(c)— Bread ; a loaf. Roil (f .).
Butter. Makkhan (in.).
Wine. Sharab (f.).
Tea. Oha (f.).
Any light meal. Nashta (m.)
Breakfast. Hdziri (f.).
Knife. CKhuri (f ).
Fork ; spur ; thorn. Knta (m.).
Cold. Thanda.
Hot. Garm.
Sweet Miiha.
Hindustani instances in which
the object by the addition of
Meat. Gosht (m.).
Milk. Dudh (m.).
Rice (boiled). Shot (m.).
Plate (any utensil). Bartan (m.)
Spoon. Chamcha (m.).
Sugar. flhakar (m.).
Sugar-candy.
A letter.
News.
Clean. Pure.
Strainer.
Ready
Mian (L).
Chitthi (f.).
Khobar (f.).
Sdfl, f .
Taiydr .
Transitive Verbs.
To throw.
Phekna.
To learn (how to do
.) Slkhna.
To bring.
Land.1
To give.
Dend,
To make (prepare).
Banana .
To say, tell.
Kahnd.
To eat.
Khdnd.
To see; look.
Dekhnd.
To drink.
Find.
To hear.
Sunnd.
To make, do.
Kama.
To strike.
Mdrnd.
To place, put.
Rakhna.
To read ; study.
Parhnd.
To take away.
Le-jdna*
To write.
Likhnd.
1 Does not admit of agent case (ne), as it = le-ana, ' vide ' L. 13 (c) 2.
2 Though transitive in meaning this verb does not take ne, 'vide'
L. 13 (a) and (c).
48
To call.
(d)—Kahnd.
Bolna.*
Utarna. intr.
Utraj, t.
Utarna, tr
Utarwana, caus.
Pul, m.
Oari, f. (pi. gariya).
Thika, m.
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Bulana. To take.
Lend.
To say, tell ; to command ; to
compose poetry.
To utter sounds ; to speak.
To descend ; alight, dis-
mount ; disembark ; halt
on a journey ; put up at ;
to cross over.
Descent.
To take down, etc.
To make to descend, etc.
Bridge.
Cart ; carriage.
Contract.
Thika gari. (used in Bengali Hackney-carriage.
Maza, m.
Be-maaa.
Phlkd, adj.
Tap, f .
Charhna, intr.
Gharhdnd, caus.
Charhaf, f.
Tola, m.
Taste ; enjoyment.
Tasteless.
Insipid, without taste.
Fever ; vapour, steam ; exha-
lations from the ground.
Fever.
To climb ; to mount.
To make to climb or mount.
Ascent ; invasion.
Male parrot.
I Though transitive in meaning bolnd, like lana, does not take nc,
'vide' L. 13(o) and (c).
LESSON 10.
4!)
Toti,1 f. (tuti, Pers.).
Argara, m.
Haqq, m.
Haqqddr, subs, and adj.
Mustakiqq* (kd), partic.
Khandan, m.
Ta'rif, f.
Ittifaq. m.
Na-ittifaqi* f.
Ittifaq-an, adv.
Muttafiq, Ar. partic.
, f.
f.
Miknati, adj.
Jf^Aa,», f.
Sharatn. m.
Ri'ayat, f.
In'am, m.
Bakhshish, f.
Female parrot.
A hackney-carriage stand ; a
riding school.
Right, due.
Rightful ; rightful owner.
Deserving of, entitled to.
Family (in the sense of line-
age).
Praise ; (also, in writing;
"specification").
Agreement, concord, chance.
Discord, disagreement.
By chance.
United, agreed, unanimous.
River, stream.
Labour.
Laborious, hard-working.
Sweetmeats; pudding.
Drunkaid, wine-bibber.
Privilege, consideration,
favour.
Reward of any kind.
Reward in money.
Coolie.
1 There is also a small cage- bird called #5$ or tijti, the common Rose-
Finch (Carpodacus erythrinus).
2 Derived from the Arabic root haqq : it takes the genitive.
3 Be-ittifaqi is vulgar.
4
50 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Blch, subs, m., and prep. Middle; midst.
Paidal, subs, and adv. Infantry : on foot.
Qdbil, prep, and adj. Fit, worthy, able.
QabiUyat (qdbiliyyat) , f. Fitness, merit.
LESSON 11.
(a) — The difference between kahnd and bolnd ' is that the
former is used of articulate speech only, whereas the latter,
meaning " to utter sounds," can be used of animals, as : Men
tod bolti hai = "my parrot is screaming or calling out," but
Men toti " Miya Mitthu*" kahtl hai = " my parrot says
" Pretty Polly.'' Kahnd, to say, tell, command ; bolnd, " to
speak "
(b)— Bolnd is often vulgarly used for "to tell, to say," but
this is generally incorrect. It is, however, quite correct to
say Bolo mat—'' keep quiet, don't utter words."
Bolnd. however, may be correctly used before direct narra-
tion, as : Wuh bold ki "mai dMgd " " he said he would come
(lit. he said 'I will come')," but 8d,is ko bolo ki yaha dwe
(or a,e) "tell the sais to come here (lit. tell the sais that he
should come here) " is vulgar ; sd.is ko yaha dne (ko) kaho (not
bolo).*
(c) — The use of bolnd in such phrases as the following is
colloquial :—Aj argare me ghord kuchh nahl bold " the horse
did nothing, was quite quiet, to-day in the riding-school."
(d)—Charhnd in its literal sense requires par, as : Wuh
i Kahna requires ne — vide Lesson 13 (c), but bolna does not.
* Miya, a term of respect, as Mr. ; Mitthii from mltha " sweet."
3 The use of 6oto in such a case is incorrect. Vide L. 26 (c) (2).
LESSON 11.
51
darakht par charhd ; but in its metaphorical sense (when a
substitute for and) it requires the dative, as : Mujhe bukhdr
charhd (or ayd) " I've got fever."
(e) — He speaks good Persian.
He composes good Persian
verse.
This has no taste at all, it's
insipid.
Wuh achchhl Far si bolta hai.
Wuh achchhl Fdrsi kahtd hai .
Is me kuchh bhi maza nahl
hai, phtkd hai.
It is tasteless ; it is very taste- Be-maza hai ; bahut hi be-maza
less indeed. hai.
There is very little water in Nadi me thord pdnl hai. us
the river, can you ford it ? se paidal utar-sakoge ?
No, we must cross by the Nahl,1 pulpar seutarndhogd.'1
bridge.
1 8 have fever since yesterday ; Kal se bukhdr charhd8 hai.
ab tak nahl, utrd.
it has not left me yet.
I will make the carts cross by
the bridge.
Are that family (i.e. its vari-
ous branches) friendly with
each other ?
By chance I caught his eye.
Gariyo ko pul par se utarwa.-
ugd.
Us khdnddn me ittifdq hai ?
Ittifaq-an mert akh us se Ian,
or mere uske l char akhe huM.
All are agreed or are un- Sab muttafiq hai.
anmous.
1 No for " no" is vulgar.
2 The pronoun ham ko " to us " (or turn ko, etc., as the case may be)
is understood.
3 The pronoun mujh ko (or whatever the person may be ) is understood.
* Probably for mere uske darmiyan; akh is feminine. (Vide p. 62,
line H).
g2 HINDUSTANI
The native officers don't pull
together.
This is my right, just due.
No, it is a privilege.
All are entitled to loot money.
This is an admirable, praise-
worthy, creditable book.
This coolie is hard-working :
he is entitled to a reward.
He is worthy of pity.
He got angry.
I just ' sat on his head ' ' till
he consented to do this.
Nice warm dishes (to eat).
MANUAL.
Sarddro ke bich nd-ittifdqi hai.
Yih merd haqq hai. Nahl.
ri'dyat ki bdt hai.
Lut ke rupai ke sab mwtahiqq
hai.
Yih kitdb ta'rif ke ld,iq hai.
Yih quli mihnati hai, in'dm
ke ld,iq hai or in^dm kd
mustahiqq hai.
Wuh rahm ke qdbil hai.
Us ko ghussa charhd (or di/d).
Mai uski gardan par charhd
jab jdkar* yih kdm karnc
ko rdzi hu,d.
Garm garm khdnd*
LESSON 12.
(a)_When the object of a transitive verb is definite or
specific, the postposition ko is added, as a general rule ; for
example, chhuri ld,o signifies "bring (a) knife"; but for
"bring that knife," the postposition ko is usually added;
thus, us chhuri ko ld,o.
l Kisl ke sir par baithna is also the idiom.
i Jab is often, as here idiomatically used for tab. Jab jakar gives
the idea of unwillingness, vide also Lesson 57 (e) : " then and then only."
3 See last example in L. 4, and footnote.
LESSON 12.
53
EXAMPLES.
Put (the) water on the table. Pam mez par rakho.
Take away (the) sugar Shakar (not ko) lejd,o.
Clean (make clean) this plate. Is Hasan ko sdf karo
Cool the water. Pdni ko thandd karo.
(6) — Isti'mdl, m.
Iftti'mdl karnd.
Baratnd, H. tr.
Kdm me land.
Kdm denci.
Wdjib.
Wdjtbi, adj.
Naukar, m.
Naukarl, f .
Qtmat, f. ; and Qimati, adj.
Lagdm, pi. lagdme, f.
Be-lagdm, adj.
Ghantd, pi. ghante, m.
, f.
Jahdz, pi. jahaz, m.
Paltan, pi. paltane, f.
Pard,o. m.
Balki, conj.
Use.
To use.
To use.
To use.
To be useful
Proper, fitting.
Fair, moderate.
Any servant.
Service.
Price; Costly.
Bridle.
Unruly, without bridle.
Hour ( = ghart) ; bell, gong.
Ladder : also stairs, steps.
(For stairs the pi. sirhiyU,
is generally used.)
Ship.
Regiment of foot.
Camping-ground, stage.
Nay, rather, moreover, but.1
1 When " but" means " instead of" it must be rendered in Hindu-
stani (not in Persian) by balki.
54 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
T handd hond, intr. To become cold ; also to die.
Bat kdtnd, tr. To contradict : to interrupt.
Saiana, tr. To tease ; harass: persecute.
Phurtl, f . Smartness.
Phurfila, adj. Smart ; active.
Bhala-manus, Hindi, m. Gentleman (lit good man).
Karwa, adj. Bitter.
M iZ& karwa karna. To look surly, give sour lo. .ks
(C) .Ko.t naukar ld,o means "bring me a servant." but
naukar ko sdth ld,o means "bring the servant with you,"
implying that there is only one, or referring to one pre-
viously mentioned.
If however the object is lifeless, the ko is often omitted.
as : gdn khan karo " stop the cab."
(d)— The ko of the direct object is added to (1) definite
nouns ; (2) proper names ; (3) to the interrogative pronoun
kaun ; (4) to personal pronouns ; (5) to persons. Us ne kaun
kuttd bhej-diyd ?, but kit naukar ko bhej-diya ? ; mat ne sab
bhej-diya "I sent all (the things) ; mat ne sab bhej-diye " 1
sent all (the dogs)," but mai ne sab ko or sabho ko bhej-diya
" I sent all (the persons)."
Remark. — The ko is, however, occasionally omitted even
after persons. In, its ne sirf fin admi qatl kiye "he killed
only three of the men," the omission of the ko gives the idea
of men of no inportance.
(e) — The ko is added to even indefinite nouns if its omi.-- i'>n
could cause any ambiguity, as : Mai samjfid ki ek janwar ko
dekhkar bliagla hai "I guessed he was running away from
some wild beast" : omit the ko and janwar might be mis-
taken for the subject.
LESSON 12. 55
In such sentences as, Sirkd dudh ko pharfa hai " vinegar
curdles milk"; Agar ko,i sharab ko sharbat se badle "were
any one to exchange wine for sherbat." the ko cannot be
omitted.
(/) — (1) The ko cannot, or should not. be used in the same clause as
the sign of the indirect object (dative) and of the direct object (accusa-
tive). After verbs of giving and (often of) sending, ko is generally used
for the dative ; and the direct object therefore often cannot take ko.
Jan ko bhej do " send John " ; Mat ne ek muharrir us ke pas bhej-diya
"I sent him a clerk as a servant," but with ko, "I sent him one of
my clerks (with a message)."
(2) Personal and demonstrative pronouns, however, have two forms
of the dative and accusative, and advantage may be taken of this fact
when both a dative and an accusative occur in the same clause ; but ko
will indicate the accusative, as: Usko ek sahib ne mujhe (not mujh ko)
diya " A sahib gave it to me," but mujhe ghar [ko] le-gaya " he took
me home"; use (dat.) us ko sdp-diya "he made him over, entrusted
him, to him." Instead of .in kitabd ko turn ko parhna chahiye " you
should read these books," write either, In kitabd ko tumhe parhna
chahiye, or else yih kitabe tumko parhnl chahiye.
Remark. — It will be noticed in these sentences the accusative pre-
cedes the dative.
(3) If however a noun and a pronoun occur as direct and indirect
object, the ko may indicate either the dative or the accusative but the
accusative will come first.
(g) — After the demonstrative pronouns yih and wuh, with or without
a noun, the ko can optionally be inserted or omitted, except after
verbs of givigg, etc., i.e. after verbs that take a dative as well as ac-
cusative, as: Us ne iffuh kitab usko dedl "he gave him that book";
wuh do " give me that," but either us kitab ko us ke pas bhej-diya, or
wuh kitab us ke pas (or usko) bhej-dl; yih (not isko) sunkar, " having
heard this," but either yih bat or is bat ko aunkar. Isko or usko alone
means " him, her, it.
(h) — It was stated in (d) that ko is used after persons. It may
however be omitted after insignificant persons, as; Tamam sipahl
walia bhej-diye, or tamam sipahiyd ko waha bhej-diya "he sent all the
soldiers there."
56 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(i)— Examples of the ko of the indirect object or dative :
Adht rat ko " at midnight " ; sanishar ko " on Saturday " ;
Ldhor (ko) gaya "he has gone to Lahore"; das rupai ko
" for ten rupees " ; kitab us ko bhej-cK " he sent him the book,
he sent the book to him." It is also used with the infinitive
as : Wuh jane ko taiyar hai " he is ready to go."
Remark.— The ko of the dative of ' motion to ' is generally
omitted, except in the Punjab. It is occasionally inserted to
avoid awkwardness, as : Led! Bdgh ja,o " drive to the Eden
Gardens," but Ledl Bdgh ko tez hak-ke chalo. " drive us quickly
to the Eden Gardens." If ko is omitted in the last example,
the sentence becomes clumsy, vide also L. 57 (/). The ko in
adverbs of time may be omitted.
(7) — Marnd with ko means either " kill " or " beat," accord-
ing to the context. Without ko, for animals of size, it means
"to kill" : but for insects, etc.. with or without ko, it can
only mean "to kill." Jan se marna means " to kill."
(k) — You now speak good Ab bahut achchht Hindustani
Hindustani ? bolte ho ?
No — only moderate, so so. Nahl, wajibi.
Tell me its right, fair, price. Iski wajibi qimat bolo.
This is in use. Yih to isti'mdl me hai.
I came down the hill in one Mai pahdr se ek ghante me
hour. utra.
Dismount (from the horse). Ghofe se uiro.
He came down the ladder Wuh sifhi se utar-dyd.
(or stairs).
We, however, disembarked in Ham log to Kalkatte me jahaz
Calcutta. se utre.
LESSON 13. 57
I shall put up at the hotel. Mai to hotel me utrugd.
Help me to mount. Mujhe ghore par charhd-do, or
char ha, o.
It is hilly country, many ups Charhd,i utrd,i bahut hai.
and downs.
[Order] : The regiment will Paltan ogle pard,o par na
not halt at the next stage utregi balki ' dusre par.
but at the one after
I will give it to thee. Mai usko tujhe dugd.
Let me give that (may I give Mai wuh tujhe du.
that) to thee ?
LESSON 13.
(a) — Before the tenses formed from the past participle 2 of
a transitive verb, the nominative of the sentence assumes the
Agent case with ne. The verb then agrees in gender and
number with the object, thus, " The man wrote a letter,' must
be admi ne ek chitthi likhi - ' by the man a letter (was)
written.' If it is necessary to render the object very defi-
nite, and consequently to add ko, the verb must always be
in the form of the third person singular masculine, as : " The
man killed the tigers " = mard ne sherd ko mdr-ddld (masc.
sing.) ; " The boy has struck the girl " larke ne larki ko mdrd
hais (masc. sing.).
(b)—Bald, L Calamity.
Bald se. Hang it, I don't care.
1 Not lekin here — vide Note 1 , p. 53.
2 That is, Preterite, Perfect, and Pluperfect.
3 With this exception, the trans, verb is conjugated like the intraris.
58 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Ghazab, m. Wrath : also ghfizub kn = ad j
(idiomatically) terrible the
devil of a. etc.
Roza, m. Any Muslim fast.
Fdqa, m. Going hungry, starving.
Pesh, prep, and adv. Before.
And, intr. To come, etc.
Kisl se (or -ke sdth) pesh and. To treat a person.
Mihrbdni, pi. mihrbdniya. f. Kindness.
Jutt, pi. jutiya, f .
But or but, pi. 6t*f, m.
Musibat, pi. musibate. f.
Qismat (no pi.), f.
Bad-qismafi, f.
.Vastfe (always pi.), m.
Ma'ne or raa'rw or ma'nq. tn.
pi.
Sdtht, pi. -sa^t, m.
TVitfc, adj.
Haraj (no pi.), m.
»Sftor (no pi.), m.
SAor o g^w^, or yfculshor (no
pi.), m.
Natija, pi, nofi/e, m.
^am [me] and.
Shoe ; also boot.
Any English shoe or boot.
Misfortune.
Portion ; lot ; fate. .
1 11 -fortune.
Fate ; lot, chance.
Meaning, purport.
With, in company with. him.
Comrade, companion.
Proper, right.
Inconvenience, interruption.
Noise.
Much noise.
Result, consequence.
To be useful ; also to bi- k i I IP. 1
(in any noble strife).
LESSON 13. 59
Kaham. pi. kahdniyff. f. Story, tale (sp. fiction).
Boli, pi. boliyS. f. Language, dialect ; mode of
speaking ; street cry ; bid
at an auction ; cries of bird
or beast.
Dusrd. adj. Second; another: next.
Bhara, p. p. Filled, brimful.
Bhar. adj. vide (g) (below).
Piyala-bliar, adj A cupful.
Tmr-bhar, adv. For the whole of one's life.
life-long.
(c) — (1) Kahna requires ne ; bolnd does not.
(2) If the second part of a compound (transitive) verb is
intransitive, ne is inadmissible, thus us ne kMyd " he ate.5'
but wuh khd-gayd "he ate up." Vide L. 21 (a).
(3) Some few transitive verbs do not take ne : with a few
it is optional ; with a few others the use and omission of ne
is a matter of new and old fashion.
(4) Formerly ne was not used with lifeless subjects : " Your
coming has pleased me " dp ke dne se mat bahut khush hu,d :
but now-a-days dp ke dne tie mujhe khush kiyd is used, though
rather stilted. In easy colloquial ne is not often used with
lifeless things.
(d) — And has various idiomatic uses besides "to come" :
these are illustrated in L. 14 (a).
(e) — Lo<j. pi. (gen. logo kd). "people" is sometimes used
to form a plural. Since ham is often used for the singular
" I," log is sometimes added to it to indicate the plural " we."
Such plurals as kutte log " dogs " are very vulgar.
60 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(ft — Reciprocity is expressed thus : Wuh ek dusre ko ehdhte
hat "they love one another, each other." Vide p. 8 (g).
(0)— The adjective bhar is added to adjectives of weight,
quantity and measure: Maqdur-bhar (not so good bhar-
maqdur) "to one's utmost power or ability, as far as one
can"; pet-bhar or bhar-pet, adj. and adv., "one's bellyful,
also completely " ; kurti-bhar kaprd " enough cloth to make
a jacket"; bas-bhar "the length of a bamboo"; bhar-pur1
"brimful"; kauri bhar "the weight of a kauri, i.e. a small
quantity" ; bhar-pana ''' to be paid in full" ; bhar-pd,t subs.,
f., "a receipt."
(h) The proper vocative singular can be used with either
singular or a plural Imperative, as : Ai lafke sun or suno
"listen, boy"; but larka sun (not suno) "listen my dear
boy" (affectionate).
LESSON 14.
(a) — I don't know English. Mujhe Angrezi nahl all (hat).
Your son's name cropped up Tumhdre bete kd zikr dyd thd.
in the course of conversa- or bich me dyd tha.
tion (lit. mention of your
son had come between us) .
These boots fit me well, but Yih jutiya pd,o me thik dti
they have no lasting quali- hal lekin in me kuchh jdn
ties ; shoddy. (or dam) nahi hai*
Tt was due to my ill-luck that Men bad-qismatl se yih musi-
this misfortune befell me. bat pan, or pesh 5,t.
I Pur for pura, adj. " full, complete, entire, etc."
* la me /on nahi. hai, also means " perished" or " worn out."
LESSON 14. 61
The Sahib treated us well. Sahib ham logoke sdth ban
mihrbdni se pesh d.e.1
What is the meaning of this ? Is ke kyd ma'ne hai ?
This will interfere with my Is se mere kdm me haraj hogd ?
work.
What harm will there be if I Is kam me kya haraj hai ?
(or you or he) do this ?
I hope Your Honour is not in- Is shor o ghul se dp kd haraj
convenienced by this row. to natii hai ?
This will have a bad result, Is ka natija burd hoga
the consequences will be
bad.
This thing will be useful. Yih chiz kam a,egl.
Ten men were killed in the Das sipdhl lard, I me kam d.e.
battle (or war).
They are thirsting for his Wuh us ke khun ke* pyase
blood. hat.
I am not hungering for wealth Mai mal ka^ bhukha nahl.
(property) .
This girl is much loved by her Yih larld apne ma bap ki *
parents, is very dear to her ban pyarl hai.
parents.
(b) — Idioms : —
Violent anger. Bald kd ghussa.
Terrible 3 injustice. Ghazab kl (or bald kt) & nd-
insdfi.
A dreadful famine. Bald Hi (or ghazab ki) qahtsdti.
1 Plural for respect.
2 Note these genitives.
3 In this sense ghazab, bala and qiyamat have all the same force.
62 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
A terrible dacoity has oc- Ghazah kd ddkd hu.d.
curred.
Paltry fellow ! (lit. man worth Take ' ka dflmi.
two pice ' or a half -penny) .
You paltry slave-girl (lit. that Derh rupiai ki kaniz !
cost \\ rupees).
To encounter, come face to KifH *e do chdr hand.
face with, any one suddenly
(lit. two eyes become four) .
We met unexpectedly. Merv\usk\ chdr akhT> ////.7.
I am ready to start (lit. my Mcrd, rikdb me. pd.~> Imi.
foot is in the stirrup).
To scold at nothing (said of a Hawd se larnd.
scolding person).
To bargain, haggle. Mol jol karnd*
I am keeping the fast (volun- Mai roze se hu.
tary).
He is starving (fasting invol- Wuh fdge Sf tin I.
untarily) .
He is mad about sport. Wuh shikar ke pichht
hai.
Just do this. Zard yih kdm karo.
Follow your nose ; also = as Ndk ki sidh me (jd,o)
the crow flies.
To be cautious (lit. to look Dd,e bd,e dekhnd.
right and left).
1 In Calcutta however taka is a rupee.
2 Molna (used in Calcutta) and mol-lena, tr., «• to buy " ; mol, m.
"purchase" : jol has no meaning In Delhi mol tol karna.
LESSON 15. 63
Come at the usual time. Ma'muli waqt par ana.1
It's an ordinary sort of horse. Ma'muli ghord hai.
Indifferent topics of con versa- Idhar udhar kl bate.
tion, small talk, etc. (lit.
words of hither and thither) .
Far and wide, I have to-day Aj, dur tak. merd jawdb natil.
no match.
A man named Muhammad
said — .
To keep an appointment (lit.
to come according to pro-
mise) .
Ah, I admire your cleverness.
Pathans are the very devil.
My heart was broken by grief.
Ek shakhs Muhammad nam
ne a kahd ki - .
Iqrdr par ana.
an ke
Bas : tumhari Jwshyan
qurbdn jdM (or jd,iye) .
Pathdn log ghazab hate hai.
Gham se merd kalejdz phat-
gayd.
LESSON 15.
(a) — Saknd means ' to be able, can ' ( Potential) . and
chukna* ' to have done or finished ' (Completive). When
these govern another verb, the latter is not in the infinitive
(as with us), but in the ROOT, which is always placed first ;
the two together thus form a compound verb.
1 Infinitive used as Future Imperative.
2 Nam is in apposition to Muhammad. Also naml " named," " fa-
mous."
3 Indians usually say " liver" where we say " heart."
* No ne.
64
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
EXAMPLES.
He can (or is able to) speak
our language.
Are you able to read iny writ-
ing ?
No one will be able to read
this but yourself.
He can speak a little English.
They have done eating.
Have you done writing ?
They had done reading when
I arrived there.
(6) — Samajhna,'1
(does not take ne) .
Samajh, f .8
Samajh-dar .
Samjhana, caus.
Nikalnd, intr.
Nikalna, tr.
Wuh hamarl zaban bol-sakta
hai.
Turn mera likha ' parh-sakte
ho?
Siwa.e tumhdre. ko,i isko na
pafh-sakega.
Wuh kuchh kuchh (or, thorl
bahut) Angrezi bol-sakta hai.
Wuh khd-chuke hai.
Turn likh-chuke ?
Jab ml waha pahucha (tab or
to) wuh parh-chuke the.
To understand, consider,
think.
Understanding.
Intelligent.
To cause to understand, to
explain ; to comfort, con-
sole ; reason with; per-
suade.
To come out ; to turn out.
To turn out, expel; also to
break in a horse (educate
it).
. 1 Likha, subs., " writing," but likha hu,a " something written."
2 But samajh-lena requires ne. \
3 Verbal roots which are also nouns are usually feminine, as mar
" beating." So too, Persian verbal roots, as amad " coming."
LESSON 15.
65
Ghalat, adj.
Ghalati, pi. ghalatiyn, f.
Hogd.
Hu,d hogd.
Bald, pi. bald,e, f.
Bald se (exclamation) .
Hdth, pi. hath, m.
Andar, P., ^prep. and
Bhitar, H.Jadv.
Bdgh/i, m.
Ydyhistdn.
Rond, intr.
Saikrd, m.
Saikro ddml.
Kharch, m.
Kharch karnd.
' Imdrat, pi. 'imdrate, f .
Pahuchnd, intr.
Pahuchnd. tr.
.£*', conj.
(JaK, pi. gdliya, f.
G55 rfewa.
iKoshish, pi. koshishe, f.
^aAno.
Wrong.
Mistake, error.
Will be, must be (w'de L 8)
(4).
Will have been, must have
been.
Calamity.
Never mind, hang it !
Hand.
In, inside.
Rebel, mutineer.
Country across the border.
To weep, shed tears.
A century, or a hundred.
Hundreds of persons.
Expenditure, cost.
To spend, expend.
Any masonry building. •
To arrive.
To cause to arrive.
That.
Abuse, specially filthy abuse.
To abuse.
Endeavour, attempt, striving.
To abuse (English fashion) ;
to rate.
66 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Mai, m. Property, goods ; in the
Punjab often 'cattle.'
Daulat(nov\.),i Riches, wealth.
Mal-dar, adj. Possessed of property.
Daulat-mand, adj. Possessed of riches.
Muftis. Poor ; also bachelor (vulg.) .
Paidd, adj. Born; apparent, evident.
Paidd hond. To be born ; to be produced ;
to be procured.
Ha (corrup. of ya&!, = here). =The French chez.
Mere h& ; tere h&-Yr. chez At my place, etc.
moi, etc.
Shifa (no pi.), f. Cure (by God, not doctor).
Shifd-khdna, m. Hospital.
Bahuterd , ad j . Much .
Magar, conj. But (and in writing " per-
haps").
Chukdnd, tr. To settle (a dispute, an ac-
count) ; to pay a debt.
'Ildj, m. Treatment, cure by doctor.
LESSON 16.
(a) — Chuknd "to be finished" sometimes expresses "al-
ready," as : Wuh jd-chukd hai " he has already gone."
(b) — It is usually better to insert nahl "not" between
saknd and the verb-root; thus mai likh nahi saktd hU is
better than mai nahl likh saktd hti ; but both are right
LESSON 16.
07
(c)-Chukna with any verb is, in the Preterite only, used ironically
for the Future, as : Jl U mal ja-ckuka=" I won't go, i.e. Oh yes I've
gone (ironical) ; catch me going."
Ghukna may be used in the Imperative, as : Yih kam jald kar-chuko.
Should, however, the Imperative indicate time anterior to a second
Otooa, chukna cannot be used, as : Pahle yih kam kar-lo (not kar-chuko)
dusra kam karna, " first do this and t en that."
(d)—Sahj,b and Miya as terms of respect require a plural
verb.1 Sahib, with a singular verb, often indicates a loafer,
or a half-caste in European clothes, and Miya* with a singu-
lar verb is in the mouth of a Hindu a contemptuous expres-
sion for a Muslim.
(e)—l am unable to talk Hin- Mat Hindustani bol nahri sakta
dustani.
I do not know how to talk
Hindustani.
I cannot do this (either = I
won't or I can't).
Do you understand ? (lit. have
you understood what I
said?).
Do you understand as I go
Mujhe Hindustani boll nahl
atl hai.
Ham se yih kam nahl ho-
sakta hai.
Turn samjhe (or not so correct
turn ne samjha) ?
Turn samajhte ho ?
Well, hang it, let him come Bald se, usko andar ane do ;
in- bos.
How much service have you ? Tumhan kitne din kl naukarl
hail
th» subject must also be
luraT SUCh CaS6S the adj6Ctive
2 In some parts of India MiyS-ji is a title for a school-master. The
meaning of miyS, varies in different districts.
08
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
The service in this hotel (or Is hotal kd intizam achchhd
refreshment -room) is poor. nahl.
The sepoy did good service Sipdhi ne Sarkdr H khidmat
for Government.
What induced you to let these
•rebels stay with you ?
He didn't understand me.
He did this at my persuasion.
Comfort the boy, he's crying.
I reasoned with him well, ex-
plained matters, but he
didn't heed me in the least.
Thousands of rupees must
have been spent on this
building.
He must have reached there
by now.
He is sorry that this turned
out to be wrong.
He loaded me with filthy
abuse, called me filthy
names.
He called me names (not
filthy).
achchhi ki.
Turn ne. kyd samajhkar, in
bdghiyo ko apne pas rahne
diyd ?
Wuh hmnari bat ' nahl, samjha.
Us ne mere samjhdne se yih
kdm kiyd.*
Larke ko samjhd,o, rota hai.
Mai ne usko bahut samjhdyd
lekin usne ek na-mdni, or
na-sunl,s (or wuh kab suntd
thai).
Is ' imdrat me hazard rupai
kharch hu,e hoge.
waha pahuch-gayd
ki yih bat
Ab tak
hogd.
Usko afsos hai
ghcilat nikli.
Ume mujhe bun (or mri) *
gdliya dl.
Us ne mujhe burd bhald kahd.
Not ham ko. 2 Kiya "did " ; kya " what ? "
Idiom : feminine bat understood.
From sarna to be rotten ; sar-jana to go rotten.
LESSON 17.
Dinner is over.
What can be, or will have
been, done by his exer-
tions ? — what is likely to
have been done by his en-
deavours ?
What ! from merely drinking
wine has such a man of pro-
perty become penniless ?
A horse like this can never
have been bred in your
place.
I tried all sorts of remedies
but I didn't get well.
' Id is over.
When1 I have finished this
business, I will let you
know.
Khdnd ho-chukd.
Uskl Icoshish se kyd hu,d hogd ?
Kyd, shardb hi ke pine se
aisa mdl-ddr ddmi muftis
ho -gay a ?
Tumhdre ha aisa ghord kabhi
pqidd nahu,d hoga.
Mai ne bahutere ' ilaj kiye
magar shifd na pd,i.
'Id ho-chuki.
Jab l yih kdm kar-chukUgd
(Fut.) to tumhe khabar dtiga.
Lagnd, intr.
Lagana, tr.
Ghazdb, m.
Shd'ir, m.
Shi'r, m.
LESSON 17.
To be attached, joined, etc,
to begin (and continue).
To affix, etc., etc.
Wrath.
Poet.
Poetry : also a couplet.
Fire.
1 Jab with Present Tense is temporal =" whenever" ; with Aorist or
Future it means " when (conditional) " and sometimes " whenever."
70 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Bhukh, f.
Hunger.
Topi, pi. topiyfi, f.
Cap or hat (for head for gun.
etc.).
Jawan, adj. and sube.
Youthful ; a youth.
Pith, pi. pithe, f.
Back.
'4gZ(nopl.),/.
Understanding, wisdom.
'Aql-mand, adj.
Wise.
PeJ, pi. peJ, m.
Stomach, belly.
4saw, adj.
Easy.
Asam, subs.
Easiness.
Nlshan, m.
A mark, sign ; banner.
Nlshana, m.
Target, butt.
Nishdni, f .
Token, memorial.
Talivar, pi. talwdri, f.
A curved sword.
Tttar, m.
Cock grey -partridge.
Tttan, f .
Hen „
Sher, m.
Tiger.
Sherm, pi. sherniyft, f .
Tigress.
Kunfi, H., pi. kunjiyd, f. )
>
Key.
Chabi, H., pi. chabiyS,, f. )
TaZa, H., pi. fa^e. ")
Lock or padlock.
QM^, A., m. )
Chhitkam, pi. chhitkaniyH , f.
Bolt.
Kasna, tr.
To pull, draw tight: t
adj. and subs.
tighten.
Tight, narrow, contracted ;
worried ; in straits ; a girth.
LESSON 17.
71
Pichhe, prep.
Sarakna, in.tr.
'Aish o 'ishrat, f.
'Phul, m.
Phal, m.
Mausim, m.
HUa, m. hlle, pi.
Dlwana, adj.
Diwana, subs., pi. cKwane.
Banna,1 intr.
Banana, tr.
Sawar, adj. and subs.
Ghiithi, pi. chittliiya.
Bahra, pi. bahre, adj.
Jawdb, pi. jaivab, m.
Jawab dena.
Aram (no pi.), m.
Bhdgna, intr.
Behind.
To shift from its place.
•Luxurious living ; debau-
chery.
Flower.
Fruit ; result.
Season.
Trick, wile ; false excuse.
Mad.
Madman, madmen.
To be made, prepared, fabri-
cated ; to be feigned, made
like.1
To make.
Mounted on a horse, or in
any conveyance : a horse-
man, trooper of Native
Cavalry.
Letter, specially official (in
Urdu).
Deaf.
Answer.
To answer ; also to dismiss :
and sometimes ' to refuse.'
Rest, quiet, ease.
To flee away, abscond (not
to run).
For some idiomatic significations of banna, vide Lessons 3S and 55.
72 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Mafi} m. Gardener (Hindu).
Malin, pi. maline, f. Gardener's wife.
Gul, pi. gul, m. Flower; an ornamental flow-
er ; a spot on a pigeon,
horse, etc. ; also the burnt
part of a wick.
Gul karna. To extinguish a lamp, candle.
Gulab, pi. guldb, m. A rose ; also rose-water.
Dasta, pi. daste, m. Handle ; a pestle ; a packet ;
a quire of paper.
Gul-dasta. Nosegay.
Torna,1 tr. To break (lit. and met.).
Tutna,1 intr. To be broken.
Qasam, pi. qasame, f. An oath.
Qasam khana. To swear (Zi7. eat an oath)
Garha or gaddha, m. , pi. garhe. A pit.
Mitti, f. Earth, mould ; vulg. corpse,
' remains.'
Bharna, tr. and intr.2 To fill.
Band karna, tr. To close, stop, shut up.
Dubnd, intr. To sink ; to set (of the sun,
moon or stare) ; to be
deluged ; to drown, or
nearly drown ; be immersed
in.
Dubona or dubana, tr. To plunge into water, duck ;
cause to drown.
1 Note the first t of torria and tutna ; soft and hard.
3 But bhar-dena and bhar-jana, tr. and intr. only.
LESSON 18.
73
Pdnl ke upar bahna, intr. ; and
bahdnd, tr.
Asu bahana, tr.
Haiza, m.
Khara, adj.
Khard karnd, tr.
Kuril, pi. ; kurtiyS, f .
Jharan, pi. ; jhdrane, f .
Jharna, tr. (jharna, intr.).
Par jharna, tr.
Jdn-bujhkar.
Qasd-an.
To float ; to make to flow or
float, or to wash away.
To shed tears.
Cholera.
Standing, erect ; halted.
To erect ; to stop from motion .
A short coat, tunic.
A duster.
To sweep, to dust ; to shake
dust or water off clothes ;
to brush away with the
hand ; to beat a jungle for
game : to shake fruit off
a tree.
To moult, shed feathers.
On purpose.
LESSON 18.
(a) — The verbs lagna, intr., "to begin" (Inceptive), dend
(takes we), " to grant permission " or "allow" (Permissive),
and pana (no ne1), "to get permission" or "be allowed"
(Acquisitive), govern the Infinitive of another verb in the
inflected state, that is, -ne instead of -nd.
(b) — The Conjunctive Participle (jd-kar, jd-ke, etc., "hav-
ing gone") serves to throw two or more short sentences into
1 From janria to know and bujhna to solve (a riddle).
2 Pana when it means " to find," takes ne.
74 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
one; thus. "Go to my room, and bring me quickly my
sword " mere kamre me ja-kar talwar jald ld,o. Vide also
L. 26 (d).
(c) — (1) The intransitive lagria has many common idioma-
tic meanings besides "to begin, etc." Most of these are
illustrated below.
(2) — After an infinitive, lagna may take the place of the Subjunctive,
as: Mai waha ky& jane laga, "why should I go there?"; mat waha
kyS jane laga tha " why should I have gone there ? "
(d) — (1) Beginners should avoid the construction known in
English as the "error of the misrelated participle," ' that is.
they should see that the participle and the finite verb refer to
the same grammatical subject : M ujh ko ghar jdke bukhar dya
•' I got fever after reaching my house/' is quite correct Urdu,
for though bukhar is the grammatical subject of the finite
verb (while mujh ko is the dative case), still the logical sub-
ject is "I." The beginner, however, if he copies such con-
structions will make serious errors.
(2) The Conj. Participles barh-kar ''more," and khass -kar
"especially" are adverbs.*
(e)— The substantive verb of a tense is often omitted in a
negative sentence, as : Mai us ke (or us se) milne ko kabhi
nahl jdtd [hu] " I never go to see him."
(/) — The inflected infinitive before sakna (as jane saktd for
ja-sakta) is vulgar and incorrect.
(g) — His house caught fire. Uske ghar me ag lagi.
1 "The Shah spoke for three hours, when, becoming fntigued, the
ministers left the darbar." It was the Shah who became fatigued, not
the ministers.
2 Compare the English "notwithstanding, concerning, etc."
LESSON 18.
75
I feel hungry. Mujhe bhuk lagl hai.1
I don't like this place. Mera dil yaha nahl lagtd (hai) .
The youth has fallen in love Jawan ka, larki se, dil laga hai
(or lag-gaya hai) .
Ghore ki pith lag-go,^,.
Topi us ko 'z achchhl nahl, lagti
(hai).
'Aql-mand ko ko,i bat jald bun
with the girl.
The horse has a sore back
The hat does not suit her.
A wise man does not easily
(quickly) take offence.
I made a good shot.
I fell asleep.
nahl lagti (hai).
Men goli nishane par thik lagi.
Men akh lag-ga,i.'6
I am always thinking about Mera dil har waqt uski taraf
her.
laga-rahta hai.
When the sword struck him Jab talwar us ko (or better us
then — . ke) * lagi tab .
It will occupy only a short Faqat thofi der lagegi.
time.
I didn't get a single partridge. Ek bhi titar mere hath (me) na-
The key did not fit the lock. Chabi qufl me nahl lagi.b
Why should you go there ? Turn kyu waha jane lage ?
1 Pyas " thirst." Mai bhuka pyasa hH " I am hungry and thirsty.' '
Peahab laga hai " I want to make water."
2 Us ko may mean " him" or " her" according to the context. If
it is necessary to lay emphasis on the feminine, some word like larkl,
or 'aurat, must be used.
3 For this form of this verb vide Lesson 23 (c).
* i.e. Uske badan me or ko—vide Lesson 20 (e) 4, etc.
6 Vulgarly chabi lagl hu*i hai—'1 it is locked."
^g HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
He rose and began to say. Wuh uth-kar kahne lagd.1
I set fire to the house (vide also Mai ne ghar me dg lagd-dl .*
first sentence).
Bolt the door (or window). Chhitkani* lagd,o.
If he had not pulled the girth Agar uruh tag kaske na lagdtd,
tight, the saddle would have to zin pichhe ko sarak-jdtd.
slipped back.
The Raja is a very dissolute
person.
At this season the trees are in
blossom.
He's a fine poet.
A devil of a war took place.
He is the devil to work.
Try to lift this.
He pretended to be mad.
Raja sahib 'aish o 'ishrat me
lage-rahte* hat.
Is mausim me darakfrffi me (or
par) phul lage-rahte hoi.
Wuh ghazab ka B sha'ir hai.
Ghazab ki laraj waqi' hu,i.
Wuh bald kd mihnatt hai.
Koshish karke isko uthd-lo.
(Hlla karke) diwdna ban-gayd.
Mai, wdha sawdr ho-ke gayd.
Apnd kdm jhut bol-kar nikdld
hai (or nikdl-liyd hai).
Us ne has-kar kahd ki .
.1 rode there.
He has accomplished his busi
ness by lying.
He laughingly said that — .
The thief came silently (with Ghor chup-ke (dabe pd,o 6) dyd.
stealthy steps). ,
Kindly tell me, please tell me. Mihrbdnl kar-ke bolo (or kaho) .
Laga here equals ' began and continued.'
Laga-dena ; for this form of verb vide Lesson 22 (c) 2.
Not ko — vide Lesson 12 (c).
Hu,e understood after lage. Plural of respect after sahib.
These two idioms bala ka—, and ghazab ka—, have either a good
or bad sense. 6 Se understood after dabe pa,o.
LESSON 18.
77
He pretended to be deaf and did
not answer.
Even after leaving here there
is no rest to be obtained.
He escaped with just his life.
The mall made a bouquet of
flowers.
He swore that .
Fill up this hole (lit. this hole,
having filled earth in it, stop
it).
When I got there, I found that
I had come to the wrong
place.
He sank, was nearly drowned,
or was drowned.
He was drowned (dead).
He died of cholera.
Does not a great boy like you
feel ashamed (of doing such
a thing) ?
After striking him repeatedly,
I turned him out of the
house.
Us ne, bakra ban-ke, kuchh
jawdb na diyd.
Yaha se jd-kar bhi dram na-
M milne kd.1
Apm jdn le-kar bhdg-gayd.
Mali ne phul tor * tor (ke) gul-
dasta bandy a.
Us ne qasam khd-kar kahd
ki .
Is garhe ko, mitti bhar-kar,
band kar-do.
Watia jdkar mujhe ma'lum
hu,d ki " bhule se aur makdn
par d-gayd hu." 3
Wuh dubd.
Wuh dubke mard,
Wuh haiza karke mar-gayd.
Turn ko, itne bare ho-kar, sharm
dtl ? " *
Mai ne us ko mdr-marke
se nikdl-diyd.
He stood up and said that — . Us ne khare kokar kahd ki — .
1 For the signification of the Infinitive used like this, vide L. 32 (e).
2 Tor tor (Tear) : the repetition here expresses repeated action.
3 In Hindustani this is direct narration.
4 Hai understood ; vide (d) and (e).
78 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
I stealthily tied a duster to M ai ne chhupdkar ' ek jhdran
his coat (tail). us kt kurtt se badh-di.
He secretly put the letter in Us ne chhipdkar chittht dg me
the fire. daft-
By continually quarrelling he Us ne lar lar-kar ghar bhar kt
has worn out the whole nak me dam kar-diyd1- (or
house. kar-rakhd) hai.
I went away just before he Wuh 8 ane bht na pay a thd ki
came. mat chald-gayd ( = wuh dyd
bhi na-thd ki mat chald-gayd
= wuh ane hi ko tha ki mai
chala-gaya).
LESSON 19.
(a) — Ghdhnd, " to be about to do " or " to be about to finish
doing," and karna* in the sense of "to make a practice of,"
"to be in the habit of (Frequentative)," often govern the
past participle instead of the infinitive. The participle so
governed is always in the form of the singular masculine
in a.5 Thus—
EXAMPLES.
He is in the habit of reading Wuh har subh ko parhd-karta
every morning. hai.
Also chhipakar.
Nak me dam karna (lit. " to bring the breath into the nose") an
id om for " to worry, wear out " : the in transitive is nak me dam ana.
K
r-rakha signifies " has kept the house in a state of — .'
Note no ne.
Kama in this sense is intransitive. Vide also L. 20 (d).
The Past Part, of Jana in such cases is regular, i.e. jaya and not
gaya; also in the passive mujh ae wahct jaya na gaya—" I could not
venture to go there."
LESSON 19. 79
He is in the habit of writing W uh har roz kuchh likhd-kartd
something every day. hai.
He used always to give (make) Wuh hamesha shdgird ko yih
this injunction to the scho- tdktd kiyd-kartd thd.
lar.
I am about to finish learning Mai Hindustani zabdn slkhd
Hindustani. chdhtd ~hn.
I am going to finish writing Mai yih chitthi likhd-chdhtd
this letter. A§.
(6) — The form chdhiye of the verb chahna is used imper-
sonally, like the Latin " decet," and " oportet," or the French
" il faut," as : chahiye ki turn jd,o, " you must or ought to go,
it is necessary that you go." This form of chahna is often
followed by the Aorist, as in the preceding example, but more
often it is construed with the uninflected infinitive, the sub-
ject being put in the dative case, as : tumko jdnd ' chahiye. It
used also to govern the Past Participle of the verb, as : Adab
sikha chahiye, "it is proper (or necessary) to learn good man-
ners" ; 2 but this construction is at present met with only in
the expression dekhd chdiye "let us see (what happens)."
Vide also L. 32 (c).
(c) — Dastana.8 Glove.
Jord, H., m. ^ A pair, i.e. a couple ; a suit
Juft, P., m. 5 of clothes.
Jord khdnd. To pair.
1 Jana is the subject of chahiye.
2 Vide L. 33 (a). Chahiye is also considered ' Desiderative,' vide L.
20 (6).
3 From the Persian dost " hand" ; it ends in the Persian silent h ;
vide note 2, p. 16.
HINDUSTANI MANUAL,
Jon."
Juffi karnd or juft hond.
Tirath, m.
'Adat, pi. 'ddate, f.
HdL m., Ar. pi. ahwal,1 m.
Halat, f ; Ar. pi. hdldt, m.
Dekhnd, tr.
Dikhdnd, caus.
Dikhaj, subs., f.
Dikkaj derui, intr. (no ne).
Zamin, f.
Ghord, m.
i, f.
Ta«iZ, m.
Tatwdm, f.
Kambal or kammal, m.
Ghddar, pi. chddare, f.
^aZ, adv.
M, f.
A pair (two) of horses, clubs,
or dumb-bells ; of sepoys,
brothers, etc.
To pair.
A Hindu pilgrimage, or place
of pilgrimage.
Habit, custom.
State, circumstances.
State, circumstances
To look, see.
To show.
Appearance, view ; money
paid for seeing any unusual
sight.
To appear, seem.
Land, ground ; the earth.
A land-owner.
Horse ; also cock of a gun.4
Mare ; also a saddle -stand, and
a clothes-horse.
Pony.
Pony-mare.
Blanket.
Sheet (of cloth or metal).
To-morrow ; yesterday.
An instrument, machine.
1 Sometimes, in Urdu, used as a singular.
2 Also the Knight in chess.
LESSON 19.
81
Kal kd ghora.
Ms, pi. raa,e, f.
Bap, m.
Ms-bap, m., pi.
Akh, f., pi. akKe.
Akh and, intr.
Tasma, m.
Nil, m.
Ntld, adj.
Khasna, intr.
Km*, f.
Hasnd, intr.
Chalnd. intr.
Bachna, intr.
Bachdnd, tr.
Dast-khatt, m., pi.
Pliisalrid, intr.
Ghusnd (me), intr.
Bachcha, m.
Chuhd, m.
CAwAi.. f.
Uthna, intr.
Uthdnd, tr.
A mechanical horse.
Mother.
Father.
Parents.
Eye ; aZso a " good eye for."
To have ophthalmia.
Strap.
Indigo.
Drak blue.
To cough
A cough.
To laugh.
To move, to come in motion.
To be saved, get off. remain
over, be spared ; to avoid
a threatened ill.
To save, etc., etc.
Writing, line ; also a letter.
Signature.
To slip, slide.
To enter (by force or hur-
riedly) .
The young of anything.
Rat.
Mouse.
To rise up ; swell ; rise from
sleep.
To raise ; to awaken ; to suffer.
82 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
LESSON 20.
(a)— With the past tenses of chdhnd, the agentive ne may
be used or omitted ; both are right. If however the subject
is without life it is better to omit ne, as : Mai ne (or ma?)
chdhd ki usko zara dekh-lu, but merd dil chdhd, ki usko zdra
dekh-lu "I wanted to see him for a minute" ; 'aurat chdhi
(or 'aurat ne chaha) ki yaha se bhdg-jd,e, or 'aurat kd dil chaha
ki yahu, se bhdg-jd,e "the woman wanted to abscond."
(b)— Chdhnd may also govern the uninflected (not inflected)
infinitive, but the sense is different. Chdhnd with a past
participle properly signifies " about to do " or " about to finish
doing " ; with an infinitive " wishes to do (desiderative)," as :
Hindustani sikhd chdhta hu "I am about to finish learning
Hindustani " ; Hindustani sikhnd chdhta hu "I want to learn
Hindustani." These two expressions however are often in-
correctly used for each other, as : yih kdm dj kiyd (or karnd)
chdhiye " you must do this to-day."
(c) — Chdhna also signifies "to love, to like." as: Ma bete
ko chdhti hai "the mother loves her child." Chdhat, subs, f.,
" love " ; chd,o " fonding." '
(d) — When karnd means "to be in the habit of," vide L. 19
(a), the agentive ne cannot be used. In the Present, Imper-
fect, or Perfect Tenses, karnd indicates habitual action ; but
in the Preterite Tense either habitual or continued action.
The Pluperfect does not appear to be used.
Remark. — The expression wuh kiyd kiyd is not in use.
(e) — There is in Hindustani no verb " to have." (1) If the
thing possessed is saleable, the preposition pas is used, as :
i For chahiye " it is necessary," vide L. 32 (c).
LESSON 20. 83
Us ke pas zamln hai "he has land" ; mere pas (or yaha) '
naukar hai is an exception.
(2) If the possession is unsaleable, the masculine inflected
genitive, or the dative case, is used, as : Us ke. (or usko) ek
beta hai "he has a son" (a general statement) ; bichchhu
(sing.)'2 ke (or ko) Skh nahl hotl "scorpions have no eyes."
Vide also L. 60 (e).
But in us kd (uninflected) ek beta hai, some word is em-
phasised, as: "He has a son," or "he has one son," or "he
has a son (not a daughter)."
(3) If the thing is ideal, not real, the dative only is used,
as : Mujhe fursat nahl hai "I have no leisure."
(4) For limbs, etc., the proper genitive is used, and for
such sentences as "she has blue eyes" the Urdu idiom is
"her eyes are blue " us kl tikhe mil hai ; us kl ndk Iambi hai,
"his nose is large" (in English "he has a large nose").
Remark /. — In, Ek gadhd jis ke dum na-ihl, "an ass that
had no tail/' the explanation is that badan me is understood.
Compare, us ke chot lagl "he was hurt, bruised, etc."; ghore
ne uske Idt marl "the horse kicked him, etc., etc."
Remark II. — Mujh pas, and us pas, and turn pas, are sometimes
colloquially used for mere pas, us ke pas, and tumhare pas.
(g) — When two separate nouns of different genders occur
together as a semi-compound, the masculine or more worthy
gender will predominate, as : rotl-makkhan, m. sing. " bread
and butter"; chharrd-bdrut, m. sing, "powder and shot";
ma bap, m. pi. "parents"; hisdb-kitab, m. "accounts."
(h) — Pas also signifies "to" when the motion is towards
1 Vide L. 64 (c) (3).
* Masc. and declined like mard : the nom. pi. is also bichchhu.
84
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
living beings or things that cannot be entered ; as : Us ddmt
ke pas (not ko) jd,o "go to that man" ; ghore ke pas (not ko)
jd,o "go to the horse."
Wuh is jagah ke pas hai ?
Pas hi hai.
Ydhd, se nazdtk hai.
Wuh ' likhd ki.
Yih bat ' (hamesha) hu,d ki ( =
hoti-raht).
Uske pas ghord (bht) hai aur
tattu bht hai.
(g)—ls it near here ?
It is quite close.
It is near here
She continued writing.
This always used to happen.
He has both a horse and a
pony.
He has both a blanket and a' Uske pd* kambal bht hai aur
sheet. chddar bht hai ; or uske pas
kambal aur chddar dono hai
(for lifeless things hai is
better than hai).
Mere pas kuchh bht nahl hai.
Yih wuhi ghord hai jo kal mere
pas thd.
I have nothing at all.
This is the same (that very)
horse which I had yester-
day.
He has no parents.
His (or her) eyes are blue.
I have a severe cough.
Whose mare is this ?
Whose ponies are these ?
Uske rna-bdp nahl hai.
Uskt Skhe niU hat.
Mujhe sakht khiisi hai.
Yih ghort kiskt hai ?
Yih tattu kin logo ke hai ?
This pony-mare is the khan- Yih talwdni khansdma kt hai.
sdmd's.
i Vide (d).
LESSON 20.
85
Come to me to-morrow.
He has seven or eight pairs.
In the opinion of Hindus, pil-
grimage is a meritorious
act.
He is in the habit of taking
They don't know anything
about it (lit. to them the
state of this is not at all
known).
Fasten the strap tight.
This pigeon belongs to that
hen.
These two pigeons are a pair.
Patna is about to become a
London.
He has no eyes for a horse.
He has just closed his eyes,
fallen asleep.
He is on the point of falling.
Mere pas kal and.1
Uske pas sat dth jor'e hat.
Hindu, o ke nazdlk tirath jdnd
pun * hai.
Usko sharab pine ki 'ddat hai ;
or wuh sharab piyd kartd
hai.
Unko, iskd hai, kuchh ma'lum
nahl hai.
Tasma kaske badho.
Yih kabutar is kd jora (or juft)
hai.
Yih dono kabutar jora hai.
Yih Patna bhl Landan hu,d
chdhtd hai.
Us ko ghord pahchdnne Id akh
nahl, hai = us ki nazar ach-
cMw nahl hai.s
Us ki d,kh dbhi lagl hai.
Wuh gird chdhid hai.
1 The infinitive can be used as a future imperative but is less im-
perious. When used as a present imperative it is polite.
2 Pun, only used by Hindus, is " religious merit rewarded by
Heaven " ; opposed to pap " sin " ; papl " sinner." The Muslim equi-
valent for pun is sawab, and for pap is gunah.
3 Meaning of the latter depends on the context ; it may also mean
" he has poor eye-sight " or " he eyes women evilly."
86
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
LESSON 21.
(a) — Hindustani abounds in compound Intensive verbs. A
verb is rendered intensive by employing its root only, and
suffixing some other verb. The root of the principal verb is
invariable, but the suffixed verb is fully conjugated ; thus,
mdrna, to beat, becomes intensive by adding the verb dalna.
whereby mar-dalna signifies " to kill downright " ; so, ddl-dena,
"to throw down"; bol-uthna, "to speak out"; mar-jdnd,
"to die"; kho-dend, "to lose"; tor-dend, "to break to
pieces, to smash." Almost every verb may be rendered in-
tensive. The ' servile ' verb of an intensive, often lays aside
its primitive meaning. Vide also L. 13 (c) (2).
(b)—Zillat, L, pi. zillate.
Khiffat, f.
Awdz, f., pi. dwdze.
Ddbnd, intr.
Ddbdrid, tr.
Dabd,o, m.
Rdh, pi. rdhe, f.
Rdhl, m.
Ham-rdh, prep.
Intizdr, m.
Disgrace, baseness.
A slight, affront.
Sound, voice.
To be pressed, squashed ; be
buried beneath ; restrained,
kept in check ; quelled.
Press, squash, etc., etc.
Pressure, influence.
Road, way, path.
Traveller on roa,d = jdnewdld.
In company with
Watching, waiting for
Intizdr khichnd ' or Icarnd (or To wait for, expect anxiously.
— me rahna).
K rdh dekhnd. To wait for, expect anxiously.
The causal is with khtchwana or karana.
LESSON 21.
87
Rah dikhdnd, caus.
Duhrana, tr. and intr.
Hafta,1 m.
Nahr, pi. nahre, f .
De-mdrnd, tr.a
Ho-lena. intr.
Girria, intr.
Parna, intr.
Gir-parnd, intr.
Girdna, tr.
Tap, pi. <a>e: f.
Tap mdrnd.
Ro-lend, intr.
So-lend, intr.
To make a person to wait ;
also to show the way.
To repeat, say a second time,
repeat after ; also to double,
fold in two ; (tr.) : to occur
again (intr..).
Week.
Artificial canal or stream.
To dash against.
To accompany (kist ke sdth or
pichhe) : sometimes to be
over, finished outright ; also
to pass by, see on the way.
To fall (from a known source).
To lie down, be in a lying
state ; happen ; metaphori-
cally to fall ; to fall (from
unknown source).
To fall suddenly (inten.).
To cause to fall, knock down :
also to let fall or drop.
Pawing of fore-foot.
To paw the ground with the
fore-foot (of a horse).
To weep one's fill, take ones'
fill of weeping.
To sleep one's fill.
1 From the Persian haft "
2 De-marna=chhor-marna
and the latter ke waste.
to bequeath " ; the former requires ko
88 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
LESSON 22.
(a)— Dem in the following idiomatic compounds does not
admit of ne,1 the verbs being regarded as intransitive.
Samjhdj dena, intr. To be understood.
Dikhdj dena, intr. To appear, show.
Sund,l dena, intr. To be heard.
Pakrdj dena, intr. To allow oneself to be caught.
Chal-dena* intr. To move off, clear off.
Remark. — Dena in the Imperfect tense " was giving " (and
sometimes in the Present) signifies " to offer." 8 Kdm dena
"to be useful," is transitive, and requires ne. Sdth dena " to
accompany," is properly transitive and takes ne ; vide also
p. 53 foot-note 1, Urdu of " Sepoy to Subadar."
(6) — The subjoined or 'servile' verb of an Intensive, (1)
modifies or strengthens the first verb ; (2) sometimes the.
meaning of both verbs is retained, in which case the first part
of the compound is the shortened form of the Conjunctive
Participle, as : us gSw ko dekh d,o, lit. " having seen the vil-
lage return here " ; mdl us ke makdn ho-dyd hu " I have been
to his house and come back."
The use of the ' servile ' verb is, to a great extent, governed
by rule, as will be discovered by a study of the following.
(c) — (1) Dena and Lend. In compounds, dena usually sig-
nifies doing a thing for some one else, but lend for oneself, as :
Yih rupiya bat-do " divide this money amongst them " (i.e. give
1 So too with -Jena as in ho-lena.
2 Dena here is simply intensive and does not signify ' for the benefit
of any one else,' vide (c).
3 In the Pret. dene logo, " he offered."
LESSON 22. 89
and divide it) ; yih rupiya bSt-lo " divide this money amongst
yourselves" (i.e. take and divide it); yih khatt parh-lo "read
this letter to yourself " ; yih khatt parh-do " read this letter to
me." Ham apas me has-lete the "we were joking amongst
ourselves" (for our own amusement), (but ham h&s-dete the
"we could not help laughing)."
(2) Dena also sometimes gives the idea of "on purpose,"
as : Mai ne (jan-bujh kar) usko mar-diya ' (or qasd-an mara}
" I hit him on purpose," but bhul se usko mara (not mar-diya).
(3) The compound in dena is also used to express a time more re-
mote than the simple verb, thus : Jab mai ' the tar ' me pahucha us ke do
ek minat peshtar darwaza khola-gaya tha " when I arrived at the theatre,
I found that the doors had been opened just a minute or two before."
but mere pahuchne se bahut pahle darwaza khol-diya-gaya tha. The two
final verbs in the preceding could be interchanged, but it is better not
to do so, and the same rule applies to the Active.
(4) Dena also signifies some definite time, as: Jab mai waha gaya
wuh hasta tha (not has-deta tha) " when I went there he was laughing
(i.e. he was laughing before I arrived)," but jab mai usko gudgudata
tha wuh has-detl thl (or not so good hastl thl) " whenever I tickled her,
she laughed."
(5) The Imperative do can be added to the root of any verb,
and signifies " for my sake " ; it is more polite than the simple
verb.
(6) Us-ne muj'he mustbat se bacha-diya "he saved me from misfor-
tune." Mai girne hi ko tha M sahib ne mujhe bacha-liya 2 (rarely -diya) ,
or mujhe girte girte sahib ne bacha-liya " I was on the point of falling
when the Sahib saved me."
If, however, a person makes a request, dena may be used, as:
Mujhe bacha-do " save me (for my sake)," or bacha-lo " save- me (out
of your pity)."
1 If the object were insignificant (say an insect), mar-diya would
mean " killed."
2 Liya signifies for his own pity or mercy.
90 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(7) Lena sometimea gives the idea of unwillingness, as: M at shart.o
ko qabul kar-leta hu "I unwillingly agree to the conditions," but
shartfl ko qabul karta hu " I willingly agree to the conditions." Qabul
karna "to agree, to acknowledge, to confess": qabul kar-lena "to
agree unwillingly " : qabul kar-dena " to confess." Lad-lena " to load
for oneseif," but lad-dena, tr., " to load," gives an idea of force or
help.
Occasionally Una gives the idea of chukna ' to have finished,' as :
pah&ch-lena intr. = pahSch-chukna = pahuch-jana. " When 7 have
finished this matter I will turn my attention to something else " 706
mai yih kam kar-ltiga tab kisl duare kam kl t.araf mutawajjih huga.
Sometimes it gives an idea of success.
Lena often indicates that one action is to be done before another,
as : (Jab) yih kitab likh-lo (or likh-chuko) to mujhe kjiabar denu " when
you have finished writing the book, tell me " : here likh-do could not
be used.
Here mal-ll-jiyo signifies that the ghl has to be administered to the
horse first. Were it is to be administered second, mal dijiyo would be
substituted.
(d) — (1) Pa/fina, in compounds, generally signifies some
suddenness, as : gir-parna "to fall suddenly" : h&s-parna " to
burst out laughing" ; ro-parna "to burst out crying, fall a-
weeping"; chal-parna "to start off"; phisal-parna " to slip
suddenly, or accidentally " ; ghus-parna " to enter suddenly"
ho-pafna " to happen suddenly " ; kud-pafna " to jump into."
(2) There are, however, some exceptions to this idea of suddenness,
as: rah-parna " to remain," vide 6(1); ban porno "to be effected,
managed, to get the upper hand" ; le-parna to lie down with," vide
6(2).
(3) With tutna, however, it also gives the idea of • from a height ' ;
chhat tut-parl " the roof came down (on somebody)" ; daku-mujh par
tulrpare • met ' : pul yak-a-yak tut-gaya " the bridge broke," but— tut-
para " broke and came down (on somebody)."
LESSON 23. 91
(e) — Uthria, " to rise up," has in compounds a force similar
to parna, as : jag-uthnd "to wake up suddenly; to start out
of sleep " ; bol-uthna " to cry out " ; jal-uthim " to catch fire " ;
ghabra-uthna "to lose one's head suddenly."
Note. — Utha-rakhnd signifies "to postpone," i.e. to "take
up and put aside."
(/) — Dalna, "to throw," gives in compounds the idea of
completion or vehemence, as : de-ddlnd ( = de-dena) "to give
away"; marna1 "to beat or kill," but mar-dalria "to kill
outright"; kha-dalna (=kha-jana^) "to eat up" kah-dalna
"to speak out" ; parh-dalnE "to read through" ; dekh-dalna
" to look through " ; badal-dalna ( = badal-dena — badalna) " to
change " (but badal-lena " to exchange ").
LESSON 23.
(a) — (1) Baithna, "to sit," in a compound, gives the idea
either of finality or suddenness, as : uth-baithna " to sit up
suddenly (from a lying position)," but baith jaria "to sit
down " ; kar -baithnd " to do anj^thing suddenly, or in an im-
proper manner, or without forethought." Mar-baithna "to
beat without cause " ; qismat ko ro-baithnd " to weep over
one's lot (completeness)." Wuh bddshah ban-baitha "he be-
came king by force," but wuh badsliah bankar baitha "he sat
on the throne as king."
1 The passive mar arj aria always signifies "to be killed" and never
" to be beaten " ; mar-khana or (plta-jana or pitna) is " to be beaten."
Vide also L. 12 (/).
2 When any part of a compound verb is intransitive the whole com-
pound is treated as intransitive, i.e. it does not admit of ne, as : Mai
usko kha-gaya " I ate it up."
92 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(2) In the following, the idea of both verbs is preserved : —
He went and sat down there. W uh waha jd-baithd.1
To meet and sit together. Mil l-baithnd.
Note.—Baithd hai, Perfect tense "he has sat" ; also "he
is seated or he is sitting 2 " ; the Present tense baithtd hai '•' he
sits every day, he is in the habit of sitting." Similarly para
hai " he is lying, fallen " ; letd hai " he is lying down."
(3) Note the idiom goli sir me baithi " the bullet pierced,
entered, his head."
(b) — Marna in compounds gives an idea of impropriety and
folly : Yaha peshdb kyU kar-mdrd ? Mai ne pddshdh ko sidhd
likh-mara. It is not interchangeable with baithnd.
(c) — (1) Jand "to go" added to the roots of verbs, express
completeness or finality, as : Kha jdnd " to eat up " ; pi-jdnd
"to drink up"; dub -jana "to sink down, to drown"; but
dub-marnd " to die of one's own accord by drowning " ;
dubke-marnd "to be accidentally drowned"; gir-jdnd "to
fall down" (gir-parnd "to fall suddenly"); d-jdnd "to
come, arrive (completeness)"; rah-jdnd "to be left quite
behind " ; par-jdnd " to lie down, to subside (of wind, voice),
to be engaged in, to be put to or to take up a work " ; plchhe.
par-jdnd "to goad continually to a business"; vide also
L. 28 (?'). Jdnd often indicates that the action is away from
the speaker. It is the servile most commonly used with In-
transitives.
(2) Kah-jana, kah-kar-jana " to say before leaving," but ko,l sha'ir
kah-gaya hai " some ancient (dead) poet has said."
(3) Note the following idioms: Fula kitab mujhe de-ja,o " bring me
such and such a book (and go away again) " ; this might be said to
1 Here ja and mil are Conjunctive Participles, for/5-fcar and milkar.
2 Baitha in the second case is Past Participle for baitha hu,a (hai).
LESSON 23. 93
some one in the next room. Jo kuchh Sahib turn se kahe wuh mujh se
kah-jana "whatever the Sahib says to you, come and report it (and
go away)" ; said to one just departing. Turn mujh se kah-ga,e the kl
mal Lahor ja,uga magar ab talc yihi ho '• you told me when you left me
that you were going to Lahore but you're still here." Mal is kitab ko
parhta hu turn usko sun-ja,o " I will read this book ; do you listen to
it from beginning to end" : in this idiom there js an idea of duration.
However kar-a,o "go and do it and come back," can be said only to
one present, while karke a,o " come to me after you have done it "
can be said to one either present or at a distance.
(d) — With Intransitive verbs only, purpose or intention is
indicated by Rahnd, as : Mai so-gayd "I fell asleep," but so-
rahd " I deliberately went to sleep," vide " Stumbling Blocks,"
p. 37 : tumhe sharm ke mare mar-rahnd chdhiye "von ought
to die (on purpose) of shame."
(2) Ho-rahna " to be accomplished (in Fut.) to be done some time
or other," as : Jaldi kya hai, kam ho-rahega " what is the hurry, it
will be done some time or other," but yih kam abhl abhl ho-j'a,ega
(not ho-rahega) " it will be done at once" ; ho-fa,ega " it will cer-
tainly be done." The Future of rahna added to an intransitive verb
means " some time or other" (indefinite time).
(3) There is, however, an exception in the use of Rahna :
its Perfect tense added to a root signifies present uninter-
rupted continuance, and its Pluperfect, past continuance, as :
Raste me jd-rahd hai "he is now going along the road; (jata
hai "he is going, or goes," might signify "every day").
Raste me jd-rahd thd " he was going along the road ; (jata
thd might signify either "he was going" or "he was in the
habit of going "). Ka,t sal se is bat H darkhwdst kar-rahe the,
but har sal is bat kl darkhwdst karte the or karte rahe the (not
kar rahe the). Ho-rahd hai " is happening now " and ho-rahd
thd "was happening then." Zakhmi ho-rahd thd "he was
(still) wounded," but zakhrni hu,d thd "he had been wounded
(but is now recovered)." Rahna, so used is not classed as a
Continuative, vide L. 26 (a).
94 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Note.— In the Past or Preterite Tense the signification of both verbs
is retained, as: Wuh waha ja-rdha "he went there and stayed";
mal us shahr ka ho-raha " I made that city my permanent dwelling, I
stuck to it" ; jab se mal ne usko dekha, mal uska ho-raha "ever since
I saw him I have taken his part." Ja-rahna and a-rahna also indi-
cate suddenness of action.
(4) Rahnd with the Conjunctive Participle of Transitive or
Intransitive verbs signifies ' to do after effort or determina-
tion/ as : Akhir nikal-kar rahd " at last he managed to es-
cape"; vide also chhornd, (g) ; mai usko daftar se nikal-kar
rahd " I managed to get rid of him from the office."
(5) Jdtd-rahnd in all its tenses signifies " to be completely
lost, and to die."
(e) — And "to come," in compounds, generally retains its
proper signification, as : Darya charh-dyd hai " the river has
risen up in flood"; ham dekh-d,e hai "we have seen (and
come back) " ; mai khud dp ke hamrdh ho-dtd &£ " I will my-
self accompany you there and back, go there and come back
with you." Utarnd is "to descend, come down," and utar-
dnd has much the same meaning. The action of the verb is
towards, instead of away from, the speaker ; while with jdnd
it is away from the speaker.
(/) — Rakhnd. — In compounds with rakhnd, the signification
is often to do a thing beforehand, as : kah-rakhnd " to order or
tell beforehand "; rok-rakhnd " to engage beforehand " (and
also "to stop"). Sometimes the signification of both verbs
is retained, as : sun-rakho " hear and keep in your memory."
Us ne mujhe tang kar-rakhd hai " he has kept me in a position
of discomfort." Samajh-rakhnd " to keep in mind." Mai ne
ko,i bat kahne se uthd na-rakhi " I left nothing unsaid " ; (the
idea is taking up a thing and putting it down only when done
with — Kempson) .
LESSON 23. 95
Notice the shade of difference in meaning between Is bat
ko halal kar-rakhd "he made this lawful some time ago" (i.e.
having made it lawful kept it so), and Is bat ko halal kiyd
" he made this lawful now."
(g) — Chhorna, added to the roots of transitive verbs, gives
an idea of completion after effort, as : Mai ne is qadr mihnat
ki ki imtihdn " pas " kar-chhord " I worked so hard that I got
well through my examination." This is more forcible than
kar-liyd. Nikdl-chhornd "to succeed in expelling." Vide
also L. 26 (d).
Also karke chhorna has much the same force, as : Mai ne
wuh kdm kar-c.hhord or karke chhord. The latter is more
forcible. Compare with karke raha (d) (4). Example: Mai
wuh kam karke raha (not kar-raha) gives the idea of " I was
determined to do it and I did it."
(h) — (1) In the ordinary "declamatory negative (^
c£r*^)" the simple verb must be used, as : Usko chhor-do, but
usko mat chhor o (not here chhor mat l do) ; mai ne usko
kdt-ddld, but mai ne usko nahl kdtd (not nahl kdt-ddld).
(2) Exceptions are, clauses implying some expectation or
exception, as : Do to sahl, mai use khd na jd-,ugd, " well give
it me, I'm not going to gobble it up " : unko is bat ka bard
khaydl thd ki kahl goll ki mar ke andar na d-pare " they took
good care not to come within range of our rifles." Wuh mar
nahl gayd "he did not die." Mai ne kdt nahl ddld, fagat
chhild hai. Chhor mat do indicates an expectation.
Interrogatively, also, the negative intensives are used in
the same sense, as: Kyd usne darakht ko kdt nahl11 ddld?
" what, didn't he cut down the tree ? "
1 Note the position of mat, na, etc., and see next para. (2).
* Note the position of the nahl.
96 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
LESSON 24.
(a)' The mother lay down with MS, bachche ko le-pari.1
the child.
I could do nothing and that's Mujh se kuchh na-ban-pard,
all about it. bas.
He jumped into the canal. Wuh nahr me kud-pard.
My hand happened to fall * on Ittifdq-an merd hath ek chuhe
a rat. par para.
I was pawed by the pony- Tatwdnl ki tap mujh par pan .
mare.
It is raining, rain is falling.8 Pdni partd hai.
The fox was stumbling and Lomn girfi parti chall jail thi.
limping along.
Why did you let this book Turn ne yih kitdb kyu gird,i ?
drop?
As I was weak my enemy got Mai kam-zor thd, is liye dush-
the upper hand man kl * ban-pari.
It is ill to suffer such insults. Aisi zillate utharii bun hat.
' It has gone and burst.' Phat-gaya.
I suffered endless trouble (lit., Mai ne aisi taklif uthaj, ki mat
I suffered such trouble that (or na) puchhiye.
— don't ask me about it).
He lost his voice. Uski dwaz baith-ga,i (or par-
1 Vide Lesson 22, 6 (2).
2 "To fall" metaphorically.
3 .Actually falling (of rain, snow, etc.) ; perhaps the only instance of
parna meaning to fall actually.
* Some such word as tfiqat (fern.), " power," is understood
LESSON 24.
97
hould anv outside influence,
pressure, ba brought to bear
then — .
ly hat has been squashed in.
he is now weeping.
waited for him for a whole
hour.
cannot control him ; (or. if
inanimate) it cannot be
pressed by me.
left no work T undertook till
I completed it.
'his will be done some time
or other (indefinite).
'his will be done some time
or other within a week.
tepeat this (oath, etc.) after
le has had a relapse.
'11 come here again some day.
^-morrow is a holiday, so do
the work of to-morrow to-
day.
!ee me on your way to office.
Agar bdhar se ko,i dabd,o paf-
jd,e to—.
Men topi dab-ga,i.
Wuh ro-rahi liai.
Mai ghante bliar talc uske inti-
zdr me rdhd.
Wuh mujh se dabtd nahl,.
Jis kdm me mai par-gayd (or
lag-gayd or lag-raha) uslco
kar-chhord '
Yih kam ho-rahega.
Yih kam hafte ke andar andar !L
ho-rahega.
Jaise jiiseham kahtc, ja.e turn
bJii kahte ja.o; or men in
bato ko jo abhl bolta hn
duhrd.o.
Us H bimari duhra-ga,i.
Mai phir yahS, d-rahUjd.
Kal ta'lil hai. is liye kal kd
kdm dj kar-rakho.
Daftar jdte waqt mere pds se
ho-lend.
1 Compare uthn rnkhnri ; vide. Lesson T3 (f).
a Andnr andar less than, not more ; emphasis
7
98 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
What was to happen, has hap- Jo h ina tha ivuk ho-liya.
pened and is finished.
I got all I wanted, my heart's Mere dil K arzu nikal-ga,i.
desire was completed.
To accompany. Kul ke safh (or /Jichhe) ho-lena.
(&)_ Note the following methods of forming feminines :—
(i) Brahman, m. "a Brahman," Brahmam, f. "a Brah-
man woman"; ahir, m., ahiri, f. "cowherd" (a
caste) ; kanjnr, m. (a caste, a kind of Gypsy), kan-
jari,t. " a kanjar's wife, a prostitute." etc. ; Pathan,
m., Palhani, f.
(ii) Ghora "horse," ghofl "mare"; billa, m., billi. \.
"cat."
(iii) Sunar, m. "goldsmith," sunaran (and sundrm) gold-
smith's wife"; kumhar, ra., kumharan (and kiun-
Mrm), f. "potter."
(iv) Utt m. "camel," Ulni. f. ; sher, m. "tiger," sherm, f.
" tigress " ; mulld, m. T., " a schoolmaster, a learned
man," mullani ''a mulla's wife."
(v) Mali, m., malin, f. "gardener" (Hindu) ; dhohl. m..
dhobin, f . " washerman " (a caste) ; kujra^ m.. k-Ujfi,
f. " greengrocer and fruiterer " (a caste) ; qam,i ' (or
qasa i). m., gasd,in. f . " butcher " ; dulha, m., " bride-
groom," dulhan, f. "bride"; hathi, m. halhni, f.
"elephant."
(vi) Mamti, m. "maternal uncle," milmarii (for mamarii*)
f. ; tattu, m. "pony," latwani, f. "pony mare."
1 Kujre-qafu',i=:" low people."
2 Antepenultimatea usually short: vide L. 53 (ft), foot-note.
LESSON 25. 99
(vii) Baniya, in. "grain-merchant" (a caste), baniyayan
or baniya,in. f. ( uJt>i> ) f. ; na.t, m. " barber,"
na.in, f.
(viii) Khatri. m. (a caste), Khatrani, f. ; mih-tar. m. "a
sweeper," mihtar-am,1 f. "a sweepsr's wife."
(c) — Others are: — .Ka/<*. m., ra»», f . ; bh-ij. m., bahan or
bahin,f.', nii/cik (vulg. n^ ,ik) " a guide, a corporal," n&yak'i,
nayik-i (and ria,ika.. ni^ki), f ; MI?M m. " maternal unole,"
khala. f. ; fte^, m. (T.), begam, f. (a Mughul title) ; Khi,n,, m.,
Khvnam, f. (a title); ssi, m. "bull, stallion," gr5,e or ^5,0, f.
"cow."
(rf) — 2Var s^er or slier-e'1 nar "male tiger," mcida sher or
xhe.r-e1 mada "female tiger."
LESSON 25.
Apnd, etc., poss. pron. One's own.
Apne. pi. One's own people.
Kahna, tr. To say.
Kahlana, intr. and caus. To be called ; also to cause to
say.
Bairhna, intr. To increase, to grow ; to ad-
vance ; to surpass.
Age barhna, intr. To advance.
Murna, intr. To turn to one side.
Morna, tr. To turn over, fold back.
1 Here the Sanskrit suffix -aril is added to a Persian word.
* This -e is the Persian izafat; ' vide ' L. 61 (g).
100
M uh morna.
Batti, f.
AT (no pi.), f-
Sulgana, tr.
Dhahna,1 intr.
Dhana, tr.
Letwi, intr.
Kahla-bhejnt, tr.
Likh-bhejni, tr.
MOgt&hejna, tr.
Buld-bhejnT,, tr.
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Ldfcn, f.
Qcufim, adj.
Khlss. adj.
Khimyat, pi. k±assiyale, f.
Khlss-kar, adv.
To turn the face aside, to
refuse to obey, avoid do-
ing.
Wick, (and hence) light.
Cover, protection.
To kindle, set alight.
To fall down (of buildings) ; to
be pulled down.
To pull or knock down build-
ings.
To lie down.
To ssnd an oral message, send
word.
To send word in writing, write
word.
To send for things.
To send for persons.
To ask for through a psrson
(by letter or orally).
Wood ; a stick.
Ancient.
Special, particular, private.
Th3 nature, characteristic, pe-
culiar quality.
Especially.
1 In Ihe Punjab " to fall down" generally.
2 Vide Caus. verbs, Lesson 44.
'Amm, adj.
'Awamm
Bazar ke log
Ghazal, pi. ghazale, f.
LESSON 25. 101
Common, general, vulgar.
Common people.
Qd'ida, pi. qa'ide, m.
Qawa'id, Ar., pi., m. and f.
Parwarish, f.
Love-song or ode (formerly
always short).
A rule, regulation ; propriety ;
custom ; clastur ; regularity.
Rules, regulations-, etc.. masc
pi. : parade of troops, f.
sing. ; grammar, f. sing.
Cherishing, rearing ; main
taining ; patronage.
Chal (from chalria) , pi. chale, /. Motion ; gait ; procedure ;
conduct, behaviour, trick.
Chal-chalan, m. and f.
Bad-chalan, adj.
Nek-chalan, adj.
Nek-chalnl, f.
Pyara, H., adj. j
Character.
Ill -behaved, of bad character
Of good character.
Good character.
'Aziz, A., adj. and subs.
Apne pas se.
Ap se, or dp se dp.
Apa* me.
Dear, beloved ; a relative ju-
nior in years.
Out of one's own pocket ; or
from himself, myself, your-
self, etc., etc.
Of my (your, -their, etc., etc.)
own accord.
Amongst ourselves, your
selves, themselves.
102 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
LESSON 26.
(a) — (i) Jana (Progressive) and Rating (Continuative) suf-
fixed to a present participle express progression or continu-
ance, as : Wuh har roz aehchhd hold jdid hai1 " he is getting
better every day " ; wuh kahtd-gayd aur mat likhtd-gayd " he
kept on saying, or dictating, and I kept on writing what he
said (progressive)," but wuh kahtd-rahd* aur mal likhtd rahd
" he went on saying it, while I went on with my writing (con-
tinuative)," (i.e. there was no connection between the two
acts). Merd gala baithd-jdtd hai " I am losing my voice
rapidly," but baithtd-jdtd hai "I am losing it by degrees."
Jdnd and Rahria cannot be used interchangeably.
(2) Jdtd-rahnd, however, in all its tenses signifies "to bo
completely lost," a curious idiom that according to Kempson
originates in the idea of going on till the vanishing point is
reached : Akhir wuh men nazar se jdid-rahd " at last he dis-
appeared from view." Vide L. 23 (d) (3).
Remark. — The Imperfect and Preterite tenses, however,
may mean either "was being lost," or "was in the habit of
going" ; and also "was lost" or "used to go."
(3) Rah-jSna preceded by a Present Participle gives the idea of in-
effectiveness, as: Larka rota hi rah-gaya aur ma ueko chhor-kar chall
ga,l " the child kept on crying to be taken, but its mother left it be
hind."
(&)—(!) when kahnd, or kah-dend, or kah-ddlnd,s signifies
" to tell or relate," it requires se with the object : when " to
command," or "call, name," ko, as: Us se kalio ki ten ma
mar-ga,l "tell him his mother is dead"; sard qissa mm ne
' A good example of a Progressive verb.
* Or holta-raha "he went on talking."
3 Kah-dalna " to tell without reserve."
LESSON 27. 103
us se kah-diyd " I told him the whole story " ; but us ko (not
us se) waha jane kaho "tell him (i.e. order him) to go there."
Am ko Angrezi me kyd kahte hoi ? " what is a mango called in
English?" Wuh mujhko Shaiidn kahtd hai "he calls me a
devil."
(2) With bolna, se only is used. Mai turn se nahl boltd
"I'm not addressing you " or " I don't want to talk to you."
Bolna with ko in the sense of "to order " is vulgar.
(c) — One form of the Conjunctive Participle [vide L. 18 (b)]
is identical with the root ; this form is still occasionally used,
more in speaking than \rriting,' as: Mai ne subh sawere uth,
muh hath flho, ndshtd kar, aprii rah li. In compounds such
as mil-baithna "to sit together," where both verbs retain
their original significations [vide L. 22 6 (2)], the first part of
the compound is the Conjunctive Participle ; mil-kar baithnd
can be substituted for mil-baithna : this latter is not an inten-
sive. Other examples are. A-pahuchnd, jd-pahuchnd, kar-
dikhana, phar-khana, bhag-nikalna. Rakh-chhornd is "to keep
by for future use," but rakh-kar chhornd is "to place after
effort"; vide L. 23 (g).
LESSON 27.
(a) — On the possessive adjectivial pronoun Apnd.
When the Nominative or Agent is followed in the same
clause by a possessive pronoun belonging to itself, such posses-
sive is rendered by apnd, -ne, -m, never by the possessive mera,
mere, men, etc. Examples : —
I read my book. Mai apnl kitdb parhtd hu.
Thou readest thy book. Tu apnl kitdb parhtd hai.
1 Indicates haste : 'vide' Stumbling- Blocks.
104 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
He reads his (own) book. Wuh apm kitab parhln 1m i.
She reads her (own) book. Wuh apm kilab parhti hai.
We have seen our father. Ham ne a/we bap ko dekha hai.
Have you written your letter ? Turn ne apm chitthl likJn ?
The goldsmith and carpenter Sundr aur barha,i apne shahr
went to their (own) city. (me) gaye.
The women feed their (own) 'Aurate apne bachcho ko palti
children. hai.
N.B. — If. in the above examples, the words 'his,' 'her/
'their,' refer not to the nominative, but to somebody else,
then they must be expressed by is-ka or us-ka, etc.
(2) A pna refers to (1) the grammatical subject. (2) the logi-
cal subject. (3) the speaker, as : (1) Wuh apm kit'ib pirhta hai
"he is reading his ' book " ; (2) usko apm 'izzat ka khayal hai
"he has a regard for his own honour " = wuh apm ' 'izzat ka
khayal rakhta hai; (3) or (2), apna (or mera) dil nah'i chahta
ki waha ja,u "I don't want to go there." (4) Afma also
means "own " as : Yih uskt apm kitab hai " it's his own book,
not some one else's" ; apne pas se "out of my own pocket.
etc.'"2
Remarks. — Of the three accusatives (1) apne dp ko, (2) apnt
ta,l and (3) apne ko, Xos. (1) and (3) are in commoner use, in
modern Urdu.
(6) — Apa, a form of up, is only used in the following phrases: — ape
me hona " to be in one's proper senses" ; ape me ana ; ape se buhir
hona ; ape se guzarnfi. Mai ape aya (for mat ap tit/5) is vulgar.
(c) — My book is lost. Men kilab jali raht.
My book was lost. Men kitab jad-rahl tin.
' Wuh us ki kitab parhta hai "he is reading his, i.e. another per-
son's, book."
9 Vide also Lesson 27.
LESSON 27.
105
She keeps on advancing (going
away from us) and keeps on
looking behind the while.
Light every other lamp.
What is this called in Hindu-
stani ?
Tell them (order them) to give
me my book.
Inform them that their brother
has come (unexpectedly).
Tell him to go.
I want to say something to
you.
He is getting well (progres-
sively) .
I ordered him to burn wood.
The house fell down suddenly.
The city is being pulled down
I lay down.
I remained lying down.
Ancient writers have written
(some time ago).
W uh age ko barhti-fifi hai aur
murkar dekhti-jdtl hai.
Ek batti dr ek batti sulgdte jd,o
(Bombay idiom), or Ek batti
chhorkar har ek dusri batti
jaldte jd,o.
Yih Hindustani me kyd kahldid
hai ? or, Is ko Hindustani
nie kyd kahte hai ?
Unko kaho ki meri kitdbde-de.
Un se kaho, " tuinhdrd bha,i
ayd hai." '
Use jane ko kaho (not bolo).
Mai turn se kuchh bolna chahta
hu.
Wuh achchha hotd jata hai.
Mai ne lakri jaldne ko kah-i
tha.
Makan dhah-pard.
Shahr dhah rahd hai.
Mai let-rahd, or mal let-gayd.
Mai letd-rahd.
Qadlrn likhne-wdle is tarah
likh-ga,e hai.
' Or simply aya, if he were expected. Direct narration.
106 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
I composed this ghazal of my Mai ne yih ghazal kah-li.
own accord.
I composed this ghizal at some Mai ne, yih ghazal kah-di.
one's request.
His own mother (i.e. not his Us Id apni ma mar-ga.i.
sauteli mil) is dead.
Why should I do it — I don't KyU karti ; apna (or merd) rlil
want to ? nahl chdhtd ?
We must maintain our own Apno ki panvarish zarnr hai.
people.
Every one has his own fashion. Har ek ki apni apni civil dhdl
method. hai.
Every one values his own Apni jdn sab ko pynri fiai.
life.
He thinks of his own benefit Us ko apne hi fd,id.e ka, khayal
only. hai.
T cannot quit my nature, habit. Apni 'ddat (mujh se) Icrk nahl
ki-jdti.{
I came here of my own accord. Mai apne dp yaha dyd.
What, do you look on this as Kyd, yih chiz apni samaifil<
your own property ? ho?
Kindly send some one to ask Sdhib sc puchhwd-mSgd ,iye ki
the Sahib when he will go Aqre kab jd,ege*
to Agra.
The water keeps flowing away. Pdni bahtd jdtd liai. .
i Ki-jatl hai "is being done"; present tense, passive voice. Vide
Lesson 47.
* Indirect narration.
LESSON 28.
107
LESSON 28.
Use of the suffix sa, se, .«*.
(a) — Sd, se: or si (according to gender and number) added to
a substantive, or to the oblique form of personal pronouns,
converts these into adjectives denoting similitude or resem-
blance, as : from haiwan, a beast, comes haiwdn-sd. like a
beast, beastly ; kutta-sa dog-like.
(6) — Milnd, intr. (takes dat. To find, to be found ; obtain-
ind abl. of person).
Milana. tr.
SuraL pi. surate, f.
Is surat se.
Is surat me.
Khub-surat, adj.
Bad-surat. adj.
BaeK, L
UstacL m.
m-sd, H.
Yak-sa. P.
ed ; to meet with, to happen
on ; to resemble ; be mixed ;
to join ; be connected ; har-
monize with (tune) : to tally
with, etc.1
To mix ; introduce ; unite ;
compare ; check with a list,
etc., etc.
Face ; form ; appearance:
manner ; case.
In this way.
In this case.
Of fine appearance, beautiful.
Of bad appearance, ugly.
Evil, vice.
Any teacher ; also a past-
master, one skilled in any
art.
All the same ; exactly alike ;
uniform ; identical, no dif-
ference.
Vide also L. 28 (t).
108 HINDUSTANI MANUAL
Kaifiyat, pi. kaifiyate, f.
Clialan, m. (from chalna).
Top, pi. tope, f
Pahar, m.
Do-pahar* f.
Tisra pahar? m
Jgc/i parlal karnd.
Hundi or hundawt, f.
Nasikat, pi. nasihate, f
A;, pi. salake, f.
The "howness,"1 nature,
state, condition ; report ;
remarks (in " column of re-
marks"); view, any sight
to be seen.
Invoice; certificate of des-
patch; despatch; forward-
ing a case or prisoner.
Gun, cannon.
A watch, i e. 3 hours.
Midday.
Afternoon.
To examine accounts.
Bill of exchange ; vulg. a
cheque
Admoniton.
Advice; (in pi. = ad vice on
various subjects).
Soon.
Quickness.
Like a soldier, soldier -like.
Jald, adv.
Jcddi. f., subs.
Sipahi-sd, or sipahl-ka sa.
(c) — But sa, etc., added to adjectives of size or quantity,
signifies " very," as : Bahut-sa " very much " ; zard 6i Inl i><tr
" at a very little matter, a trifle." Added to other adjectives
it usually signifies " somewhat," as : Kdld-sd " somewhat
black, blackish, black-looking " ; b&kd-sd " somewhat, rather,
foppish." 8
1 Ar.kaif "how?"
* Do-pahar and st-pahar are feminine, but tisra pahar is masculine.
8 There are in fact two suffixes «o with different derivations : vide
"Hindustani Stumbling Blocks," V, 7, supplement.
LESSON 28 109
(d) — When sd. se, si is added to Tcaun " who ? ", kaun is not
(but sd is) inflected, as: Yih kaun-se ghofe kd zin hai "of
what horse is this the saddle ? " Kaun sd as compared with
kaun indicates surprise or negation, or refers to a number.
(e) — Ko,i-sd means " any at random, any one you like, etc." ;
rnujhe ko,l,-si pinsil do " give me any pencil " ; koji si naukarl
bht mujhe mile to mat karugd, "no matter what work it is, I
will do it willingly."
(/) — Sd is also added to a noun in the genitive,1 as : Gtdar
kutte kd sd (or kuttd sd) ek jdnwar hai " a jackal is an animal
resembling a dog." This genitive construction is to be pre-
ferred with nouns.
(g) — Instead of yih-sd and wuh-sd "like this" and "like
that," aisd and waisd are used.* Mujh-8d (or colloquially
merd-ffd) "like me"; tujh-sd (or colloquially terd-sd) "like
thee " ; but ham-sd or hamdrd-sd, tum-sd or tumhdrd-sd " like
us," "like you." Us kd sd (not us sd) "like him." Mujh
ghjanb-sd " like poor me " ; us jaqtr sd " like that faqlr."
(h) — The forms mujh ka, lujh ka, ham ka, turn ka, which may be
styled true genitive forms, are used when an adjective i? in apposition,
as: mujh kam-iakjit ke nas-'jd me '• in the fate of me the unfortunate."
(i) — Milnd with se means " to pay a visit " " to make ac-
quaintance or to say good-b}7e," but with ko " to happen
on," as: raste me ek ddmi mujh ko mild "I met a man on
the road (by accident) " ; merd khoy'd hu,d rupiya mujh ko
mild " 1 got back my lost money " : mujh ko in'dm mild, " I
got a reward " ; but wuh mujh se milne ko dyd liai " he has
come to see me."
1 There are in fact two suffixes sa with different derivations ; vide
" Hindustani Stumbling Blocks," V, 7, supplement.
* buuiJaxly kama is for kia-aa.
HO
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(7) — Note the following idioms with parna : — pichhe pnrn? " to run
after, importune, pester" ; pale parna " to f.ill into the clutches of" ;
mura parna " to be undone " ; pl<ai'> parna " to be hanged " ; mujh par
mar parl " I was beaten " ; jan ke lale parna " to be m danger."
LESSON 29.
What particular house is this Yih kaun sd makdn hai ?
(several having been men-
tioned) ?
To what set of horses do these Yih kaun-se ghoro ke zin hai ':
saddles belong (i.e. the rid-
ing, or the dak horses, etc.) ?
There is none as expert as I Mujh-sd, i* shahr me, ko,i us-
am in this city. tad nahl.
He is skilled in this. Is kdm me barf ustdd hai.
He resembles his brother in Surat me apne bhd,i se milta
appearance. hai.
Give me a smallish quantity Thofa-sd wilayatl pani (mujhe)
of soda-water. do.
Pour slowly (said as the ser- Thord thord pdni dhdlo.
vant commences to pour).
He looked like a sepoy. Us k% ' sipdhi ki si surat th%.
He looks like a sepoy, or he is Wuh sipdhi-sd ddml hai ; wnJt
like a sepoy in qualities. sipdhi led AO ddml hai.
We'll all eat it in company Sab milkar khd,ege.
together.
I compared my watch with to- Aj do-pahar H lop se apnt
day's midday gun. ghafi mildf.
Kl as furat in feminine
LESSON 29.
Ill
What do nine, and eighteen,
and twenty-seven, added
together, make ?
I have put my mare to the
Government stallion.
Don't let these horses smell
each other (put their noses
together) .
God grant my brother may
soon come to see me (and
then go away) ; but [ — that
I may find him soon].
Please arrange a meeting be-
tween him and the L G.
Mix some water with this milk.
Mix the water and the milk
together.
Adding a hundred of rupees
out of my own pocket I
will send you a bill for five-
hundred altogether.
This person's appearance tal-
lies with the description on
the forwarding letter.
Both closely resemble each
other.
Nau, aur aitharah, aur satta.i*
milke kai ' hole hai ?
Mat ne apm ghon sarkan sand
se, mtta,i.
In ghoro ko nak mat milane do.
Khuda kare mera bha,l jald
mujh se mil-ja,e [but jald
mujh ko mil-ja.e}.
Ap Lat Sahib se, inhe * milwa-
de. '
Dudh me, thora pant mila.o.
Dudh aur pani ko mild,o.
Sau, mat apne pas se milakar,
pure pans sau H hundaivi
turn ko bhejta hu.*
Is shakhs H surat chalan ki
kaifiyat se, milli hai.
Dono kl ek-si surat hai, or unki
surate milli hai (or miltl
jultl hai).b
1 Kai,p\., " how many ?"
a Plural for respect.
3 Pun for pack " five."
* Present tense to indicate immediate future.
5 Julna has no meaning ; the jingling phrase gives the idea of reci
procity.
112
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Are there any flowers and fruit
in that garden ?
A smallish number.
He is a somewhat elderly per-
son.
I gave him a lot of good ad-
vice (admonition), but he
paid no heed.
My advice to you is not to do
this.'
Come, bt us consult together.
What book do you want ? }
Give me anv one of them. )
Us bagh me kuchh phul phrtl
liai ?
Kuchh thofe se hoi.
Wuh kuchh buiiha $a admi
hai.
Mai ne bahut si nasikat ki,
lekin us ne ek na-sum ' (or
mam).
Men saVih yih hai ki turn yih
kam ni-karo.
A,o apas me, is bat ke bare me
salah kare.
Kaun kilab magte * ho ?
Ko,t st do.
(a) — Bachna. intr.
Bach-rahjia.
Kist chlz se bacha s-rahna.
Bacha-rahna.
Bach-nikalna.
LESSON 30.
To save oneself, be saved ; be
spared ; to be left over ; to
recover, survive ; to avoid,
shrink from.
To be or remain over ; to sur-
vive.
On one's guard against, avoid.
To remain safe.
To get clean away, escape in
safety.
) But understood.
2 Vulgar. Properly
3 Past participle, i.e.
" are you asking for ? "
bacha (hu.a) rahna.
LESSON 30.
118
Bachat, f.
Najat paria, tr.
Natii to; warna, conj.
Go; agarchi ; harchand, conj.
Samne, prep, and adv.
Amne samne, adv.
Amria samna, or samna, subs.
Bad-nam, adj.
Bad-narm, f., subs.
Dar-ban, m.
Khush, adj.
Khush-bu ', pi. khush-bu,e, f.
Khush-bu-dar, adj.
KhusJn, pi. khushiyS, f.
f, f.
, f .
Chori-karna, churana, tr.
jA;/ie churana.
Akhe bacharia.
Savings in money.
To obtain salvation ; to be
saved from danger.
Otherwise, if not.
Although.
In front of.
Right opposite each other.
Coming face to face with, con
fronting.
Of ill -repute ; defamed.
Ill-repute; disgrace: defama-
tion.
Door-keeper.
Pleased, happy ; (in com-
pounds " good, pleasant ").
Scent.
Of sweet smell.
Rejoicing ; happiness.
Company, society, inter-
course ; sexual intercourse
(of humans only).
Thief.
Theft.
To steal.
To avoid seeing another ; to
connive at.
To avoid being seen by
another.
Khush-bu was formerly an adjective and khush-bu,l a noun.
114 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(b) — The Present Participle of a verb, prefixed to Rahn/i,
signifies " to do continually " and is equivalent to karnd with
the past participle, Lesson 20 (d) thus : —
(1) Wuh rofi-rahtl hai "she weeps off and on" ; some-
times = roya karti hai. '
(2) Wuh kal se roti-raht hai " she has been weeping off
and, on since yesterday."
(3) Wuh kal, din bhar, roti-rahi "she wept (remained
weeping) all yesterday off and on," Lesson 23 (d)
(3) ; but wuh ro-rahl hai " she is now weeping." '
(4) Jab tak mai waha thd wuh bardbar rold-rahd (thd) =
roya kiyd " whilst, as long as, 1 was there, he con-
tinued weeping " ; definite, time fixed ; but : —
(5) Wuh ro-rahd thd "he was weeping. continually " ; no
definite time.
(c) — (1) The first person is more worthy than the second,
and the second than the third ; thus in English " You and I,''
but in Hindustani " 1 and you." When, too. the subject con-
sists of two or more parsons, the verb will agree with the first
person rather than with the second and with the second rather
than with the third.
(2) This rule is, however, modified by regard for euphony ;
wuh aur turn is ko karoge " you and he will do this " ; not turn
aur wuh karoge, as the second person plural verb sounds awk-
ward close to wuh. Similarly, ham turn jd,ege, " I and you
will go," and not mai turn jd,ege. "I and ha will go" re-
quires a plural verb, and according to the rule it must agree
with the first person ; but mai aur wuh d,ege sounds awk-
ward ; write therefore mai aur wuh dono ddml d,ege.
1 But ro,e jati hai she weeps continuously, without a break. Vide
also L. 64.
LESSON 31. 115
LESSON 31.
Use of Ap.
(a) — The word Ap literally denotes self, and it is so em-
ployed with any of the personal pronouns ; as, mai dp jd,Ugd,
" I wijl go myself." It may also bs used in the same sense
without the personal pronoun ; as : dp jd,egd. " he himself will
go," ap d,ege, " we will come ourselves."
The word ap, however, is frequently employed in a very
different sense, like our terms "you sir," "your honour,''
"your worship," " his honour," " his worship." etc., and the
verb, in such cases, is in the third person plural. The words
sahib, " master, monsieur," and kuzur, and jandb-i 'all '• your
honour," are used in a similar manner when a person is ad-
dressing, or speaking of, his superior in rank ; or as a mere
matter of politeness, by strangers of respectability.
(6) — Ap as an honorific requires the third person plural. In Delhi
City, however, they incorrectly use the second person plural in speak-
ing, as : Agar ap kahte ho (for kahte hal).
(c) — Avoid bad company else Burl suhbat se bacho, nahl to
you will be disgraced. (or warna) bad-ndm ho-jd,-
oge.
Keep clear of the fire, or you'll Ag se bacho, warna jal-jd,oge.
be burnt.
He escaped death. Marne se, bach-gayd.
He just escaped death. Marte marte bach-gayd.
He nearly fell off his horse. Ghore se girte girte bach-gayd
(or rah-gayd) ; or nazdlk
thd ki ghore se gir-jd,e.1
1 Aorist or Present Subjunctive, lit. " it was near that he should
fall."
116
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
The door-keeper was sitting at, Darwdze par dar-bdn baifha
the door, but I evaded his thd magar mai uski akh
watchfulness and went in bachd-kar andar chald-gayd.
(without his seeing me).
Though the thief came face Go chor aur sipdhiyo kd dmnd
to face with the police, yet sdmnd hu,d, lekin wuh bacil-
li got away free. kar nikal-gayd.
He escaped punishment (either Sazd se bach-gayd.
was let off or absconded).
I have come here of my own Mai dp se dp yaha dyd hU ; or
accord. mat apni khushi fie
It is a matter of rejoicing.
I am very pleased with him.
Who asks after us ? Who
cares what becomes of us ?
(d) — Idioms : —
This house oppresses me.
By all means let them come.
Return immediately (lit, if
you eat there, drink here ').
What the devil does he care
where I am dragging out
my existence.
If my book is torn you won't
care a hang.
Ban khusht H bat hai.
Mai is se bahut khush JiM.
Ham ko kaun puchhld hai ?
Yih ghar mujhe kdttd hai.
Shauq se d,e.
A gar roil wahd, khd,o to pdnl
yah'ii pt,o.]
Unki bald jane 2 ki mdl kahfi
para hn.
Agar men kitdb phat-ga,l to
iumhdri bald se.1
1 Easterns usually drink after they have finished their meal, not in
the middle of it.
2 Vide Lesson 13 (b).
LESSON 31.
117
To be annoyed, put out.
Everything was quite changed.
What has happened is the
best for my interests.
The horse jibbed (lit, stuck,
came to a stop).
A moonlight night.
The day preceding the new
moon.
This place (i.e. its climate)
does not agree with me.
This is no concern of mine
(lit. do you know it and let
him, or them, know it).
The horse sank in the mud.
Each sepoy's share comes to
three rupees.
He's queer, not quite right in
his head (or lit. his brain has
started from its place).
Don't anger me (lit. don't
make me open my mouth).
He must have come by way
of the bazar.
build castles in the air (lit.
to cook imaginary pilaos.)
Dil maild (lit. dirty) hond.
Kuchh kd kuchh ho-gayd.
Jo hu,d,mere haqq me bihtar
hai.
Ghord ar-gayd
Chdndni rat.
G hand -rat kd din.
Yaha ki db o hawd mere mizdj
ke muwdftq nahl hai.
Turn jdno. wuh jdne.
Ghord klchar me dhas-gaya.1
Har ek sipahi ke zimme tin tin
rupai baith-ga.e.
Uske dimrt-cfh. me khalal hai (or
uskd dimdyh, chai-gayd).
Merd muh mat khulwd,o.
Wuh bdzdr se hoke dyd hogd.
Khaydli pild,o pakdnd.
1 In the Punjab khubna. Dhasan, m. (in the Punjab khuban) in
also a quicksandy place.
118
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
LESSON 32.
Use of the Infinitive
(a) — One use of the Infinitive or Verbal Noun is to ex-
press obligation ; thus, tum-ko wahS, jdnd hogd or paregd, you
must (or will have to) go there.
(6) — Are, m.. and Art. f. (to
servants and children) ;
inter j.
Are are !
Ajl, m. and f. ; interj.
Yu, adv.
M kd tu.
Ghdhiye, impers. verb.
Chdhiye thd. impers. verb.
Darkdr hai.
Mundsih, adj.
Zarur, adj. and adv.
Jd,e zarur, m.
Zururat, f.
Intizdm, m.
Hajat, pi. kajate, f
Muktdj, adj. and subs.
Qharib,1 adj.
Halloo! ho! hark!
Good gracious !
Oh Sir ! Oh Madam !
Thus.
As it was before (/specially
with regard to quantity).
Is necessary, wanted : ought.
should.
Ought to have been.
Is necessary, is wanted.
Proper, fitting ; reasonable.
Necessary ; necessarily, sure-
W.C.
Necessity.
Management ; preparation ;
administration ; discipline ;
order.
Need.
In need, in want ; pauper.
Poor ; quiet, inoffensive
Originally " foreigner, stranger " : -a;I6 o yliarib t; rare, strange.'1
LESSON 32.
Rozt, f.
Rozgar, m.
Qalami ' kitdb, f.
Guldbi (from guldb rose).
Jara, m., subs.
Guldbt jam.
Saj-rakhnd, tr.
De-rakhnd, tr.
Le-rakhria. tr.
, tr.
, tr.
6rAw? machana, tr.
Charchd machana, tr.
Dil-bahldnd, tr.
JVaw dubona? tr.
Thamnd, intr.
Thamnd, tr.
Daily bread ; portion ; divine
grace, power.
Employment ; (in literary
Urdu = zamana "time").
A " \vritten book," i.e. manu-
script.
Pink.
Cold ; also ague ; in pi. cold
Spring and autumn cold,
mild cold.
Put in order beforehand.
To give in advance.
To take or purchase before-
hand.
To exceed a fixed time (tr.) ;
put off, defer, postpone ; to
evade.
To reject an oral request.
To make a clamour ; to raise
an alarm.
Spread a rumour.
To amuse oneself.
To disgrace one's name.
To cease.
To stop ; catch hold of.
Qalam ' pen.'
Dubona, tr., to drown.
120 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
SambJudM, intr. To pull oneself together :
save oneself from falling ;
keep ones' balance.
Sambhdlnd, tr.1 To support or hold up, save
from falling ; take care of ;
maintain ; manage ; dil
sambhalnd = control one-
self, curb ones's emotions.
Sambhdld-lend,1 tr. To rally before death ; to
mend one's way.
De-marna, tr. To dash a thing against
another.
To give away completely.
patak-denT, To dash on the ground.
To throw on the back (in
wrestling).
De-dalna, tr.
De-pxtaknd, or
(not so forcible), tr.
De-pachhdfnd or pachhdr-
dend, tr.
(c) — Chahiye and chahiye thd, either take the dative of
the person, etc.. as also do hogd and papegd ; or else they are
followed by the Aorist with ki, as : tumko wahS, jdnd chahiye,
or chahiye ki turn wahS, jd,o " you ought to go there."
The past part, is also occasionally used before chahiye, as :
Yih kdm dj kiyd (or karna) chahiye.
The plural chahiye is used in the Punjab and in Delhi, but
not in Lucknow.
Remark. — In the negative of "should, ought," either nahl or na is
used, but the latter is preferable. If, however, chahiye means " want-
ed," no/it must be used.
(d) — The infinitive may be used as a future imperative or
The old spelling was with m, the new is with n (m).
LESSON 32. 121
polite present imperative ; ' it is less imperious (and conse-
quently more polite) than the imperative. Vide L. 54 (/).
(e) — The inflected infinitive with ka, ke, H expressing inten-
tion is used only in the negative, the substantive verb "I
am, he is," etc., being understood after it, as : wuh nahl likhne
ka [hai] " he has no intention whatever of writing."
(/) — Shukr, "thanks/' specially means Khuda ka shukr
" Thank you " for a small obligation is taslim, or is expressed
bj' touching the forehead with the right hand and bowing.
Hindus say bandagi. Ap ka bara mamnun hu is "thanks"
for a gift, etc.
(g) — (1) Nouns preceded by a cardinal number may be in
the singular or plural, latter preferable, as : do larkl or do
larkiya "two girls." If, however, the noun is masculine and
ends in a, the plural must be used, as : do ghore (not do
ghora) = " two individual horses." With large numbers, how-
ever, the noun may be in the singular, as : sau ghora hazir
tha " a hundred horse, i.e. a collection of a hundred horse, was
present " ; sau sipahi hazir tha.
(2) But, if the noun denotes money, measure, quantity,
time, distance, direction, manner, kind, it is generally in the
singular, as : do hafte lak "for two weeks"; das r as'1 ghora
hai "ten head of horse " ; do taraf se "from two sides " etc.
Chdlis ashrafi = " forty ashraft," but in " chalts afhrafiyd, " '
" so many as forty ashrafi" there is emphasis on the num-
ber forty : bhat bhat ki boli ; us ke muh me do zaban hai " he
is double-tongued " ; is mulk me pachas zabane (or boliya)
1 It is also used as an Interjection, as : sunna " listen ! " ; dekhna
>e, beware !"
2 For Ar ra*s, m., " head " ; but ras, f., H. " rein."
3 Chalisd ashraftya " all the forty ashrafis."
122 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
hat " there are 50 languages in this country " (here the singu-
lar zaban should not be used).
(3) A similar rule holds good after indefinite pronouns, as :
sab tarak se " in all ways " ; ba'z jagah (/.) " in some places " ;
kaj din ke ba'd " after several days " ; sab qism H machhti
" all kinds of fish " ; kitm daf'a " how often."
(h) — The formative plural of certain numbers below a hun-
dred, is used without a post-position, as : darjano " dozens
of " ; koriyo or blso ' " scores of " ; pachasd " fifties of." The
numbers one hundred and upwards are all so used, as :
saikro, hazard, lakho, karoro. A similar idiom exists in nouns
denoting quantity, and in some nouns denoting time., as :
mano anaj "maunds of grain"; sero "seers of"; dhero
" heaps of " ; hafto " many weeks " ; barso guzar ga,e " years
passed away " Sal-ha sal, hazar -ha hazar or hazard hazar ;
karor-ha karof ; lakh-ha lakh are similar idioms. The -Jta is
the Pers. pi. Vide also Appendix A.
(i) — Adjectives agree with their substantives. There is,
however, an exception to this rule. If the substantive is an
object with ko, the adjective following it must be masculine
singular, as : gari ko khara karo " stop the carriage," but
gan khari karo. The particle ko destroys concord. Compare
L. 54 (d).
LESSON 33.
(a)— I require a pony. Mujhe ek tattu chahiye or
darkdr hai.
We want ten books like this. Ham logo ko das aim kitabe
chahiye(-).
1 Plural of the cardinal number bis. "A score " is 6w»», f.
LESSON 33.
123
You ought to have been a Turn ko sipalii hond chal
soldier. tha, or rhdhiye tha ki turn
sipahi hole.1
This is as it should be. Yu-hi chahiye.
Write an answer soon ; if you Jawab jald likho, warna mujh
don't (otherwise), I am with ko watil maujud samajhna.
you (i.e. look on me as
present with you there).
There were ten rants present. Das rani
The work of three men.
You ought not to have done
this.
We must arrange for this.
This is an important matter.
(or ram, not so
good) maujud thl.
Tin admiyo (or adml) ka kam.
Yih bat turn ko munasib na-
tht ; or yih bat turn ko chah-
iye na thi.
Is bat ka intizam karna chah-
iye.
Yih ban zururat kl bat hai
(or ban zaruri bat hai).
Turn ko kis chiz H hajat hai ?
Wuh admi gharib hai, muhtdj
hai.
Yih ghora gharib hai.
Of what are you in need ?
That man is poor, he is needy
(in want).
This horse is quiet.
He is in need of even his daily Rotl tak ka muhtdj * hai.
bread.
He has to go somewhere (lit. Us ko kaM jana hai.
there is for him the going
somewhere).
Hole Past Conditional tense.
Tak here is not a post-position ; vide Lesson 60 (6).
124
He will have to go, must go,
somewhere.
God gives us our daily bread.
I refuse to listen to such
things.
He has gone to prison (before
trial).
God grant you His grace, so
that you may obey your
parents.
They ought to be here by now.
Look after these things, take
care of them.
He managed this well.
Hold up, pull yourself to-
gether (to a person on trip-
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Us ko kohl jana hoga (or pare-
Khuda rozt deta hat.
Mai aisl bate nahl sunne ka
[*tj.
Wuh hajat ' me gar/a hai =
(kawalat).
Khuda turn ko is bat H rozt de
ki turn ma-bap ki farma-
bardan karo.
Un ko ab tak yaha a- jana chah-
iye tha.
In chtzo ko sambhalo.
Yih kam us ne khub sambhala.
Sambhlo.
Keep a civil tongue in your Zabdn sambhal-kar bolo.
head.
Pulling herself together she Us ne, sambhalkar, kaha ki-
said — .
The rain has stopped. Pant tham-gaya.
Hold this, keep it. Is ko thamo (or pafyo).
(b) — Idioms : —
It is spoken in everyday collo- Roz-marra * me bolte hai.
quial.
1 The origin of this curious but common idiom is obscure.
8 Roz-marra, adv. "daily," and subs, "colloquial speech."
LESSON 34
125
Keep the soup on the fire till
the liquid is reduced by a
fourth.
Can hearsay be equal to the
evidence of one's eyes ?
I felt intensely jealous.
To be faithless.
Shorbe ko itni der chulhe par
rakho ki chautha,l pam jal-
ja,e.
Kdno ' sum * bat alcho ' dekhi «
ke barabar ho-sakii hai ?
Men clihati par stip-sa phir-
gaya.
Tote 8 ki tarah &kh pherlena
(or badalnd).
LESSON 34.
(a) — Yahl (emphatic).
Wahl (emphatic).
Kohl.
In this very place.
In that very place.
Somewhere, anywhere ; also
I fear lest ; if ; ever ; far
more.
Aisa, * adj. and adv. (correl. is Thus, like this, such, so.
jaisa).
Aise, adv. Thus, so.
Jaisa, adj. and adv. (correl. As. such.
waisa).
Jaise, adv. As, such as.
Jitna, adj. (correl. utna so As much as.
much).
1 Se understood.
2 i.e. surii hu,l and dekhl hu.i.
3 Unlike other birds, a parrot that has escaped does not return to
its cage.
* For yih-aa, vide Lesson 28 (g).
126
HINDUSTANI MANUAL
Jitne, pi.
Na to (or no) — na.
Yd to (or yd) — yd.
Tdzi, m.
Jahdz, m.
Jahdzi, adj. and subs.
Itnd, H. (for things present).
Is qadr, H. P. (correl. jilnd).
Jitnd*, H. )
Jis qadr, H. P.
Utnd ~) (for things ~j
f/5 ?ac?r ) absent.) ^
Jo/is (correl. is wahti *).
JahS, kohl
Jidliar (correl. is udhar. thi-
ther).
Pahld, adj.
Pahle, adv.
Chain, m.
Khatra, m.
As many as.
Neither — nor.
Either — or.
Greyhound
Ship (of any kind).
Any passenger or official in
a ship; imported; in the
Punjab also an English
greyhound.
This much.
As much as.
That much.
The place where, when.
Wherever.
Whither.
First.
Firstly, at first.
Ease, comfort ; also now the
English word " chain." f.
Danger.
1 The Hindi so (correl. of jo) is now rare; but taisa (correl.
is obsolete.
2 In old Urdu tahafi was the correlative.
Khatre me dalna. tr.
, m.
,, f.
Chhari, f.
, f.
Chliarra, m.
#o/a, m.
£ofi; f.
Chhurd, in.
Chhuri, f.
Ja& (correl. ta& or <o).
Jo& kabJil.
Jab tab.
Lai, adj. and subs. m.
L'«/, m. subs.
Lai kurti, f .
Chaura. adj.
Chauraji, f.
Lamba.i, f.
Gahra, adj
LESSON 34. 127
To risk.
Colloquially a cock ; (tw wrtV-
iwf/ any bird).
Cock (domestic fowl).
Hen (domestic fowl).
A light walking-stick.
A long heavy stick used as a
weapon.
Small shot.
A large ball; a cannon ball.
A small ball ; a bullet ; a
pill.
A large knife with handle.
A small- or dinner -knife.
When.
Whenever.
Now and then
Red ; an amadavat.
Ruby.
British regiment.
Wide, broad.
Breadth.
Length.
Deep; the surface of the
water being far from the
ground -surf ace (of a well).
Depth.
128 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Aisa waisa. Middling, or less than middl-
ing, not up to much, so so.
Aisa taisa. Of bad character.
Sharm-gvh, f . The privy parts.
Kitne ko (or me) ? For how much, for what
price ?
Itne me For so much : also in the
meantime.
Jaha tahS. Everywhere ; also here and
there.
Yaha tak. Thus far ; to such a degree.
so, such a — .
LESSON 35
The Relative and Correlative.
(a)— Strictly speaking, there is no relative pronoun corres-
ponding to our "who. which, that." For example, "the
man is wise who speaks little," is expressed in Hindustani as
follows: — jo shakhs (land liai so1 (or wuh) kam bolfa lini ;
literally, " whatever man is wise, the same speaks littlo."
Here the word jo is called the relative, and so ' the corrdatire.
The correlative is often omitted Examples : —
That which you say is all true. Jo turn kahte ho (wuh) sach
hai.
Speak plainly whatever comes Jo kurlih (ki) tumh'ire. dil me
into your mind. awe (wuh) saf kaho.
1 So is practically obsolete in Urdu : wuh takes its place.
LESSON 35.
129
The man whom you saw in Jis shakhs ko turn ne kal sliahr
the city yesterday died this me dekhd thd, wuh dj fajr
morning. ko mar-gayd.
The letter which you wrote to Jo chitthi tumne mujhe likhi
me has not arrived. thi, wuh natil pahuchi.
Where there is a rose, there is Jaha gul hai, waha ' khar (bhi)
also a thorn. hai.
As you act, so will you expe- Jaisd karoge, waisd pd,oge.
rience.
As long as there is life, there Jab talak sas tab talak as.
is hope.
Jidhar turn ja,oge, udhar mat
bhi ja,ugd.
Jaisd ustdd waise hi slidgird
hoge.
Jitnd cJiahiye utnd le-lo.
Wherever you go, there will
I also go.
As the master, so will the
scholars be.
Take as much as you want.
The construction of the relatives and correlatives corres-
ponds, as one writer points out. to the construction "where
the bee sucks, there suck I."
(b) — There is another construction with the relative pro-
noun, which corresponds to the English, as : adm/i. jo (or
jo-ki) dana hai kam bolta hai ' the man who is wise speaks
little " ; or wuh ddmi jo (or jo-ki or ki 2) dana hai kam bolta hai
= jo ddmi ddnd hai wuh kam bolta hai. [Vide also L. 55 (a)].
The conjunction ki is often used alone for jo ki, ' vide ' L.
52 (e) (11).
1 In Forbes taha; now obsolete except in jaha taha " everywhere "
and " here and there."
2 This ki is merely the conjunction " that."
130 HINDUSTANI MANUAL
(c) — Aisa, jaisd. waisd, jitnd, utnd, itnd. and also the inter -
rogatives kaisd and kitna, are pronominal adjectives and
agree with the substantives to which they refer. They are
also adverbs. Aise and jaise are adverbs only, and indeclin-
able. As adverbs, either form aisd or aise. etc., can be used.
Vide also (/) and L. 55 (o), (3).
Remark. — In the Punjab sometimes aisa alone is used for aisa waisa^
as: wuh aisa admi hat "he is so-so, not much good "
(d) — The negative na repeated, means neither — nor, as :
wuh na hiltl hai, na dulti* "she neither moves nor stirs."
Idiomatically, however, the first na is often omitted, as : uskd
mdlik Zaid hai, na Umar ; balki mat9' "its owner is neither
Zaid nor Umar. but I."
The conjunction aur "and" is often prefixed to the
second na, as: na mai bolugd aur na turn "neither will I
speak nor will you."
(e) — (1) Yd "or," repeated, means either — or, as: yd to
apnd kdm kar, yd clialtd phirtd nazar d " either do your busi-
ness or be off (lit. or appear to my sight moving away)."
As with na, the conjunction aur is sometimes prefixed to
the second yd, as : yd " Khwdb o ghaydl " par ho aur yd " Urdu
Roz-marra " "read either the Khivdb o Khaydl or the Urdu
Roz-marro " ; but it is better to omit the aur.
(2) Ya — ya is also idiomatically used for "whereas" (halan-ki in
good Urdu), i.e. it expresses great contrast, as : ya (to) pahle tAgdasti
thl, ya ab chain hi chain hai=" at first I was poor, whereas now I live
in nothing but luxury." Compare the use of kahd and kab, L. 38 (d)
and (e), and aur, L. 43 (b).
1 Hai is of course understood after dulti.
2 Hu understood after mat.
LESSON 35.
131
(/) Kya — kya means whether — or (inclusive), as: kya amir kya faqlr
" whether rich or poor, high and low."
Khwah — khwah and Chahe — cJiahe ditto (but exclusive).
(g) " When", expressing a future condition, is in English
often followed by the Present Tense, but in Hindustani the
Aorist or Future is necessary, as : " When (or if) he comes,
tell me " jab wuh djd,e (not d-jd,egd) mujhe khabar ' dend.
But if the first verb is future the second must be future ;
vide Lesson 61 (b).
(h) — So also means "therefore, so," as: turn ne waha jane ke liye
man' kiya tha so mal waha nahl ja,uga. The correlative so is seldom
used in modern Urdu ; but as jo ho, ho for " happen what may " would
sound ill, jo ho, so ho is used.
(i) — He delights in danger.
This is the sais whose pony
was here yesterday (lit.
what pony was here yester-
day, its sais is this).
I have the pencil you had.
Jis kdm me khatra hai wuhl
(or wuh, or so) usko pa-sand
hai.
Yih wuhl sd,is hai jiskd
tattu kal yaJifi 'thd (or jo
tattu kal yaha thd. uskd
sd,is yih hai) .
Mere pds wuh pinsil hai jo
tumhdre pd-s thi.
Ts it in the same spot it was Kya wahl hai jaha kal thd ?
in yesterday ?
Every one eats the fruits of Jis ne jaisd kiyd waisd pdyd.
his own actions.
Is this a cock or a hen ? Yih murghd a hai yd murght ?
He has either a cock or a hen. Us ke pds yd to s murgfed hai,
yd murghi.
1 But 706 wuh a-ja,ega mal khabar duga; if the apodosis is an
Imperative, the Aorist is used in the protasis.
2 Colloquial, ride L. 34 (a). 9 Or omit to.
132
HINDUSTAN r MANUAL.
It is neither a cock nor a hen,
it is a pigeon.
I have neither your walking
stick nor your brother's.
It is as far from here as my
house.
Might is right.
Why he's here !
As many saddles as are here.
As many books as are there.
" What are you doing ? "
" Nothing." (lit. I am seat-
ed thus, i.e. as you see.)
Have you a greyhound like
this?
He has a bull-terrier just like
this.
He has an English greyhound
exactly like that.
It is not as large as the Cap-
tain Sahib's horse.
My chudder is not as long and
as wide as this one.
You will get this, when you
come here.
He comes to see me now and
then.
A/a murghfl, hai na murgtd,
kabutar hai.
Mere pas na to tumhdrl chhari
hai na tumhdre bhd.l ki.
Itnl dur hai jitnl dur merd
ghar hai.
Jis kl lathi us kl bhals.
Wuh to yihl (emphatic of
yaha) hai.
Itne zin jitne yaha Jial.
Utrii kitdbe jitrii waha hai.
" Kyd karte ho?". " Aim
hi baithd [hu,d] hu."
Tumhare pas aisd tdzl Icutta
hai (jaisd yih hai) ?
Us ke pas aisd hi bul-dak '
hai.
Uske pas waisd hi jahdzl hai
jaisd (ki) wuh hai.
Wuh itnd bard nahl hai jitnd
ki Kaptdn Sahib kd ghord.
Men chddar itnl Iambi '2 chaurl
nahl jitnl yih hai
Jab turn yaha hoge (tab) tumkn
yih chlz milegl.s
Jab tab mere pas did' hai.
Bull kutta " bull-dog" ; sahib logd Jca kutta " fox-terrier."
Note the omission of aur. 3 Vide (g), and note 1, p. 131.
LESSON 36.
133
Come to see me whenever
you get leisure ; but He comes
to see me whenever he gets
leisure.
God is everywhere.
Jab kabht jursat mile mujhse
milna ; but jab kabhi fursat
miltl hai l wuh mujhse
milta hai.1
Khuda jaW, taha hazir hai.
The maidan is quite open, ex- Maiddn bi'l-kul saf hai lekin
cept that here and there yaha waha darakht hai.
there are trees.
The camel is an ungainly Ut bhaddd janwar hai.
beast.
As quickly as possible. Jaha tak jald mumkin ho ; or
jaha tak jald ho -sake
He is such a fool that he does Wuh yaha tak be-wuquf hai
not even know how to feed ki khana khana bhl nahl
himself ; he is an utter ass. janta ; wuh bilkul gadha hai.
Neither is this right nor that. Na yih durust hai na wuh^
Hang him ! Us par tin harf.s
Hang you and your master Turn par aur tumhdre ustad
too. par bhl tin harf.
(j) — Aur mera yih hai tha ki kato * to badan me lohu nah~i
"and such was my state that had you cut me you would
have found no blood ( = my blood was frozen from fear)."
Here the demonstrative yih equals aisa or waisa.
LESSON 36.
(a) — The phraseology of Eastern languages is dramatic.
When reporting the words of a third person, the direct nar-
1 Vide(g), and note 1, p. 131.
2 Afo yih na wuh durust hai is bad Urdu.
3 i.e. lam, 'ayn, nun.
* Direction narration.
134
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(b)— Chhutna, intr.
ration is generally used, i.e. that pronoun is used which the
person himself made use of. This peculiarity alters the
structure of a Hindustani sentence compared with the Eng-
lish. For example : " The prisoner told me that he would
kill Shaikh Hasan if he saw him " qaidt ne mujh-se kaJid ki,
raal Shaikh Hasan ko mdr-ddlugd agar usko dekhu or dekhfigd ;
literally, "the prisoner said to me thus. '/ will kill Shaikh
Hasan if I see him."
To be set free, liberated ; to
be let go; be loose; be
omitted ; to go off (of a
gun) ; be effaced (of spots) ;
to spout ; to start ; to run
(of colour) ; to be left be-
hind; be fired (fire- works,
gun).
To leave behind ; let go ; set
free ; fire a gun, etc. ; give
up a work ; pardon, etc.
To break wind.
Chhornd (tr. of chhutna)
Hawd chhutna,
chhofnd, tr.
Chhor or chhorke.
intr.,
Faunvdra, m.
Toil,* f.
Totd, m.
Qaidi, m.
Qaid-khdna, Jel-khdna. m.
Qaid karnd. tr.
Except; omitting; not men-
tioning.
A fountain.
Parroquet (hen).
Do. (cock).
Prisoner.
Prison.
To imprison.
But jS5if.i or tutl is the Rose-finch (a cape bird).
LESSON 36.
135
Imlikan, m.
Kho-jdnd, intr.
Khona, tr.
Khoya-jana, pass.
Chiragh, m.
Trial; examination; test.
To be lost.
To lose.
To be lost.
Properly a native lamp ; often
used for any light.
English lamp.
Cold ; cool.
Cool medicinal drink.
Cold (opp. to heat) ; coolness
To cool ; to put out a lamp.
To put out a lamp.
Fear.
To fear.
Fear.
Lamp, m.
Thanda, adj.
Thanda j,, f.
Thandak, f .
Thanda karnd, tr.
Gul karnd. tr.
Dar, m.
Darnd (kisl se), intr.
Khauf, m.
Aisd na-ho, H. )
Mabddd, P. 5
(c) — Verbs of seeing, asking, replying, remonstrating, thinking,
dreaming, hearing, hoping, inferring, wishing, seeming, implying,
intending, and fearing, are usually followed by the direct narration.
(d) — The indirect narration, however, is also used occasion-
ally, as : "Tell him I am ill," us se kah-do ki mat bimar hu ;
or direct, us se kah-do ki sahib bimar hai.
Remark. — (1) It will be seen that sometimes a sentence may
mean two different things according to whether the hearer
takes it as direct or indirect narration.
(e)—Kyukar nahl (neg.) is used in indirect questions, or in direct
questions signifying an affirmative , as: mal dekhuga ki wuh kyukar
nahi a,egl. Wuh kyukar nahl a,ega=" of course he'll como."
May it not be so ; lest.
136 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Kyukar (aff.) in direct or indirect questions signifies negation;
wuh kyukar a,ega ?=•" he won't come," or " in what manner ? " ; mal
dekhuga ki wuh kyukar a,ega=" you say" he'll come but / say no." It
also signifies affirmation, as: *Tum jante ho ki wuh kyukar a.ega "do
you know how he will come (i.e. by* train or on foot etc.) ? "
(/) — After verbs of telling, or ordering, it is usual to use
the indirect narration as : sd,is ko ' kali-do ki yaJid, awe,
" tell the sais to come here (lit. tell the sais that he should
come here — to me)." Sa,is ko ' kah-do ki yaha a.o would
rarely be used and might mean '; tell the sais to come to you," 'z
(g) — If a pronoun gives rise to ambiguity, it is better to
substitute a proper name ; u# ne kahd ki turn blmdr ho might
mean that either the speaker or the addressee was ill.
(h) — The Transitive verb often indicates that the action was
done on purpose, the Intransitive by accident ; vide examples
in L. 37. The Passive also (vide Lesson 47) has generally the
first signification.
(i) — The Passive without an agent also often signifies im-
possibility, as : qismat se lafd nahl, jata, " none can fight
against Fate." Vide L. 47 (</).
(;') — The parrot escaped Toll Jidth se chhut-ga.t (not
from my grasp. bach-ga,i).K
The horse got loose (or is Ghora chhut-gayd.
loose).
The prisoner has escaped and Qaidt nikal-bMga.
absconded.
The prisoner was released. Qaidt chhut-gayd.
He escaped from the Police. Polis ke hath se chhut-gayd.
1 Ko as it is an order, vide Lesson 26 (c).
* A direct narration sometimes occurs within a direct narration.
S Bachna is to escape from a threatened evil.
LESSON 37.
137
The prisoner has been released Qaidi jel-khdne se chhut-gayd.
from jail.
The train had just started. -Eel chhut-ga,i thi.
The fountain is playing. Fawwdra chhut-rahd hai.
The fireworks have begun (or Atash-bdzi chhut-rahl hai (or
are going on).
He is very free with his tongue.
He has taken to beating one
(or to beating people) for
the slightest thing ; is free
with his hands.
He has lost heart, hope, about Is imtihdn se uska dil chhut-
chhon-jd-rahi hai).
Us kd muh bahut chhut-gaya
hai.
Us ka hath bahut chhut-gaya
hai.
this examination
gay a.
LESSON 37.
(a) — I left my book at home Ham ne aprii kitdb ko ghar me
on purpose. (or 'ghar par) chhord.
I left my book at home by Kitab ghar me (or ghar par]
accident ; I forgot it. chhut-ga.i (or rah-ga.i).
He lost his book on purpose. Us ne kitab ko kho-diyd.
He lost his book by accident. Us ki kitab khoyl-ga,t.
He put out the lamp (espe- Chiragji ko thanda kar-diya.
cially means on purpose).
The lamp went out. Chiragh. thanda ho-gayd.
He lives in the next house but Ek ghar chhor-ke dusre ghar.
one. me rahtd hai ( = yaha se fisre
ghar me rahtd hai).
I wanted to go out. Mai ne chdhd ki " bdhir jd,u."
138
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
He wanted (or tried) to clear
off with his life.
I wished never to leave him
again.
I asked him in reply what
business that was of his.
It is now proposed to go to
Delhi.
Tell them that what I (the
writer) told you (i.e. either
the addressee or a third per-
son) was wrong.
I said to myself that you (Fir-
man Ali) would never agree
to this.
I feared 1 might be late.
Us ne chdhd ki "apnl1 jan
leke bhdg-jd.u" (or indirect
Merd ji chdhd* ki phir us se
kabhi judd na-hu.
Mai ne jawdb diyd ki ''tumhdri
is se kyd gharaz (hai) ? "
Ab tajiriz hai ki " DilK
Un se yih kah-do ki wuh bat
jo mai ne* turn se kahi tlii
yhalat hai.
Mai ne kahd ki Farmdn ' Alt
qabul nahl karne kd ; or
mat ne tumhdn nisbat kaha
ki wuh nahl qubul karne kd ;
or mal ne tumhdrd zikr
kiyd ki turn (F. A.) qabul
nahl karne ke.
Mujhe dar thd ki ' mai ' let '
na-ho jd,u"6 (in Panjab
pachhar-jd,u) ; or mai " let "
ho-jd,ugd* (\vithout na in
the future).
1 Omit apnl and the meaning is " to go off in haste."
2 Note omission of ne: vide " Stumbling Blocks," p. 3.
3 Ja.iye Respect., or Impers Imper. " let us (or you) go."
* Here, for mal ne, the writer's name (Ohalib ne) could be substi-
tuted.
6 Direct narration. « Indirect narration.
LESSON 37.
139
Mujhe khauf thd aisa na-ho
ki wuh na-d,e.
Mujhe khauf thd ki wuh na-d-
jd.e.1
" Fd " ho- jane se fi na-chhoro.
I feared he would not come
(I wanted him to come and
was expecting him).
I feared he would come (I
didn't want him to come).
Don't be disheartened at
failing in your examina-
tion.
But I am already disheart- Herd dil to chhut-chukd hai.
ened.
Why did you drop the bottle Botal ko kyu girdyd ?
or why did you knock it
down on purpose ?
(6) — Idioms : —
You have merely to ask for Faqat magne ki der hai.
it to get it (i.e. in obtain-
ing it there will be only
the delay of saying the
words).
There was a great robbery in
my house ; everything was
swept clean away.
The city is now desolate.
This has caught my fancy.
Mere yaha sakht dakaitl
hu,i ; sdre gftar me j/idru
phir-ga.i.
Us shahr me ab khdk urti hai.
Yih (chlz) men nazar me khub
1 A-jana is generally " to come unexpectedly."
2 Khub-jana is used metaphorically only for to " go deep into,"
of pleasant things : literally .and also for unpleasant things chubhna
" to prick,. pierce, etc." is used.
140
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
This has fascinated me and I
must buy it.
He has become a great favour-
ite with the -king.
The brick houses there can
be counted (they are so
few).
You have no knowledge of it
at all.
He's never seen (or experi-
enced) such a thing; lit.
why, his father even can't
have seen it in a dream.
How can I thank him suffi-
ciently ?
I have sworn not to go there.
1 have sworn to go there.
Yih chiz men nazar par
charh-ga,l hai.
Wuh Bddsftdh kl luizar pai
charh-gayd.
Khishti ' makdn yintl Av IKU
Tere firishto1 ko bhi khabar
nahl.
Us ke bap ne to ylh khwdb
me bhl na-dekhd hogd.
Mai us kd shukr kis muh se
(add) karu ?
Mai ne waha jane H qasam
khd,i hai.
Mai ne waha jdne ke liye
qasam khdj hai.
Merd kdm chal-gayd
I have got what I wanted, I
have been successful.
He swallowed what I told Merd fiqra us par chal-gayd.
him.
(c) — Dur is used when there is no substantive, as : bahut
dur hai ; otherwise the adjective is dur M, as : dur kd mulk
"a distant, far-off, country."
' Sbisht, f., is a kiln-burnt, not a sun-dried, brick.
2 Every man has two recording angels, one behind each shoulder :
that on the right, records his good deeds ; that on the left, his bad.
LESSON 38.
141
LESSON 38.
(a) — Banna, intr.
Banana, tr.
Banwana, caus.
Banawat, f.
I shara, m.
To be made ; repaired ; pre-
pared ; to become ; become
like ; play the part of ; to
prosper ; to be affected ;
etc.
To make, etc. ; to make a
fool of.
To cause to be made ; to order
to be made, repaired, etc.
Make ; sham ; contrivance.
Sign, signal ; hint ; a refer-
ence to.
I shara karna (kisi ki taraf or To point out ; beckon.
kisi ko). tr.
1 shara dena, tr.
Kahl.
Kohl nahl.
Jaha kohl.
Jo koji.
Jo kuchh (correl so. or wuh,
vide Lesson 35) .
Khushk, adj.
Khushki, f.
Malik, com. gen.
Milk, L
To signal.
Somewhere, anywhere : also
I fear lest ; if. should ; far
more.
Nowhere.
Wherever.
Whoever.
Whatever.
Dry ; withered.
Dryness, khushki se by land (as
opposed to tart se by water).
Master, owner.
Property ; landed property.
142 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Patd, m. Trace ; address ; sign.
Pattd, m. Leaf (of tree) ; also a single
playing card.
Sfidh, m. The Shah of Persia ; the king
at chess ; a hereditary
faqir ; a beggar.
SJtah-zdda, m. Prince.
Shdh-zddi, m. Princess.
Sakib-zada, m. A son of any one entitled to
the address dp.
(b) — When jab tak means " until " or yaha tak ki, it re-
quires a negative verb, but when it means " whilst," an
affirmative verb, as : yaha thahro jab tak ( = yahil tak ki) mat
na-d,u " stay here till I return, or as long as I do not return " ;
but jab tak wuh yaha rahd mal bhl yaha raJia " I remained
whilst, or as long as, he remained." Violations of this rule
should not be imitated. Vide also L. 61 (b).
YaJiti tak ki, itself, however, does not admit of a negative,
as : yaha thahre raho yaha tak ki mat wdpas d,u.
(c) — A Transitive Infinitive can be substituted for a Pas-
sive or for an Intransitive Infinitive, as : us ke mdrne ke liye
kukm hu,d "an order was given for killing him," or its ke
mare-jane ' ke liye kukm hu,d an order was issued for his
being killed." Vide L. 54 (a) (3).
Regard must, however, be paid to the logical subjects.
Thus, Avadh ke chhin-jdne par Wdjid 'AU Shah Mityd Burj
me rahne lage "after the annexation of Oudh (by the Eng-
lish) Wajid AH Shah took up his abode at Mityd Burj";
Mara-jana, pass., " to be killed," vide Leaaon 47 (a).
LESSON 38.
143
but Avadh ke chhin-lene par Sarkar ne us par apna qabza kar
liyd. If a Transitive Infinitive were used in the first example,
it would refer to the subject Wajid Ali Shah.
(d) — Kahd, idiomatically expresses great contrast or differ-
ence, as : kaha mm, kaha ap? = there is all the difference be-
tween Your Honour and me (lit. " where am I and where is
Your Honour ? ") ; kahM wuh dosfi thl aur kaJiM ab yih dush-
mami. "once there was such friendship, now there is this
enmity." Compare ya-ya L. 35 (e) (2).
(e) — Note the following similar signification of kab ; mat
ne tumhe yih kam karne ko kab kahd thd aur turn ne kab kiya,
" how long ago did I order you to do this and when did you
carry out the order ? " ( = either you delayed doing it, or did
it at an unsuitable time).
(/) — Sahib-zadi, f.
Banda, m.
Haram-zada, adj.
Pir, m.
Pir-zada.
Palanq, m.
Char-pd,i, f.
Dunya, f .
Feminine of Sahib-zada.
Slave.
Illegitimate, base-born; a
rascal (in abuse).
A religious teacher, either
living ordinarily, or at a
shrine
The son of a pir.
Any bedstead.
Any bedstead, but specially
a wooden one.
The present world ; the
earth ; the people of the
earth ; a whole world ;
multitude ; worldly bless-
ings; wealth.
144 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Dunyd-ddr, adj. Worldly, rich, a mammonist.
Dunyd-ddn. Wealth, worldliucss.
Dunyd-talab,a,dj . { Seeking after this world, am -
Dunyd-talabi,1 subs. bitious.
Ardm-talab, P. A. )
adj. Loving ease ; ease-loving.
Sukh-wdr H.
Sukh, H., m. Pleasure; happiness ; welfare :
ease.
Dukh, H.. m. Pain: misery; grief; hard-
ship, etc
Marammat-talab, adj. In need of repairs.
LESSON 39.
(a) — Send this to be repaired. Is ko banne (or bandne) ko do.
Where are such things made ? Yih kah% bantd hai ?
Mochi, make me a pair of Mocht, hamare waste ek jon
boots. juti band,o.
Bearer, order me this. Berd: hamare waste aist chiz
banwd,o.
It is not anywhere ; I cannot Kahl nahl hai.
find it.
It must be somewhere or Kahl na kohl to hogd.
other.
He is very affected ; gives W uh bahut bantd hai.
himself airs.
l In such compound nouns, the gender is usually that of the final
noun : thus aram is masculine, but aram-tfilabl is feminine. Vide
L. 56 (fe).
LESSON 39.
145
Ah, you are making a fool of
me.
Wherever his master is, there
will this dog be also.
I could not find it, there was
no trace of it.
I am in one place, you are in
another.
There she is seated, tricked
out in all her finery !
We won't get on together, he
and I won't hit it off.
This flower is dead.
He pointed out the false
(made-up) prince.
This is a made-up story.
Wherever it may be, it cer-
tainly is not here (lit. it
may be anywhere, here
however it is not) .
To whomsoever this mare
belongs she is not up to
much.
This is my son.
Oh ! turn mujhe bandte ho.
JaJtM kahl malik Jin wahl yih
kuttd bM hogd.
Kuctih pat a na-thd (or na-
mild).
Mai kahl, turn kahl.
Wuh ban-than-kar ' baithl hai.
Meri* us se na-banegi.
Yih phul khushk ho-gayd (not
mar -gay a) .
Us ne bane hu,e shdhzdde ko
(or kl taraf) ishdra kiyd.
Yih bandwafi bat hai.
Kohl ho, yaha to nahl hai.
Yih ghon kisl ki ho (or jis
kisi ki ho) achchhi nahl hai.
Yih banda-zdda hai (polite).
1 Thanna, meaningless appositive : has no meaning by itself.
2 Agrees with bat understood. Vide L. 16 (d) note 1. The first
person more worthy than the second, etc.
10
146
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Is this«your son ?
Boys ! if your father comes
(unexpectedly) what will
you do ?
1 hope you won't forget ?
(b) — Idioms : —
What comparison is there be-
tween Raja Bhoj and
Ganga the oil-man ? (i.e.
there is a vast difference
between them).
I rated him, abused ' him,
soundly.
Once ten needy persons were
fed by my house whereas
now I myself am in need
of food.
You do this ? you can't pos-
sibly do this.
Half and half.
Actual cost or expenses
What is left over ; also profit.
From the light of the fireworks
the night was as day, vied
with the day.
Accumulation of back pay,
or arrears due.
Yih ap ka sahib -zada hai ?
(polite).
Ay bachcho! kohl tumhara
bap a-ja,e to turn kya
karoge ?
(Mujhedar hai) kalfi turn bhul
na-ja,o.
Kaha Raja Bhoj aur kaha
OangateR? (pro verb).
M ai ne usko sakht sust ' aur
hura bhald kaha.
Kaha mere, ghar se das muhtaj
khdna pate the, kaha ab
khud mujhe khane ko nahl
miltd.
Turn kaha aur yih bat kahn '
Adho adh.
Ldgat, f. (from lagna).
Bachat, f.
Atash-bazi se rat ne din ka
samna kiya.
Charhd hu,a rupiya.
Not filthy abuse.
LESSON 40.
147
If you won't give me more, Ziyada nahl, to das hi rupiya
at least give me tea rupees. do.
I will give you Rs. 50 and Tumko ziydda nahl, pachas
not more. rupiya dagd.
To demolish utterly (of build- It se it bajdnd.
ings, cities).
He has cut himself off from Wuh qaum se phir-gayd.
his people.
The candle is burning dimly, tiliarri udds jalfi Imi (lit.
sadly).
LESSON 40.
(a) — CJialna, intr.
Sdth cJialnd, intr.
Chaldna, tr.
Kdtnd, tr.
Katania, tr.
Kar-khdna, ni.
Kdfi, adj.
Kifdyat, L
Kijdyat me.
To start, to move get in mo-
tion ; come along with ; to
go off (of gun. rifle) ; to be
current (of money).
To accompany.
To make to start or move ;
to let off a gun or rifle.
To cut with a knife, sword,
etc. ; to bite ; sting.
To cut with scissors ; also to
cut in slices.
Factory, warehouse, work-
shop.
Sufficient.
Sufficiency, economy.
At a cheap rate or cost.
148
Kasrat, f .
Mashq, f ; isti'rndl,
Paidd hond, intr.
Bahadur, adj.
Baliadun, f
Lain bahdduri, f .
Banduq, f.
tfa/o/, f.
Banduq Mejar.
Bazar Kaplan .
Barn-polls (Eiig.)
Khulnd, intr.
KJwlnd, tr.
4fotf, f .
Hajdmat, f.
Hajjdm, A.; nd,i,1
Ddrhi, f .
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
H.
Abundance; practice (in
Panj.).
Practice.
To be born ; produced ; ob-
tained ; appear ; grow up.
Brave ; after a noun a term
of respect = Honourable.
Courage ; also the order of
merit.
Good conduct medal.
Gun or rifle.
Rifle.
D. A. A. G. for Musketry.
Cantonment Magistrate.
Provost police ; sanitary
police ; also a public latrine
in a city.
To be opened ; loosened ; re-
vealed ; disclosed ; un-
locked ; uncovered.
To open, etc.
Sound of any footfall.
Barber ing of any kind.
Barber.
Beard and whiskers.
1 Hindus also u
barber is addressed
se the word napi; in Calcutta napit. A Muslim
LESSON 40. 149
Mundna, tr. To shave (object of verb, the
chin, or head or any part
of the person).
Khatka, m. A slight noise (as in the dark.
of stealthy movement,
etc.) ; also the sound of
foot-steps; suspicion; mis-
giving ; fear.
Suraj, m. The sun.
(6) — (1) Chalna amongst its other meanings signifies to
'"' come along with " ; jdnd is "to go " and cliala-jana is "to
go away": mere sath chalo (not a,o or ja,o] "come along
with me," but if beckoning to a person behind, mere sath d,o
might be used. Vide also L. 63 (d). [For chale-jdna, ' vide '
Stumbling Blocks, p. 85].
(2) The Past Tense of chalna added to the root of another verb
signifies " to be on the point of doing," as : wuh ab bol-chala " he is just
going to speak." The Perf. and Plup. added to the Present Participle
signify commencement, as: wuh bolta chala Jtai "he has just com-
menced (started) speaking." But added to a root its signification is as
follows: wuh yih karri slkh-chala hai, "he has nearly finished mas-
tering this business " ; kitab ko parh-chala hai, " he has nearly finished
the book."
(3) Idiomatically the Preterite of chalna is used for the Present, as:
mal ab chala phir kisl dusre waqt a-ja,uga " I'll go now and come again
some other time.
(c) — (1) If a pronoun or a subject has been once men-
tioned., it is better not to repeat it in the same sentence,
unless there has been a change of subject, as : mm waha
gay a aur jab us se muldqdt hu,l to tumhara paigham us se kah-
diya " I went there and when (1) called on him (1) told him
your message."
150 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(2) Note the omission of the pronoun in the Urdu of the
following : — " Having caught the thief they took him to the
police station " chor ko pakar-kar [usko '] thane me le-ga,e ;
"it is my custom to rise at six every day" 'men 'ddat yih
hai ki [mat '] roz svbh ko chha baje so-kar uthtd hU, lit. " it
is my habit that (1) rise at six daily." The pronouns must
here be omitted as the object and subject are in each case
obvious from the context.
(d) — Note the use of me and se in the following : —
Kamar me kamar-band hai " a kamar-band round his
waist " ; ungli me angutht " a ring on his finger " ; gilds me
pdm bhar-do "fill the glass with water"; pdm dudh me (or
se, or ke sdth, but better me) mild,o "mix the water with the
milk " ; dol ko rassi me (or se) badho " fasten the bucket to
the rope."
(e) — He gave him this as a t/*K bahddurl dekh-kar* i/ih
reward for his bravery. in' am diyd.
LESSON 41.
(a) — The sepoy fired (on pur- Sipdhi ne goll chald.i.
pose).
The rifle went off suddenly. Rafal (or goli) rhal-pari
A thriving business. Chaltd kdr-khdna.
He became king (by force). W uh bddshdh ban-baithd.
This will do ; I can manage Is se merd kdm nikalegd (or
with this. chalegd).
This is sufficient. Yih kdfi hai.
1 It would be quite contrary to idiom to insert these pronouns.
2 Bahaduri ke waste is Sahib's Hindustani.
LESSON 41
151
Do you prefer walking or
riding ?
I wake up very early (habitu-
ally).
When I opened my eyes (or
when I woke up), what did '
I see but that a woman was
sitting by my bedside.
1 heard you ; heard what you
said.
I heard you come in last
night.
I heard him coming, heard
his foot-steps.
Barber me (i.e. shave me, or
cut my hair, nails, corns).
Cut my hair.
Shave me.
Lathis [or swords, etc., etc.]
began to fly.
My influence was nil.
The sun is far larger than the
earth.
Paidal chalnd pasand hai yd
(ki) ghore par sawdr hond.
Merl alch bahut sawere khultl
hai.
Jab mal ne akhe IchoU kyd
dekhtd hu ' ki ek 'aurat
mere palang ke pas baitht
hai.
Mai ne tumhdri bat (not turn
ko) sum.
Mujhe, rat, tumhdre dne ki
dhat miU thi.
Mai ne uski dhat sunl (or
mal ne us ko ate sund1).
Hamdri hajdmat karo.
Hamdre bdl kdto (or tardsJio).
Hamdri ddrhl (not ham ko)
mundo.
Un-ke-dpas-ml, 8 lathi [or
talwdr, etc.. etc.] chdR.
Merl us ke sdmne (ek) na-
chaK*
Dunyd se suraj kahi bard hai.
1 In Urdu, the historical or dramatic present is used. .
2 The latter may also mean " I heard the news of his coming."
3 — ke " on account of apas mi."
* Bat understood.
152
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(b) — Idioms : —
He has not come but he's
about to come.
If such a thing is to be had
anywhere, it is in Calcutta.
If he comes, well and good ;
if not, I'll have him brought
by force.
He does nothing but loaf
about the city.
About one o'clock p.m.
Aya to nahl, magar amad
amad hai.
Yih chlz Kalkatte me mile
to mile, warna aur kahl na-
milegi.
Agar aya (to) aya, warna
pakarwa-maga tiga.
Wuh kuchh kam nahl karta ;
dinbhar shahr ki galiya aur
safake napta phirta hai.
Do pahar dhale.1
LESSON 42.
Pighalnd, intr.
Ghulna, intr.
Galna, intr.
Pahinnd, tr.
Ghari lagana.
To be melted (fused) by heat.
To be dissolved in water, be-
come mixed with; met. to
become thin, waste auay
(of the body).
To be cooked till soft, be
wasted a,w&y (of the body) ;
to be decayed or perished.
To wear cut garments, boots,
hats, ornaments.
To wear a watch.
Dhalna " to decline" (here of the sun after midday).
LESSON 42.
153
Orhna, tr.
Orhna, subs., m.
Samana: intr.
Shauq, m.
Shauqin, adj.
Muqaddama, m.
Guzara, m.
Guzare kl kishtl.
SJiakk, m.
Shubha, m.
Shakki, adj.
Kam-chor.
Ji churana.
To wear a sheet, shawl, etc. ;
to cover oneself with a
sheet.
Covering.
To be contained; to be able
to enter.
Desire ; longing ; hobby ;
keenness ; custom (rare).
Fond of ; keen on.
Lawsuit ; preface to a book
or to any matter ; (lit.
means " something placed
before ").
Fish ; a fish-shaped pendant
worn by women in the ear ;
a " fish-insect " ; a martin-
gale-stop on reins.
Subsisting ; living with.
Ferry-boat.
Doubt (and sometimes sus-
picion) .
Suspicion (and sometimes
doubt).
Suspicious, disbelieving ; also
overscrupulous and faddy
in religion or health.
Shirker of .his work; 'skrim-
shanker.'
To shirk work (of men or
horses, etc.).
154 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Nasha, m. Intoxication (real or met.).
Mast. adj. Drunk; must (of elephants,
camels) ; in rut ; lascivi-
ous ; wanton.
Bad-mast, adj. Dead -drunk.
Mai-mast. Purse-proud.
Mastl, f. Drunkenness, etc.. etc., vide
"mast"
Mazmun. m. Contents of a letter or book ;
subject matter ; also pur-
port.
Matlab, in. Object, intention, meaning,
explanation.
M attain, adj. Selfish.
Tambaku, m. Tobacco, especially country
tobacco.
Asl, f . ; and adj. Root ; origin ; pure ; genuine ;
real.
Aslt, adj. Original, genuine.
NaqU. adj. Copied, i.e. forged, or not
original.
Asil, adj. and subs. Of pure breed; also a maid-
servant.
Astl murgjhfi, m. Game-cock.
Asl me, adv. Tn reality
Ihsan, m. Favour, doing good to.
Ihsan manna. To acknowledge benefits re-
ceived ; be grateful to.
LESSON 43.
155
Ihsdn charJtdnd or rakhna.
Ihsdn jatand.
Ihsan-mand, adj.
Ihsdn-mandi. f.
Jatand or jatldnd, tr.
Thaharnd, intr.
To place a person forcibly
under an obligation.
To remind one of benefits
conferred, cast them in a
person's teeth.
Thankful, grateful.
Thankfulness.
To caution ; make a show of.
To be fixed; decided on; to
be stopped ; stay ; rest ;
pause ; wait ; last ; endure ;
turn out : prove.
LESSON 43.
(a) — The negative na at the end of a sentence shows that
an affirmative answer is expected to a question, as : mat ne
kukm diyd thd.na ? " I gave the order, didn't I ? "
(6)— (1) Like kahti and yd [vide L. 35 (e) (2), and L. 38
(d)], the conjunction aur idiomatically expresses contrast or
surprise, as : merd beta aur chon ? " my son and (capable of)
theft ? "
(2) It also expresses the simultaneous or nearly simulta-
neous occurrence of action, as : turn ne mirch khd,i ' aur btmdr
hu,e l "as soon as you eat pepper you get ill."
(3) Note these idioms : phir mat hu aur turn ho " then I will settle
accounts with you (threat)"; turn jano (aur) tumhara kam jane "I
will have nothing further to do with you (or it)."
Preterite for Present.
156 HINDUSTANI MANUA1
(c) — He is a keen fisherman.
Us ko machhti ke shikar kd
bard shauq hai.
Fuldne Sahib bhi shauqin hm.
Such and such a Sahib too
is keen.
What is your favorite occu- Turn ko kis bat kd ziydda shauq
pation ? hai ?
I can manage, get along with, Is se merd guzdra ho-mkta, hai .
this.
I suspect that sepoy of theft. Mujhe us sipdhl par (or H
torn/) chon ka shubha hai.
Wuh jawdn nashe me hai, or
us jawan ko nasha hai.
Khatt ka kyd mazmun hai ?
Wuh bara matlabi ddrni hai.
Mujhe tambdku se shauq nahl.
Yih larka bara shauqin hai.
That young fellow is drunk.
What does he write about ?
He is very selfish.
I do not smoke.
This boy is very particular
about his dress ; also he is
studious.
I can't get along on ten
rupees a month.
Das rupiya mahine me mera
guzdra nahl hotd hai.
I cannot stay in your Honour's Ap ke sdth merd guzdra nahl
service.
Manage with this somehow.
I am very much obliged to
you.
ho-saktd.
Is se kist tarah guzdra karo.
Mai dp kd bahut bahut shuk-
riya add kartd hu = mat dp
kd bahut mamnun hu (ra-
ther highflown) .
I am very much obliged to Ap kd 6am ihsdn hai (com-
vou.
mon)
LESSON 43. 157
He makes a great show of his Wuh mujhe, apni dosti jatdtd
friendship to me. hai.
Go ; the Devil take you. Jd,o : Shaitian ke hawale ' (ho).
Your children are all well, are Tumhare bal-bachche sab ach-
they not ? chhe hai, na ?
Your father dead and I not Tumhdra bdp mar-gayd aur
even hear of it ? mujhe khabar tak nahl ?
I offended with you ? Turn se aur ranj ?
You offended with me ? Turn aur ranj ?
(d) — Idioms : —
How shall I address him (in Us ko Munshi, Mir, Shaikh.
writing) ; as Munshi, Mir, Khwaja — kya karke likhu ?
Shaikh, or Khwaja ? (or — ( — kyd karke pukdru) ?
how shall I address him in
speaking ?)
To retire from military ser- Kamar kholnd.
vice.
Please let me take my small Mihrbdni karke ek ser dtdbakh-
pension. shiye.
This happened before I can Yih bate mere hosh se pahle ki
remember. hai,.
To ape a European (in dress. Sdhibi karnd.
speech, etc.) ; be imperious.
From this it may be inferred Is se yih bat nikalti hai (or
that — . tapaktl *hai) ki — .
1 Ml understood.
'2 Tapakna " to drip from the roof; to trickle down the wall; fall-
ing of fruit from a tree," esp. of the tapka am.
158 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
I am here for this day also ; Mai yaJm aj „,„ ;,g ;
I'll depart to-morrow. jaMga.
—otherwise you will be -™rnatnmparWa.,<fi.
I found him on good terms Mai ne us ko us se (or „, H
.
I am just starting ; (the met. Merd ek pa* zamin par /,„/
From a man mounting). ek pd,o rikdb ml.
The horse jumped out of the Gl^a argare se phaln, ' m*r-
nding school. kar nikal-aya.
I set my horse at the wall hut Mai ne ghora daura-kar diwdr
par phfldana cha/m Win
wuh df-gaya.
A hurdle (for Jumping) . Tattl-tarpa.o.
His horse jumped over the Uska ghora khan^ ko tap-*
dltch' gaya.
The Agra dialect ? why. it's Agre H zaban kya ! „„/, to nn
of no account. tin me na terah* me.
You can't vie with him, stand Us ke <ilm ke samne turn Ma-
in front of him, in learn- har-naM-takte.
ing.
A cornelian can't be com- 'Aqlq la'l ke tamne
pared with a ruby (in beau- har-sakta.
ty or value, etc.).
1 Properly for long jumps.
L ^ g°
« Past 12
Three is a Iucky number, thirteen unlucky.
LESSON 44. 159
LESSON 44.
CAUSAL VERBS.
(a) — A simple neuter verb is usually made transitive by
inserting a after the root, as : girna "to fall." girana " to make
to fall, to knock down." The insertion of if a forms the causal,
as : girwdnd "to cause to be thrown down by some one."
Remark. — When there are two transitive forms, one form sometimes
has a special or restricted application. Thus from dabna. intr. " to be
pressed," are formed the transitives dabna and dabana. The latter
is used for " to press down," while the former is commonly used for
" to shampoo," though both forms are used in the latter sense (pa,6
dabna or dabana).
(b) — If the simple verb is transitive, the insertion of a
makes it causal, and of wa doubly causal, as : parhna " to
read"; parlidnd "to make one read, to teach"; parhwdnd
''to cause to be taught."
Remark. — Sometimes the second and third forms of a cau-
sal formed from a simple transitive are identical in mean-
ing, as : kardnd and Tcarwdnd " to cause to do." The causal
of kahim is kahland (or rarely kahdnd) which is both intransi-
tive "to be named," and causal "to cause to say."
(c) — (1) Some verbs are formed irregularly, as: Solid "to
sleep," suldnd "to lull a child to sleep and to make one
sleep": mujhe is kamre me na-suldnd "do not force me to
sleep in this room." Sulwdnd is doubly causal, as : Is larke
ko dd,i se sulwd,o "tell the dd.i to put this child to sleep."
(2) From tutnd "to be snapped," the initial hard t becomes
soft in the trans, and caus. tornd and turwdnd.
(d) — Yih khatt Sdlik se parhdnd "make Salik read this
letter to you," but Sdlik ko parhdnd "make Salik read
it to himself, ' or "teach Salik how to read this letter."
(c) — Some verbs are both transitive and intransitive, as :
160
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Khujland "to scratch with the nails" and also "to itch" ;
harna (no ne) " lose a game, be defeated etc." The intensive
forms of such verbs leave no doubt, thus kar-jana is intr.
and hdr-dend tr.
(/) — Note the following: wa'da karna.tr. "to make a pro-
mise, to promise " and wa'da lend "to take a promise fit mi.
to make to promise, to cause to promise."
(g)—Paknd l intr.
Pakdnd,1 tr.
Pakwand,1 caus.
Pakkd, adj.
Pakkd ghar, m.
Kachchd, adj.
Bhtgnd, intr.
Bhigond^ tr.
Bhigwdnd, caus.
To be cooked ; to ripen ; to
come to a head (of a boil,
etc.) ; to turn grey (of hair) .
To cook, etc.
To cause to, or order to cook.
Cooked ; ripe ; mature ; ready
to discharge matter (of a
boil, etc.) ; grey (of the
hair) ; fully developed ; ex-
perienced ; expert ; made of
stone, brick or cement :
macadamized (of a road) ;
permanent ; resolute ; trust-
worthy.
A brick or masonry house:
also prison.
Raw; unripe; unmaeadnm-
ized ; the opposite gene rally
of pakkd.
To become wet ; to be soaked
in.
To make wet ; to soak.
To order, or to cause, to soak.
Pakna, pakana, pakwaria are regular.
Antepenultimate short; vide L. 53 (k), note.
LESSON 44.
101.
Letna, intr.
Litana, tr.
Litwana, cans.
Dhulna, intr.
Dkona, tr.
Dhulwdnd, caus.
Sina. tr.
Siland, tr.
Silwana, caus.
Palna, intr.
Pdlnd, tr.
Palwana, caus.
Pitna, intr.
/^a, tr.
Pitwdnd, cans.
Khichnd, intr.
Khlchnd, tr.
Khichwand, caus.
Sikhnd.1 tr.
Sikhdna and sikhlana
To lie down.
To be washed.
To wash.
To sew, stitch.
To be reared, tamed, nurtured
To be beaten, struck.
To be pulled tight, stretched,
drawn
To pull tight, etc. ; to draw
(a picture) ; to pull (a car
riage) ; to pull (a punkah) :
to bear, suffer ; to draw a
sword.
To learn to do • to learn any
work or business (but not
science or literature) .
To teach.
Parhna " to learn, study literature or science." Slklina, however,
may be used for learning a language colloquially.
SamjhSna " to teach how to do ; to explain, etc."
11
162
HINDUSTANI MANUAL
Khulna, intr.
Kholna, tr.
Khulwana. caus.
Bolna.[ intr
Buldna, tr.
Bulwana, caus.
Katnd, intr.
Katna, tr.
Katdnd, caus.
Rahnd, intr.
Rakhna, tr.
Rakhwaria, caus. J
Bikna. intr.
Bechna, (kist ke hath), tr.
Bikwand, caus.
Phatnd. intr.
Phdfna, tr.
To be opened ;
loosened.
To open, etc.
revealed ;
To utter sounds.
To call.
To send for a person.
To be cut ; to be traversed (of
a road) ; to pass (of time).
To cut ; pass the time, etc. ;
to bite.
To dwell ; remain ; to be kept
or to rest in one place (of
things) .
To place, keep.
To be sold.
To sell.
To cause to sell, order to be
sold.
To be torn (of cloth, paper,
leather) ; to be cracked (of
a wall) ; be burst (of over-
ripe fruit, a boiler) : to be
dispersed (of clouds) ; to
curdle (of milk).
To tear ; to split ; to rend.
1 Intransitive according to native grammarians; it does not tako
ne. It, however, requires an object, so according to English idous it is
transitive.
LESSON 44.
163
Baithna, intr.
Bithdnd, tr.
Bithwdnd, caus. '
Dekhnd, tr.
Dikhdnd, dikhldnd, caus.
Nahdnd, intr.
To sit ; settle down (of dregs) ;
to become fixed in the
mind.
To seat; cause to seat, cause
to fix in the memory
To see, look.
To show.
To bathe
Nahldnd, tr. (nahlwdnd, caus.) . To give a bath to ; to order a
bath for.
Land (tor le-dnd ; without ne).\ To bring.
' To bring a person, or to cause
Liwd-ldnd, caus.
Jalnd, intr.
Jaldnd, caus.
Jdgnd, intr.
Jagdnd, tr.
Jagwdnd, caus.
Jlna. intr.
Jildnd. caus.
Jdnnd, tr.
Jatdnd or jatldnd, caus.
Find, tr. \
Pildnd. caus. c
to be brought by a per-
son.
To burn.
To cause to burn.
To be awake ; to keep awake.
To awaken ; to rouse.
To order a person to be called
in the morning.
To live.
To cause to live, to revive.
To know, think.
To warn, caution.
To drink ; to smoke (tobacco).
To make or give to drink or
to smoke.
164
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Chhutna
or chhutnd
To be released, etc. ; vide
Lesson 36 (6).
Chhornd,
, tr.
> To let go, etc.
Chhurdnd, chhutdnd,
chhurwdnd, caus.
or To cause to be released.
Lend, tr
Liwdnd,
caus. )
To take.
[Mai dm quit se liwd-layd
= '•1 made the coolie tak<
the mangoes and have
brought him with me.]'
Dend, tr. "(
Dildnd. dilivdnd, caus. ,
To give ; to permit.
KJidnd, m.
Food : meal.
Khdnd.
tr.
To eat; to suffer; take lh<-
(air); etc.
Khildnd
tr.
To cause to eat; i.e. to feed.
Khilwdnd, caus.
To order to feed.
Nikalnd
Nikdlnd
, intr. \
, tr.
To come out. to turn out.
To turn out, dismiss ; to take
Nikalwdnd, caus. )
out.
To cause the dismissal of. etc.
Samajhnd, intr. \
Samjhdnd, tr. (
To understand, think, consi-
der.
To explain; console; con-
vince; reason with.
Phutnd,
Phornd.
1 intr.
1 tr. ; phurwdnd
ITo get a hole in ; to become
disunited ; to sprout ; to
. boil, bubble.
, caus. I To break into several pieces :
J to make to burst (a boil).
Note the change of I into r.
LESSON 44.
165
Magnet, tr.
Magdnd, magwdnd. caus.
Gunjd,ish. f.
Intizdr, m. (karnd or khinch-
nd, or — me rahnd).
Manzur, Ar. p.p.
Khdtir. f.. subs, and prep.
Zabar-dast, adj.
Zer-dast, adj.
Phutd rupiya.
Phutd pdm.
(h) —The tie has been to the
wash.
The Sahib is very late
(You) made me wait a long
time.
He forced me to do it.
They unanimously agreed to
the terms.
To ask for, beg; incorrectly
used for chdhnd, ' to want.'
To send for a thing.
Capacity, room.
Watching
Approved : sanctioned.
Heart ; pleasing ; for the
sake of, for.
Arbitrary ; powerful : some-
times strong.
Subordinate
A cracked rupee.
Boiling water.
Gala-band dhulke aya hai.
Sahib ban der me a,e,1 or ban
der karke (or lagake) a,e.
Mujh se bard intizdr kardyd.
Us ne zabardastl (se) yih kdm
mujh se karwdyd.
Sabho ne (or sab ne), ek zabdn
hokar, kahd ki yih bat ham
logo ko manzur hai.
1 Wherever the word sahib is used, the verb must be in the plural
vide Lesson 16 (d). Deri for der is vulgar.
166 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Do you wish to please me or Tumhe men khdtir manzur hai
not ? yd nahl ?
I am as keen as ever but what Shauq to pahle H tarah hai.
can I do ? I've no time lekin kyd karU ? fursaf
now. nnhl.
His head was cut, bruised by. Patthar $e uskd sir phut-gayd.
a stone.
His head was split into two Uska, sir lathi se phat-gayd.
bits by a lalhi.
Note.—'FoT one use of the causal verb vide p. 151. note fi
Eng. Tr. H. S . Part IIT.
LESSON 45.
(a) — (1) A large class of compound verbs is formed by
prefixing substantives, adjectives, Arabic past participles,
prepositions, and adverbs, to verbs, especially to hona and
karnd, as : jam' hona " to be collected " ; jam' karnd " to
collect" chori jdnd (or hona) "to be stolen" : k&ushk karna
" to dry " ; lamba karnd " to lengthen " ; sawdr jdnd "to go
mounted, to ride"; mashyhul hona "to be bus}7" and mash-
ghul karnd " to engage one in a business " : bar-land " to
fulfil"; dar-dnd "to succeed"; pesh-dnd "to come before,
to happen, to treat or deal with " ; pesh karnd " to bring up
before " ; bdz and " to desist " ; bar taraf karnd " to dismiss."
Such compounds are usually regarded as single verbs, and if
transitive, the compound governs the accusative, as : usne
mulk ko fath-kiyd or kar-liyd " he conquered the country " ;
mulk fath-hu.d " the country was conquered."
Note. — For dikhdji dend " to be seen " and sundj dend " to
be heard " etc. vide L. 22 (a).
LESSON 45. 167
(2) When speaking of big people, farmdnd (lit. " to order ")
is substituted for karnd in compound verbs, and for kahnd.
(b) — In some verbs, however, the first part of such a com-
pound is treated as the direct object of the simple verb, as :
mai ne us ki (or ko) bahut taldsh ki "I searched for him " ;
hamesha dp ki (not ko) ta'rif kartd hai "he always speaks
highly of you " ; us ne men ghafi (not ki) chon ki "he stole
my watch." Sometimes either construction is admissible, as
with taldsh karnd. Ta'lim dend and ta'lim karria both mean
" to teach " ; kisi ko namdz Id ta'lim dend, but kisi ko namdz
ta'lim karnd " to teach a person the Muslim prayers." There
is no rule on the point.
(c) — Sometimes one construction is required in the active
and another in the passive, as : Us ne usko ' izzat bakhshi " he
honoured him." but wuh 'izzat bakhshd-gayd " he was hon
cured."
(d) — Hindustani often requires a (simple) verb different
from that used in English, thus : kaprd sind " to make
clothes (not banana) " ; wuh asil murgh pdltd hai " he keeps
game-cocks" ; lawd l lardtd hai " he keeps fighting quails " :
kardmdt * dikhdnd " to perform miracles."
(e) — The use of the word saikre, "per cent." is illustrated
later. Sixteen annas or one rupee may, however, be taken
to represent a hundred per cent, as : bimdri solah dne me ab
sirf char dne rah-ga,i hai "the sickness has decreased to
twenty-five per cent (i.e. by seventy-five per cent)."
1 Lawa is the " Bustard-quail " and also the Rock Bueh-quail ; bater
is the " Common Quail " ; both are used for fighting.
2 Karamat: miracle performed by a Wall or Saint, opposed to mu'-
jiza, one performed by a prophet.
168
(/)— Do.
Dorio (or dono).
Tino ; chard (and so on).
Kort or bisi, f .
Saikra, in.
Sati, L
[Fl, Ar., prep.
Sailer o.
Hazard.
Bar. f., daf'a. f., or -martaba.1
f.
$/fc 6ar, eA; fZa/'a.
Do-guna, dugria, dund. adj.
Tigund or si-guna, adj.
Chau-yuna, adj.
Do-chand, adj.
Si-chand (and so on), adj.
Ekek.
Ek ek karke: adv.
Do do, etc.
.Kara se A;am.
Ziydda se ziydda.
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Two.
Both.
The three, all three ; the four
(and so on)
A score.
A century, i.e. a hundred.
A century of years ; fl sadi or
fi sad (or saikre, or saikre
jnchhe) = per cent.
In. each, per)
Hundreds.
Thousands.
Time.
Once.
Double.
Treble.
Four-fold, etc.
= Do -gund.
= Si-gund, etc.
One apiece, one each.
One by one.
Two apiece.
At least.
At most.
1 When martaba means " rank, position " it i* masculine: when bar
means " load " it is masculine.
LESSON 46
Taqrib-an, adv.
Qarib, adj. and prep.
Do tin.
Tin char.
Qiyds se, or anddz se or anddz-
• an. adv.
Qiyds (k).
Sau ek : or ko,i sau : ko.i
bar ah ; or bar ah ek.
Yad, f.
Yad hond. intr.
Yad and.
Yad karnd, tr.
Yad rakhnd, tr.
Kdm ana, intr.
Khet rahnd (rare).
Hisab, m. (k.).
Lafz, m. (pi. alfdz).
Lafzi. adj.
Hdrnd tr. and intr.
About, almost.
Near ; also adv. about, nearly.
Two or three.
Three or four.
At an estimate, about.
Guess (to).
About a hundred : about
twelve.
Remembrance
To remember ; to be learnt
by heart.
To come to mind.
To learn ; to call to mind.
Keep in memory, remember.
To be useful : to be killed in
battle.
To be killed in battle, i.e. to
be left on the field.
Account : arithmetic.
Word.
Literal.
To lose, be defeated ; be tired
out. dispirited. Vide L. 44
(e).
(a) — (1) J» harnd.
Shikast khdnd. tr.
LESSON 46.
To be dispirited.
To be defeated.
170
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Jitna,1 jit-lend, tr.
Path karna, tr.
Khushk karna. tr.
Ohirna, intr.
Ghernd, tr. ; gher-lend, tr.
Jutl s\nd (or banana) , tr.
Wahl (ert*,), adv.
or woAl a (ert*j J ; , ad v.
, adr.
Zakhm khdnd.
Kisi par rahm khdna.
Hawd khdnd.
Hawd pind.
Qasam khdnd.
Mar khdnd.
Jutiya khdnd.
Ghota khdnd.
khdnd.
Odll khdnd.
To conquer ; to win.
To conquer.
To dry.
To be surrounded.
To surround, besiege.
To make boots.
In that very place.
In that very state ; without
any special purpose.
As soon as.
To be wounded.
To feel pity for.
To take the air, go for an
outing.
To wind -suck (horses).
To take an oath.
To be beaten.
To be slippered.
To plunge, dive, duck in-
voluntarily.
To carry tales to superiors,
tell tales.
To swallow or put up with
abuse.
1 Jltna is used with or without ne : mat basl jita or mat ne bazl jiti.
* Yu " thus, in this way " ; ion " in that way " ; tu " the time when.
i.e. as soon as " ; juhl " at the very moment when " ; /u tu " tomehow
or other."
LKSSON 40.
171
Gham khana.
Ranj uthdnd (or jhelnd) .
Khushi uthdnd.
Mihnat uthana.
Sadma uthana.
Maza urdnd. •
TakUf khaichna.
Salchtl khaichna (or uthana).
Fdqa khaichna.
Fdqa karnd.
Intizdr khaichna.
To endure grief patiently.
To endure trouble, etc.
To enjoy a thing.
To undergo trouble : also to
labour.
To endure a shock ; undergo
afflictions.
To live luxuriously ; to enjoy.
To endure trouble, hardship.
Ditto.
To be starved.
To abstain from feeding, vol
untarily.
To wait for (sp. with anxiety) .
(2) Note the force of the transitive verbs in the following compounds;
jumbish dena. tr. " to move a thing," jumbish karna,intr. " to move"
=hilna ; dukh dena " to worry, give trouble to," but dukh pana " to
be worried " ; bet khana " to be caned " but bet khilana " to cane some
one else."
(6) — I cannot recollect that Mujhe wuh lajz ydd nahl hai.
word.
I don't know (recollect) ray Mujhe apnd sabaq ydd nahl
lesson. hai.
Remember this. Is ko ydd karo.
Keep this in mind. Is ko ydd rakho.
The Sahib has just asked for Sahib ne turn ko ydd kiyd hai
you
He has lakhs of rupees. Us ke pas lakho rupai hai (or
rupiya hai).
172
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
All five horses are here.
Pacho ghore hazir hat.
The enemy had thousands of Dushman H hazard fauj tin (or
soldiers ; they were double sipdhi the) ; hamare se (or
our numbers. hamare sipdhiyo se) dochand
the.
At the rate of two rupees per Har mahine (me) do rupiya
hundred per month ; at the saikre ke hisdb se ; or liar
per mdh do rupiya fl sadi ke
hisdb se.
rate of 24 per cent
annum.
Put them aside, one by one.
Ek ek karke alay karo.
Give them twenty rupees each. Bis bis rupiya de-do.
It was a fine view. . Ek achchhi kaifiyat nazar a. I.
This is not of quite such a good Is mdl se yih mdl unnis hai.
quality (i.e. is as 19 is to
20).
Unnis bis kd farg.
Taqrib-an bis the ; or andaze se
bis the ; or qiyds se bis the ;
or bis ek the ; or ko.i bis the ;
or bis ke qanb the.
(Ek) sau rupiya (or pi. rupai)
se, kuchh kam.
Do kam sau rupiya.
Pach chha admi d,e.
Mai ne ek ghante tak, tumhari
rah dekhi.
How long shall 1 have to wait Tumhard, kab tak. intizdr
A very slight difference
There were about twenty.
Rather less than a hundred
rupees.
Ninety-eight (lit. 100 minus
2 rupees).
Five or six people came.
1 waited for you an hour.
for you ?
mujhe karna
hogd) ?
)>(irer/a (or
LESSON 47. 173
Help me. Mujhe madad do, or men ma-
rl ad karo. or men madad ko
d,o (or pahucho).
Give me an explanation (of Is kl kiafiyat batd,o.1
machine, your conduct),
etc.
The nearer [ got to the city Jii jU mai its shahr se nazdlk
the more T longed to see it. hota gaya fa tti its ko dekhnc
kd shauq dil me barhtd gaya.
LESSON 47.
(a) — (1) The grammatical passive is formed by conjuga-
ting the past participle of a transitive or a causal verb with
jdndsis: ntdrdjdnd " to be killed,"2 and metaphorically "to
be mined, undone" (but never "to be beaten") ; mat mar a
jdtd hu " I am being killed " ; wuh mdrd gaya " he was killed."
or wuh man ga,i " she was killed." The passive is not as
much used as in English — except in translations from Eng-
lish. The general rule is that the passive should only be
used when the subject is unknown, or when, for some special
object, it is desirable not to mention the subject.
(2) The agent of the passive, if expressed, is expressed by
— ke hath se and the instrument by se, as : kisi ddku ke hdth
se talwdr se mdrd gaya " he was killed by some dacoit with a
(curved) sword." Such an expression as i;he was killed by
1 Batana " to explain verbally, to point out," is, in the Panjab.
sometimes vulgarly used for dikhana, as : ghore ko pant bata,o=" give
the horse some water in the bucket."
2 In the active voice, however, marna signifies " to beat " as well as
" to kill." Vide L. 22 (/) footnote.
174 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
a tiger"1 must be turned: ek sher ne us ko mdrd, or wuh
sher kd shikar ho -gay a.
(b) — Instead of the passive, Indians idiomatically use (1)
the active voice, as : kahte hai " they say, it is said " ; (2) an
intransitive verb, simple or compound, as: pitnd "to be
beaten " ; chori jdnd (or hond) " to be stolen " ; fath hond " to
be conquered " ; (3) an Arabic or Persian past participle, as :
ma'lum (Ar. p. p.) hond "to be known " ; mauquf (Ar. p. p.)
hond "to be stopped: abolished"; bar-afrokhta (P. p. p.)
hond " to be angry" ; and (4) a transitive verb with an ob-
ject, as : mar khdnd " to be beaten " ; shikast khdnd or pdnd
" to be defeated." Such verbs can seldom be used in the cau-
sal forms : gham khdnd is " to suffer," but gham khildnd can-
not be used. However, usne naukaro se mujhe gall (or mar)
khild,l "he made his servants abuse (or beat) me" is idio-
matic.
Remark. — In gum hond " to be lost," gum appears to be a
Persian adjective. Pasand is a shortened form of pasandida.
(c) — The subject of the grammatical passive is usual!}' in
the nominative. As, however; this grammatical subject is
the logical object of the action, it is often, in modern Urdu,
in writing only, put in the accusative. This construction is
admissible with certain compound verbs [vide L. 45 (a) (1)],
or with simple verbs that take two objects, as: usko qatl
kiyd gayd "him was killed " = wuh qatl kiyd gayd ; usko bar
taraf kiyd gayd = " him was dismissed " ; usko dekhd jd,egd is
incorrect, but achchhd, uskomalika kahd jd,e "let her be called
Queen," and agar usko sach mdnd jd,e "if it be considered
true — " are correct.
1 Ravan, Ram se mara gaya, is correct Hindi but not correct Urdu.
, LESSON 47. 175
(d) — (1) The passive (of even neuter verbs) is idiomatically
used to express possibility or impossibility, as : qismat se
lard ' nahl jdtd "one cannot contend with Fate/' but mujh se
lard nahl, jata " I dare not, or I am unable to, fight " ; mujh
se yih khdnd khdyd nahl jata " I cannot eat this " ; yih kab us
se uthdyd jdtd thd? "he could not lift this" ; turn se kisl kd
khun hond dekhd jd.egd? "could you stand seeing a person
killed ? " ; us se pahdr par charhd ]-gayd "he was able to as-
cend the mountain."
(2) — In other words the Passive Voice with a proper agent
expresses (a) I did not dare to — , (6) I could not bear to — .
or (c) I was unable to , as : mujh se to sher ke sdmne na
jdyd 1 gayd : mujh se to us ki gdli na-sunl-ga.i : koshish karne
par bht mujh se us pahdr par na-charhd }-gayd.
Remark. — Note that in such cases, i.e. to express possibility, etc..
even neuter verbs are used in the passive. Note also that yih murgh
kis se zibh '2 kiya gaya ! does not = " who killed this cock ? " but " who
was bold enough to kill it ? "
(e) — Deorhd, adj. Too much by one half ; half
as much larger.
Ek ddh. A few ; only a few
Kahldnd or kahdnd, intr. and To be called, named ; to make
caus. one say or repeat.
Kahd-jdnd, pass. =kahldnd: kahd jatdhai "it
is said" (not kahldtd hai).
'Ilm. m. Knowledge; science; learn-
ing.
Ma'lum: AT. p. p of above. What is known.
Nazar, pi. nazre, f . Sight.
Intransitive passive.
Zibh k. "to cast on the ground and cut the throat."
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Manzur, Ar. p. p.
Muqdbala k. (from qabl. prep.
" before," of time).
Inkdr (k.), m.
Inkdri, adj. (hond).
Munkir, Ar. (hond).
Mukarnd H.
Pahld,* adj.
Pahle, abv.
Dusrd,1 adj.
Dusre, adv.
77sra:' adj.
Chauthd,1 adj.
Pachwa?- adj.
Chhatd,* adj.
E,* adj.
Panja, m.
Panja marna, tr.
Approved (originally ' the ob-
ject of sight).'
To oppose ; to compare : to
confront, face.
Refusal, denial.
Refusing.
Denying; also one denying
the true faith, a kafir.
To go back on one's word.
First.
Firstly
Second; another.
Secondly.
Third.
Fourth.
Fifth.
Sixth.
Seventh.
(Remaining numbers formed
by adding wa).*
Hand or foot (bunch of fives.
from Per. panj five) ; paw
of animal.
To claw (of beasts) : met. to
sieze by violence.
' These are adjectives and are inflected, as : dusri tarlbh.
2 Inflected as pachwl tarikb ; pachice mard ko.
LESSON 47.
177
Pa,o, or ek pa,o, or ek chau-
tha,i.
Chduthd hissa.
Ek tihaj.
Adha, adj. and subs.
Do-tihaj.
Tin pa,o, or tin chauthdJi.
Sawa.
Derh.
Rar~he.
Dhd.i or arh-d.t.
Paune.
(/)— What is that called in
Hindustani ?
I cannot lift this.
Let one be sent for from the
bazaar.
If they be compared side by
side, it will be seen that
there is not the slightest
difference between them.
Have you lost your wits ?
He struck him one blow with
the sword.
One-quarter of.
The fourth part
One-third.
Half.
Two-thirds.
Three-quarters.
= 1 j, or +j, as: sawa sau —
125.
= 1^, as : derh hazar 1.500.
= + i, as : sarhe fin rupiya
Rs" 3-8-0.
= 2|, as : dim. I sa?< = 250.
_i
; : paune do ••
Hindustani me wuh kya kahlata
hai ? ; or usko Hindustani
me kya kahte JidH ?
Yih mujh se uthaya nahl jata.
Baza* se ek maga-liya ja.e. or
magaya ja,e.
Agar dono me muqabala kiya
ja.e l (or dono muqabala kiye
ja.e) to ma'lum ho-ja.ega ki
kuchh bht farq nahl hai.
Kyu, ten 'aql man ga.t ?
Us ne ek talwar man.
1 Or milana, tr., to compats.
12
178
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
The bullock gored me twice.
Give them 4£ rupees each
It is ten past twelve.
Ten minutes to twelve.
At last he consented to, agreed
to, this.
1 have no objection.
I do not deny it.
I do not want such service (or
I don't want to continue in
such service).
Kindly reply to my letter
soon.
Bail ne mere ' do sing mare.
Unko sdrhe char char riipiya
do (not sdrhe char sdrhe
char}.
Bdrah par das minat d,e.
Bdrah me das minat bdqi hai ;
or in the Punjab das minat
Icam bar ah baje.
Akjiir (ko) is bat par rdzl hud ;
or dkhir yih bat usko man-
zur hu,i or ; dkhir is bat ko
manzur kiyd.
Mujhe inkdr (or -uzr) nah\.
Mai nahi inkdr kartd hu.
Aisi naukaii karni * manzur
nahi hai.
Mere khatt kd jawab jald bhejd-
LESSON 48.
ITERATION OE REPETITION .
(a) — (1) The same word is repeated for emphasis, or to
signify continuous state, etc., etc. Examples: (1) Substan-
tives: ghar ghar "in every house." roz roz "every day";
juq juq ddmi chale ate hai " they are coming in crowds " ; (2)
1 Badan par understood : vulg. mujh ko.
2 The infinitive is made feminine to agree with naukarl. Vide L. 54.
3 Here the passive is more respectful than the active, i.e. than ap
i a ic all jald bhfie
LESSON 48. 179
Adjectives : achchhe achchhe kapre ' " various good cloths (or
clothes) " ; uska chihra mare ghusse ke lal lal ho-gdyd " he got
red all over from anger "* ; (3) Prepositions : . goli mere sar
ke upar upar chali ga,i " the bullet passed just close over my
head"; rel pahdr ke andar andar jati hai "the train goes
through a continuous tunnel " ; (4) Adverbs : daryd ke kinare
kinare gaya " I kept along the bank " ; (5) Verbs : kitab parhte
parhte s men Hkhe dukh-ga,l "from continuous8 reading my
eyes began to ache " ; (6) Numerals : sau sau rupiya ki ghariya
" watches costing full a hundred rupees."
(b) — Sometimes an idea is repeated in a synonym, which
generally gives the idea of plurality, as : naukar chdkar "ser-
vants and domestics " ; larke bale " children and youngsters " :
girtd parta = "falling and tottering " ; soch samajhkar " care-
fully considering."
The same idea is conveyed by a singular and a plural Arabic
word, as: faqir fuqard " faqirs and mendicants, poor and
needy."
(2) Two adjectives, synonymous or nearly so, one Hindi
and one Persian, may be used for an intensive, as : sdf suthra
" very clean " ; ujla safed " very white." Compare L. 3 (a).
(c) — Sometimes the idea of plurality is conveyed by a
meaningless appositive. as : baja gaja " all kinds of music " ;
dekhna blialria " to search, or look into carefully, to examine."
The appositive alone has usually no meaning and is fixed by
usage.
1 Note that when the noun is pi. such a repetition gives an idea of
plurality. Compare garm garm dudh and its footnote, end of L. 4 ; and
last example L. 11.
2 For the repetition of adjectives vide also " Hindustani Stumbling-
Blocks," LXI (3), supplement.
3 Compare conj. part. L. 18 (g) note 3.
180 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Another form of Meaningless -Apposition is formed by
repeating the word but changing the initial letter into w, as :
Rail wotl " bread, etc.," ; tojn wopi "hats and such like";
yih khdtd wdtd kuchh nahl " this neither eats nor drinks,
touches nothing." This last form can be applied to any
word.
(d) ' Reiteratives ' is a name given to two verbs of similar
meaning or of jingling sound conjugated together, to give an
idea of repeated or thorough action, as : dekh-bhdlke " having
examined thoroughly, looked everywhere " ; sab chhor chhdr
ke "having abandoned all the things" ; bin samjhd.e bujJia.e
"without explaining at all."
Chhar is a kind of Meaningless Appositive," bhalnd is used
with dekhria only.
(e) — Two substantives coupled by "and" are often used
for an English substantive and adjective, as . dtash bdzt me
rupiya kharch karnd layby o (or aur) fazul-kharcfii hai "to
spend good money on fireworks is a wicked waste." Tn any
case a synonym strengthens the expression, as : Ten be-
sharmi aur be-kdyd.i "your utter shamelessness."
(/) — Darydft, k. To find out ; also to enquire.
Basna, intr. To be populated (of a place) ;
(also met. to be fixed, of
an idea in the heart).
Chal-basna, intr. To die.
Ba.sdna, tr. To populate.
Abdd k.} tr. To populate.
Abafa f. Cultivation ; population.
Khud,P. Self = ap, H.
Khudi, f.
Tabah hona, intr.
Tabahi, f .
Bhlr, f., sing.
Sujhna (with dat. of person),
intr.
Hawa se larria.
Shdh-kharchl, f. ^
Fazul-kharchi, f. ?
(gr)— The whole field.
One and all.
I was one mass of sweat.
The whole bazar is under
water (or is nothing but
water) .
I canie by road the whole
way.
Crying out "bread, bread"'
he died.
Shooting took (us) so long
that evening came on us.
He continued to read till he
fell asleep.
LESSON 48. 181
Selfishness ; also one's proper
To be ruined ; to be wrecked.
Ruin ; destruction ; downfall ;
shipwreck.
A crowd.
To become visible, be per-
ceptible; to occur to the
mind.
To scold, nag.
Extravagance.
Khet ka khet.
Sab kemb, (pi.).
Mera badan pasine pasine
[me] ho-gaya.
Sard bazar pant pdnl hai (or
pam Hi pam hai).
Mai sarak sarak (se) ay a.
Wuh roil roil kahtd mar-gaya.
Shikar ' khelte khelte (hu,e,)
sham ho-gaj.
Wuh kitab parhte parhte so-
gaya.
1 Any personal pronoun in the dative is understood.
182
HINDUSTANI MANUAL
He is engaged in pulverising
something.
All milk or all water (not
half and half).
He became hoarse from con-
tinued crying out.
In a moment.
They have two rupees apiece.
They have 3J rupees each.
They have two or three horses.
He quarrels with me (or 1
quarrel with him) every
day.
Whenever he asked me for
it I always gave it to him.
You are always ready to
quarrel with me at the very
least thing.
To pass (at hockey).
What various things will take
place here the day after to-
morrow ?
Sit quite still and don't stir.
I nearly fell off my horse.
I got a headache from long
sitting in the sun (lit. sun-
Kuchh pis pas ' rahd hai.
Dudh kd dudh yd pdnl kd
pdrii.
Chilldte chilldte us kd gala
baith-gayd.
Bdt kl bdt me.
Unke pas do do rupai hat.
Unke pas sdrhe fin tin a rupai
hat.
Unke pas do fin ghore hai.
Us se ham se roz roz (or simply
roz) jhagrd hold hai.
Jab jab 8 us ne magd (tab tab)
mai ne diyd.
Turn hameshd zard zard si bdt
par Idrne ko tayydr hole ho.
Pas pus karnd*
Yaha par so kyd kyd hogd.
Ghup chap baitho, hilo mat.
Mai girte girte bach-gayd.
(Mujhe) dhup me baithe baithe
sar me dard hu,d.
1 Meaningless Appositive.
3 Jab jab=jab kabhi.
Not sarhe tin sarhe tin.
Pas karna " to pass (once).
LESSON 49.
183
I turned him out of the house
by repeatedly beating him.
Having turned the matter
over in his mind, he said —
Many good teachers.
Various, or many, quite nice
teachers.
A pleasant cool breeze is now
blowing.
I lost my money and at the
same time was thought to
be a thief
The whole house was ruined.
Usko mdr-mdr-ke ghar se
mkal-diya.
Soch sdch }-kar kahd —
Bahutere achchhe parhdne-
wdle*
Achchhe achchhe parhanewdle.'1
Thandl thandi hatvd chal-rahi
hai.
Merd rupiye kd rupiya gayd
aur phir khud chor kd chor
band.
Ghar kd ghar tabdh hu.d.
LESSON 49.
He was educated (in reading Us ne parh-likh 3-liyd, magar
and writing) but remained gadhe kd gadhd rah-gayd.
as big an ass as ever.
Once every year : also a whole Sdl kd sdl.
year.
Long years, many years. Sdl-lid sdl.4
Nothing but promises. Wa'da hi wa'da hai ( = wafd
kd ndm nahl) .
1 Meaningless Appositive.
2 There is a degree of nicety »s well
two sentences.
3 For parh-liya aur likh-liya.
* Sul-ha. Persian plural of tal.
> plurality in the second of these
184
He will come this minute,
immediately.
Has letter after letter been
written ?
He covered me with such
filthy abuse (that I. can't
repeat it) .
Is there a crowd there ?
Multitudes.
A story and nothing else.
This is a tale and moral as
well.
Of his own accord.
Question them singly, one by
one.
By repeatedly enquiring from
the villagers I guided my-
self here.
Most ignorant.
The best.
In less than, not more than,
a week.
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Wuh dyd kd dyd hai.
Khatt1 se khdtt likhe-ga,e
hal?
Us ne mujhe gait si gdli ' di?
Waha kuchh bhir hai ?
Adml se ddmi hat.
Kahdnl hi kahdni.
Kahdni H kahdni hai aur
nasihat ki nasihat.
Ap hi dp.
Ek ek karke puchho.
Gd,o-wdlo se puchh-puchh-
kar* rasta darydft kar-liyn.
Ndddn se 8 ndddn.
Achchhe se 8 achchhe.
Hafte ke andar andar.
1 Both the words kh'it}. are nominative plural, and se is from sa : it
is not a post-position. This idiom is always used interrogatively, in
answer to a question. Thus, to the question, " Did he abuse you ? "
the reply might be, " Did he abuse me ? (i.e. he did so to his utmost).
Gall el gali means more than ordinary gall.
* For puchh-kar puchhrkar ; the kar of the participle must only occur
once.
3 Se post-position. Vide footnote 1.
LESSON 49.
185
All sorts of things took place
here yesterday.
He savs one thing to one and
another to another.
Ready made.
An alreadjr populated city.
Without any cause or pur-
pose.
A little water in each glass.
Pour a little water at a time,
by degrees.
People are turning Muslims
in great numbers at a time.
I was absolutely alone in the
house.
Mangoes are sold here at a
rupee apiece.
She is my "chachi"3 and at
the same time my khdla."
I can't see anything.
A plan has just come into my
mind.
I can think of nothing else
but going home (I'm so
anxious for a holiday)
Kal yaha kyd kyd na-hu,a.
Kisl se kuchh kahtd hai. kisl
se kuchh.
Band -bandy d, adj.
Basd-basdyd shahr.
Baithe bithd.e '.
Thord thord pdni do.
Thord thord pdni ddlo.
Log fauj fauj Islam me ddkhil
hone lage hai.
Us sdre ghar me mai hi mal
thd.
YahS, dm rupai rupai * biktd
hai.
Ylh 'aural men chachi kl
chachi hai aur khdla kl
khdla.
Men akho se kuchh nahl
sujhtd.
Mere dil me ek tadblr sujhl
hai.
Mujhe ghar jdne ke siivd kuchh
1 Used as an adverb ;', always inflected.
2 Rupai rupai is usual in this idiom and not rupiya rnpiya.
3 Chachi is a paternal uncle's wife, and khala is a maternal aunt.
186
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Now tell me the truth and
nothing but the truth.
She scolds from morning to
night.
I wrote as many as four letters
but you didn't answer one.
I sent my petition direct to
(Government) ; not through
the Commanding Officer.
Whatever he found, he used
to eat as he found it.
Wherever thou goest I will
go-
Who were the various people
concerned in this murder ?
Whatever I gave him at any
time he used to eat directly
he got it.
I put all the things in their
various proper places.
It is exactly opposite to you.
Sack sack bolo.
Uskd, larte hi laj-te. din guzarta
hai ; or wuh subh se sham
tak lar-lar-kar ' din guzarti
hai.
Ma"i ne char char khatt bheje,
magar turn ne ek ka jawab
bhi na-likha.
Mai ne apni 'arzi upar upar*
bhej-di ; Kaman Afsar ki
ma'rifat na-bheji.
Jo jo kuchh wuh pata tha kha-
kha-jata tha.9
Jis jis taraf tu ja,egd (us .«*
taraj) mat bhi ja,uga.
Is khun me kaun kaun admi
sharik the ?
Jo jo kuchh mat ne use diya
wuh kha-kha gay a.
Mai ne tamam chize apni apni
jagah par rakh-rakh-dl.
Tere amne samne * hai.
1 In such cases the kar of the conjunctive participle is placed at the
end only.
* Upar upor=not in any one's control.
s Signifies ' continuity.'
* Samne (simple prep, or adv.) "opposite," hut amnesatnne requires
two things to give the idea, " each other."
LESSON 49
187
He did this in imitation of Us ne men dekha dekhl (se)
me. yih kdm kiyd.
Mutual strife. Mdrd-mdn. f.
He often kept falling asleep
when I was telling the story
and I kept waking him up.
For one night only ; also every
night, by night only.
During the night, before dawn.
The dhobi having washed and
swilled the clothes well,
came back from the ghat.
From morn till night he wan-
ders and wanders in search
of a living (either food or
service) .
Ready saddled.
Ready loaded.
Ready furnished, adorned (of
table-cloth, house, etc.).
Ready cooked.
Hear-sav.
Wuh mere kahdnl-kahte waqt
so-so-jdtd thd lekin mai use
jagd-jagd-detd tha.
Rat kl rat.
Rdto-rdt.
Dhobi kapre dho dhd-kar ghat
se wdpas ay a.
Wuh rozi kl taldsh me subh se
sham tak phird-phirtd hai.
Kasa-kasdyd, adj.
Ladd-laddyd, adj.
Sajd-sajdyd, adj.
Pakd-pakdyd, adj
Suni-sundj bat.
I will fall asleep by the time Chirdgh. jalte jalte mat to
the lamp is lit. rahugd.
Before 8 A.M. the news spread Din charhte charhte ! yih kha.
through the city. bar shahr bhar me phail-ga,i-
Din-c.ftarhe is from about 7 to 8 A.M.
188
HINDUSTANI MANUAL
Just before sunset a she-
riding-camel appeared in
the distance.
I will be back home by the
time it strikes nine.
Din dubte dubte dur se ek sadni
dene lagi.
Nau bajte bajte mat makdn
wdpas d-jd,ugd.
[For further examples vide Lesson 65].
LESSON 50.
(a) — Manna, tr.
Kisi kd ihsdn mdnnd.
Hukm ba-jd land.
' Udul-hukmi karnd = hukm na
manna.
Ra'tyat, f.
Add karnd. tr.
Qatl karnd.
Maut, f.
Apni maut marnd.
Jawdm maut marnd.
Be-waqt marnd.
Kutte H maut marnd.
To believe, admit, suppose ; to
be reconciled to (after a
quarrel) ; to obey (hukm) ;
to esteem, respect, follow (a
religious teacher).
To be grateful for.
To obey.
To disobey.
Subject ; tenant of a house or
land.
To discharge a debt ; to per-
form (prayers, pilgrimage,
etc.).
To kill a human being.
Death.
To die a natural death.
To die young, die an untimely
death.
•
To die a disgraceful death.
LESSON 50.
180
Khun, m.
Kisi ka khun karnd, tr.
Kisi ka khun hona, intr. .
Khum.1 subs, and adj.
Likaz. m.
Agarchi ; go, or go-ki ; har-
chand, adv.
Magar or lekin.
Ta-ham.
Tau-bht.
Phir-bhi.
Mana Id.
Halal.
Halal karria.
Namak-halal, adj.
Namak-haram, adj.
PaheE, f.
Bujhna, tr.
{: Kafi," f. : Qahwa, m.
Hawa btidhna.
Na-nb, m. pi.
Nasib hona.
Blood ; murder.
To murder.
To be murdered.
A murderer ; also adj.. bloody.
Respect, regard.
Although.
Rut still.
Yet, still never-
theless.
Correla-
tives to
agarchi,
etc.
Granted that, admitted.
Lawful; lawfully killed.
To make lawful (i.e. to kill an
animal by Muslim or Jew-
ish rite) .
True to one's salt faithful.
Faithless.
Riddle.
To understand ; solve a riddle.
Coffee.
To make a name for oneself.
Fate, luck.2
To be obtained ; fall to one's
lot.
1 Be careful not to pronounce this word kuni
2 Ya naslb P , A. , lottery.
190 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Dam,m. Breath; life, moment;
strength ; lasting (met.)
Ekdam ' (se) , adv. Totally, altogether ; also di
rect, without break or me
dium.
Kisi ke dam me and. To be cajoled.
(6) — Hi, adv. (can be added Very, the very same ; but ;
for emphasis to any part of alone ; certainly ; also = ita-
speech). lies or underlining.
(c) — "No matter how " is kaisd (or kitnd) hi....
kyu na. . . .with or without agarchi, as : Ko,i paheli kaisi (or
kitni) hi mushkil kyu na-ho, mai bujh-jd ,Ugd •= (agarchi) ko,i
paheli kaisi hi mushkil ho, mai bujh-lugd "no matter how
difficult a riddle may be, I can solve it."
(d) — "Even though " ; agarchi wuh basti das mil par kyu
na-ho. mai wahs tak paidal jd-saktd hu "even though the
village be ten miles off T can walk there on foot " : this is
stronger than simple agarchi.
(e) — "The more.... the more" (or "the less — ") is ex-
pressed as follows : — " The nearer I got to the city, the more
I longed to see it " ju ju (or jis qadar) mai us shahr ke qarib
hotd-gayd tu tu (or usi qadar) us ke dekhne kd shauq barhtd
gaya : the correlative tu tu (or usi qadar) may be omitted.
(/) — " How much the more " is expressed as follows : —
" If coffee makes you drunk how much the more will wine
do so" /a&2 qahwa se tumhe nashd ho-jdtd hai to shardb kd
hdl ma'lum ; or to shardb kyd karegi ?
1 Servants of English people say ekdam for " at onoo." but this i«
English not Urdu.
5 Or agar.
LESSON 51. 191
(g) — " How much less " is expressed as follows : — " If wine
does not make you drunk how much less will coffee do so "
jab shardb se tumhe nashd nahl hotd to kafi se kab hogd, or to
kdfl se hond ma'lum. "I would not do this for a friend,
much less for an enemy" mai dosto ke liye to aisd karu-hl-gd
nahl, dushmano ke liye kaha tak karugd?, or — dushmano ke
liye karnd ma'lum.
(h) — "Much less, to say nothing of, let alone, " "I
have never even heard the name of the place, much less seen
it, to say nothing of never having seen it " mai ne us jagah
kd ndm bhl nahl, sund hai, dekhne kd kyd zikr? , or dekhnd to
ma'lum. or dekhnd to dar kindr hai = us jagah kd dekhnd dar
kindr, mai ne ndm bhl nahl sund.
Uske gdne kd kyd zikr (or kahnd or puchhnd) ?. wvh bajdne
me bhi ustdd hai " to say nothing of his singing, his playing
is excellent " : vide L. 54 (h) and 60 (6).
LESSON 51.
(a)— "As soon as. or no sooner than " Mai, ne idhar
parhd. udhar jawdb likhd "I replied as soon as I read your
letter." " He no sooner went there than he died " wahU, jdnd
(kyd) thd ki maut kd shikar hu,d = waha jdte hi (or jdte ke sdth)
mar-gayd. Merd likhnd hi thd ki wuh bol-uthd = mere likh-
chukte hi wuh bol-uthd " I had no sooner finished writing than
he cried out." Turn d,e aur khardbl d,i = tumhdre dte der na-
hu,i ki khardbi d,i "as soon as you came, there came ruin."
Us ke marte der na-hu,i ki us ke bete ne us ki sdrt daulat lutd-di
" as soon as he died his son squandered all his wealth." "As
soon as I went, he came " juhi mai chald-gayd wuh dyd = mere
jdte hi wuh dyd ; but wuh dne bhi na-pdyd thd ki mai chald-
102 HINDUSTANI MXM'AI..
gayd = wuh ayd bhl na-tha ki men, chala-gaya "I went just
as he arrived." Us ke ate der na-hu.l ki mal chala-gaya "I
went as soon as he came.
(6)— "Hardly, barely, not quite" may be expressed by na,
with or without pana. as: "he had barely gone when you
came" wuh jane na-pdyd.1 thd ki turn pahuche; "he had
barely (not yet) completed the work when he died " = us ne
its karri ko tamdm na-kiyd thd ki mar-gaya.
. (c) — "Not only.... but also....(l) Na faqat Musalman
balki Hindu bhl "not only Muslims but also Hindus"; (2)
Musalman to khair, Hindu bhl ; (3) Musalman to Musalman.
Hindu bhl.
(d) — " . . . . rather than " "1 would rather die than go
to prison " mujhe jdn de-dend man%ur hai magar qaid-khanr
me jana to manzur nahl. " I would rather take the office
than allow him to have it " mat khud is 'uhde ko qabul karngn
magar usko to kabhi muqarrar hone na-duga.
(e) — The enclitic and emphatic particle hi [' vide ' L. 50 (b) |
can be added to any part of speech. With pronouns or
nouns, it occurs between the pronouns and the post-posit ion.
as: tujh hi ko duga "\ will give it to you (alone)." For
euphony, however, mat ne hi is preferred to mat hi n< . l>:
the plural, hi is often hi, as tum-hl ko, unhl ko, but h<i»n /,"
(without the h) : also yihl and wuhl< usl se and usi ko, etc.,
are without the h. In the Punjab, however, the hi follows
the post-positions. Note the position of hi in wuh yih bate
1 This means that he had not actually departed ; but uska jana lliu
aur tumharu pahuctma means, " he had just left when—." No ne,
L. 15(o).
2 Tai ne and lal hi ne are vulgar for til ne ;ui<i tii l>~> nc.
LESSON 51.
193
•ar hi rahd thd ki mat a -para " he was in the very act oi
ying this when I arrived." Yih to ho-hi-gd " this is certain
take place."
Note. — Ab means ; now ' as opposed to past time ; but abhi
cans ' this moment ' with reference to the future, as : " wuh
ahle gharib thd magar ab amir hai " ; but wuh abhi amir hai
kin kuchh dino me gharib ho-jd,egd. Abhi jd,o "go now"
and not at some future time). Abtak (with Pres. or Past
"ense) = " still." Ab ki daf'a " this time."
— You and none other com- Turn hi ne yih chori ki.
mitted the theft.
Pas hi hai.
Dusre hi din jawdb likhugd.
is quite close.
will write the very next
day.
was just on the point of Mai dp ke pas dne hi ko thd
going to you when you ki dp tashrif ' le-d.e.
arrived.
:ter all he did yield to his Lekin us ke dam me d-hi-gayd.
cajoling.
Us ne kahd ki charhdj kaisi
hi ho, mujhe kuchh parwd
.e said he did not care how
steep the ascent was.
nahl.
you cannot come for more, Ziyada nahi'2 to ek hi do hafte
then come for just one or ke liye d-jd,o.
two weeks.
was in the very act of writ- Mai likhtd hi thd ki wuh bol-
ing when he cried out. utJtd.
1 Tashrif, lit. honouring.
2 Agar "if" understood. Agar and jab are often idiomatically
omitted. To if it begins a clause is a correlative.
194
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
I had no sooner finished writ-
ing than he cried out.
Probably no party has ever
before had such good sport
(lit. scarcely has any party
had such good sport).
He is a murderer and worthy
of death (killing).
He has murdered three men.
Well, I \vll let you off for your
father's sake.
According to our religion, it
is unlawful to drink wine.
I won't do it, not even if I be
killed.
I then suspected that it was
the chaukidar who had
stolen the watch.
Although J reasoned with him
to my utmost, still he
would not listen.
Herd likhnd hi tha ki wuh
bol-utha.
Shay ad hi aisd shikar ki-n
"parti " ko naslb hu,d ho.
Wuh khunl hai, qatl ke qdbil
hai.
Us ne tin ddml (or pi. ddntli/o)
kd khun kiyd hai.
Achchhd, tumhdre bap k< Him:,
se turn ko chhortd hu.1
Mazhab ke lihdz se *lmrdb
jnnl a Itardm hai.
Mai yih kam nahl karuga-
agarchi mm mar a hi kyfi
na-jaM.
Tab mujhe shubha hu,d ki
chaukl-ddr hi ne gfuin chu-
ra,l 8 (hogl *).
Mai ne us ko lakh 6 (or hazdr 6)
samjhayd magar Uf> ne na-
mana (or men ek na-sunl).
' The present tense to signify the immediate future The future
tense would indicate a more remote time, or an action depending on
a condition.
2 Sharab is feminine.
3 Churana, tr., " to steal "=chori karna.
* As the word ahubha is expressed, the hogl, the sign of a doubtful
tense should properly be omitted.
*> Lakh 1,00,000, and hazar 1,000. in such sentences give the idea of
" although" and " a great deal."
LESSON 52. 195
The more medicine I take, J€ jft dawa.i pita hti, tn tti
the more ill I become. blmari barhti jati hai.
When you happen to come (Agar or jab ') turn yahS, phir
again, bring your gun with a.o to apm banduq bht sath
you. lete-ana "z (or lekar ana}.
When he becomes hungry he Jab bhukha hoga wiih klid hi
will certainly eat it ; there's lega ; mere kahne kl kya
no need for me to tell him. zarurat?
LESSON 52.
(a) — ChUki "because" begins a causal clause (periodic
sentence); and has for its correlative is liye "therefore/' as :
chUki turn sack bole (is liye) mat tumhe chhor-deta hn '' as you
have told me the truth I'll let you off."
As a rule the causal clause should precede the principal
clause. The causal clause, however, may follow the principal
clause (loose sentence) ; in this case it is usually introduced
by kyuki, or is liye ki, as : mai kal sham ghar se na-nikla,
kyEki (or is liye ki) tumhara intizar tha " I did not set foot
outside my house yesterday evening, as I was expecting
you."
Remark. — Chtiki may introduce a causal clause following
the principal clause, and ky&ki and is tiye ki may introduce
a causal clause preceding the principal clause; but this is
considered inelegant.
(&) — Kis liye, kis waste, are vulgarly used for is liye. etc
" therefore." as : mai sham ko wahs, na-ja-saka. kis liye (for
is liye) ki d/ajtar se a-kar thak-gaya.
I " If" is often, as here, idiomatically omitted.
* But tu leta ana.
196 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Jo ki for chuki is old.
(c) — Az bos ki "inasmuch as, because," is not, now, much used:
its place is taken by chuki: sometimes it means simply "because,"
and sometimes it gives an idea of excess as in, az baa ki mal thaka /m,a
tha mal ko,l kam na-kar saka " as I was much tired, I was not able to
do any work."
(d) — Hdl-dn-ki is " whereas, although." For yd " whereas."
vide L. 35, (e) (2).'
(e) — The conjunction ki " that " has many significations as
may be seen from a study of the following : —
(1) Ma'lum hu,d ki chor kaun hai "it became known (Ota I)
who is the thief.1 "
(2) Mai gundh nahl kartd ki Khudd se dartd hu " 1 do not
sin as, because, I fear God." Is sabab se mal bar bar piic/i//tn
hu ki turn mujhe sack jawdb do "I repeatedly ask this a* I
want a truthful answer."
(3) Thon hi dur gaya tha ki air- para " he went only a short
distance, when, before, he fell."
(4) Mai nahl, jdnta hu ki (or ay a, or ki ay a) naliju achchha
hogd yd burd " I do not know if? whether, the result will be
good*or ill " : indirect narration.
(5) Is kitdb ko chdhte ho ki usko "do you want this hook
or that ? "
(6) Us ne muchho ko td.o di ki, "merd muqdbala kaioi k«r
saktd hai ? " "he gave a twirl to his moustaches saying thai ?
none could compare to him."
1 In such sentences kaun is a relative pronoun.
2 Never agar. " If" when it means " whether " is aya or ki.
3 There must be some indication in the clause to show that ki has
this elliptical sense : you could not, for instance, say mere pas a>/a ki
mal nahl ja ,uga.
LESSON 52. 197
(7) Mai hi tumhdri ta'rif nahl karta, ki ' tumhdri ta'rif to
sard zamdna karta hai "I alone am not praising you, but,
rather, nay, all the world is doing so."
(8) Mai is dar se ki * mujhe ko,i dekh na-le darakht ki dr me
chhip-gayd " for fear lest* any one should see me I hid behind
a tree."
(9) Mai darakht ki dr me chhip-gayd kis ko.i mujhe
dekh na-le " I hid behind a tree so that, no one might see
me."
(10) Mai ne irdda kiyd ki* " Chalu " " I thought of * going
(lit. I made this intention that, 'Let me go ')."
(11) Wuh ddmi ki6 (or jo ki or jo) parhnd nalii jdntd,
ndddn hai "the man that6 (who) cannot read is ignorant, he
is an ignorant man who cannot read " = jo ddmi parhnd nah~i
jdntd (wuh) ndddn hai.
(12) Mai khush hu ki or (jo) 6 turn d.e "I am glad that you
have come, in that you have come" ; turn ne bari khair-khwdhi
ki ki (or jo 6) mufsido ko dabdyd " you did a great service in
putting down the rioters."
(13) Mai apni jagah par khard 7 kd khard rah-gayd ki wuh
dyd bhi, aur chald-bhi gayd "I remained standing as I was,
while he went and returned."
1 Ki here=balki.
2 For mabada (or vulgarly mat) or aisa na-ho ki.
3 For ta ki " so that."
* Direct narration.
5 Ki is not a relative pronoun; wuh "he" is understood after it,
and M really means " that (he)."
' Jo, conj., " if, inasmuch, in that " ; this is not the rel. pron. jo.
1 Note that idiomatically khara is not inflected in such cases : simi-
larly aya ka aya ; soya ka soya.
108
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Remark. — Ki is often pleonastic as in ki jo, jo ki ['vide' L.
35 (ft)], ki aya, etc., etc. : qasam Khuda ki ki mai turn se n<t-
bolUga " by God (I swear thai) I won't speak to you."
(14) Ek adrm ka mama achchha ki tamam shahr ka? "is
it better for one man to perish or (rather than) the whole
city ? "
LESSON 53.
(a) — Ikhtiyar, m.
Oharaz, subs., f.. and adv
se
Matlab, m.
Mutad, L
Maqsad, m.
Fajda, m.
Sud, m.
Shukr, m.
Munasib (with dat.)
Agar, con].
Agar na ; warna, conj.
Agarchi, conj.
Jo, rel. pron.
Jo, adv.
Jo, conj.
Power, authority, liberty.
Object in mind, purpose, mo-
tive ; also adv. in short.
With this object in view.
Meaning, explanation : also
= yfaaraz .
Object, meaning, desire.
= Gharaz.
Use, benefit ; interest on
money.
Interest on money.
Thanks.
Fitting, proper.
If.
If not, otherwise.
Although
Which, that.
When.
If; in that, inasmuch.
LESSON 53.
199
Ki, conj.
Mat.
Ayd.
Pahle pahal.
Zanidna, m.
Ta'rif(k),t.
Muchh. muchhe, f .
Fasdd, m.
Fasadi, in.
Mufsld, m
(6) — As you please.
I have no choice, power, in
this matter.
He could not help laughing.
His salam
motive.
That ; in that ; inasmuch as ;
because ; when ; whether ;
if ; or : = saying that ; more-
over ; lest ; in order that ;
while ; = of ing ; also =
who, which.
Lest (vulg.) ; not (prohib.).
Whether ?
First of all.
Time ; the world.
Praise; (in writing = descrip-
tion, specification).
The moustache or mousta-
chios ; whiskers of cat, ti-
ger, etc.
Cover from view or storm, etc.
Wickedness; viciousness; de-
pravity disorder ; distur-
bance ; mischief ; intrigue ;
sedition ; discord.
Mischievous, seditious.
Mischievous, seditious (man).
Apko ikhtiyar hai ; or dp ki
ikhtiydt
Is amr me merd
kuchh natii hai.
Be-ikhtiydr hasne lagd.
as not without a Be-g&araz salam nah\ kahd
' (or be-matlab or be^maqsad .
but not be-murdd).
200
HINDUSTANI MANUAL
You should give him his de-
sire, or help him to attain
his object.
I am much obliged, under an
obligation, to you.
Thanks to God.
He died at once (lit. he fell so
ill that he had no time even
to ask for water1).
May you die alone and help-
less (a curse) !
Thank you.
He looks only to his own ob-
ject ; he is selfish.
If you mean to come, come
quickly.
I was going along when sud-
denly I saw a snake.
Since you said in your letter
you were coming, why have
you not come ?
Uski murdd pun kann minia-
sib hai.
Mai dp kd bahut mamnun hti ;
or mujh par dp kd bard
ihsdn hai.
Khudd kd shukr hai.
Wuh aisd bimdr para ki pant
bhi na-magd.
Turn at'si jagah maro ki (jaha)
ko,i tumhe pdnidewd11 na-
mile.
Ta*Rm['vide'L. 32 (/)].
Usfn apni hi gharaz (or mat-
lab or maqsad or fd\ida] par
naqar hai.
Jo tujhe and mangur hai, to
jald a.
Mat rdste me chald-jdtd tJui
jos (or ki) yak-d-yak& ek
sap nazar dyd. ,
Turn ne jo* dne ko likhd thd
ab tak kyu na-d,e ?
1 Dying people at the last generally ask for water.
2 Dewa, H.= dene-wala.
3 Jo here is the adv. " when "—jab. In Hindi ek-a-ek.
4 Jo here is a conj.
LESSON 53. 201
When I arrived there, they Mai jo l wdhti pahuchd mujhe
all fled. dekhkar sab ke sab bhdg-
ga.e.
This is the first time I have Mai ne dj dp ko pahle pahal
seen you to-day. dekhd.
(c) — (1) Masculine nouns ending in nasal n, such as baniya " grain-
merchant," have often an alternative form in 5, as baniya. Both
forms are practically declined like kutta. To decline the first form
strike off the final nasal, decline the word like kutta (or baniya), and
then restore the nasal. Thus, gen. baniye ( ~ ) ka, etc. So, too, with
dhu,a or dhu,a or dhu,a " smoke," ru,a or ro,a 2 m. " fine hair, down."
(2) Adjectives in 5 nasalized, as baya (also baya) " left-hand,'1
change the final syllable to e for all the oblique cases of the masc.
sing, and for the nom. pi. masc., as: ba,e hath (ko) chalo "go to the
left"; da,e-wale "those on the right." The feminine is -f, as: aj
pachwl [tarikh] hai "to-day is the fifth of the month," vide Appen-
dix A (c).
(d)— (1) The final silent A (in the Roman character transliterated by
short a) of masculine nouns like banda (nom. sing, and pi.) may or
may not be inflected in the singular, thus bande ka or baiida ka. The
latter form is now usual in writing, but in any case the noun is pro-
nounced as though inflected. Note the inflection bachche-wall murghl
'• a hen with chicks." The final h is not inflected in Persian construc-
tions, as: zaban i rekJkta me ( j^x^ £isuj ^,'oj ) "in the Urdu lan-
guage" ; bachcha-kushl " infanticide." Such forms as sube-dar ^^i^e
(for suba-dar )\& &JJAO ) are vulgar. The final his, of course, dropped
before the formative -o of the plural, as ; bandd ka " of slaves."
Remark. — The final 5 of Hindi masculine nouns is, however, inflected
in such compounds, as : pate-baz " fencer " ; karne-wala " doer" ; 65 ,e-
wale " those on the left."
(2) In masculines in -ya, the y may optionally be changed to hamza:
as: paya ( Ajb ) m. "leg or foot (of an animal or inanimate thing)",
pi. paye ( «LU ), or pa,e ( Jb ).; saya " shade," ace. saye or aa,e ko.
1 Jo here is the adv. " when "= 706.
2 An alternative form for the sing, is rom. m.
202 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(3) The plurals of rupaya (or rupaya),^ are rupa,e or ntpaye (or
rupa,e, rvpaye) and rupai or rfiupai.3 Rupai is also used in the oblique
cases sing., as: ek rupai ka " worth one rupee."
(e) — (1) Some feminine nouns that end in silent h, drop the /; in the
plural, as: fabhta "the Bar-tailed Tree Dove," pi. fakhtS; daf'a
( A*»'.i ) "time, etc.," pi. daf'e ( ^t*»>> )• So, too, the plural of
lasha,3 f. " carcase " is lashe, which is also the pi. of lash.
(2) Some words do not appear to be used in the plural, as : malika,*
f. "queen"; tauba, f. "repentance"; u-alida, f. "mother": banaf-
sha, f. " violet." Had plurals to be coined they would be malika,?
( ^xj *£1* ) tauba,? ( ^xj *jy ) etc.
Remark — Some other words, maso. and fern., do not seem to be
used in the plural, as: tarazu,* m. "scales" : balu. f. " sand"; darii,
f. "medicine, remedy (and vulg. gun-powder)" : and a few others.
(/) — (1) A few Persian adjectives in silent h are inflected like Hindi
adjectives in 5, as: be-chara "helpless" (fern, be-charl, masc. pi. be-
chare); taza "fresh": haram-zada "bastard, blackguard": shar-
minda "ashamed"; ganda "stinking, fetid": na-kara "useless";
manda " tired, ailing" ; kamina " low, ignoble."
(2) The feminine of banda = " your humble servant," etc., is bandl •>
and of shah-zada " prince," shah-zadi. Badi (rare), and laudl are alsci
used for bandl " your humble servant."
(g)— Nouns like dih, m. "village": shah ( &£ ) m. (contraction
of Shah); gunah,m. "fault": rah (contraction of rah) "way," end
i n an aspirated h and are regular.
1 For the Hindi rupaya ; rupaya, etc., etc.
2 The nom. sing, has other forms, as: rupiya, rupaya, rupaiya and
rupiya. The final 5 of the Hindi becomes silent h in Urdu.
» Lasha is sometimes erroneously regarded as a masculine form.
+ The plural would be tin malika, lino malika, etc. Malik Ar.
"king," malikah Ar. ( AjJU> ) "queen." In Arabic there is no final
silent h: the aspirated final h («; becomes a silent h in Persian and
Urdu. So, too, walid Ar. "father" and walida(h) "mother."
Words like ( «;Liu ) Ar. " good news," are in Urdu, masculine when
written bashara ( 8jl£j ) but feminine when written basharat (cylSoj.
6 This must not be confused with bandl, m. and f. " prisoner, cap-
tive."
LESSON 53. 203
(h) — A few Hindi feminines in -iya (properly diminutives), form the ,
plural by adding a nasal n, as : chiriya " a small bird," pi. chiriya,1
gen. pi. chiriyd ka. So, too, randiya (dim. of randl "woman," or
"widow," but in Urdu generally "prostitute"); dibiya "a small
box " : guriya " a doll " ; tiliya " a hen pullet (and contemptuously a
fat 'flapper')" ; burhiya2 " an old woman"; phuriya " a small boil
or a pimple." (These nouns being feminine do not inflect in the singu-
lar).
(i) — Mata "mother, also small-pox ,3" has in Urdu the regular
plural mata,e, but in Hindi, mata is also used as the plural. Ghata, f.
" a dense cloud," has as a plural ghata,e or ghataye.
(f) — (1) Feminines in u or o, form the plural like those in I by add-
ing a, as : saru or saro, f. " a maina," pi. saru,a.*
(2) The nom. pi. of joru is joru,a, rarely joruwa,* but an alterna-
tive form joru ,e is regular.
(k) — Dissyllables remain so in the plural, as: jagah, f. " place," pi.
jaghe 6 ^.x^Xa. (and not jagahe) ; bahan or bahin, f. " sister." pi. bahne :
magar, m. " the Indian crocodile," gen. pi. magro ka So, too, taraf,
f. " side, direction," pi.
1 Also the pi. of chiri " a hen-sparrow."
2 Burhiya can also be the pi. of burhl " an old woman." Sir George
Grierson writes: "As a general rule, both in Hindi and Urdu, the
antepenultimate of a word must be short. Hence burhiya, not
burhiya ; burhl, pi. burhiya:' Vide also L. 24 (6) foot-note.
3 "Mother," an epithet of Parvati, Durga, or* Devi, the wife of
Siva, the patroness of thags, and the goddess of small-pox.
* Note the shortening of the final u in the plural, vide L. 59 (c) (7).
In Urdu this cannot always be indicated in writing ; joru,a, etc. is
written ( ujl^J*^ )•
6 Note, too, that the Preterite of nikal-na is nikla and not nikal-a,
as might be expected), and the adjective from janam is janmi.
8 The Urdu plural is rarely used.
204 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
LESSON 54.
THE INFINITIVE.
(0) — (1) The Infinitive is both a verb and a substantive
masculine. As a substantive it can be used in any case. It
is occasionally used in the plural : vide Lesson 55 (e) .
In 'Aurat ko mama achchha nahl hai "it is improper to
beat a1 woman," it is a verb, as it governs 'aurat in the
accusative ; and the infinitive, or the whole phrase, is the sub-
ject to hai : in 'aurat kd mama achchha nahl it is obvioush' a
noun : similarly too in the phrase marne ke waqt tak " till
the time of dying, till death." If an infinitive is coupled
with a noun, both forming either the subject, or the object,
(without ko) of a verb, the infinitive usually agrees with the
noun, as : jhut bolnd achchha nahl (hai) " it is not good to
lie " ; wuh kitdb parhni bahut pasand kartd hai " he is fond of
reading."
(2) If the object have ko, the infinitive is always masculine,
as: Is kitdb ko parhnd mushkil liai = yih kitdb parhm* musli-
kil hai = is kitdb ka parhnd mushkil hai.
(3) A transitive infinite is sometimes used in an intransi-
tive sense, as : Ab wuh din dyd ki uskd beta biydhne jd-rahd
hai " the day has now arrived when his son is going to be
married," vide L. 38. (c).
(b) — In Delhi, it is obligatory to make the infinitive agree with the
noun, but in Lucknow, the final verb only is made to agree with the
noun, as : mujhe kitab parhna thl, which seems absurd.
(c) — If several infinitives are the subject of one verb, the
verb agrees with the last.
i Vide(d).
* But in Lucknow kitab parhna would be preferred.
LESSON 54. 205
(d) — In a (2) it was shown that the post-position ko des-
troys the concord of the infinitive. A similar rule holds
good in the case of adjectives, thus : gari l khafi Tcaro " stop
the carriage," but gari ko khard karo : again gari khafi karni
achchhi nahl. 'Vide ' also L. 32 (t).
(e) — The infinitive is also a noun (in the Nom.) in such
expressions, as : mujhe kohl jdnd hai " I have to go some-
where, I have an appointment " ; turn ko jana hogd (or paregd)
" you must go " ; usko jana chdhiye " he ought to go."
(/) — The infinitive is also an imperative future ; if used for
present time it is polite, but not respectful. It is either
preceded by na (vulgarly mat) in the negative, or followed
by natii. Vide also L. 32 (d).
(g) — The infinitive with ko is equivalent to the noun of
agency in its future sense, as : mat waha jane, ko hu " I intend
to go there — ma? waha jdne-wdld hu " ; wuh waha jane ko thd
lekin na-gayd " he intended to go there but changed his mind.''
It also means " to be about to," as : marne ko hu ; vide p. 152,
note 1, Eg. Tr. H.S., Part III.
(h) — (1) The infinitive is idiomatically used in such phrases,
as: tumhdri bahdduri kd kyd kahnd "what can one say of
your valour, how can one praise it enough ? ". vide L. 50 (h) ;
merd waha jana thd ki wuh mar-gay d "he died as soon as I
got there.
(2) — It is also colloquially used for the Aorist, as a kind of correla-
tive to another infinitive used as an Imperative, as: jo chahna (for
chaho) so karna " do as you please."
(3) — In the two examples, rupiya to ani jani shai hai " one can't
keep money in one's purse," and yih ek an-honi bat hai " this is an im-
possibility," the infinitives are colloquially used for the nown of
agency.
1 Note that, though definite, there is no ko. Lesson 12 (c).
206 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(i) — It is inflected before verbs of motion, as : mat dp kd
bdgjj, dekhne ko (or ke waste) dyd hit "I have come to see your
garden"; mujhe mdrne (ko) daurd = "he threatened to beat
me." It is also inflected before the verbs dend, pdnd. lagnd,
vide L. 18 (a) ; and before kahnd " to order," and vulgarly
before chdhnd.
(;')— The Present and Past Participles can be used as (i) nouns;
(ii) infinitives ; and (iii) adjectives.1
(i) As nouns : —
He awoke me from sleep, from Mujhe sole se jag ay a.
sleeping.
To a drowning man, the support Dubte ko lmkefkn asra (=sahara)
of a straw is ample. bahut hai.
By order. Kahe se.
Mind my words, believe what I Mera kaha man.
said (or am about to say).
His messenger. Us ka bheja hu,a.
A band of the defeated. Hazlmat kha,e hu,d ka ek guroh.
(ii) As infinitives : —
Immediately on hearing this. Sunte ke sath (=aunne ke 8ath =
sunte hi).
Why have you come so late, when Kyu itn\ rat ga,e [par] turn a,e ?
so much of the night has passed ?
I rose three hours (one watch) Po/wir din charhe [par] utha.
after daylight.
(iii) As adjectives : —
A speaking likeness, a life-like Muh se boUl hu,l ta*wir.
picture.
Congealed blood.
1 The Participles (and the cases where hu,a can be omitted and in-
serted) are fully dealt with in* " Hindustani Stumbling-Blocks."
207
LESSON 55.
(a) — (1) The relative may occur as both subject and object in the
same sentence. This construction is obligatory when the subject and
object are both indefinite, conditional clauses excepted ; "every one,
any one, took away whatever fell into his hands jo jis ke hath para
le-gaya (lit. "whatever fell into whosoever's hands, he took that
away"); in such sentences the correlative is always omitted.
(2) A similar construction is required with the interrogatives , as :
bolo ki kaun kis chlz ka malik hai ; ' ' tell me who is the owner of each
thing, who is the owner of what " ; bahs karte the hi kaun kya mansab-
o-'uhfla pa,ega " they were discussing who would get what rank and
office."
(3) The relative adverbs jaha, jab, jaisa and jitna may take the place
of the relatives, as : jaha se jo kuchh mujhe hath toga mal le-aya ' ' what-
ever I got from anywhere I brought it with me : " jo faqir jab mere pas
a,ega mai uako ek paisa duga " I will give a pice to any faqir when-
ever he comes to me."
Jaisa and jitna, however, admit of a correlative, as ; jo jaisa karega
waisa pa,ega "as a man acts, so will he be rewarded"; jiskl jitrii
amadanl ho utna (or usl mutjabiq) bharch kare " one should spend ac-
cording to one's income."
For place or direction, too, an adverb may be a correlative, as:
jia taraf se aya 'udhar hi ko chala " he went in exactly the same direc-
tion whence he came."
(b)—Naqsha: m. Map, plan ; picture ; design ;
diagram ; a blank form ;
drawing ; features ; pros-
pect, state of affairs.
Mushkil, subs, f., and adj. Difficulty; difficult.
Ju.d m. Gaming and gambling : yoke
(for oxen).
Ju,a khelna, tr. To gamble.
Parhez, m. Abstinence ; shunning ; diet
in sickness.
208 HINDUSTANI
Parkcz-gar, adj. and subs.
Shay, AT., f . ; (the Hindu-
stani pi. not used ') .
(c) — It is difficult to have all
the maps (or forms) ready
by to-morrow.
It is difficult to have the book
ready by to-morrow.
There is no fear he will come.
There is no hope at all of his
getting well.
It is difficult to remember so
many words.
I must first finish this.
] told him, ordered him, to go
there but he did not listen
in the least.
It is better to die than to live
such a miserable life.
A man should not turn him-
self into a woman.
One who shuns altogct IHT :
one who controls his pas-
sions.
A thing
Sab nac/Kli<' kit I ink taiyar hone
mushkil hoi.
Kitab kal ink taiyar horn in it* It -
kil hai
Us ke ane ka kuchh an flesh a
(or dar) nahl hai.
Uske achchhe hone H kuchh
bhi ummed natii.
line lafz yad Icarne* mushkil
hai.
Mujhe pahle isko tamdm karna
chahiye.
Mai ne us se uxiha jane ko
kaJtd lekin us neek na mani.8
Aise bure fine se to mama
achchhd hai.
Hard ko 'aural bannd* na
chahiye.
l The Arabic plural ashyu is used by the literate
« Though yad by itself is feminine, the compound verb yad karna i?
masculine.
3 Feminine to agree with bat understood.
* Not bannl because the logical subject ia mard.
LESSON 55.
209
The wall on this side should
be less in height.
The doors on both sides are
better shut.
Service is mere slavery.
Wine, gaming, and women
ruin a man.
She abstains from wine drink-
ing.
I am going to ' feed.'
One can't keep money.
This is an impossibility.
This sick man is not expected
to live.
I am not allowed to eat beef
(by Doctor's orders) ; also
I never take it.
Death is better than this.
They began to throw many
huge stones at the boats.
Is taraf kl diwdr uchd,i me
Team honi chdhiye.
Dono taraf ke darwdze band
hone bihtar hat.
Naukari karm aur kisi kd gh_u-
Idm banna bardbar hai.1
Shardb pirn, ju,d khelnd aur
bun 'aurato ki suhbat me
baithnd insdn ko tabdJi Icar-
detd hai.
Shardb pine se parhez karti
hai.
Mai roti khdne jdtd hu.
Rupiya to dm jam shai hai?
Yih an-honi bat hai!1
Is bimdr kd naqsha, achchha
nazar nahl dtd.
Mujhe gd,e ke gosht se parhez
hai.
Maut dm (or maut kd and) is
se bihtar6 hai.
Bare bare patthar kishtiyo ki
taraf phekne shuru' kiye.*
1 If dond were inserted after banna the verb would be hai, plural,
and not hai.
2 Idioms, for one- jane-wall, and na-hone-walt.
* Bihtar is the Persian comparative.
4 Kiye plural, as the object patthar phekne is plural.
14
210 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(d)— The Conjunctive Participle ' indicates that one act is
completed before another,- as: usne has-kar kaha. "he said
laughingly," i.e. he first laughed and then said. The Past
Participle (of transitive verbs always inflected) * indicates state.
while the Present Participle (uninflected)8 indicates act of
doing, thus: pagri badh-kar aya, "he put on his pagri and
then came." Pagri bathe* (hu,e) aya, "he came with his
pagri on his head." Pagri badhtd* (hu,d) aya, "he came
tying on his pagfi as he came."
(2) The Past Participles of transitive verbs can be combined
with any tense of the verb ' to be ' and ' become/
The Past Participles of a few intransitive verbs only that
indicate state can be so combined. Amongst the latter are
baitha hu,d tha, etc., soya hua,para (hu,a),leta (liu,a).latka.
(hu,a). If the (hu,a) of these last verbs be omitted, they max
be either the compounds of the Past Participles and hona. or
else the simple Perfect and Pluperfect tenses, etc. : baitha hai,
and baitha tha may, therefore, mean " he is sitting (is seated)."
and "he was sitting (was seated)/' or else "he has sat" and
"hehadsat." [The Participles are fully dealt with in Hindu- '
stani Stumbling-Blocks]. Vide also L. 63.
LESSON 56.
(a)-Namaz,L The Muslim pubjic prayer
(which is a kind of liturgy).
' Passive not used, vide Stumbling- Blocks. For repetition of Conj.
Part, i-ide L. 38 (g), foot note.
« Note that the Past Part, of transitive verbs is thus (adverbially)
inflected, for all genders and numbers
LESSON 56.
211
Panj-waqti namdz.
Namdz parhm (or add k.}.
Namdzi, adj.
Du'd, f.
Du'd dend.
Du'd karnd or magnet.
Bad-du'd (karnd or dend), f.
Marlium ( Ar. p. p. from rahm).
Mutawaffq.
Yaqln and or hand.
1'tibdr, m.
I'tibdn, mu'tabar.
Tapaknd, intr.
Tang, subs, and adj.
Tanga,1 m.
Prayer at the five stated
times, the prayer five times
a day.
To pray.
Punctual in prayer ; hence re-
ligious.
A blessing ; prayer in the
Christian sense.
To bestow a blessing on.
To pray.
A curse.
(Lit. pitied, blessed) ; late, de-
ceased ; (generally added
to the names of deceased
Muslims but not to those of
Hindus) .
Deceased (used for iion-Mus*-
lims).
To believe, be believed ; to
feel certain.
Trust, reliance, confidence.
Trusted, trustworthy; (of
persons, a clock, etc.) ; au-
thentic.
To drip, leak from above ; to
throb (of a wound).
A girth ; tight ; narrow.
A defile or pass.
Used on the N.-W. Frontier.
212
Tangi, f.
Tang karnd.
Tang ana.
Nisf, in.
Insaf, m.
Munsif, Ar., part.
Munsiji k.
Walid, Ar.; m.
Wdlida, Ar., f.
Sab chlz.
tiab chize.
Ghat, m.
Ghafi, H., f.
Ohdtd, H., in.
Nid, f.
Chaukna.
Chauk-parnd.
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Straits ; narrowness ; tight-
ness ; scarcity ; want ;
stinginess ; a large sack.
To contract, make narrow,
etc., etc. ; put pressure on,
worry, harass, oppress.
Be distressed, in difficulty.
Half.
Justice.
Just; an umpire; a court
munsiff, or "under sub-
judge."
Do justice ; to umpire.
Father.
Mother.
Everything.
All the things.
A landing place; a Hindu
bathing place in a river ; a
place on the river bank
whence water can be dra u n ;
a ferry.
A defile, pass.
Deficiency, loss.
Sleep.
To wake up ; be alert.
To start out of sleep (sud-
denly).
LESSON 56. 213
Saza, f. Punishment.
Bachhra, in. Calf.
Bachhera. Colt.
Bachhen. Filly.
(6) — A compound of two nouns of different genders usually
follows the gender of the second, as: aram-talabi, f. "being
fond of ease"; shikdr-gdh. f. ''hunting-ground"; db-o hawd;
f. "climate."
Sarkdr, f., follows the gender of kukumat, though both its
compounds are masculine
Qibla-gdh in the sense of "the direction faced in prayer"
is fern, according to the above rule, but in the sense of
father it is masculine.
There seems to be no good reason why pd,e-gdh, ''rank,
dignity," and khar-gdh •' royal tent, pavilion." should be mas-
culine.
Guft o gu or guft-gu, "conversation" is fern., though the
second noun is masculine (and the first fern.).
(c) — The first tendency of the verb is to agree with the
masculine or more worthy gender, as : larke larkiya khel-rahe
hat "the children, boys and girls, are playing together";
sand aur bakriya ek sdth cMrte the " the bull and the she-goats
were grazing together." Compare L. 20 (g).
Remark. — In this example, the sand is by far the more
important animaL hence the verb, though plural, is mas-
culine
(d) — There is also a second tendency of the verb to agree,
for the sake of euphony, with the last subject, and in the
case of inanimate nouns, or animals of equal value, it gener-
ally does so agree, as : sab haran aur jangll bhaise chiriyd-
214 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
kjwine se bhag-ga,l (or, not so good, bhdg-ga.e) =sab Jtaran bhag-
ga,e aur'jangK bhaise bhi.
To avoid conflict, the words dono, tino. etc., or sab, are,
when possible, inserted, and require the verb to be in the
masculine plural, as : mera Ut aur uskl hathni dono chori ga,e
(or chura,e ga,e) ; omit the dono and the verb is preferably
feminine singular, chori ga.t.
In mat ne ek sher aur etc shernl dekhi (or dekhe), the verb
is better singular feminine for the sake of euphony, but if the
verb and the last object be separated, euphony no longer re-
quires this feminine : mal ne ek sher aur ek sherni Naipdl ke
jangal me dekhe is better than — dekhi.
(e) — When several infinitives are the subject, the verb always agrees
with the last.
(/) — The plural is often used for respect, as : Jaj Sahib bare
munsif adml ' hdl " the judge is very just " ; unho m* kaha
" he said."
Such words as the King, the Governor, etc., may be singular,
but if Sahib be added for respect the verb must be plural.
(g) — When the subject is a plural concrete noun, the predicating noun
must also be plural, as : fiam yaha ke rahne-wale (not ka rahne-wala)
nahl hat " I am not a resident of this place."
If, however, the predicating noun is abstract, it remains in the sin-
gular, as : us ke qatl ka sabdb us ke doat the " his friends were the cause
(sing.) of his death"; kale adml se merl murad turn ho "by 'black
man' I mean you."
(h}— A few adjectives (Arabic part.) require a genitive, as :
ivuh sazd ke qabil (or ld,iq) hai, " he is worthy of punishment,"
1 As munsif is also a technical word for a " munsiff " it is better to
insert the word adml.
1 Unneby itself is an old form of us ne and is sing. But in un larkd
ne, the un is the plural of the demonstrative adjective wuh.
LESSON 57.
215
but wuh sazd kd mustahiqq hai: wuli rofi kd muhtdj hai "he
is in need of bread." Like qabil and ld,iq, the adjectives
tnuwafiq " like," mdtdbiq " conformably with," bardbar " equal
to, etc.." are equal to prepositions and govern the inflected
genitive. Wuh bat ka bard sachchd hai " he is true to his word,
he keeps to his appointments, etc.," is Hindi.
LESSON 57.
(a) — I don't believe it in the
least.
It might be inferred from \vhat
he said that he was in diffi-
culties.
He implied that, it might be
inferred from \vhat he said
that, it was you who com-
mitted the theft
Good or bad I'm going to do
it.
Many pears, pomegranates,
guavas. peaches, musk-
melons, water-melons, and
quinces are produced here.
I was just starting when* he
suddenly arrived.
Is bat ka mujh ko zard bhi yaqin
nahl hai.
Uski bdto se pay a jdtd thd ki
wuh tangi ki kdlat me hai.
Uski bdto se tapaktd thd ki tum-
hl' ne yih chori ki.
Achchhd ho ki (or yd) burd.
magar ham is kdm ko zarur
karege.
Yaha bahut si1 ndshpdtiya,
andr, amrud * dru, kharbuze,
tarbuz* aur bihiyS paidd
hotl ' hai.
Mai jane logo, ki * wuh d-pahu-
chd.
1 Feminine to agree with the nearest noun.
2 In Persian, and locally, amrud is " pear."
3 Tarbuz=hinduwana.
* Ki "when," denoting suddenness ; not here 706; but job mai jane
laga wuh a-pahucha, " he arrived (not suddenly) when I was starting."
216 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Your mother is lying very Tumhdrt wnUda hlntnr /win
sick (i.e., is confined to her liai.
bed).
Your mother fell ill. Tumhdri wdlida blmdr pari.
My cow, his bullock, and your Men gd,e, uskd bail, aur tum-
calf have gone to graze in lidrd bacJihj-d find ' jangal
the jungle. me charne c/a,e ha7.
When I suddenly woke up. I Jab mai nld se chauk-pard,
recollected that I was (sleep- mujhe ydd dyd ki mat ghar
ing) alone in the house. me akeld papa (huj£) M.
These women all deserve to Yih 'aurate sab H sab. snza /;«
be punished. mustahiq<] hm.
(b) — The verbal noun of agency (karne ivdld, m., "a doer")
is partly a noun and partl}r a verb, as : admi-khane-wala sher
"a man-eating tiger"; khatt ka likhne-ivdla "the writer of
the letter." In the former, ddmt is the object of khane-wala :
in ahista jdne-u'dld "a slow goer," jdne.-wdld is qualified 1»\
an adverb.
The verbal noun of agency (karne-wdld, m., "a doer") is
also a future participle, as; mat jdne-ivdld hn " I am about
to go, I am going"; yih ghofi bachcha dene-wati hai "this
mare is just going to foal." By Hindus, the words hdr and
hard are often used for wdld, but lakar-hdrd " wood-cutter" ;
honhdr "promising"; pan-hdri "a woman water-carrier,"
and a few others are also used by Muslims.
Wdld can be added to substantives also, but not usually to
adjectives; bail-wdld "the man driving the bullock; also a
seller of bullocks " ; roti-wdld " baker " ; shahr-iodld "resident
Tind, sab, etc., is always inserted in such sentences : vide L. 56 (d).
LESSON 57. 217
of a city." [Such expressions as achchhd-wald for "the good
one," are English ; they are used by servants of Europeans],
(c) — (1) The particle to is a correlative of agar and also of
jab, being in modern Urdu preferred to tab. When a correla-
tive, it can begin a clause. After dekhna, it has often the force
of " lo ! " It is often an expletive. When an enclitic, it adds
point to a speech. The instances of its very idiomatic use,
given in the previous examples, should be carefully studied.
(2) — Ntz "also," can begin a clause; but bhi. like the en-
clitic to, cannot.
(d) — Sahi is a dramatic particle often difficult to translate. It usually
means '" let there be, let us suppose, let it be admitted" ; but some-
times also " certainly ; just so, very well, pray, etc." ; na-sahl " never
mind, well one cannot." In games, etc., sdhl is an exclamation =
"ready!" Raha saha=" as much as remained, the little that was
left."
(e) — Jab is often idiomatically and forcibly used for tab,
especially before ja-kar or before IcdKi, as : ham charo ne, mil-
kar, mihnat ki, jab (or tab) jakar yih kam pura ho-gaya "the
worjc was only then finished when we all three combined " ;
jab mat Dilli a,Ugd ki turn bhi wahS, ho " I'll come to Delhi
only when you are there."
(/) — Agar and jab are frequently idiomatically omitted,
vide L. 51 (/). footnote. The Ito of the dative, signifying
motion to, i.e., before verbs of going, sending, writing, arriv-
ing, is also often omitted. (Agar wuh d-jd,e to mai faur-an
Ilahabad1 (ko) jafiga, "if (or when) he comes I will go
straight to Allahabad." Vide also L. 12.. (i).
(g) — (1) Some nouns are of common gender, as: dushman, "ene-
my" ; dost, " friend."
218
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(2) A few Hindi nouns of agency in ya are of common gender, as:
gawaiya, m., f. "singer" ; rakhwaiya, m. , f.=rakhwal, m., f. (or rakh
wala, m. and rakhwall, f.) '-guardian"; sulwaiya, m., f., vulg.,
" one who lulls to sleep," and auwaiya " sleeper."
(h) The adjective barhiya " superior, excellent," makes no change
for gender, as : barhiya chlzS.
(i) The negative does not always immediately precede the verb,
vide L. 16 (b). Note its positions in: mai yih na-janta lha, and mal
yih junta na-tha.
(j)-Qalib, m.
A mould; also the human
frame, body; body of any
animal.
Kisi la ghat me baithna (or To lie in ambush for.
rahnd or laga-rahnd).
Kharch hona, intr.
Kharch, m.
Amadani, f.
Faur-an, adv.
Chuhd, m.
Chuhi, f.
Bit, m.
Billi,1 f.
Billd, m.
Ban, H., m.
Jangal, P., m.
Ban-bila,o, m.
To be expended, spent (of
money or anything).
Expenditure, expenses.
Income ; importation of goods.
Immediately.
Rat.
Mouse.
Hole of rat. mouse, etc.
She-cat; also "cat"' (class-
noun).
Tom-cat.
Jungle (properly forest or
bushy land).
Wild cat.
1 The class-noun for
cat" isbilli, f.
horse
ghora, m., but the class-noun for
LESSON 58.
219
(a) — When several roots, infinitives, or participles follow
one another in the same construction, the finite verb is ex-
pressed with the last only, as : wuh mujhe dne jane detd hai,
'' he allows me to come and go "; jab ivuh sab kuchh khd pi-
ga,e, "when they had eaten and drunk up everything."
(b) — The conjunction 'and' is frequently omitted between
two nouns, as : Tich nlch, f. (and adj.) : " ups and downs,
vicissitudes, pros, and cons." : garm-sard (or garm o sard),
m. (and adj.) "the ups and downs of life." [This question
of Asyndeton is more fully dealt with in " Stumbling-
Blocks]."
(c) — Boys and girls.
Larke larkiya.
Big and little alike refused to Chhote bard sab ne kahd ki yih
agree.
Milk and sugar.
The old man had barely said
this, when he expired.
(d) — I have come to see your
goshawk.
I am about to die.
The late (also the dying) Raja.
Tell me its advantages and
disadvantages.
This a very up and down,
hilly, country.
manzur nahi.
Dudh shakar.
Una hi kahne pdyd ki burhe kl
jan nikal-ga,t.}
Ap ki bdz ko dekhne11 aya hU.
Ab mai marne-wald hu.
Marne-wdld JRdjd.
Is ki bura.i bhaldj batd,o.
Is mulk me charhaj utra,i ba-
hut hai.
1 Note the position of burhe, and the change of subject. Such a
construction, though wrong in English, is not so in Urdu.
2 After dekhne, the ko could not be inserted, as it occurs already
after the direct object baz ko. ' Vide ' L. 54 (i).
220
HINDUSTANI MANUAL
Alas, how full of good quali-
ties was our late friend.
He has written to a friend in
Rawalpindi.
Ah, marne-wale ' me kya kya
khubiyathl!
Apne ek dost ko Rawalpindi
[ko11] khatt likha hai.
If I hear anything about the Pinshin ka lw.1 kuchh ma'liim
pension I'll tell you.
This has just happened.
When you have yourself seen
them eating (or if you your-
self see them eating), you
will believe it (or allow I am
right).
Well, if I cannot manage to
travel (for pleasure). I can-
not.
If not half an anna, well an
anna.
Come if vou mean to.
1m ja tos kahuga.
Yih abhi hu,a hai.
Ap khud unko khate hu,e dekh-
le, tab to sahl.
Khair, agar sair-o-safar mu-
yassar nahl, na-sahi.
Adh ana na-sahi, ek ana w/w.
A.o to a.o.
Eat it or leave, you will get Khd,o to khd,o, yihi ham dete
nothing else.
Stay or not, but I'm going.
If you have anything to say,
say it ; I cant wait.
Just listen to me.
hai.
Rdho to raho, magar ham jate
hai.
Bolo to bolo, nahl to ham jate
hai.
Suno to sahl.
1 In these idioms marne-wala = "the one destined to die (and who
has died)."
2 Not, Rawalpindi ko.
a Here the correlative to clearly indicates that an agar is under-
stood.
LESSON 58.
221
Well do it (or just let me see Kar to sahl.
you do it).
All, big and little, said that Chhote bard ' sab ne kaha ki
they agreed to it.
You'd better call me names.
Pray open it.
Ah, you just see how I'll thrash
you.
Come on if you dare, or well,
just come here.
If a corpse has already got 100
maunds of earth on top of
yih thlk hai.
Gait do to sahl.
Kholo to sahl.
Dekho to sahl, ham kitnl mar
mdrte hai.
A,o to sahl.
Jaha murde par sau man mitti,
ivaha nau man aur sahi =
it, let it have 9 more ( = as Jaha ek hazdr dagh hai, ek
well be hanged for a sheep
as for a lamb) .
Let us suppose that the earth
is round — why suppose ? —
say rather it is round.
" If you won't be my lover,
well some one else will ; if
some else won't, then some
one else will."
We must love some one:
" may Farangi Mahall pros-
per ! "
hazar ek sahl.
Dunya gol sahl — sahl ke '2 kya
ma'nl ? — yU kaho ki gol hai.
" Turn nahl aur sahl, aur nahl
aur sahl."
Dil laga-lege ;" Farangi Ma-
hall* abad rahe"
1 Note that chhote is inflected, but that the formative -o is added to
the second word only.
* Ma'nl, ma'ne or ma'nq, etc., pi. masculine.
3 Farangi Mahall in Lucknow ; its women have or had a reputation
for immorality.
222 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
The little life there was left Rahi sahi jan qalih se nikal-
in me, left my body. (ja,i.
The little money I had left Raha saha rupiya bhi kharch
was also spent. lio-gaya.
Play fair and don't hit so Zior se marne H nahl w///.
hard.
I come and go here frequently. Mai yaha aya jai/n karta fifi.
Play fair and don't help him Batane H nahl ftaht.
(to an onlooker assisting an
opponent at chess, etc.).
Come, you must not ask out- Auro se pvchhne ki nahi snhi.
side help, play fair.
I am living beyond my in- Kharch,aincid,am *e zii/nda fiat
come.
Dawson's boots are not im- Aj kal Dasan l ke jute. Id nm<t -
ported now, are not kept dam nahl hai.
in the shops.
He is sulky with me, that's Wuh mujh se rutha* hit. a hai
why he won't come to see jabhls wuh mujJi w milnc
me. nahl ata.
I began to do this as early as Aj mat chhe hi baje sc yih kam
six ; that's how it is finished karne laga ; jab IK waqt tak
by now. pura huja.
I went before he had even Wuh aya bht na-tha, jabhi ma!
arrived. chald-qaya.
1 A brand of boots much in favour.
* Ruthna, sp. of equals or of children : the word contains an idea of
familiarity.
» Tabhl not so idiomatic.
LESSON 59. 223
What comparison is there (or KahU, mat kahii turn,1
can there be) between us
two ?
It is nearly finished. Thord bdqi hai.
He nearly fell off his horse. Nazdik thd ki ghore par se gir-
LESSON 59.
(a) — Balki (enhansive conj.). Moreover, nay, rather.
Magar, lekin (exceptive conj .). But.
8iwd or siwa,e, prep, and adv. With the exception of; be-
sides.
'Aldwa, prep, and adv. Besides, in addition to.
Age, prep, and adv. In front of, before (time or
place) ; in comparison with.
Sdmne, prep. In front of, opposite ; in com-
parison with.
( — ki) ni-sbat. f . , subs, and prep. Regarding ; with reference to ;
compared with ; relation ;
connection ; comparison ;
ratio, proportion ; relation-
ship by marriage ; betroth-
al.
— kebi-nisbat, in. (and f.) prep. In comparison to.
Ittild', f. Information, report.
Ittild' (lend. To inform, report.
A good example of Asyndeton. * Compare example in L. 48 (/.).
224
Ittila' -riama , m.
Muttala' k.
Goya, conj. and adv.
Nij kd, pron., adj.
Ohair, adj. and subs.
Begdna, adj.
BdJiar ka.
Ajnabi, or glsflir mulkt.
Bdshinda, m.
Rahne-wala.
Be, P.,1 prep.
Bind or bin,1 H.; prep.
Ba-gkair, prep.
Mdnind, f.,a prep.
Bdbat. f., prep.
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
A written report.
To inform.
As if, as though, so to speak.
Own ; special ; personal ; pri-
vate; unofficial.
Other ; strange ; different ;
changed for the worse :
foreign ; another person ; an
outsider; stranger.
Strange, belonging to outside ;
of unfamiliar appearance.
Of outside, strange, not of the
house ; also outer.
A foreigner.
An inhabitant, a dweller of a
town or country (not of a
house).
An inhabitant, a dweller of a
town or country and also
of a house.
Without.
Without.
Like, resembling.
Concerning.
1 Be precedes the noun, and bin either precedes or follows the noun :
neither needs the post-position. Vide Gram. Notes VII (/).
2 If it precedes its noun, it is masculine.
LESSON 59.
225
Taraf, f., prep.
Janib, f., prep.
Tarah, f., prep.
Ware (in the Punjab ure) prep.
Pare, prep.
W arlt taraf.
Parli tftraj.
Zamin se lekar dsmdn tak.
Direction, towards.
Do. do.
Manner, like.
On this side of, on the near
side of.
On the far side of.
On the near side.
On the far side.
From (beginning from) the
earth to the sky.
Except, omitting, leaving out
Let alone, not to speak of.
Chhor-kar or chhor-ke, conj.
part., and prep.
Chhor.
(b) — (1) Except and besides : " all came except Zaid " sab
a,e magar (or lekiri) Zaid nahl aya = Zaid ke siwa sab d,e, or
Zaid chhor-ke sab a,e. In negative sentences the thing ex-
cepted is sometimes totally different in kind from the general
term, as : us jangal me mai ne janwaro ke. siwa kisi adrrii ki
shakl na-dekhl :< in that jungle with the exception of animals
I saw no human form " ; idiomatically this is correct, but
logically ridiculous. Mai ne gham ke siwa kabhi rdhat na-
dckhl " with the exception of grief I had no pleasure ' ( = 1
had all grief and no pleasure").
(2) Besides : "I have other books besides these " in kitabo
ke 'aldwa (or wrongly siwa) mere pas aur kitdbe bhi hat : "I
have no other book except (or besides) these " in kitabo ke
siwa (or 'alawa) mere pas ko,i kitdb nanl.
1 This idiom has its origin in a confusion of thought, as even a native
would not say, " all the fish died except the elephant."
15
226 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(e) — (1) Most Persian and Arabic masculine nouns in -a,
and certain Hindi nouns denoting relationship, titles and
professions, are exceptions as regards declension, i.e. they do
not inflect in the singular or in the nom. pi. ; Ex. : daryd, m..
P., " river and sea " ; ddnd, P. " wise, a wise man " ; sakrd,
m., Ar., " desert " ; chacha, m., H., " paternal uncle " ; kdkd.
H. P. (ditto1); #*#», H. P. " school master" (also a title of
respect); raja, H. "a raja"; pita, S. " father"; data, S.
" giver" ; devtd or de,ota, S. " a Hindu deity."
(2) — Dada, H. " a paternal grandfather, an elder brother,"
may or may not be inflected.
(3) — Raja is in Urdu written raja, and hence occasionally
inflected.4 The plural is usually, raja log. So, too, wala is
often written wala. ' Vide ' also page 3.
(4) — Nasha,8 m., P., "intoxication," and majara* in.
" event," are declined like kuttd.
(5) — Masculines in -u or -o. as» bichchhu (also bichchhu.a
and bichchhuwd) "scorpion"; biju (or bijju or bijjo) "bad-
ger " are practically declined like mard, but see (7). So, too,
are masculines in -?, such as moti, m. " pearl." hdthl " ele-
phant," bM,t li brother." malt " a Hindu gardener." dhobi
" Hindu washerman " ; these merely insert a euphonic y in the
oblique cases plural, as : mdliyo kd. Vide also p. 2 (c).
(6) — Bha,i has a vocative bhayyd 6 ((*#) and ma,t a vocative
.
mayyd6 (lj/c). and bahin a vocative baind (luj) or bahind or
bahnd.
1 But in Urdu generally used in the Persian sense " an old slave, an
elder brother."
2 It is never inflected in Hindi.
, * # -
s From the Arabic jiLiJ or lii.
* From the Arabic tna-jarq (^fj** U) " that which happened."
& Said to be a good vocative in Bihar and Oudh, but not in Delhi.
LESSON 59. 227
(7) Nouns, masculine or feminine, ending in u, shorten the
u before the formative 5 of the plural, as : asu. in. " tear,"
* o
gen. pi. asftp lea, ^ri^flf OT (in Urdu written either fc &fj~tf
ft,
or £ cJjr~Jf but pronounced with a short u). In bu or bo f.,
"perfume," however, the final vowel remains long in the
plural, as : bu,e or bo,e. ' Vide ' also L. 53 (?').
(8) Gha,o, m. " wound, sore " has only one o in the forma-
tive pi., as : ghd,o kd.
(9) Naw, f., H. (vulg. nd,o), has, nom. pi. nawe. gen. pi.
nawo ka, etc.
(10) The nom. pi. of ga,o} or gd,e " cow," is gd.e. gen. pi.
gd,o^ M or gdyo Ted ; of ra,e or ray. f. " opinion." ra,e or rdye,
gen. pi. rd,o ka or rdyo kd.
(11) Note the following: bhau (or bho), f. " eyebrow, coro-
net of a horse's hoof," nom. pi. bhau,e or bhawe, gen. pi.
bhauwo kd or bhawd kd ; soh, f. H. " oath," nom. pi. so,e. gen.
pi. soho kd ; m&, f. " mother," pi. md,e.
(12) Paw. m. " foot," gaw. m. " village," naw. m. '''name,"
and rfSw, m. " snare, chance, etc.," may be declined regularly.
The usual modern forms, however, are pd,o, gd,o, nd,o, and
dd,o, sing, and pi. The formative pi. pawd (kd), etc., etc., is
contracted to pd,o (kd), etc., etc., so for these words there is
usually only the one form for all cases sing, and pi.
(13) The formative pi. of khdnsdmdn (vulg. khansdma), is
khdnsdmd,o (kd, etc.),(^) o^l/cl-Jli..
(d) — The logical subject of the Adverbial Participle is in
the inflected genitive, as : mere jdgte M " as soon as I awoke."
1 Biit in Persian gav Jg without a hamza.
2 There is nothing to distinguish ga,d ^^ " village" from the ob-
lique cases of ga.e ^ " cow."
228 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Its object is either in the inflected genitive or the accusative,
as : mere usko (or uske) dekhte hi, wuh uth-baitJid " as soon as
1 saw him, he sat up." Occasionally the hi is omitted, as :
fajr hole [hi] wuh rukhsat hu,a " he left as soon as it was
dawn."
LESSON 60.
(a) — Two post-positions sometimes follow the same sub-
stantive, as : ghore par se gird " he fell off his horse (lit. from
on his horse)." Ghar me, subs., f., or ghar ke log, subs., m.,
is a polite term for " wife " ; mere ghar me ne kahd = mere ghar
ke logo ne kahd = " my wife said."
Post-positions are sometimes omitted, as : tumhare hdtho
"at your hands"; tumhdri jagah "in your place"; un he.
ndm " (a letter) addressed to him."
(b) — Tak meaning " even " is not a post -position, as : ghord
tak (not ghore tak) wahS maujud thd " even the horse was
there." Wuh is makdn me kahu tak hogd, wuh is shahr tak
me nahl ( = is shahr me bht nahl) " set aside his being in this
house, he is not even in this town " ; ek bd,isikal chdUs pachas
rupai tak In le-lo " buy a bicycle, of not more than 40 or 50
rupees in value."
(c) — Balki is enhansive, it means " but" ; it always occurs
after a negative clause, as : '• I didn't beat the boy, but '
(rather) your servant did " mat ne larke ko nahl mdrd balki
tumhare naukar ne mdra.
Note the following : — Mai keld nahl khd,ugd balki dm
khd,ugd " I won't eat the (or a) plantain, I'll eat the (or a)
mangoe," (said by a child who has been refused the mangoe ;
balki is used here, as the conjunction understood is enhansive
and not exceptive) ; but mat keld nahl khd.ugd mayor dm
1 For " but " in such sentences, beginners generally write mayor.
LESSON 60. 229
kha,ugd " I'll take a mango please not a plantain " (by a per-
son offered a choice).
When "but" means "instead of" it must be rendered by
balki. Vide Footnote, page 53.
(d) — (1) Some prepositions are feminine and require kl be-
fore them, as : purab ki taraf "towards the east." If, how-
ever, they precede their substantives they require ke. as :
taraf uske,
(2) — The following prepositions are feminine : Hindi ; or
"towards" ( = taraf}; jagah "in place of" Persian: babat
"concerning"; zabarii "from the tongue or mouth of";
ba-jihat "by means of"; ba-dawlatl "by means of" (for
favourable things only, except ironically). Arabic : taraf,
janib, samt "towards, in the direction of" ; khatir "for the
sake of"; ma'rifat "by means of"; nisbat "with reference
to, in comparison with."
(e) — (1) The prepositions badle "instead " ; hawale " in the
charge of" ; zimme "in the security of" ; zan'e "by means
of," are inflected nouns with a post-position understood
With zari'e, and with hath "by the hand of," the post-posi-
tion is sometimes used.*
(2) — Similarly in such expressions as, uske goU lagl "he was
hit by a bullet " : ghori ne uske lat mart " the mare kicked
him" ; bail ne uske slg mard "the bullock gored him," the
words badan me, or badan par, are understood. Vide also
L. 20 (e).
(/) — Masculine nouns in -a often have a diminutive form
in -». as: patla, m. "a big leaf," patti, f. "a small leaf."
1 Jihat and dawlal are Ar. subs. (fern, in Urdu) with the Persian
preposition ba prefixed. Ba-dawlat lit. " by the good fortune of."
2 Kisi ke hath bechna " to sell to a person" ; hath ana or lagna " to
come to hand."
230
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
The Persian suffix cha is also used to form diminutives.
as : sunduq, m. " a large box." sunduq-cha, m. " a small box."
sunduq-chi, f. H., is a still smaller box, "a casket."
(g) — Take one out of these.
The money kept in this box
is missing.
I have searched the news-
papers from now up to four
or five months back.
These are my own private
property.
For my own special riding.
There is no outsider, stranger,
here.
A foreigner.
Who is it ? Some stranger.
"This belongs to some one
else, it is not mine," or
" belongs to some one else
not of the household/'
You appear to be a stranger
to me, I don't think I know
you.
I mean to read (or to come,
etc.). as far as this.
Thus far and no farther.
Water out of this.
From 10 A.M. to 6 P.M.
If I cannot dwell near them,
never mind.
In me se ek le-lo.
Is bakas me. Tea rupiya gum
ho-gaya.
Char pach mahine tak ke
akhbdr dekh-liye.
Yih chize men nij H hai.
Mere nij H sawari ke liye.
Yaftfi ghfiir admi naffi hoi .
Ohair mulk ka admi.
Kaun hai ? Ko,% bahir ka
admt hai .
Yih begana ma I Ixii .
Tumhart swat begana ma'lum
Jioti hai.
Mujh ko yahs tak ka irada J«ti.
Mujh ko yahl tuk ka irada hai.
7,s me ka pant.
Fa jar ke das baje se lekar
sham ke chha baje tak.
Sath rahna, pa,s ra]i»a,
hai, na-sahi.
LESSON 60.
231
All the servants with the ex-
ception of you, are scound-
rels.
Cut down every other tree.
Not one but ten rats came out
of the hole ; let alone one.
ten rats came out of the
hole.
He (or I, etc.) would rather go
to prison than pay the fine.
Call him a thief — call him
rather a robber.
A slave I don't consider him,
I consider him my son.
Forgot you say ? Why you
wilfully disobeyed me !
call
Turn ko chhof-kar sab naukar
namak-hardm hai.
Ek chhor-kar dusre darakht ko
kdt-ddlo.
Ek chhor (not chhor-ke) das
chuhe bil se nikle.
Qaid me jdnd manzur hat lekin
jurmdna deria qabul nahl.
CJior kyd, balki wuh to ddku
hai.
Ghuldm kya, mm to us ko beta
samajhtd Titi.
Bhulnd kya ma'na ? balki jdn-
bujhkar turn ne merd kahnd
na-mana.
Rascal you call him ?
him a regular devil.
As soon as he saw me. the
thief went off like a shot.
The young man was very
pleased at seeing him.
I have eaten Your Honour's
salt (I am your servant and
under obligation to be
loyal).
He made up his mind to take
them somehow or other,
for himself.
1 Feminine to agree with bat understood.
Pdjl kya ? yu kahiye ki pakkd
shaitfin hai.
Mujhe dekhte hi chor bhdg
khard hu.d.
Jawdn uske (or usko) dekhte
hi khush hu,d.
Huzur kd namak khdyd hai.
Dil me thdn-ll ' ki kisi dhab
se inhe le-lend chdhiye.
All Direct Narration.
232
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
The master stopped the rich
man's son (as he was going
out of the door).
He dashed the stone forcibly
on his head
No sooner had the schoolmas-
ter touched the stone than,
by God's decree, a cobra
issued from underneath it
and coiled round his hands.
There is a village quite close,
go straight on to that place.
He respectfully saluted.
Wuh 'djizi se kahne lagd.
Ustdd ne amir ke larke ko rok-
liyd.1
Sir par patlhar de-mdrd.*
Ustdd ne abhl patthar ko hdth
lagdyd hi thd ki Khudd ke
hukm se ek kdld sap palthar
ke niche se nikal-kar us ke
hdtho me lipat-gayd.
Pas hi gd,o hai, waha chale-
chalo.
Adab se saldm kiyd.
= Us ne 'djize se kahnd shuru'
kiyd.
LESSON 61.
(a) — " It is a long time since I saw you " : the Urdu idiom is,
" it is a long time since I did not see you " Mat ne bahut dino
se dp ko nahl dekhd (hai 8) = Ap ko dekhe hu,e bahut din hu,e.
(b) — Jab " when " and jab tak " until " are not followed
by a past tense unless the verb in the Apodosis and Protasis
(jazd aur shart) are both in past time : " When he has gone
I will inform you " is jab wuh jd-chukegd to mm tumhe
khabar karugd. If, however, the second clause is in the Im-
perative, the first must be in the Aorist or Present Subjunc-
tive, as : Jab wuh jd-chuke mujhe kjiabar do " tell me when
he goes, or has gone." Vide L. 38 (6).
1 Rok-liya =stopped the boy near himself.
8 Marria, here gives the idea of force and not of impropriety.
•• Better with hai.
LESSON 61. 233
(c) — (1) Adjectives are used as adverbs, as : Wuh bar a
zakhm* hu,a " he was badly wounded " ; ghorl achchhi jati
hai " the mare goes well " ; DilU H zaban ko achchha l kahte
hat "they speak well of the Delhi dialect."
(2) In wuh 'aurat achchha gati (or siti, etc.,) hai, " she
sings (or sews, etc.) well," the cognate infinitive gana (or
stna, etc.) is understood, and achchha agrees with it.
(3) Examples of adverbs : Din ko " by day " ; adhl rat ko
" at midnight" ; dkhir ko " a't last " ; chard taraf se " on all
sides"; har tarah se "in every way"; kis tarah se? "in
what manner? " : tin sal se " for the last three years" ; aj
kal, or in dino me " now-a-days, in these days"; waqt par
" in time" ; be-mahall " out of due season " ; us din " that
day " ; us sal me " that year " ; wuh us se liyaqat me barh-
kar (or ziyada) hai " he is the more able man " ; jaldH (for
jaldl se*) " quickly " : roz " every day " (for roz roz or har
roz). Vide also p. 10.
(4) Post-positions are added to even adverbs, as : Ab se
•• henceforth " ; jab se ;t since " (temporal) ; kab se ? " since
when ? " ; kahS, se ? " whence, of what place ? " ; jab tak
•' until " ; tab tak :: so long " ; kab tak ? " how long ? " ; ab
tak " till now " ; ydha tak " thus far, or to this degree " kaha
tak ? "how far, or to what degree ? "
(5) The adv. aksar, '• often." can be used with any tense,
but barha with a past tense only.
(d) — (1) When two nouns are commonly coupled together without
aur " and," usually the second only takes the formative termination
5, as : Larke larkiyo ko " to boys and girls " ; chhote bard ka "of small
and great"; nadl natd me (more colloquial than nadiyd aur riald mS)
" in streams and nullahs."
' Vide Lesson 32 (i). * But jald is an adj. and adv.
234 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(2) If, however, the words are coupled by aur, the full form is usual,
as: Jhagrd aur lara,iyd ko (or not so good ! fhagrf lara,iyd ko) " quar-
relling and strife."
Remark. — Pahard ke ghar aur wirand mS "in mountain caves and
wild places " is more euphonious and therefore preferable to pahard
ke ghard aur wirand mS.
(e) — A nominative is often, before a relative, used abso-
lutely, at the beginning of a sentence, as it were to intro-
duce the subject : Mera bha,t jo janqal trie, ja-raha tJia ek
sad a ne us ke slg mara " my brother who was going along
in the jungle, a bullock gored him (a bull gored my brother
as he was going along in the jungle)."
(/) — (1) Nouns denoting number, measure, quantity,
weight, length, are put in apposition, as : Ek kori ande " a
score of eggs " ; ek gifas pdnl " a glass of water " ; ck </<i:
kapra ; ek kos zamln ; ek ser dudh.
(2) Note the following : Ek shakhs Muhammad nam " a
man named Muhammad " ; darya ka lafz " the word darya " :
jnpal ka darakht " a peepul tree " : Dilli ka shahr or better
Dilll shahr " Delhi City '* ; Gaga darya " the River Ganges " :
Panjab ka mulk ''the country of the Punjab"; Himalaya
PaJiar or Himalaya ka Pahar " the Himalayan Mountains."
(g) — ^The izafat ("connection"). In Persian the adjective usually
follows its noun and is then ' connected ' to it by a short t (pro-
nounced in India e *) which, however, is seldom written ; thus mard-c*
nek vJjj tj* "good man." The izafat also supplies the place of the
genitive case as I&L j^* mard-e* Sbuda " man of God."
After an 5 or u, the izafat is written as a ye ; as : Rii,e K&iib ^^
w.^i. "beautiful face." After a silent h or an \, it is written as a
hamza, as: Banda-e^ ghuda lixi. ItxL "Creature of God": mat/l-e*
darya Uji 1*4*1* " fish of the sea."
' As these two words are not habitually associated.
2 Sod " a bull or a stallion."
3 This pronunciation e is peculiar to India and Afghanistan.
LESSON 62. 235
n classical Persian, animate nouns add an to form the plural
and inanimate ha ; as mardan "men"; sal-ha "years." Before an,
a silent h becomes g, as, banda, bandagan.
(»)— In imitation of Arabic, -at is often added to lifeless Persian
nouns to form a plural, as: dihat, m. pi. " villages, the country" (as
opposed to town); kaghazat, m. pi. "documents" ; zewarat, m. pi.,
" ornaments, jewels."
In chitfhiyat " letters," it is added to a Hindi word, but such a form
is vulgar. Vulgar, too, is such a Persian form as : riamajat " letters,"
pi. of nama.
Remark. — In Arabic, -at is the regular fern, pi., as: halut , Ar.
" circumstances," which is masc. or fern pi. in Urdu. In Urdu, the
gender is usually that of the singular.
(?) — (I) Arabic Declension.
Singular. Dual. Regular Plural.
f - , , 9 *
Nom. jJka* hazir't", d^^ haziran*. cJjj**^ hazirun".
" present.''
Gen.
hazirayn*.
Ace.
Remark. — The final short vowels and the tanwln are dropped in
Urdu and in modern colloquial Arabic. The ace. sing, with the tan-
win is used in Urdu as an adverb, as : ittifaq'"1 " by chance."
(2) In Persian and Urdu, the oblique cases only of the Dual and
Plural are used (except in quotations from the Qur'an), as: farafayn
"both sides, the two parties"; walidayn "parents" (walid "fa-
ther"); nazirln "spectators"; akhirin " posterity, those that come
after."
(k) — The Parsian comparative and superlative are formed by adding
tar and tarln, as : bad " bad " ; bad-tar " worse " : bad-tarln " worst."
(I) — Persian vocatives are : ay dost or dosta ; ay Khuda or Khudaya.
LESSON 62.
IDIOMS.
I swear by God I don't know Vallah ! Billdh ! agar mat jan-
who he is. td hn ki kaun hat.
236
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
He didn't want to do it but I
made him ; I sat on his head
till he did it.
Here is eight annas as a pour-
boire.
Do. do.
Here is a small present.
You ran a great risk in going
to sea in such bad weather.
To despair of life.
T detest such conduct.
I compelled him to write it.
What on earth shall I (say) 1
There was not the least bene-
fit from it.
He ; he's a devil to sleep ; he
beats the dead. v
A confounded (lit. unfortu-
nate) cock woke me up by
its crowing.
He is so ill — don't even ask
me about it (or 1 seek
refuge with God).
Wuh yih kdm kartd na-thd
magar mat ne us ki gar dan
par sawdr ho-ke dkhir its se
karwa-chhora.
Ath ana mithdj khane ke waste
(to a Muslim).
Ath ana ghi khane ke ivdxte
(to a Hindu).
Ap ke pan (or juti) ke toastc-
(to a religious guide).
Ap ne bart jokhim uthd.t ki
aise mausim me daryd kd
safar kiya.
Jan se hath dhond.
Aisi chdl se mai 'addwat rakh-
td hu.
Mat ne its se likhivd-chhord,
or mai ne its ko likhne par
majbur kiya, or mat ne jabr-
an us se likhwaya.
Kya khak (bolu) (or any verb).
Khak bht fa,ida na-hu,d.
Wuh to bald ka sone-wdld hai ;
murdo se shart badh-kar sotd
hai.
Ek kam-bakht murgh ne bang
(or dzan) dekar mujhe jagd-
diyd.
Wuh aisd sakht bimdr hai ki
mat puchh (or — Khudd ki
pandh) !
LESSON 62. 237
To ask after a person, after his Kisi ki kjiair o 'afiyat puchhnd.
health and welfare.
Most probably he is the man. Ho na-ho uruht admi hat.
All my animals have gone Mere sab janwar lagre ho~ga,e
lame; one, and only one, le-de-kel ek kumait ghort
a bay mare is left. bach-ga,%.
To seek distraction from grief. Gham ghfdat karna.
I pride myself on this. Mujh ko is par naz hai.
He has one daughter left and Allah amiti* H ek larkt us ke
she is being reared carefully. Wi rah-ga$ hai.
I brought her up by frequent Allah amlri* karke usko pala.
prayers.
It is after half-past four.8 Char baj-ga,e hai, pSch ka
'amal hai.
How nice ! Ajt wah wa*
Good gracious no ! Ajt wah.*
This district is very lightly Is zila' ka band o bast bahut
assessed. h? narm hai.
It is scarcely exaggeration to Agar mat us ko Hatim kahu
say that he is a Hatim to shay ad ht mubalagha ho.
Ta,l.
A nice sense of honour ; jeal- Ghairat, L
ousy in a good sense : also
shame, emulation.
Are you not ashamed to mix Bun 'aurato ke sath milne me
with bad women ? ghairat ndhl ati ?
1 Le-de-ke, after adding and substracting.
2 Amen.
3 Sometimes, incorrectly, for any time after four.
* Note the difference in meaning between these two. Vide also
L. 32 (6) lines 1 to 5.
238
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Neither will there .be nine
maunds of oil nor will Radha
dance (a reply to one who
makes an impossible stipu-
lation) .
Some one's house burns and
another warms himself (an
ill-wind, etc.).
If you have life you have the
world ( = health is wealth) .
To get no benefit at all.
He will certainly come.
I thought you would nofc come
but you did come.
To-day you are bullying me ;
to-morrow perhaps you too
may fall into the clutches
of a tyrant.
To be scattered ; also to be
ruined, undone.
Hang, confound, this boil.
Lady, you are not smiling,
you are dazzling me with
lightening (of your teeth) .
The boil came to a head and
burst and formed a wound
— wound do I say — rather
it was a chasm.
He will come soon.
What can one say of his learn-
ing (i.e. it is vast) ?
Na ntm man lei hogd na Radha
ndchegi ( pro verb ) .
Kisi kd ghar jale, ko,l tape.
Jan hai, to jahan hai (pro-
verb).
Na dunyd mill, na <Iin.
A-gayd par d-gayd.
Ham to samajhle the ki turn
na-d,oge lekin d,e par d,e.
Turn dj mujhe satdte li<>. k<il
turn bhi kisi zdlim ke pale
paroge.
Tin. terah, nau, atthdrah hond.
Is phore kd burd ho!
Hastl kyd ho, goyd bijliya
girdti ho.
Phord pak-kar phul-kar ek
zakhm — zakhm kyd — ekghdr
ban-gayd.
Wuh dyd kd dyd (pi. d,e ke
Us ke 'ilm kd kya kalind (or
puchhnd) hai?
LESSON 63. 239
To concilia tea person; tocause Manana, tr.
to agree or believe; per-
suade ; appease : desire ;
pray to God or to Plrs.
Enjoy yourselves. Turn khushl mand-lo.
To celebrate (a marriage, Rachand.
etc.).
This is many degrees better. Yih ba-darja-hd J bih-tar hai.
LESSON 63.
Some Compound Verbs, etc., Prepositions, Collocation,
(a) — The inflected past participle of transitive verbs pre-
fixed to ddlnd, dend and lend, has the signification of being
on the point of doing a thing, as : —
Baghiche kd nds kiye-ddltd hai. He is on the point of quite
destroying the garden.
Mai uthdkar diye-detd hti. I'm just going to pick it up
and give it to you.
Mm kahe-detd, hn. Now I'm going to tell you (in
confidence) .
[Mai kah-detd M. I tell you out, plainly].
Batore-letd M. I'm just going to collect
them.
Uthd,e-letd h%. I'm just going to pick it up or
(I'll put up with, suffer, it).
(6)— (1) In L. 26 (a) (1) and L. 30 (b), it has stated that
a present participle prefixed to jdnd or rahnd indicates pro-
gression, etc. The inflected Past Participle prefixed to jdnd
indicates (i) doing a thing continually (with breaks), or (ii)
I Darja-ha, Pers. pi. of darja. Bih-tar Pers. comparative of bih.
240 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
doing a thing continuously for a fixed period, or (iii) con-
tinuing an interrupted action. Frequently, but not always,
these compounds are interchangeable. Note, however, that
tu hase-jd is " go on laughing," but tu hastd ja is properly
" go laughing, or while laughing."
Examples : —
Is kitab ko parhe-jd,o (or Continue to read this book
parhte ratio 1). now and then.
7.9 kitab ko do ghante tak Continue to read this book
pa?he-ja,o (or parhte-raho)."1 for two hours.
Tu parhe-jd mat sone Jn ko- Go on with, continue, your
fthish kar-rahd hn. reading; I'm trying to
sleep.
Tu hase-jd.s Go on laughing, don't stop.
Jab us ke sdmne jd,e to hastd When you go to him, go with
ja* a laughing countenance.
Bam par bam gire (or gird) Bomb after bomb fell, but he
magar wuh sotd ratio,. went on sleeping.
(2) — The Present Participle prefixed to jdnd is used for an
action running concurrently with another. It may be used
for continuing an interrupted action, but does not give this
meaning as clearly as the previous construction.
Turn khdte-jd,o (or better You go on eating, I am read-
khd,e-jd,o), mm parh-rahd ing.
ftfi.»
Mai parhtd jd,u, turn khate- I will read while you go on
ja,o (or khdte-raho) . with your eating.
1 Parhte-ja,o could be used here.
* Parhte-ja,o could not be substituted here.
•'• Hrtxtu-ja not idiomatic here.
* Not hUse-ja.
6 Parhta ja,u not so idiomatic.
LESSON 63. 241
Gafi me yahn se DilK tak sote- Go to sleep in the carriage
ja,o (or sote chale-jd,o). till you reach Delhi.
Parhte-ja,o (or parhe-ja,o). Go on with your reading.
Turn jdte to ho magar is nazm Well, you are going; but go
ko bU parhte-ja,o. after reading these verses.
(3)—So,e-ja,o, ( Go on W]'th y°ur sleeP, re'
< sume your sleep (to one
Sote-raho. / 1.1.1.
v. who has been awakened).
Pahre par wuh so so jdtd tha. He kept on falling asleep on
his beat (or during his
watch).
So-jana. To fall asleep.
So-rahna. To go to sleep deliberately.
(c) — (1) Note the constructions with the following prepo-
sitions and vide also page 11, VII.
Be mere kahe hu,e, )
mthout mv bidding.
Be mere kahne ke )
Belarke(ke). Without the boy.
Ba-g]iairl kha,e hu,e.~\
Kha,e ba-g^air. L Without eating.
Ba-g^air khane ke, J
Eila, -uzr kiye hu.e.}
Without making excuses.
Bila 'uzr karne ke. )
Bild 'uzr. Without excuse.
* ?
Ba-cfhair us ke. )
Ba-ghair * ijazat (ke). Without permission.
1 Or ba-ghair khane kf. When bdrghair is used with a verbal noun
the ke is omitted.
* Bi-gbair with both an abstract and a concrete noun.
16
Us ba-g&air; ,
Without him
242 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(2) — Mujh pas. (vulg., vide ,
L. 20 (e) Rem. II),
Near ine.
Mere pas,
Pas mere.
Pith (ke) pichhe. Behind the back of.
Hdjat (ke) mmvdfiq. Suitable to the needs of.
Pd,o (ke) tale. Underfoot.
Nodi (ke) par. Across the river.
Shahr (ke) bdhar. Outside the town.
Remark. — Note that the prepositions in (2) follow their
noun in the examples given. If they precede their noun
they govern the full genitive, as : Bdhar shahr ke.
(3) — Ha is a preposition signifying " at the abode of/' as :
Mere ha ( = the French chez moi) il at my house, or I have."
vide L. 20 (e) (1). Rightly or wrongly. yaJtM is frequently
used for JiM.
(d) — (1) Note the collocation in the following : —
(i) Waha ek ghar hai, bahut bard " there is a cave there,
very large " : the position of the adjective here gives great
emphasis.
(ii) Waha ek ghar bard hai : less emphatic.
(iii) Waha ek bard ghar hai: least emphatic, i.e. not em-
phatic.
Remark. — Khdnd achchhd do is more emphatic than achchha
khdnd do. Khdna do achchhd is colloquial only.
(2)— (i) W uh ddnd hai jo kabhi dhokhd nahl khdtd " he is
a wise man who is never deceived."
(ii) Ddnd wuh hai jo kabhi dhokhd .nahl khdtd " \\ ise is
he who is never deceived, or he is wise, etc. : more emphatic.
LESSON 64. 243
(3) — Similarly in a relative sentence if the demonstrative
clause is placed first, emphasis is laid on it,, as : Aur wuh
kikmat jis se mlr-shikar ne bahri ko phJSLs-liya mujh se bayan
H "and the device by which the fowler snared the pere-
grine, he explained to me." This is more emphatic than
aur mujh se bayan kiya ki kis kikmat se mir -shikar ne bahri
ko pMs-liya "and he explained to me the device by which,
etc."
(4) — Aj ek kulang ka ghpl sir par hokar guzra "to-day a
dock of common crane passed overhead." This should be
aj kulang ka ek ghol . Such errors in collocation, though
common, should not be imitated.
(e) — The verbs harna "to lose a game or battle." jltna "to
conquer," and janna " to give birth to," do not take ne, as :
Wuh yih larka jani " she gave birth to this boy." Vide also
L. 44 (e), and " Hind. St. Blocks."
LESSON 64.
(a) Further examples of idiomatic Repetition : —
9 t
l(^j ££.;*- Still hungry as before.
A very fool, a fool among
fools.
In their very midst.
«i
i .jj* Ujlo ,^1 ^*u ^-e ««jf A«5f Up with you, I mean to kill
you.
1 Note the absence of the dot over n to indicate Anuswar or nasal n
of Hindi. This nasal can only be so indicated when a final letter.
244 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
tew may gftin y°ur
vour.
florae KWZe steam keeps con-
stantly rising.
f t
cJJoU A«£*$J c;fo d&* He began to beg from shop
to shop (from each shop).
\*\) £_ ^i ^d Rajas of various countries.
What, are there three several
kinds?
Many a mickle makes a
muckle.
«Jj| L jj»ji He caught four fish, one of
eoc^ colour.
They came out in twos, two
by two.
J^l J3\ / u^ J^ ot He separated the sticks from
one another.
Right months were passed in
hoping on
J^ Walking on and on, I reached
home.
*J The place was quite close, so
^A UJl;4j -A-. they just went there on
/oo< only.
, S. and kirpa H. f.
2 Note the absence of the dot over n to indicate Amiswar or nasal n
of Hindi. This nasal can only be so indicated when a final letter.
LESSON 64. 245
^jU In their very hands, or from
hand to hand.
Ly* £. L?» »j They died, just as they were
in their sleep.
After these repeated blows,
blows on blows.
Various l nice clean clothes.1
j of; ^ isil,. Let us stay here just this
night.
Something or other.
Something quite different.
The boat sank by degrees.
The watchman ^ep< o??, fall-
ing asleep on his beat (or
during his watch).
(6) Miscellaneous idioms : —
( ^* »jy$j b ) u^>*? *J They died of hunger, were
% starved to death.
<*_ 2 UU \j«> \SS *# This dog is about to die.
£L » 13U. l^T »j He is just coming.
^3 K v^a. At that very moment.
He was deep in the thought
of burying the corpses.
1 Not " very clean clothes."
2 Note this idiomatic use of jana after a past participle.
3 A reiterative, vide L. 48 (d).
240 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
LESSON 65.
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS.
The following grammatical questions are based on mis-
takes actually made by pupils. The letters and numbers
that follow the questions indicate where the answers are to
be found.
(a) Correct the following : —
Yih kya kitab hai " what book is this ? " L. 5 (/>).
Mat ne bold ki shor na karta hu "1 said that I was not
making a noise." L. 13 (c) (1) and L. 7 (c).
Bara sahib aya Imi "the Deputy Commissioner (or other
senior official) has come L 16 (d).
Lajrkd! men bat suno " boy! listen to me." L. 13 (h).
Us ne kahne laga ki chhoro mat "he said 'don't let it
go.'" L. 18 (a).
Darakjito par kawwe bahut kahte hai " the crows are making
a great noise in the trees." L. 11 (a).
Barf pant tJianda karta hai " Ice cools water." L. 12 (e).
Bahuteri dudh shakar maujud liai "there is plenty of milk
and sugar." L. 20 (</).
Kaun yih kuttd hai " what dog is this ? " L. 5 (6).
Wuh darakht ko charhd "he climbed the tree." L. 11 (d).
Kaun wuh log hot " who are those people ? " L. 5 (b).
Ai quR ! ek rupiya hazir hai; le-lo "here, coolie, is one
rupee ; take it." L. 9 (a).
M ai samjha ' ki. ek jan-war dekhkar bhagia hai " 1 thought
1 In modern Urdu the ne is omitted with samajhna (but not of
course with samjhana).
LESSON 65. 247
that he was running away from some (wild) animal that he
had seen." L. 12 (e).
Sipahi ne kafia ki Jarnel Sahib Jiazir naht hai " the sepoy
said that the General sahib was not at home." L. 9 (a) and
L. 16 (d).
Kisi do minit me a.o "come in about two minutes' time."
L. 8 (&)(!).
Ek naukar ko sath le-a.o " bring a servant with you."
L. 12 (c).
Us ne kis kutte ko bhej-diya hai " what dog has he sent ? "
L. 12 (d).
MujTi par bukhar charha "I've got fever." L. 11 (d).
Ka,t ate hai "several (men) are coming." L. 8 (6) (1).
Mai ne usko khd-chuka hai "I have finished it. eaten it
up." L. 15 (a).
In me se ko.i kharab Jiat "some of these are bad." L. 8
(b) (2).
Ghore ne pakrajnahi diya "the horse did not allow itself
to be caught." L. 22 (a).
Wuh to bahut bara sahib hai "he is a big person, of high
position." L. 16 (d) (1), foot-note.
Farman 'AU bhej-do "send Farman 'Ali." L. 12 (d) (2).
Ai chaudhari ! yih rupiya quliyo me bat-lo " here, chau-
dhan, go and divide this money amongst the coolies." L.
22 (c) (1).
Mai ne us ka sath diya " I accompanied him." L. 22 (a).
Mai us ke pas kabU kabln jata "I go and see him occa-
sionally." L. 18 (e).
248 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
In kitdbo ko turn ko paj-hnd chdhiye " you must read these
books." L. 12 (/).
Mai ne dne na pdyd thd "I was not allowed to come."
L. 18 (a).
Us ko ek sahib ne mujh ko fa " some sahib gave it to me."
L. 12 (/) and L. 13 (a).
Wuh kisi mem-sahib ne mujhe diyd "some English lady
gave it to me." L. 12 (g).
Wuh us ko andar ane diya " he let him enter." L. 18 (a).
Mai, to jane natft sakid " well, I can't go." L. 18 (/).
Ghore ko jd,o "go to the horse." L. 20 (/).
Mai ne bahut hi dsdm se us ko mkal-chhofd " I expelled
him with the utmost ease." L. 23 (g).
Wuh jane chdhtd hai " he wishes to go." L. 20 (6).
Dur se mas j id ke mandr ne dikha,l dl "the minaret of the
mosque was seen from a distance." L. 22 (a) and L. 13 (c)
(4).
Jaj sahib bafd 'adil hai; kabhi kabhi qaydiyo ko mar-
baithta hai "the (English) judge is very just; sometimes he
flogs prisoners. L. 16 (d) (1), foot-note and L. 23 (a) (1).
Mai ne chal-diya " I went right off." L. 22 (a).
Yih kutta bahut kala-sa hai "this dog is very black." L.
28 (c).
Tih pattd kis se kutte ka hai "to which dog does this
collar belong ? " L. 28 (d).
Mai ne jhuk-kar saldm kar-mard " I made a profound
obeisance, I bowed low." L. 23 (b).
Mai ne us kd sdth ho-liyd "I accompanied him." L. 22
(o), foot-note.
LESSON 65. 249
Mai roz roz is ko kar-rahd hu " I do this every day." L.
23 (d) (3).
Aj ham ne hamdre bap ko dekhd hai " I saw my father to-
day." L. 27 (a).
Mai, ne us ko khd-gayd " I ate it up." L. 22 (/) foot-note.
Larki nahr me kudi aur jan bujhkar dubkar man " the girl
jumped into the canal, and drowned herself." L. 23 (c) (1).
Ap kyd kahte ho " what is Your Honour saying ? " L. 31
(a) (b).
Mai Khudd ka bard mamnun hu " thanks to God." L. 32
(/)•
P&ch ghora maujud hai " there are five horses present."
L. 32 (g) (1).
Mai wahs, jane ka " I intend to go there." L. 32 (e).
Mai jan bujh-kar yahti, so-jala hu "I sleep here on pur-
pose." L. 23 (d) (1).
Mere kam-bakht ka puchhne-wala kaun hai " who is there
who cares what becomes of unfortunate me ? " L. 28 (h).
An Farman 1AU. dekho, tattu rassi tofkar bach-gaya hai
"0 Farman 'Ali, look! the pony has broken loose." L. 32
(b) and L. 36 (t) and foot-note.
Huzur kaha jate ho "whither is Your Honour going?"
L. 31 (a) (b).
PSch rds ' ghofe maujud tha "there were five 'head' of
horse there." L. 32 (g) (1).
Jab wuh did hai mujhe khabar do "tell me when he
arrives." L. 35 (g).
1 Raa m., for Ar. rafs (J»\) " head." Ras f., H. " rein."
250 HINDUSTANI MANUAL
Sa,is se kah-do ki yahS, a,o "order the sais to come here."
L. 36 (e) and foot-note.
Tumhdrd bap bukhar Id ba-daulat mar-gayd "your father
died from fever." L. 60 (d) (2) and foot-note and Appendix
B (6) (5).
Jate waqt har ek ko milkar rukhsat hu,d " I said good-bye
to every one and took my leave." L. 28 (?').
Ittifdq"" men gum hu,i kitab mujh se rdste me milt "I
chanced to find my book on the road. L. 28 (t).
(6)— Translate :—
(1) He allowed him to enter (L. 18a). Years parsed u\vu v
(L. 33h). A diamond on his finger (L. 4Qd). Heaps of ru-
pees (L. 336). I was not allowed to enter (L. 186). Thou-
sands of people (L. 336). Fill the ditch with water (L. 40e/).
Mai waha jane ko hu (L. 54#). It is a long time since I sa\v
you. L. 61 (a).
(c) — Grammatical questions : —
How would you remove the ambiguity in A/> k<il> la-sltrif
ld,ege? L. 36 (/).
In what circumstances can the subject of a passive verb
be in the accusative ? L. 47 (c).
What are the peculiarities about Mujh se is jmlm.r \mr
charhd nahl jata ? L. 47 (d) (1) and (2).
Instead of the grammatical passive what are generally
used ? L. 47 (6).
Give examples of the ' meaningless appositive.' L. 48 (c).
What are Reiteratives ? Give examples. L. 48 (d).
What is the signification of the negative na at the end <>t
a sentence ? L. 43 (a).
LESSON 65. 251
Give examples of intensive adjectives. L. 48 (b) (2) and
T, 3 (a).
What is the difference between chunki and kyfiki in con-
struction ? L. 52 (a).
How is the agent of the passive expressed ? L. 47 (a) (2)
and (d) (1) (2).
What are the transitives of tutna, phatna, and phutna ?
L. 44 (c) (2) and pp. 162 and 164.
Construct sentences illustrating how ' as soon as ' ; ' no
matter how ' ; ' even though ' ; and ' rather than,' are ex-
pressed in Hindustani. LL. 50 and 51. and L. 60 (g).
Give the transitives and causals of sond, bJiigna, Ulna,
dhulnd, palna. lana, sina. bikna, lena. deria. L. 44.
How do you express "to sell to a person'' ? P. 162.
How is per cent expressed ? L. 45 (e) and Appendix A (g).
Give examples of verbs that are either transitive or in-
transitive. If in doubt as to whether a verb requires ne or
not, how would you get out of the difficulty ? L. 44 (e) and
L. 64 (e).
Can intransitives have a passive voice ? L. 47 (d) and
foot-note.
What is the difference in construction with jab talc when it
means " until " and when it means " whilst " ?
Give examples of apposition with a noun of number, mea-
sure, etc. L. 61 (/).
Give sentences illustrating the construction with the verbs
harna and fitna. L. 63 (e).
Give examples of participles used as nouns. L. 54 (?').
252 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
What is the meaning of jab jakar. L. 57 (c).
What is the difference between balki and lekin or magar,
etc. ? L. 60 (c).
Illustrate by examples how the participles are constructed
when repeated. L. 48 (a) (5) and p. 77, foot-note (2), and Ex.
on p. 245 and in L. 49.
Give an example of a nominative absolute before a rela-
tive pronoun. L. 61 (e).
Give an example of a transitive past participle used to
express state. L. 55 (d) (1) (2).
How is the antecedent to a relative clause made emphatic ?
L. 63 (d) (2).
What are the plurals of bu " scent " ; joru " wife " ; dhu,S
" smoke " ; raja " raja " ; pita " father " ; mata " mother " ;
burhiya " old woman." L 59 (c) (7) and L. 53.
How are the present and past participles constructed,
when they refer neither to the subject nor the object ?
Mention a few feminine prepositions. What is the con-
struction with these ? L. 60 (d) (1) and (2).
What is the signification of an inflected past participle
prefixed to dalna, deria, lena, and jana ? L. 63 (a) and (6).
Write a short note on the use of the infinitive and illus-
trate by examples. L. 54 (a).
Parse the sentence mujhe kahl jana hai. L, 54 (e).
What is the exception to the rule that the adjective agrees
with its noun ? L. 54 (d).
Give examples of the various meanings of the verbal noun
of agency L. 57 (6) and L. 54 (g).
LESSON 65. 253
When are jab and jab tak followed by a past tense ? L.
61 (6).
What is the nom. plural of jagah " place " ? L. 53 (k).
What are the constructions used with the adverbial parti-
ciple ? Illustrate by examples. L. 59 (d).
Give an example of an adjective, a substantive, and a
participle used for an adverb. L. 61 (c) (1) and (3), and pp.
10 and 11, and L. 18 (d) (2).
When can the substantive verb in a sentence be omitted ?
L. 18 (e).
Is tak always a post-position ? L. 60 (&).
What are the nom. and gen. plural of ga,o " village " and
of ga,e " cow," and ra,e or ray " opinion " ? L. 59 (c) (12)
and (10) and foot-note (2).
Give one or two examples of everyday euphemisms in
Hindustani. Appendix B (6) (1) and (c).
When does the Muslim day begin ? App. B (a).
Give one or two examples of Arabic broken plurals used
in colloquial.
Give examples of common colloquial words on the mea-
What are the measures of pL»* and fl*^> and what do
these words mean ?
APPENDIX A.
NUMERALS.
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
(«)-
19 MW»*
1 ek
20 ftt-w
2 do
21 I'itH*
3 tin
22 6a,*.9
4 char
23 te,»#
5 pSch
24 cAat^»5
6 chhn or cMe
25 pachl*
7 ,?a£
26 chhabbis
8 dth
27 ,sa<a,t.<?
9 naw
28 atka.is
10 das
29 untls
11 qyarah
30 /7,
12 6araA
31 //.•/;-
13 tera*.
32 6a«is
14 chaudah
33 te£»s or tmtit.
15 pandrah
34 chautis
16 solah
35 /jatrts
17 satrah
36 cMuttfi*
18 attJiaraJi
37 .wrtS.s
APPENDIX A. 255
38
39
athtls or artls
untaEs or unchaUs
64 chausath or chausath
65 paisath
40
chdlls
66 chhiyasath
41
iktalls
67 sarsath
42
bayalis
68 athsath or arsath
43
tetatis or taltaKs
69 unhattar
44
chau,alis or chawalls
70 sattar
45
pdltaRs.
71 ikhattar
4(5
chhiyaUs
72 bahattar
47
saitalts
73 tihattar
48
atktaUs or aridUs
74 chauhattar
49
uncluis
75 pachhattar
50
pachas
76 chhaliattar
51
ikawan
77 sathattar
52
bawan
78 athattar
53
tirpan
79 unas?
54
chaw wan
80 am
55
pachpan
81 t'A»se
66
chhappan
82 biyasl or birasi
57
sat ta wan
83 fimsi
58
athawan or atthawan
84 chaurasl
59
unsat
85 pachasi
60
sath
86 chhiyasi
61
iksath
87 sata-n
62
basath
88 af^ast
(515
tirsath or tresath
89 uawasi
256 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
90 nawwe 95 pachanwe
91 ikdnwe or ikdnawwe '. 96 chhiyanwe
92 banwe or biranawwe 97 saJtfanwe
93 lirdnwe or tirdnawwe j 98 atthanwe
94 chaurdnwe I 99 ninanawe or ninnanwe
Sau or sat. a hundred ; hazar, a thousand ; /aM a hundred
thousand ; karor, a hundred lakhs, or ten millions.
(6) — Above a hundred, the numbers proceed regularly
thus, — ek sau ek, 101 ; do sau das, 210; ek hazar dth sau
athtoMs. or attharah sau alhtdlis. 1 848 ; ek hazar do sau pat-
sath or barah sau paisath 1265.
(c) — The ordinal numbers, from the seventh upwards, are
regularly formed by adding the terminations wa nom. sing.
masc. ; we nom. pi. masc. for respect and oblique cases sing. ;
or wl fern. sing, or pi. The first four of the ordinals are
pahla " first " ; dusra " second " ; lisra " third " : and chautha
" fourth " ; then pach-wa, -we, -wl " fifth " is quite regular ;
but chhathd, chhaiha or chhatwa " sixth." After this they
all follow the rule, as : dthwa " eighth," daswa, " tenth," and
so on. Vide L. 53 (c) (2). The Persian ordinals are also
used, as : duwum " second " ; siwum " third," etc., etc.
(d) — (1) The cardinals, especially the tens, may be used as
collectives, as : char bis " four twenties." They may be used
in the formative plural, as : dono " both," lino " all three " ;
dtho dth " the whole eight of them." Vide also L. 32 (h).
(2) — The following are used as collectives in the same
sense as we say " a dozen," " a score " ; viz. ganda " a four" ;
gahi " a five " ; kori, or btst " a score " ; battisi " an aggregate
of thirty-two "; chdUsd '; a forty": mikra "a hundred."
APPENDIX A. 257
(e) — The fractional numbers are : —
pa,o or chauih or chau- paun or paune . . f
thaj . . • • i sawa . . . . 1£
tihaj . . •• I der/i .. . . 1|
arfM . . • • i <?Aa,« or arha.i . . 2|
Paune prefixed to a number denotes one quarter minus.
as : paune do, If. $cm;a denotes a quarter added, as : sawa
do, 2J. Sarhe denotes a half added, as : sarhe tin, 3|. Derh.
1|, and dha,i or arhaj, 2|, etc., denote multiplication, as:
derh-sau 150; arhaj hazar, 2,500; derh rupiya, "one rupee
eight annas, 1J rupees."
(2) — The Arabic fractions up to "a tenth" are used by
the educated, especially suls, m. "a third"; rub' m. "a
fourth " ; khums m. " a fifth." " A half " is nisf, m.
(/) — The Hindus were the inventors of the ten numerical
figures of arithmetic. From India, the invention found its
way to the Arabs. The following are the three varieties of
the ten ciphers : —
European.. 1 23456789 10
Arabian ..I r r t* a 1 v A s \ •
Hindu ..^ ^ ^ 8 l ^ a c £ ^«
These ciphers are all read from left to right.
(y) — " Percent " is expressed thus : Pach rupai saikra (and
sau ke ptchhe pach), or fl sad (or sadi) pUch " five per cent."
Vide also L. 45 (e).
(It)— (1) Multiplicatives are: (i) Do-guna (contrac. du-
yuna, dugna, and duna) m., and do-guni, etc., fern., "two-
fold"; li-guna, m., ti-gum, f., " three -fold "; chau-guna or
cJiar-guna " four-fold," etc., etc. (ii) Ekahra, m., and ekahri,
17
258 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
f., "single"; dohrd, m., ''double, two-fold," etc., etc.;
tihrd, m., " triple, three-fold," etc., etc.
(2) The Persian multiplicatives are also used. These are
formed by adding id, gdna and chand, as : yak-td " single " ;
du-td " double " ; yagdna " single " ; du-gdna " double " ;
du-chand " two-fold " ; si-chand " three-fold," etc., etc.
(i) — Numeral adverbs are : Yak-bar or yak-bdra " once " ;
du-bdr or du-bdra ( »;^J> ) " twice," etc. Also yak naubat, yak
daf'a or yak martaba " once " ; du-naubat " twice," etc., etc.
(j) — The following are the days of the week : —
Urdu. Hindi.
Itwdr. Itwdr.
Pir or Soinbdr. Som-vdr.
Magal. Magal-vdr.
Budh. Budh-vdr.
Jum'a-rdt. Brihaspat-vdr .
Jum'a. tfhukr-vdr.
Sanichar or hafta. tihamchar.
The Muslim year is lunar, consisting of 12 lunar months
or about 354 days, therefore a given festival falls each year
about 1 1 days earlier than in the previous year. The months
consist of .30 and 29 days alternately ; but sometimes t \v< >
consecutive months have both 30 or 29 days.
(k) — Names of the Arabic months. Days.
1. Muharram .. .. ..30
2. Safar .. • . . ' >4 " . . 29
3. JKabl-u-l-Awwal .. ..30
4. RabVu-s-Sdni .. .. ..29
5. Jtimada-'l-Awwal . . 30
APPENDIX A. 259
Days.
6. Jumadq-'s-Sani . . . , 29
7. Rajab .. . . . . . . 30
8. Sha'ban . . . . 29
9. Ramazan . . . . . . 30
10. Skaivwal . . . . . . 29
11. Zi qa'dah .. .. ..30
12. ZiUjjah .. .. ..29
For mercantile and agricultural purposes the Hindi or the
English months are used.
The Hindu solar year consists of 12 solar months or 365
days. Six of the months may vary in length by a day.
Festivals are calculated by lunar months, which are given
the same names as the solar months. To recover the loss of
11-12 days in eacli year, an intercalary month (malmns) is
inserted after 2£ years.
(1) — The names of the Hindi months.
Baisakh (April-May) .. 31
Jeth (May- June) . . 31-32
Asarh ( June-July) . . 32
Sawn (July- August) . . 31-32
Bhado (August-September) .. 31-32
Asin or Ku,ar (September-October) . . 30-31
Katik or kartik (October-November) . . 30
Aghan (November-December) . . 29
Pus (December- January) . . 29-30
Mngh (January-February) .. 29-30
PJiagun (February-March) . . 30
Chait (March-April) .. 30
APPENDIX B.
(a) — (1) Hindus consider that the day begins at sunrise.
Muslims, like Jews, consider that the day begins at sunset.
" The world was dark before it was light," they say, " and so
the night should precede the day." In countries under Mus-
lim rule, the watch is set daily at sunset, which is 12 o'clock.
Consequently an Englishman's Thursday night is a Muslim's
Friday night, a point to be remembered when taking evidence.
As Muslims in India use both the English and Muslim sys-
tems, misunderstandings, even amongst Muslims themselves,
are not infrequent. The night lasts till dawn : 3 A.M. is rat
ke tin baje.
(V) Sanlchar ho sham ke waqt "Saturday evening/' (Eng-
lish computation) ; but Sanlchar ki rat is ambiguous, and
may signify either Friday or Saturday night.
(3) In Persian constructions, the computation is Muslim
only, thus : Shab-i Shamba " Friday (not Saturday) night."
(6) — (1) Indians, partly from politeness, partly from super-
stition, are fond of euphemisms. Thus, a sweeper is styled
in address Mihtar ' and Jam'-dar ; a barber, a tailor, and a
cook, Khalifa or Caliph ; a bearer, Sarddr ; a water-carrier,
Bihishtl and Jam'-dar ; a muslim beggar, Shah Sahib ; a
Hindu beggar $a,f and Data; a muslim lady's maid
Idnl * ; ink is raushnaji.
1 Mihtar, lit. "greater," and also "prince."
'-' A maid-servant that looks after tobacco, pan, and dresses the hair.
APPENDIX B. 261
(2) To say " close the shop " would be inauspicious : the
shop might be closed for ever. Thus the verb in such cases
is auspiciously barhana " to increase/' as : Dudh barhana " to
wean"; khana barhana "to remove the table-cloth, etc."
The word marna is not used of respectable individuals except
by the vulgar ; vide foot-note 1, page 263.
(3) Before praising anything belonging to another person
it is usual for Muslims to say Chashm-i bad dur « far be the
evil eye," or Mashd' Allah, lit. " as God wills," while Hindus
say Ishwar bun nazar se bacha.e.
(4) When introducing any unpleasant topic, it is usual, to
indicate that present company is excepted, to say, " May this
happen to your enemies," or " May this be far from you." or
Khuda na-khwasta " God forbid."
(5) It is impolite to use such words as andha "blind,"
marim " to die " to any respectable man's face, even if he be
a, servant, either with reference to himself or his relations :
say akho se ma'zur, or basir or na-bina for "blind," and
yuzarna, etc. for " to die" before people's faces.
(c) — Examples of the above are : —
t hear you have been ill (lit. Suna hai ki dp ke dushman
I heard your enemies were bimar the.
ill).
it fall to the lot of your Nastb-i dushmanan. ap is se
enemies — I hope you won't bimar na-pare.
get ill from this.
'Co put out the lamp. CMragk gul karna (seldom
bujhana <c to extinguish)."
^ird-catcher. Mtr-shikar.
51ind man. Bastr (lit. one that sees).
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
262
Blind man.
Sweeper.
Pig.
The Quran.
Far be it from thee, I am dy-
ing for love of thee.
God is kind -(i.e., and he will
give you) — (polite refusal to
a beggar) .
Forgive me (polite refusal to
a beggar — Hindu).
Forgive me (polite refusal to
a beggar — Muslim).
There is nothing in the house
(lit. there is prosperity in
the house ; a Muslim refusal
to a beggar).
There is prosperity ( = I have
nothing in my pocket; a
Muslim refusal to a beggar) .
Friday and Thursday are days
for Ptrs to show miracles;
(cry of beggars on Thurs-
days and Fridays).
Hafiz (lit. one that has com-
mitted the Quran to mem-
ory).
Halal-khor (lit. eater of what
' is lawful).
Xa-pdk janwar (to avoid say-
ing su,ar).
Bart chtz; vulgar (too holy
to be named) .
Ap kt jan se dur, mdH dp par
marta hn (lover to mistress) .
Allah karim hai (Muslims).
Chhamn karo (Hindus).
Mu'af karo (Muslims).
Ghar me barakat hai (to a beg
gar).
Barakat hai.
Jum'a,1 Jum'a-rat fnro ki
karamat.
Friday, named first as it is the greater day.
APPENDIX B.
263
'he eighth month of preg-
nancy (lit. the unnumbered
month; if mentioned the
child will be born prema-
turely) .
f — which God forbid — you
die, who will look after these
children ?
hope you will be made a
Deputy Magistrate,
"hanks, I hope so ; (reply to
above) .
An-gind mahtna ; (is 'aurat ko
an-gind logo, hai).
Khudd na-khwdsta agar dp na-
rahe l to in bachcho H kaun
parwarish karegd ?
Agar dp Dipti ho-jd,e to mujhe
barl khushi ho*
Tumhdre muh me ghi shakar.
The word mama is generally used only by the vulgar, except for
le death of animals. When speaking generally, mama may be used
Is shahr mS tja'un se do sou admi mare ; but talaf hu,e or halak hu,e
ould be better. Rahe preterite for a future condition.
Hogi, if he knew he was going to be a Diptl.
APPENDIX C.
VOCABULARY OF ADDITIONAL USEFUL WORDS.
Thikana, m. ; thikane lagnc
(to be successful ; to be fin
ished) ; thikane lagarid (t<
kill, ironical").
Ishlihdr, m. (£.).
Ha me hs milana (to agre
sycophantly. to say ditt
to).
(iora charkd rang.
' Vide' No. 150.
Bigafnd (to be spoiled , go bad ;
also to get annoyed).
1. Address; dwelling-place;
certainty ; proper order.
2. Advertisement.
3. Agree.
4. Albino ; vide Leprosy.
5. Amusing.
6. Annoved.
7. Anonymous.
8. Appreciated, to be.
9. Authority.
10. Authority; certificate,
commission, etc.
1 1 . Avoidance ; diet in sick-
12. Awkward.
13. Benefit, advantage :
terest on
Interest.
money ;
in-
vide
Gum-nam. adj.
Dad pdna.
Hukm i bald (higher autho-
rity).
Sanad, f.
Parhez, m. (k.) (of people of
things).
Vide Clumsy.
Fa,ida (bakhshna.}.
APPENDIX C.
265
14. Bird-catcher.
15. Blind.
16. Blue.
17. Bond (promissory note)
vide Deed.
18. Borrow.
19. Brisk; trade is brisk.
20. Broker, any go-between.
21. Cajoled, to be.
22. Caricature.
23. Caste-fellowship;
tionship.
24. Change (money).
rela-
25. Clumsy, ill-shaped, awk-
ward in appearance or
actions (of things,
animals, men).
26. Complaint.
27. Confidant.
Chin -mar (Hindu).
Kami (blind in one eye) ; andhd
(in both). Vide pp. 261-2.
Awndni, adj. (sky blue) ; mid
(dark blue); firozaj, (tur-
quoise blue) ; lajawardi (col-
our of lapis lazuli)
Tamassuk, m.
'Ariyat lend (a thing) ; qarz
lend (money) ; vide Lend.
Bazar bard garm hai.
Dalldl, m.
Kisi, ki bdto (or dam) me d-
jdnd.
Kisi kd khdka urdnd.
Barddari, f.
Parchun (in Pan jab) ; kjiurda
m. (small change including
pice) ; rezgl, f . or rezgdri
(small silver bits).
Bhaddd (vide Rough).
Tangi H shikdyat karnd (com-
plain of hard times).
Rdz-ddr P. ; bhedu H. (rare).
266
28. Connive.
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Chashm-poshi , k. (overlook ;
in a good or bad sense) ;
Khudd dunyd me zalinw
ko dhtl (/.) detd hal. Vide
Slack.
29. Curse. La'nat, f. (from God) ; /W-
du'a, f. (from man).
30. Cut. Qalam k. (cut off with one
blow ; also trim a tree or
hedge).
31. Catting. Vide Seedling.
32. Dare, have the courage Himmat badhnd or karnn. li.
to.
33. Day. Shabana-roz (24 hours) : do
shdbdna-roz (2 days and 2
nights or 48 hours) .
34. Deed. Iqrar-nama, m. (any written
contract or agreement) .
Deed.
35. Defective ; imperfect
hence unserviceable
36. Desist.
37. Detour.
38. Dilemma.
Razi-nama, m. (deed of com-
promise).
Naqis, adj.
Bdz and (from a thing
begun) ; bdz rahnd (to
avoid doing a thing).
Pher, m., or chakkar, 'm.,
(khdnd).
Vide Perplexed.
APPENDIX C.
267
39. Dismiss.
40. Dodge.
41. Dress.
42. Education, instruction.
43. Enlistment.
44. Error.
45. Err, to
46. Esteemed, held in esteem.
47. Estimate ; measurement ;
amount ; degree ; con-
jecture ; guess ; propor-
tion.
48. Exercise one's ingenuity.
49. Extinguished, to be
50. Faithless.
Faithless.
51. Flood.
52. Fog.
Rukhsat, f. (k.) (dismiss from
service ; see a friend off ;
to start): rukhsat (d) (to
grant leave or permission
to).
Hikmat, L
Darban kdpre (full dress).
Ta'ttm, L (d.).
Bharti, (k.) ; bharti kl chtz
(stuffing, filling up ; any-
thing to fill up space in
packing).
Chuk. f., or bhul-chuk, f.
Chukna ; dial chukna (to make
a false move).
'Izzat-wdld, adj. (of persons).
Anddz. m. (k.).
'Aql daurdna.
Bujh-jdnd; (but bujhnd solve
a riddle ; guess a person's
meaning).
Be-wafd (in affection).
Namak-hardm (in service).
Tug&ydni, f. ; saildb, m.
Kuhdsd, m. ; kuhr, m. ; kuhrd.
268
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
53. Fool, to play.
54. Forget.
55. Forgive, pardon ; give ;
grant (to inferior).
56. Forgiveness, pardon ; tip
in money.
57. Fortune ; if fortune fa-
vours me.
58. Fun.
59. Gentleman.
60. Graft.
61. Gratis; uselessly; vide
wrongfully.
62. Greeting.
63. Guess.
64. Hate.
65. Heat.
66. Hideous.
67. Holiday.
68. Interest on money.
Vide No. 150.
Bhulna (without ne).
Bakhshnd.
Bakhshish, f.
Agar men qismat laregi to —
Vide Mischief.
Bhala-manus, m.
Paiwand, lit. a joint ; vide
' Seedling ' ; (paiwand-i
zaml hond, or zamtn ka
pawand hona "to be razed
to the ground").
Mult, adv.
tialam or tasfim (k.) ; &alam-i
niydz (k.), humble greet-
ing) ; bandagi (k.) (properly
. Hindus only) .
Vide under Extinguished.
Nafrat, f. (L).
Vide Twist.
Darauma, adj.
Ta'fil, L
Sud, m. (but be-sud = b
fa,ida).
APPENDIX C.
269
Interest ; influence.
69. Interference.
70. Introduce me, please.
71. Irrigate.
72. Jibbing, adj.
73. Lazy.
74. Lasting, enduring.
75. Leave.
76. Lend, to.
77. Leper.
78. Leprosy.
79. Loaf.
80. Lose any game.
81. Lucky, he has the Devil's
own luck (spoken dis
paragingly).
Wasila, m. (lit. means inter-
est, influence) ; sa'y sifdrish
se (by recommendation, by
interest).
Dakhl, m. ; dast-andazi, f .
Men taqrib ' fajiye.
Serdb k. (but sailab, flood).
Sust ; ahdi.
Pdy-ddr.
De-jdnd (leave an article per-
sonally at a house) ; chhor-
jdnd (to leave and go ; wuh
mar-gay a dur do bete chhor-
Qarz, d. ; (with lend " to
borrow ").
Korhl, m.
Korh, m. (black) ; charak
(white).
Ek roti ; naM se hM bhaK
(=half a loaf better than
no bread).
Bdzt hdrna, (no ne).
Qismat kd sand hai, or dhani
hai.
Taqrlb, L, lit. to make near, making near.
270 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
82. Make. Do mil lea [fastta l] ek kos hota
hai; char pd,o kd [wazn ']
ek ser hota hai.
83. March off (a person, hold- (Kisi ko) gardaniya dena.
ing him by the neck) .
84. Mason. Raj-mistri, m.
85. Match, to. Tih tasmre sab sawal o jawab
hai (these pictures are op-
posite each other and
match) ; ghore ki sirf
peshdni par sitdra hai ; aur
bdqi badan me us kd jawab
natii (the only white on the
horse is a star ; on the rest
of its body there is no
white).
Shararat se (through mischief,
in fun).
Zamin se bukhdr uthtd hai.
86. Mischief.
87
from the
Mist rises
ground.
88. Move. Vide Err.
89. Mutiny, perfidy, etc. Qhadr, m. (&.).
90. Narrow. Vide Wide.
91. Native; country -made. Desi, adj.
92. Nature. Tool- at, f.
93. Nervous, to be ; lose one's Ghabrdnd, intr.
head; to feel anxious;
be perplexed.
Understood.
APPENDIX C. 271
94 Nervousness; anxiety; Gfuzbrahat, i.
perplexity ; upset.
95. New, unused (of cloth or Kora.
earthenware) ; also a
new hand.
96. Obstinacy, 'cussedness ' ; Zidd (k) : ziddl, adj.
enmity; antonym.
97. Obstinacy. Hat dharml, f. ; hat-dharam,
adj. (not acknowledging
oneself to be in the wrong :
= ivuh apni bat H pachh
karta hai) .
98. Obstinate, proud. Magrd, adj.
99. Occasionally, by accident, Bhule-bhatke, adv.
casually.
100. Open ; uncover : unlock ; Kholna, tr.
reveal ; untie.
101. Orders. — ke ma taht (under the orders
of-).
102. Packet. Pulanda ; parsal, m. ; pakat,
m.
103. Path. Pag-dandi, f. (narrow foot-
path ; a short cut is chhota
rasta).
104. Peel, to (fruit, etc.). Chhilka utarnd.
105. Premission, vide also Dis- Ijazat,i. (d).
miss.
106. Perplexed, uncertain Shash-o-panj ' me hona ;
what to do. sha.sh-o-panj, m. (dilemma).
1 Shash-o-panj •, P. " six and five."
272
107. Private.
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Vide Secret.
108. Planned, to be.
Tajunz horia.
if possible A gar bane to — .
Nazir (in law).
Ta'Um dena.
112. Railing.
113. Razed.
114. Regret.
109. Possible;
then — .
110. Precedent (in law).
111. Prompt, to; educate, in-
struct.
Jagla, m.
Vide. Graft.
Afsos m., P. ; pashemani, f..
P., pachiawa, H. ; (in the
Punjab arman,1 m.)
115. Repeat, to utter a thing Jtalnd, tr.
over and over again.
116. Right-hand. ftdha-hath.
1 17 . Rude, rough (of artificial Angarh.
things).
Pas-andaz, k. (money) ; bacha-
rakhnd (general ; of money,
food, etc., etc.).
Wazlfa, m.
Pech, in. ; (pech-dar twisted ;
having a screw ; intricate ;
complicated ; with many
turns).
121. Search. Taldsh, (k.}.
118. Save (money).
119. Scholarship, stipend.
120. Screw; twist; grudge.
In Urdu arman, m. is " longing " and not " regret."
APPENDIX C. 273
122. Season. Jard kdi—garmiyo kd}—
baMro ' Tea mausam (the
season of winter, summer,
spring): kjiizdn, P., pat-
jhar H. (autumn).
123. Secret. Bhed. H.. m. ; ruz, P.. m.
124. Secret. Char-darwaza (secret door) ;
chor-jahaz (pirate ship).
125. Seedling, etc. Btju, adj. ; -paiwandi (graft-
ed); qalmi, adj. (from a
qalam or 'cutting').
126. Separated, to be. Bichharna, intr. ; bichhra
(hu,a). adj.
127. Shake, move, stir; get Hilna, intr.
accustomed to ; not to
feel strange with ; to be
tamed.
128. Shake ; stir; tame ; make Hiland, tr.
familiar.
129. Shift, to. Sarak-jand, intr.
130. Shy, to (of a horse) ; be Bharak-jdnd.
scared; blaze up (of
fire) ; get angry.
131. Skill. Mahdrat,i
132. Skilled. Mdhir, adj.; ustdd, subs., a
past-master.
1 These three are used either in the singular or in the plural.
18
274
133. Skinflint.
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
134. Slack (met.) ; loose.
135. Slack, to be.
Makkhi-chus, m. (lit., one
that would suck even a
fly if it fell into his food).
Dhm, adj.
Dhil k. (to be slack in work) ;
dhll d. (to slacken, and
met. to connive at for a
time only).
136. Sloping (of land or Salami, adj. and subs.
ramps) ; also subs., f.,
complimentary money
given on certain occa-
sions ; salute.
137. Smoke ; and vulg. fog. Dhu,a m.
138. Son. BeiJa, gen. ; sahib-zdda (polite
and also for son of a
gentleman).
Suput, H. (dutiful son) ; ku-
put (undutiful son).
Faltu, adj.
Vide Annoyed
Kai fit/at, f. (baifiyyat).
139. Son.
140. Spare.
141. Spoil.
142. State ; report ; remark
view.
143. Steam.
144. Storm.
Bhap, m.
Adht, H., f. (prop, blinding
dust-storm) ; tufan (gen.) ;
Nuh kd tufan (Noah's
Flood).
APPENDIX C.
275
145. Stuffing. Vide Enlistment.
146. Submit ; bring up (a case Pesh k. ; dar-pesh, h. (to be
or a person). in course of trial) ; dar-
pesh hai ( = is on the tapis).
147. Suit, to ; agree with (of Rds ana.
climate ; food, etc.) ; to
prove auspicious.
148. Summoning before Talabi (hond), f.
court.
149. Tamed ; brought up (of
children).
150. Traditionary jester ;
amusing fellow.
151. Training.
152. Treat.
153. Twist the moustache;
give heat to (in cook-
ing).
154. Twisted.
155. Undertake,
fulfil.
pledge to
Pdla hu,a. p.p. and adj.
Shaikh Chulli ; yih bam
Shaikh Chulli hai (he is an
amusing devil) ; Shaikh
Chulli -pan mat karo (don't
play the fool).
Tarbiyat, f. (k).
Mere sdth akhldq se (or mihar-
bdni se) pesh dyd (he treat-
ed me courteously).
Td,o dend.
Vide Screw.
Kisi chiz ki hdmi ' bharnd.
Corruptly for haml.
276 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
156. Ungrateful. Na-shukra.
157. Uppish, to be (with dis- Sar nikdlnd or utharia.
obedience).
158. Useless (of things or Nikammd, adj.
persons).
159. Vulgar; village-like. G&waru, adj.
160. Wheel. Pahya, m. ; payya, Panj.
161. Wide. Chaurd, adj. ; (kam-chaufd
' narrow').
162. Worldly man. Sag-i-dunya.
163. Wrongfully, wrongful, Na-haqq, adv. and adj.
uselessly; vide Gratis.
APPENDIX D.
NOTE ON Hamzah.
The first letter of the Arabic alphabet is really, hamzah
(" compression ") and not alif.1 It is an abbreviation of the
guttural a . It may be compared to the h in the English hour.
It is said to be the spiritus lenis of the Greeks or an aggra-
vation of it. The Arabs claim, that in endeavouring to pro-
nounce a vowel without a consonant, a slight effort is made
by the throat, and this they indicate by the sign *, called
hamzah. It requires, in writing, a support. At the begin-
ning of a word, this support is always alif ; but in the mid-
dle of a word at the beginning of a syllable, <_§• and j may,
in certain cases, support *. The pronunciation of a medial
hamzah is frequently omitted in Urdu, as is shown below.
In English and in Hindi the sounds ab, ib, ub, consist of
two parts, but according to the Arabs of three. They con-
sider that the first letter is the consonant hamzah ( ' or I ) ;
that this is next pointed with its short vowel ; and that
f
third comes the consonant 6; thus i-»T - ^ ( or wf ) - .w*.
In practice, the sign * and its short vowel are omitted.
Note, that in Arabic JL, = sala, but that JL. = sa-oZ", words
which have not only a different sound but a different meaning.
1 This letter is properly styled alif, only when it is a letter of pro-
Wgation, i.e. when it is equivalent to the long accent over 5.
278 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Notice the pronunciation and method of writing the fol-
^f
lowing: — ^j^- jur-at and eL>*fj«k jara-at "boldness"; fly
taw-am " a twin." Similarly, the Hindi word ?£*rc su,ar,
" pig," has to be transliterated }j» or^iy- : without the * the
word might be pronounced )\y» sawar — '' a mounted man."
In Arabic words, hamzah may occur at the end of a syllable,
<-'
as in j&& tat-sir " effect " ; er*V w,u*-min " believer," but in
Urdu this hamzah is ignored, both in writing and in pronun-
ciation, and l is changed into its letter of prolongation, as :
y
ji& tasir, e/o^y* mumin.
>
In the Persian word ^\<^ juda-i, the * is merely a hyphen.
So, too, in the Arabic word l*fa fcfidah, the Persians and In-
dians ignore the pronunciation of the hamzah, which conse-
quently acts as a mere hyphen, ja-ida. In such cases, i.e.
when pronounced with i and preceded by a long vowel or by
a fathah, it is usually supported by a y without dots, as : ^ji-jl^if
gunjajsh'1 "capacity, room," ^>jf "anyone," ^ kaj
" several."
In the Nagarl alphabet (Hindi), there is no hyphen, but
where one syllable ends in a vowel and the next begins with
l In ^j» w(b| ojttibo-yt fawji, " army doctors," the final hamzah
«*> '
of *Ui | is ignored, as can be seen by the method of writing the iza/at ;
but in j^a-^i *Ufc| the hamzah is recognized.
>
8 This may also be written and pronounced jjijlso^ gunjayisk.
APPENDIX D. 279
one, the second vowel is written in its initial or primary .form
(vide Appendix G.)- This method of writing indicates a
hyphen in English and a hamzah in Urdu, as will be seen
from the following examples : srre" u*?1^ jcffi " may I go ? "
*?T^t o*j\i pato "foot " ; ^f^t t <£ u^jy-jf ( or &*;~tf ) asu*o se
"by tears"; *t t^j* l (fern.) "became"; qftt t^y to,?
" anyone" ; q?t c*^ ^a>* " several."
It will be noticed that when hamzah is pronounced with i
and precoded by a or by a long vowel, it is usually supported
by a 4,5- without dots.
Note the following method of writing a hamzah in Urdu,
before the Hindi vowel e : (TO) ^b or <3Jj (pa*e) " foot."*
1 The only way of transliterating into Urdu smT-^t-^I (hu,a, hu,l,
hu,e), is \jA> - ^j& - f^i* ; this is obviously a makeshift.
2 If the speech of an Egyptian talking French be noticed , it will be
seen that numerous hamzahs are inserted.
APPENDIX E.
ARABIC FORMS AND MEASURES, ETC.
(a) — (1) Urdu abounds in Arabic words and consequently
some knowledge of Arabic roots is necessary.
Nearly every Arabic word can be traced to a triliteral
root. Quadriliterals are rare.
From the English word love, we get lov-er, lov-ing. and
be-lov-ed. An Arabic root is not only similarly expanded
by prefixes and suffixes, but also by infixes, and the seven
' servile ' letters used to expand an Arabic root are con-
&•?
tained in the word ij.v+~vj yatasammanu " they fatten."
(2) — At first sight it appears that, to find a root, all that
is necessary is to strip a word of its servile letters. In
many cases this would answer Some roots, however, them-
selves consist of one or more letters that are found in this
y&ss,
word lji»""*j, so if all such were elided, the whole word, root
and all, would in some cases disappear. It is therefore
necessary to know in what order the servile and radical
letters occur, in all the different parts of speech. This is
shown in grammars by models called " forms " and '' mea-
sures." r
I « Form ' properly means the model unpointed, as : JUi ; while
denotes the model fully pointed , as : JU> or JU* or JU-».
etc.. etc.
APPENDIX E. 281
(3) — The noun that expresses the simple action gives the
root, but as this noun is variable in form, the Arabs have
found it a convenient fiction to treat all words as though
derived from the 3rd pers. sing. masc. of the Past tense of the
simple verb, and it is under this head that all words must
first be searched for in a dictionary. A difficulty occurs
when the 2nd radical is a weak letter.1 The Arabs have
adopted J*ia " he did " as a typical root and have expanded
it in every possible way, to form models or " measures " of
every possible part or form of speech. Not all the tenses of
tupto are found in any single Greek verb : not all the forms
and measures from JU» are formed from any single Arabic
root.
(4) — The measure of the Passive Participle of the simple
verb is J>***. obtained by prefixing to the root or form J*»,
a (servile) m., and inserting between the 2nd and 3rd radi-
j><j*
cals a long u. Of this measure are fjl*-* ma'lum " known."
* manzur " seen, approved of," etc.. JJA&* -
etc., etc. If each one of these words be placed over the
1 For example, when looking out in the dictionary, the root JL?
"he said," the 2nd radical | must be looked for under ^ and not
Os s s
under I , as the verbal noun is Jji : therefore JU must be looked for
as though it were spelt J^i. A similar rule holds good for the other
weak letters.
^ s sJ>s
2 The measure of some Past tenses is J*5 and JUJ, i.e. not all Past
tenses have the same short vowels.
282 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
model or measure Jj***>, it will be seen that it has certain
letters (servile) in common with iti (m and u), which occupy
corresponding positions, viz. 1st and 4th. In other words,
every Arabic word of five letters, the 1st being m and the
4th M, is a passive participle of the simple verb, and is of the
measure
(5) — Conversely, cU(5 "killer "is an active participle or
agent. What is its root and measure ? It has only one ser-
vile letter, the 2nd (alif) . The form of the triliteral root is
therefore cUS ( = J*i ) . Expand J»* by the same servile
and you get the form <_M*. Point this with the same short-
vowels and you get the measure cl«l*, which is the measure
of the active participle of the simple verb (or Stem I) . This is
the principle to be adopted with all derivatives and all roots.
(6) — Euphonic difficulties, however, will arise when a root
contains any of the weak consonants or semi-vowels ^ - ) • \ ;
or when a dental and a palatal come together ; or when two
identical or two similar letters come together without the
intervention of a vowel.
The three weak consonants are homogeneous to, or sis-
ters ' of, the three short vowels but subordinate to them.
The general principle is, that when in a measure a weak con-
sonant follows a short vowel to which it is not homogeneous.
a conflict ensues, and the short vowel conquers, i.e. it
changes the weak consonant into its ' sister,' thus &\jj*
miivzdn becomes &\jy mizdn. These ' permutations of weak
consonants ' are a great difficulty.
1 SQ, too, is the modern Arabic «J>?J4* mabntik " bunkered," from
the English word ' bank.'
APPENDIX E. 283
If the soft dental ct» follow o" - u* or k , it changes into
the hard palatal £. Similar euphonic changes oecur if e>
follow i - 3 or j .
(6) — From the simple verb there are XIV derived forms or
Stems, sometimes called Conjugations. The participles, and
verbal nouns (styled also infinitives) . of eight of these de-
rived Stems are used in Urdu. Though the Stems (Past
tenses) themselves are not used in Urdu, it will help the stu-
dent to learn them and note their order : —
"{ s ' sfs s ss
I. Simple form cU* (or cU* or el**'), as : Ji> " he
killed, to kill " ; ^ " to break " ; &3 " to cut " ;
J* " to know " ; JUo " to enter."
FORMS (DERIVED) INCREASED BY ONE LETTER.
II. <J** , Meaning : Intensive. It also makes a neuter of
I Stem, transitive ; or if transitive, causal. Ex-
amples : (JLJ.5 " to massacre " ; j~$ " to smash
in bits " ; jJW " to cut in pieces " ; pi* " to
teach " ; JL& " to cause to enter, insert." [Pre-
fixing a o. makes this form reflexive.]
III. — J*l» Meaning : Attempting the act of the primary
(I) ; implies 1 reciprocity ; is always transitive.
1 In III a second party is possible ; in VI (formed from III by pre-
fixing e» ), a second party is necessary (unless the verb is reflexive).
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Examples :— J3tf " to try to kill, to fight with " ;
JJfc "to correspond with" ( Jj£ "to write").
[Prefixing a o, makes this form reflexive].
IV. J**t. Meaning: Causative. Examples: cUo' "to
S '<*£
cause to enter " ; ~Jf< " to cause to write " ;
" to cause to sit " ( <_rW " to sit ").
FORMS INCREASED BY TWO LETTERS.
,$,'
V. cUai ( = 11 + a prefixed o ). Meaning: Reflexive
or Consequence of II. Examples : j& " he
,f
thought himself great, to be proud " (j$ " to be-
,$,'
come great"); JU3 "to be made to know, to
learn, to be taught." This form has often to be
rendered in English by a passive.
VI. cMAi ( = IH + a prefixed o ). Meaning: Reflexive
or Reciprocal of III. Examples : cUlSj " to fight
one another"; «.*&> i( to write to and receive
letters from, to correspond with1";
"God made himself exalted above all ( = the
Most High God)."
i In III, a second party is possible ; in VI (formed from III by pre-
fixing o), a second party is necessary (unless the verb is reflexive).
APPENDIX E. 285
It has sometimes the idea of feigning, as : o*>^ " to
pretend to be sick, to malinger " ; j-*U3 ': to pretend to be a
nasraniyy or Nazarene (i.e. a Christian)."
VII. J*&JI ( = I + prefixed in). Meaning: Neuter or Pas-
sive of I.1 Examples : J-»&J " it was broken '' ;
u»i£il "he showed himself1 openly, he was re-
vealed or discovered " (Ut£/" to expose, reveal ").
Remark. — It should be noted that the prefix in is a servile
s Cf ^C. s s s
addition. In words like «Jl<oJI and fa[ (from «-**" " to
halve," and j& " not to know, to deny "). the n is a radical
letter and is not part of a prefix.
^ ssO
VIII. J*i*f. Meaning : Reflexive of I (but occasionally
"sCt
its reciprocal or passive). Examples : £***•] " to
collect themselves, assemble " (£»*• " to collect ") ;
s ssCt
Al " he engaged himself, was busy in (a work) "
£ •' to occupy, give work ").
IX. No derivatives in Urdu.
1 Originally a reflexive of I, but now a neuter or passive.
286
HINDUSTANI MANUAL
X. J*&-J ( = 1 + ista, with the omission of the a of the
1st radical). Meaning : Inquiry, Desire, Opinion
or tendency with regard to the matter predicated
xX> ' G ss r
by I. Examples: ^a*i~j "to ask pardon" (j^
* * & *</
Ci to pardon ") ; ^^ao-t " he thought it beauti-
ful " ( tr**- " t° De beautiful ").
s'<> sO
Sometimes it is merel causaL as : '-alsJ-t " to make to
swear, to administer an oath " = «-»l- (from tJd*. "to swear.
take an oath ").
It is also a reflexive of IV (vide Verbal Nouns of this
Stem), and the meaning is apparently neuter.
(c) Table of Stems.
Stem.
Participle
Active.
Participle
Passive.
Verbal Noun or
Infinitive.
I. &
f X
pi*
[Numerous
measures].
II. (&
,.„„„, a:
—• s
1 "^
1 ^
III. cbli
j*t*c
/ ^ x J>
fcu^
APPENDIX B.
287
Stem.
IV.
V.
VI.
Participle
Active.
Participle \ Verbal Noun or
Passive. Infinitive.
-,,
(mutafa"il) (JU&L*
(mutafa"al) JUfiLe
f ^
JUil
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
None s
^
JUil-t
Remark I. — It will be seen that the participles are formed
by prefixing mu to the Stems or Past tenses, and that the
second radical is then pointed with i for the Active, and a
for the Passive.
1 When Stem IV is intransitive (as cXkiJ " to come towards") there
is no Passive Participle , the Active form only is used.
2 Not used in Urdu and Persian.
3 The form of the Passive Participle is not found in Stems with a
neuter or passive sense. Vide footnote 4 below.
* When VIII is intransitive, the Active form only is used, as:
muttahim " accused" (not muttaham).
288 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Remark II. — Verbal nouns generally take the regular femi-
nine plural in -at. Note the introduction of an alif before
the last radical in all • except II, V and VI.
Remark III. — If the second radical be j or ^, it is, in the
f , t ,
measure J*U'} often changed to hamzah, as : ^ or ^3 ;
" standing " from jtf (<•?); '&* or &* " fit."
If the second and third radicals be identical, they unite, as :
£ $ .
u?^ khass (in Urdu khas) " special " (from u*^ " to particu-
larize").
If the third radical be hamzah (!) or j or ^5, it is changed
to <^, as : ^;l* " reader " from y ; ^lA. ;i empty," from ^
%>?> ^ s g O^
( £*> kjiuluw) ; ^l; ( f»; ) " thrower " from U;, vl. noun ^y0
Remark IV. — If the second radical be ), it is elided in the
9(.f
measure J>*&*; but throws its zammah, back on to the pre-
> f , s ,^ *(.,
ceding silent letter, as : J^« maqul, " said," from JU> ( Jy ).
If the second radical be ^, a similar change takes place.
but the zammah is changed to kasrah,- and consequently the
/ ^ , * fi>,
servile j becomes ^. as : £i** mabt' " sold/' from at ( 5^ )
" to sell."
If the //urrf radical be j, it is elided, as: ^»AA> mad'u,
•' called, invited," from U^ (^5 ) " to call, etc."
> These include the three cases where the Past tense begins with
APPENDIX E. 289
(d) Verbal Nouns.
(1)— The verbal nouns or so-called infinitives are abstract
nouns ' expressing the action or state of the Stem from which
they are derived.4 Some have always a neuter sense, as :
f<*9?
•>*W " existence," while others have both an active and pas-
f <,,
sive sense, as : ytu i; helping another" or " being helped b
another."
(2) — As already stated, the infinitive or verbal noun of
1 Stem, the simple verb, has varying measures, though only
a few are in common use. The simple verb may have more
than one infinitive, sometimes with a variety in meaning, as :
, ,<,,
**> " intending, intention." and **&.**> "object" (>*2* "to
ft'* ^xxx
intend, to go forward ") ; vy> " nearness," and &t\js " rela-
tionship " (from Jy "to be near to "). The derived forms,
however, are fixed on measures.
(3) — The following are some measures *: —
f /Ox f O s
I. J«» -\ Among the common forms are <J*>, as : <Ji*
4 ff^ J*"xx , x JTO
J^' ) " killing " ; cU>, as : -A)c " seeking " ; <J**',
o jot <jf
as : fi« " knowing, science " ; JA», as : p£*., " or
f f* fs f *}>
dering " ; J^«* as : Jj*», " accepting " ; Jy«i as :
., "acquiring."
1 They consequently imply the same action, state, reciprocity, etc.
as do their Stems.
2 Subjective or objective in sense.
3 Wujud"*. For this termination ««, • vide' (n) (I) Remark, p. 305.
+ Taken chiefly from Platts.
19
290 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
?
Examples on other measures are : j** " being small " ; &**
jf ,f _,<>, ,<,,
( = J*» ) " guiding aright " ; A^ ( O*«M ) " pitying " ;
S t, s(,f S
ala^ ( v_Jia.; ) "travelling"; «j«v* ( o;4J ) "being able";
&j** ( i&Jj*. ) I "moving" ajy- (*a>*^-; "stealing"; ^^.j
' °*j & . ' x
( = c**** ) " asserting " ; &/* " remembering " ; ^1L» " being
^^ f *f , * -
safe " ; («lft» " standing " ; Uv> f = JUi ) •• praying " ; «*l*-«
. o «
; " being happy " ; ilif ( ooltf " writing " ;
* * <*, , , <,,
) " being difficult " ; A**^* ( o>*^^x> ) ( = <u^;
"pitying" ; A£!+X> ( c^U** ; "having dominion." There are
other measures not indicated above.
II. JU«i3' / — e.g. ^J«o "teaching"; ^i3 "gladden-
fr<*,\. , o ^
4l*A> ^ing"; S/oj tazkirah* " reminding, etc.") J
&3jiti tafriqa(h) " scattering "; j*& " effecting "
The first measure is the commoner, and is feminine in Urdu
with the one exception of <x»yt> " amulet."
1 The infinitives of the derived forms are also called " augmented
infinitives."
9 The final letter jj (not silent) is in Arabic pronounced o before
a vowel, and in Urdu and Persian is often changed to o ; when not so
changed it becomes f or silent h; thus the Arabic Sy& tazlrirah.
becomes in Urdu 8iJ tazkira, m. : or £,,fjj IdzJcfrat. f.
APPENDIX E. 291
*„"•:? \ .?"* ___ j>
III. *icUu> 7 — e.g. aLlax! "facing"; &*U>c ;< discussing
* ' - l
J1*' J with, arument " £J&« " dialoue " li*
argument " ; £J&« " dialogue " :
.
and i'Llftx "fighting, slaughter";
" guarding." The first measure is the commoner.
Reciprocity is often implied.
Remark. — If the third radical is ^ or -, it is changed to
' 'S ^ ,
alif. as: *l»iU> "meeting." from ^ "to meet."
f 'O sO ,-C/
IV. J^«*' — e.g. ^j^l "causing to go out"; ;&l "de-
nying": t^a.i "causing to flow" (from <jy?« jarq
"to flow" ; flUt "yielding, obedience. Islam" :
)\&<. " making apparent " : vJUit " dividing into
halves, justice."
Remark. — If the first radical be y, it is changed to ^-. as :
^^<j ,<j s,
#U)I (for lj}]) "performing a promise." from ^j "to keep
one's promise, pay a debt."
If the second radical be ) or ^_c, it is elided and throws
back its vowel on to the vowelless first radical, and a e* ( « ;
'Kj' f s<j bs
is suffixed, as: oJU[ "help" AT. *Jl*| for e^», from ^ *
" aiding ").
1 In Urdu, muqdbala, m. ; mubahasa, m. ; mukalama. m. : rmtqatala
m . ; but muhafazat , f .
* The Past tense is not in use.
292 HINDUSTANI MANUAL
If the third radical be j or <.$•, it is changed into hamzah.
si, fto,
as : *liel "granting pardon," fromyi* ' " pardon." In Urdu
the final hamzah is usually ignored, vide Appendix D. p. 278.
V. JUA3 — e.g. £& " thinking" ; tf* " making oneself
great, being proud " ; j)*oj ;' picturing to oneself ;
9
conceiving " 2 ; ckG " reflecting, demurring." 8
Remark. — If the third radical be 3 or ^, the zammah, or
third vowel, is changed to kasrah, as : ^JUo* "being com-
forted," from JJL. " to console oneself."
VI. — J^liy — e.g. —A—lw " resemblance, proportion" ; v;^
" approaching each other " ; Jf)UJ " descent '' ; u*
" feigning sickness, malingering." In this form,
if reciprocity is possible, it is clearly indicated
and not merely implied as in III.
1 Tke Past tense is li . .
s& '
2 II Stem )y* " to fashion, shape " : Inf. yi^Ai " making H picture."
The theoretical root fa "he shouted, divided, demolished," is really
a different verb.
***
3 Stems II and IV JL«.«_, **!** " teaching and learning."'
tflxx
* J~3
APPENDIX E. 293
Remark. — If the third radical be > or /c, the same chanse
^r °
is made as in V, as : ^JIAJ tadawz, • treating oneself medi-
cally." from ^l " to be ill."
In Urdu and Persian, this final ^5- is frequently changed to (
&" •$> „„
as : Up (for Ar. ^iJ tamanm) ; UU3 (for Ar. ^W, from c«£*
' mashq " to walk, travel ").
* - ? > x.O
VII. JUflJl — e.gr. JlAfti! " being decided " (from JAJ "to
cut off, decide"); o'A&j "being uncovered, re-
vealed" (cftAf "to unveil, expose, etc., etc.") ;
ft*«j| " being demolished " ; ot^l " shunning, de-
flection."
Remark. — If the third radical be j or <^, it is changed to
_o
hamzah, as: *Uaftjf inqiza*, "the being ended, expiration.''
This hamzah is dropped in Urdu.
Jf s G / ^ O x^x
VIII. J*A»! — e.g. ^t+i^l " being collected " (5*^ " to col-
lect, add ") ; u*&l i'tiraz, " putting oneself in
the way, opposing " ( uir* " to come in the way
of " J) ; ;|AV»! " being powerful " ( ;dJI " to be able,
1 Also J (jfjf intr. " to happen":
to be broad."
294 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
have the power over"); (*j*A-\ "honouring";
x*> x X
^U3i ittiba' " following, allegiance " (from & " to
follow ").
Remark. — Certain euphonic changes occur if the first radi-
cal be _j - ^ - 3, i.e. the radical j becomes e», and the radical
X"**
^ or j becomes *, as : (3!*3t ittifdq, " agreeing, union, coinci-
dence" (from <£»j "to find suitable, etc."); Uaj iddi'a,
" claiming one's rights " (from l*j ! " to call out, pray, etc.") ;
fUoji " pressing, crowding " (from ^3 " to crowd ").
If the first radical be u» - u* - J». the servile o becomes i.
as : ^^tkoi " technical term, idiom, phrase " (from pL* "to be
good, to be suitable, etc.") : wfjl^*J " being agitated " (from
t_j^* " to strike, mix, etc.") ; »^i' " being informed " (from
^li " to appear, be disclosed)."
IX. This measure does not occur in Urdu.
f x& </ f x O
X. JUAJLti — e.g. ,M>i«iJ "getting oneself ready, apti-
tude, mental power, etc." (from the theoretical
root A« " to count, account, etc." *) ; jUAi-i " ask-
1 This final alif must be looked for under } in the dictionary. The
xC/x ..'^x
verbal nouns are : u;£^ - V>«^ etc.. etc.
2 Its verbal noun of IV ( ^|i*l ) signifies " making ready."
APPENDIX E. 295
Lag pardon " (_Ji* " to cover, hide, pardon ") ;
JU*JL»t " using, use " ( JU* " to work, do, act ") ;
^<* <j
ftlA«JL»i " tendering resignation from office " (from
la* " to pardon)." l
Remark. — The same changes take place as in IV q.v.
(e) Participles.
(1) — The active and passive participles are also used as
adjectives and substantives, as: ^Jl* "knowing, a learned
^JI " having capacity, fit " ; O5^* i: blessed,
..
late" (i.e. deceased, of Muslims); ^i*.* '"mad" (^pos-
sessed by a Jinn). These are Active and Passive Participles
of I Stem.
(2) — PARTICIPLES OP DERIVED FORMS: —
II. J*&* f Act., and cVa* Pass., as : fi*« mu'allim
\'
•Z'f
"teacher" ; pl**> mu'allam, "taught."
f sf f , ,f , >
III. JeU* Act., and JUlix Pass., as : 1>*1«.* " guardian " :
opposing, confronting " : «-()U« mubarak.
" blessed, auspicious."
Infinitive j&e.
296 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
f o t f xO f o 9
IV. cl»ix> Act., and JUi* Pass , as : J^* " squandering,
,
extravagant"; &-*"<> "benefactor";
•' polytheist, one who implies partnership, to
God " ; *jpc " made ambiguous, ambiguous."
., and J*iix Pass., as: *t*^ " expect -
ing " ; yaLo " thinking within oneself, anxious " ;
(3*i* muta'allim, " student, taught " ; ~*Sji* " ex-
pected."4
VI. cUiiix) Act., and JiclAL* Pa«s., as: v^ULc " follow
ing, successive " ; o^l«J^ ' " mutually acquaint-
ed"; oil/x> " following each other, successive,
synonymous.
f ^f sbf
VII. eUftuo,* as: \J££'** munkashif, "revealed."4
/ ,o>> f ,«,f '<*!
VIII. J«iix) Act., and d*ii* Pass., as: *ai«* "one who
rests or leans upon, believing in " ; A*i«* " leaned
upon, trusted " ; J&*A » « watching for, expec-
"to become mutually acquainted with"; o,My " to ride
an animal one behind another ; to be synonymous." Vide p. 287. foot-
notes 1 , 3 and 4.
2 Pwfe p. 287, footnotes 3 and 4.
x * xO
H fetj is neuter.
APPENDIX E. 297
•CO-* s'bf
tant " ; u^xi/o " a partner", ^jfyLS^o "shared,
held in common" ; j*aj&so 1 « abridged, an ab-
stract."
IX. Not used in Urdu.
X. (J*fli~* Act., and JUii..* Pass., as: £j»
tracting. drawing out"; JU&~-* ''coming to-
wards, the future"; ^sou** "extracted";
-Oj. o 9 , o ^ c ?
cU**-^1 " brought into use, used " ; i^~.^l~s>
"thought to be good, commendable, virtuous."
(/) Quadriliterals.
Quadriliteral verbs also occur in Arabic ; they have a ground
form and three derived forms. A feAv derivatives only are
found in Urdu from Stems I and IT.
" Os
I. Q. — cU*i. This is transitive and intransitive. Ex-
amples : »-i*^ :: to cause to swing to and fro, to
, .0^ ^ s<j,
be wavering " ; J jJj " to shake " ; ^y " to trans-
late."
f C,f? f
Active Participle JU*£>«. Examples:
tain, wavering " ; Jjb* (not used in Urdu) ;
>
interpreter.
r, the Act. Part., not used in Urdu.
298 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
f xcx.? f xo- >
Passive. Participle Jl*«*. Examples : v*?i/c " dangled,
'C"J>
suspended ; also hesitation, doubt." p**^* *' in"
terpreted, translated."
/VxGx f'.-<"
Infinitive *U*J. Examples: ***iO (not used in Urdu);
,xOx "Ox
*J>J) "earthquake"; «**j3. "interpreting, transla-
tion."
II. #. — cU**> Examples : vi*xi "to hesitate ( -
>J>J " to be shaken " (by an earthquake).
Participle Ji«a.Lc . Example : Jjl>** " shak-
ing, quaking, agitated " (perhaps not used in
Urdu).
Passive Participle JUUoi* . Example : J.)!^'* " shaken
by an earthquake "
f ft,,, f »<,,*
Infinitive Ji*iJ. Examples : v-jAooJ " vacillation " ; J^IP
" being shaken ; an earthquake."
(g) Relative Adjective.
(1) The Arabic relative adjective is formed by adding to
substantives, adjectives, pronouns, and particles, the suffix
cff -*yy** (which in Urdu and Persian becomes <^ -») and re-
jecting the final x ' of the feminine, as : j»l* " science, learn-
1 Note that the doubled ;/ is retained in Urdu in the Abstract Noun.
APPENDIX E. 299
I.
ing, etc."; ^ 'ilmmiyy™ (in Urdu and Persian 'ilmi)
t\,
''scientific " : ,^-4^. (shamsiyy** , shamsi) •' solar " ; ^LJ| hu-
man"; ^fi^ "actual, true," from Ar. &*&* (in Urdu
±fk tabi'iyy (tabVi) " natural." from **i*b (Urdu
J^ • „»
from <&c •' Mecca."
(2) Final i - ^ - ^ are changed to j before the suffix, as :
'asawiyy. from L^ "staff"; ^*>« ma'nawiyy, from
vw
or (J>*A " meaning " : Uj, from 1*^ " Delhi "
If the final a be the fifth letter, it is dropped, as : ^L+Z
^x "Musfcafa (chosen)."
(3) If the noun be of the measure cUi, the following vowel
% ^
change takes place: malik '"king"; ,^U malakiyy** (in
Urdu malakl) " kingly."
I
(4) Another form of the suffix is ^t principally used in
£
technical terms, as : ^U-^ (in Urdu jisrnani) " corporeal";
^*J) " spiritual."
(h) The Abstract Noun and Collective Plural.
(1) An abstract noun is formed by adding » (in Urdu
££ -o ^
& ) to the relative adjectives, as: i^l-ol (in Urdu wtuJLJi J)
1 Note that the doubled y is retained in Urdu in the Abstract Noun.
300 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
jp. •*<
"humanity"; &•*& (in Urdu ^**f) "quality," from the
f <i*
Arabic «-a^ l " how ? "
f f f fs '
(2) In theological terms o^ - is found, as : o^Xc " the world
of angels " ; c^-ja* " omnipotence " ; e»j*V " divinity."
(3) From some relative adjectives, a. collective plural is
^ O s
formed by adding « (in Urdu and Persian » ). as : ^j*i
f$ G,
" materialist, atheist, etc." ; **j*s (in Urdu and Persian
Ai^fci dahriyya) " the sect of materialists or those that main-
fZot
tain the eternity of matter" ; *4V» (in Urdu and Persian
suffyya) " the sect of Sufis."
(t) The Noun of Time and Place.
*,<.,, f ^ f,,<,s f,<ss
The measures are J«A*> or JLiu ; and ii»i* or lUt*.* Ex-
amples : wJ^c " school, i.e. a place where writing is taught "
s s s ' (f ' ' s -
(from v^ " to write") ; ^j**-10 ' place of egress, etc." (^j^-
<J ' C. s
" to go or come out. depart, emerge ") ; «Ji.j-« " place of in-
gress " ( J^S " to enter ") ; ^j^*^ " the place or time where
people sit, an assembly" (from
1 "-ilj in the dictionary must be looked for as though derived from
s s f <"
til^ " to cut," the verbal noun being vJuf .
* The second vowel is not constant, thus tnaqburah or maqbirah or
maqburahf" grave-yard " (from _j3 " to bury").
APPENDIX E. 301
mosque" (from ***-• "to prostrate oneself in adoration") ;
" a place of slaughter, a vital spot " ; Usuo 1 '•' a stage,
<** ' "
place " (from cU. " to alight") ; f\&> « a place of standing,
place" (from ^ "to stand"); &^^> "a place of study, a
Muslim college " ; <u&»x> " the place of giving a decision, a
court, a department."
(j) Noun of Instrument.
S'O Jf^sO Jf ,<,
The measures are J*A* , or al*i* , and JUa>o . These are
readily distinguished from the nouns of time and place by
the kasrah with which the initial servile mim is pointed
'
(mi — ), Examples : jfei* " shears " (from (bJ " to cut, arn-
' <J s 's O
putate"); Ja^xi or Ala^ixi "any polishing instrument * "
" ' ^° sss
(from c&o) ; ^j*° mizdn " scales or balance " (from &j>j " to
weigh ") ; the proper form for the latter would be
miuxan, ' vide ' (a) (6) p. 282.
(k) The Diminutive.
SOsJ> f.'*''* f<J
The measures are Ji*» and 1&&*. Examples : *
humble slave, a slave boy, or a little son of a slave " ;
" Husayn ; also the dimin. of hasan good, beautiful, etc." ;
*(, sJ> <* *
a lake or small sea " (^*u " sea ").
1 In Urdu and Persian also " a palace."
2 Often a smooth, round stone or shell.
302 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(/) Verbal Adjectives.
(1) Simple Adjectives denoting an inherent quality are de-
rived from the simple triliteral but are irregular in measure.
Remark.— The following words are found in Urdu: *_*ju* " diffi-
G o f
cult " ; ^*6 " zero " (in Ar. also " empty ") ; .—JL* "hard ; the loins ,
offspring" (in Urdu, the adjective not used); ^^ "good, beauti-
ful" ; i^AtL " rough " ; yjUL " cowardly " ; a IsJi " brave " ; tyliJs*
" thirsty " ; & jj* " naked."'
Verbal nouns on these measures also occur.
(2) The Participles are also used as adjectives and sub-
stantives.
(3) Intensive Adjectives or Intensive Agents are on the
measures : —
/G ,. fb '
el*** — Examples : ^A.J " very compassionate" (of God) ;
fxl* " very learned, omniscient " (of God or man
but jJU of man only)
Remark. — This measure is not alwaj-s intensive, as : o*^
;' sick" ; J*i* " ailing " ; ^A. " a sage, philosopher, physi-
cian (of Greek system of medicine) " ; J*U " slain " = J^ifix.
Pass. Part. ; o*t^ •' witness " = Act. Part.
S(,J>' f<j9,
J^** — Examples : j^x* " very patient " ; j^i* " very for-
s,
giving" (of God); J^l "a great eater, a glut-
* f *
ton " ( — J^i ) ; J ^ " an utter ignoramus."
<js o
I The measures are of course <JU» - <J*i, etc. , etc. The beginner
need not study the measures of the simple adjectives.
APPENDIX E. 303
f Sk f •&,
JUj —Examples : v1^ :' a great or habitual liar" ( =
"fa' ^ s
v^«^ not used in Urdu) ; ^f = ^1* ; ^lUs « very
unjust or tyranical."
f ~
This measure is an intensive of JUtj, and so professions
are commonly on this measure, as : f l«^ " barber, etc." ;
f '$" 5> *
Jlai " a great mimic, an act or professional story-teller " ;
" a money-changer, banker, ' sc&ro/?' " : Jl*J " a green-grocer
(but in Urdu used for baniya).
Greater intensiveness is given to a few adjectives by add-
ing 5 ' to imply unity, as : *-*^ "a very learned man."
(4) Adjectives of Colour or Defect are : —
9^ 9, * ?,<-,
JUii* masc. > Examples : >»M " red " (fern. *»^*. ) ; ^«^i
?, O, <(' *<>,
*iUi 3 fern. ) " yellow " (fern. [,&*> ) ; ^ j*i " lame by na-
,0s •& s '
ture" (fern, ky ) : ^^1 * " blind " ; ^ " deaf"
(fern. *U-^).
Remark. — This form undergoes no permutation of weak
letters; u^i?' "white" (not
1 This intensive ? is rarely found in Urdu.
? S<JS
* Jn Arabic jUif .
9^t,s
8 In Arabic *iUi
Jx&x
* i.e. a'my for ^f^
304 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(5) The Elative or Noun of Superiority ( = comparative
and superlative) from the simple triliteral, has for the mascu-
line the same measure as the Adjective of Colour or Defect.
> ^f * x <>s
J* '» ' masc. \ Examples : 4^—^' "more or most beauti-
es r
^** fem.1 * ful, better " &~^ " beautiful " = crt-"" ; J^1
" more or most excellent " ( cUti " excellent, dis-
tinguished "); jrf\ "greater, greatest" (^
"great").
Perhaps the only feminines of the elative, found in Urdu,
,<,9 ,<,> •$>'
are: ^^ (fem. of rf\ ), and ^Jy * (fem. of Jy ).
(m) Gender.
(1) There are two genders, masculine and feminine. The
place of the neuter is generally supplied by the feminine.
The ordinary method of forming a masculine from a femi-
nine is by supplying a « (plural o I). Examples: Jii*
••king," &A*8 "queen"; «x)|.j "father" (from **j " to give
birth"), SJtj "mother"; ^ti "powerful," fem. *>>t>; f*fc*
1 The feminine is used as a superlative only.
> *,
2 I7fc? ^l,not to be confused with auk} ^1 "worthier" from
f - -
3 oKlx, the regular feminine plural of *?ix> is not used in Urdu.
APPENDIX E. 305
" great," fern. *+J*t . _v>j* " dear" fern. *#> ; ^i^> 1
served, waited on," fem. &*j±svo ; J^x> ^ ^ teacher " fern
(2) For the feminines of cU>'', vide (I) (4) and (5) pp.
—
(n) Declension.
(1) The singular is as follows : —
Singular.
Norn. . . j*i>iL kazir** " present."
Gen. .
Ace. . . "\j^»(L hazir*".
Remark. — When the vowels are doubled thus —-^- , they
are pronounced an, un, in. This is called tanwn8 '• giving
the n sound." In Urdu, the final "* of the nom. is alwavs
dropped. The gen. does not occur. The ace. (with the
tanwin] is used as an adverb.
(2) The Dual is formed by adding to the singular -an' for
the nominative, and -ayri for the oblique cases.
Remark. — In Urdu the oblique case only is used, with the
final vowel omitted, as : ^^'J * walidayn " parents " : eri^La- *
janibayn ''• both sides, the two parties."
1 ^i. " to serve," f&lL " one who serves, a servant."
2 Act. Part, of II Stem.
f <JS
3 Measure JU*£j.
* In Urdu pronounced as though written with the Hindi diphthong
at, as: walidain, janibain.
20
30P> HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(3) The regular Masculine Plural is formed by adding to
the singular -una for the nominative, and -ina for the oblique
Remark. — In Urdu the oblique case only is used with the
final vowel discarded, as : &>;<&*> hazirin " those present'' ;
b nazirin ''beholders"; u^/^-T akjiinn "those that
come after, posterity"; eH/^-'J*0 muta*akhirin (pi. of the act.
part, of IV Stem^tf ) '" the moderns."
(4) — The regular Feminine Plural with the final vowel end-
ings etc., dropped (-at), is also used in Urdu. It may be
added : (i) to verbal nouns of any measure (in Urdu of both
genders), as : oKU? kamalat** M perfections " (sing. JU*"); ouUjJLJ
taslimat (sing. f^~3 ; in Urdu fern.) "salutations"; ol^i^i
ikjirajat (sing. ^iM ; in Urdu masc.) " disbursements, ex pen -
jf s s <> ' ' <,
ses" ; oU.Hk*l (sing. ^^*' ; in Urdu fern.) " idioms, tech-
nical terms"; (ii) to participles used as substantives, as:
/ , ,
kd*inat "entities, creatures, the universe";
makjiluqdt " created things, creation " ; «a»id>^xi mawjudat
11 existing things, etc."
Remark I. — In imitation of the Arabic, this feminine ter-
mination is, in Urdu, occasionally added to Persian and even
Hindi words, as : oUuli. kjianajat " houses " ; oU*!^. chitthi-
yat (vulgar) " letters." Such plurals, however, should be
avoided.
APPENDIX E. 307
Remark II. — The gender of this regular femiuiue plural is.
in Urdu, generally that of its Urdu gender in the singular,
as : olii^jja., m. pi., " animals, brutes " ; o^JlU^, m. pi., " fan-
cies" ; oC&o i (noun of place), m. pi.. " places" : o^, f.
pi., "movements, etc." (pi. of &j*. AT., in Urdu ta^A.. f.).
Vide also (o) (2).
Some of these plurals may be used as singulars in Urdu.
as : £- j^y* oti/j »»£j| " a criminal occurrence has occurred " ;
&- (_>-*>; ^ olft*asu •' an investigation is going on." Some-
times even the Hindustani plural is added, as : &#&* sifette.
pi. of e»li*, the reg. Ar. pi. of <&*» (Urdu oJu) •' attributes,,
qualities." Vide also (o) (2).
(o) Broken. Inner, or Irregular Plurals.
(1) — These are so irregular and various that no rules greatly
assist the memory. Though irregular, some measures are
commoner than others. The broken plurals are formed by
a change t»f vowels within the word, and in some cases with
an ending as well. Some nouns have more than one broken
plural and occasionally a regular masculine or feminine
plural as well. When a noun has more than one meaning
in the singular, it usually has a different form of plural
/ o- ^ •J'-p
for each, as: c^w bayt •' house, a couplet." pi. o^j buyut
f *>'
'• houses." and ol±j? abyat " couplets."
(2) — The broken plurals are really collective nouns, or
singular nouns with a collective signification. The regular
1 The regular feminine plural is frequently added to nouns with a
neuter sense.
308 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
-<fxCx
feminine plural in -at is sometimes added, as : j*}+ jawhar
"jewel," br. pi. yM^ jaivahir1 "Jewels, jewellery/' double
pi. e»t^A|^ " varied kinds of jewels."
jfi>f
Broken plurals of broken plurals occur in Arabic, as : ^;
/xGx J> xx
rukn " pillar," br. pi. Jiy, pi. of pl-t^t;', but these are prac-
tically not used in Urdu.
Remark. — Broken plurals used in Urdu are not necessarily
of the same gender as their singular [vide (n) (4) Remark II],
xOx C-x
as : u>b, f. " direction," br. pi. ot^ti, m. ; oJj, m. " time "
(from oJj " to appoint a time "), br. pi. olfjl, f. As in the
case of the regular feminine plural [see (n) (4), Remark II], a
few broken plurals in Urdu are sometimes singular, and some-
'xOx
times singular or plural, as: »lyi " mouths," in Urdu fern
f 9 f +
sing. " rumour " (from sing. ty» and f» " mouth ") ; Jf>»-l (br.
pi. of Jl^), m. sing. ; VT"*' (br. pi. of --**-») in the sense of
" implements, goods," m. sing. ; but in the sense of " causes,"
m. pi. : oUJl (br. pi. of «-«i^) gen. masc. pi., but also used as
a sing. So, too, the Hindustani plural is sometimes added,
1 Even foreign words introduced into Arabic are given broken
plurals, as: (^fc'^i " falcons" from Pers. ^-^U*1 ; oli*^ " papers"
from Pers. <i*« ; ,»$L»y aweak " whiskies," from Eng. c£-j "vtafc";
Oxx J>^
"doctors," from Eng. i$t.
APPENDIX E. 309
*>* 2
as : <-• &j*Ks>> hukkam-o se " from those in authority" (kulc-
kdm, br. pi. of hakim) ; ? «y^*1 " to the nobles " (umara*,
pi. of amir).
Lucknow differs from Delhi in the number of some broken
plurals.
(3) — Broken plurals are formed by adding letters, rejecting
letters, or changing the vowels only.' Measures of those
broken plurals that occur in Urdu are :—
-0-xOx
(i) JUu'i — The sing, is a triliteral of any measure, as :
.- <j £ <j
l*UaJ ''bodies" (jism sing.); p&sj Borders"
'*" x ••
(hukm) ; U^t a#hya " : things " (rt. U«, Pret. *Ui) ;
jlxkt •• information, news" (khabar) ; *'^f " opin-
Ox
ions" (sing. ^5^).
If the 2nd radical be ^ or ^, it is retained in the plural.
as : Jl>^l " state, circumstances," pi. of Jl^. (rt. J>»., Past
tense Jla- intr. " to change") . &-*f 'ayn "eye " (br. pi. &k*\
a'ydn) ; as fern. pi. = " eyes," but as m. pi. = " grandees."
A few words of the measure d*l* and J**i also take this
plural, as : ^lax^f •• companions," pi. of >-^Uo ; il^i (also
" witnesses " (shahid) ; ol^A' " nobles " (pi. of sharif).
1 As Jlc moi "property," pi. ^\j*>\ amwal: ^(!& kitab " book," pi.
fy j>
>_j;? kutub: o-»l asad " lion," pi. ,>*,! tist«i (pi. not used in Urdu).
310 HINDUSTANI AIANUAL
ft) Or o
(ii) J>** — The sing, is usually of the measures t>* - cU* •
«>> XX *
JU* - <J*» or J**, as: jy«T ''matters, affairs."
y? " ff
(amr); ^ ''the sciences" ('Urn) ; ^y "towers.
bastions, signs of the zodiac " (hurj) ;
> »
" khigs " (malik) ; ^-»t (also ^—f v ,-«'«</ ]) " lions "
(asad).
t „
A few words of the measure ckl» may take this form, as :
A '• witnesses " = A^\ (sing, shahid).
9~',*
(hi) *^U» — The sing, is usually the verbal adjective J*«-»
if applicable to rational beings, if without a pas-
sive signification,* and if not derived from verbs
* "*.
with the 2nd and 3rd radicals identical 8 as : *f_»«'
(faqlr) " the poor " ; *t^l il chiefs, nobles '' (amir*) ;
~> xx>
l^* ''the poor" (yharib) ; *U^A. -sages, philoso-
XX / X X.?
phers " (hakim) ; U*u " the noble '' (najlb 6) ; *»~^>
': chiefs " (sing. i_r**; ) ? ^*V " misers " (bakfill).
l The plurals ^^f twtwi end ^t unSd are not used in Urdu.
* As JUSJ "slain."
3 As €>LX> " to extend, prolong."
* In Hindustani amir often means " rich."
b This title was given to a body of special Indian troopa, who even-
tually degenerated into a lazy rabble, and henro the term became con-
temptuous when applied to soldiery.
APPENDIX E. 311
J5" -
Some masculine adjectives of the measure J«l* with the
,y
same restrictions as above, may take this plural, as : *lyu»
ss?
" poets " (sfa*'t>) ; *3la* •• the wise " ('aqil) ; *UX* " the learn-
,' f
ed " ('alim) ; &%=*• " the ignorant" (jahil).
y~ G- f *
(iv) >JUj? — The plural of <J**» when applicable to rational
beings, but chiefly from verbs whose 2nd and 3rd
'•& ;
radicals are identical, as : *Ufcl atibba* 1 " physi-
cians " (sing, tabib, rt. ^ " to treat the sick ") ;
*lxi.i "friends" (kabib) ; *l**il ambiya "prophets"
(sing. cj*i, Pret Ui ; ; *Ujt awliya* " benefactors,
saints" (sing. Jta ) ; Ijy1 "relations, those near"
(qarib).
f „ *<,*£,'$?, £,<,, f^y^
(v) Jl** — The singular may be J** - JU> - JUi _ a'JUi . a'LJ
and other measures also, as : v1*3 " robes " (sing.
sawb) ; )^ (also;>su) " seas " (bahr) ; JUa. " moun-
'tains " (jabal) ; Jl*; " men " (rajul) ; Jl-^ " ha-
f ,<j ,
bits., good qualities" (sing. *J^, in Urdu ^Ui) ;
^y
• J, " letters " (sing. *Jj ruq'ah, in Urdu rz^'a).
For Uktf
312 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
/£>
(vi) Jl«* — The singular is a verbal adjective of the niea -
* '.
sure cUl» not derived from verbs whose 3rd radi-
f$S
cal is 3 or ^, as : fX*> " governors, rulers, judges "
/\X/ xx/
(hakim) ; Jlf=> (also ^) " the ignorant"
(jlli " lovers " ('dshiq) ; $ " infidels "
wiy nuwivab ' " deputies " (w«*t&).
/x Ox
(vii) ^**i — The singular is chiefly a quadriliteral whose
antepenultimate letter is a quiescent long vowel.
'-•: V
as: &x*jl (in Urdu azmina) "times" (zaman) ;
t!J x
*lv«i "examples" (misal) ; *f^t (also l*^< and
xOx •><
^Ua.1) "friends" (haKb*); *)&1 "proofs" (dart/):
^ O x J? 'x C,
Aj^if " medicines " (sing. *T>> ) ; &-J| " tongues,
languages" (lisari) ; **j' or *»# " Imams, exem-
plars."
>> XX
(viii) cUl»» — The singular is a feminine quadriliteral (final
S not counted) whose third letter is a servile long
vowel (quiescent), whether the singular end in the
feminine 5 or not, as: »_>* "islands"
*.'
1 But nawwab (JU* ), intensive noun, " a govenor," in Urdu vul-
garly nawab.
* The plural JUif (No. iv) is commoner for the verbal adjective
APPENDIX E. 313
, " pamphlets " (AfL»; ) ; tJtfuL^ " volumes "
&&*XL«> ) . ^ (not used in ur(iu) « noble » (sing
. adj.) ; J51^S, pl. of s&awaZ " north wind ")
and of shimal "left hand"; JJl^ "truths"
(sing. <&Ato. , in Urdu o^xa^ ) ; wJU^ and
"rarities " (sing. %?** and <u.').
This measure is the plural of a few other cases, as :
*..' ° x
" qualities, habits " (sing. &LA± ) ; ^5U«i "personal pronouns..
f.. ' -
consciences " (zamir) ; ^^ •' needs " ( <*V^)
J x-
(ix) J*y — The singular is a substantive or adjective
-^ •: * ". *.' '.
of the measure i_M»' (or rarely <J*^') and <>icU} as :
«-*J|>» " moulds " (sing, qalib or qalab) ; ^l^i. " seal-
rings " (khatim or khatam) : g^ " followers " (tabi1
j)U ) ; v^Lr^ " sides " (janib) ; JL^l^ " sea -shores "
f
(sakil) ; iSAf^ii " witiiessess " (shahid) ; u6'^ (f°r
^
" distinguished people, the upper classes"
(sing. <kfila.) ; ;«iiy "rarities" (sing. 'ij£> );
"advantages" (S«x5l» ) ; iXcyi "rules"
s
(x) JJl*i — The singular is either : (i) a quadriliteral sub-
stantive or adjective ( ii not counted), the letters
of which are all radical, or (ii) a quadriliteral (»
1 Practically the plurals of 'aj'lb and yharib.
314 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
not counted) formed from a triliteral by a pra-
fixed f - c» or f, as : j^\ft- " gems " (jawhar j*j»-) ;
Vjl*o "experiences" (J^J); u*)'** "colleges"
(sing. *-;•>*) ; JjU* " stages " (*^); Jl*>° " places
where one stops or dwells, quarters of a town "
( &svx> ); ^JUx) " meanings " ( »_«***» in Pers. ^i**>
" " * 9 " '
ma'ni and vjji*^ ma' no) ; vJ^*' ' " near relatives.
etc." (sing. ^^ " a near relative, a neighbour ' ;
also elative " nearer, nearest") ; jM\ " grandees '
(sing. j£\ ) ; v*>^*X) or »-*3tax) ;< misfortunes "
^ X.
(xi) cV^** — The singular is a quinquiliteral (5 not in-
cluded) substantive or adjective of which the
penultimate letter is a long vowel (a, u, or »), as :
"sulfcans" ( vtjbL, ; ; ^^bt^ "devils
1 Adjectives of the measure J»if f especially with the superlative
2 ^ ^
meaning, have a plural J^Uf when used as plural substantives, as :
' J" XX
Jlcl (in Urdu and Persian l(e] ) "the highest parts" ; ,j\£\ "the
yrandees, nobles"; ^i.»y " the end parts "; cUlj " beginnings, nrut
*i-
part "(pi. of J,l).
APPENDIX E. 315
(shaytan) ; ^li* " boxes " (sanduq) : Uul*3 " lit-
erary compositions " (tasnif) ; fJUl " climes "
(iqUm) ; ^J'-ix " keys " (miftdk) .
(4) The above measures are common in Urdu. Others
less common are : —
"? i,t s«, f^ * f,»*
(a) cA*J— The singular is Jl«j . <JU«j - <J'JU«* . aJjO if not derived
from verbs whose 3rd radical is j or ^, as : ^Jk? " books "
S J>J> ffy
(kitab); JU»^ "messengers" (rasul); ^(X* "cities" (sing.
>„ ,- $yy
***** ) : o*r* "carpets, beddings" (firaah).
* '. *«•. *'
(6) JUj — The singular is usually <$!*» , as: *f^ "wise sayings,
^c, ' r'
maxims, sciences" ( <£«£*, in Urdu <£«+£&. ) ; ^x*, "morals,
qualities, deeds, biographies" (S^-*, in Urdu o^*» " mode
of walking, manner of living, character ").
*.."•: * '.
(c) AJUJ— The singular is a verbal adjective, measure cUl> , that
denotes rational beings and is not from verbs with j or ^
fs" " '
as the 3rd radical, as: <uli "students" (t&libl); A!^
" ignorant persons " (jahil).
f~"f. f '.
(d) 4jL*J — The singular is a verbal adjective, measure J^U f that
denotes rational beings and is derived from verbs with ^
1 In Arabic <ult "schoolboys," and t_)tt (both plurals
" seekers, adult students." Amongst Indians and Persians the plural
„*''
>ULt is used, but in Arabic this measure is not found from
316 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
f x f f,,S>
or ^ for the 3rd radical, as: SJUii (for 'S^AS ) "judges"
(sing. (jcUi 1 ) ; Sy^* (for &Jj ) "governors" (sing. J|j«
(e) aLu — The singulars are commonly Jl*i - JU« . JU*» as : i)^c
"gazelles" (especially when very young) (sing, ^ozai):
o o
<**10 * "boys" (sing. ^Juiom); *05^ " companions " (raflq).
(/) <J«"f— The singular is commonly JU* - JU* - JL»>. as : .j^AJ'
"souls" (sing, ^j^fti ) ; ^jJL*) ( = ^^ii ) sing. faU ' a
small copper coin of uncertain value ' (the pi. also means
ff
" scales of fish ") ; Ji^f ( = d>jj*. ) " letters of the alpha-
fsfs Ox ff tto*
bet" (sing, harf); ^ (for ) " hand," pi. jjl (for AJ>] ,.
This form of broken plural is very rare in Urdu.
/j-o f ,, f ,! f „ f .
(gr) ^JUu— The singular is commonly J**' - Jliu . JU» J**i, as :
a. "neighbours" (sing. jU ) : ^t^j "fires" ( ;l> ) ;
/ x >r ^
ayJ " crowns " (sing. ^U for ^y ) ; ^I^J "brothers"
/' >xx
(sing, if for^kl ) ; ^UJU * (sing. aJuiam " a boy, slave ");
*• x
L£l«. When definite , aLqazl ^'fl^i. In Urdu and Per-
sian the definite form only of such words ie used.
f
« In Persian and Urdu e»ilj
8 In Persian and Urdu i.
4 The br. pi. ^UU only is found in Urdu, in the sense of boys that
wait on the virtuous in Paradise.
APPENDIX E. 317
(or e>U*-e) "youths, boys" (aing. ^> for J^
measure Jk»> ) .
' '•?'] <j s & <jf
(*) ^{*> J —The singular is generally ^i . ^^ or j^Jk*. Ex-
JU» amples: ^j\Si ( j(ii ) "judicial opinions" (sing.
'<••: - ff , , ,
ISJ** ) ; JlAt ' "peoples" ( J»| i ; ^;lsu« ^ ;lsu* )
>f ^i'*' '
"deserts (sing. *1^su* ) ; <^l*i ( y(f& ) "claims" (sing.
'<" ' fb^ , ,,
} ; u*l)' J "lands, estates" (sing, ^
- ^->
(or ^cjLJ ) " prisoners " (asir) ; ^lij " orphans " (yatlm) .
^\*i "boon companions" (nadlm); (j|«SA "gifts" (sing.
f* ' $ s
hadiyyah* AJ^A ); (j\ej " subjects, etc." ( &^ i ra'iyyah):
. ..
Lli "sins" ( ^h^ for <x'Ui^ j.s
(i) a'JU^ — The singular is commonly a foreign substantive or ad-
jective of five or more letters with the penultimate a long
vowel. Occasionally it has four or more letters, the penul-
f.' "
timate not being a long vowel. Examples: <J'L«Jl» Gr.,
/ y ,<,, fm "
"philosophers" (sing. OyJL£> ) ; A^Jilvc "angels" (sing.
f ^ * * ' ' -^^ s, y
and ,_jJU> ) ; jji/clti (also AAxiU) "disciples" (sing.
, from the quadriliteral j.«l3 "to teach");
(also &*.&*> ) " heretics " (sing, mulhid).
In Persian and Urdu always ahali, arazi.
f • '
Measure
3 For the measure of the plural of superlatives vide (x) and foot-
note, p. 314.
318
HINDUSTANI MANUAL
(p) The Numerals.
(1) — The ordinals from one to ten are : —
Masc. Fern.
f xx 0
**J ahad**
wakid**
uxihidal**
/ e/Ixil isnatdn'.
o ) *'*> «oKro<» '
* 1 >x!x "
/xxOx
4. awi' arba'af* '
o. *-+<* khamsat*'
6. &» sittat*"
7. 4**-
1 In Arabic, if not before a vowel, wShidah. talatah, etc. : in Unhi
and Persian, wahida, aaluta, etc.
•J Declined like an ordinary Dual.
APPENDIX E. 319
Masc. Fern.
( '(• "" "
^
f^ samaniyat*" ^ saman™.1
***** ^
\'
9. AA~~> tis'at*** *~J tis'**.
10. &/&« 'asharat** j&e lashrun.
From 11 to 19. the numbers are formed by prefixing
ss ^ s ^ s ^xx^lO
the units to ten. as: j&c A^.f 8 masc , and Sy^e tf'^^i fern.
" eleven."
Remark. — It will be noticed that from 3 to 10, the numerals
assume the fern, form for the masc. and vice versa. There
are other peculiarities that need not be mentioned here.
(2)— The Ordinals are :—
*$? * -<;;
" First " is jy * on the elative measure JUit ; being a super-
lative it has a feminine ^^ ula [(I) (5)]. "Second" to
For ^iU!> : gen.
^ In Arabic, if not before a vowel, wahidah, salasah, etc. : in Urdu
and Persian, wahida, salasa, etc.
« In Urdu and Persian, ahad 'ashar, hadl 'ashar, sani 'ashar, etc.
+ In Urdu and Persian, J,| awwal.
320 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
f
f ' '.
" Tenth " are on the measure t>l», as : J& (c4) ' " second " :
/ * * '
eJ(3 l " third " ; £'lj l " fourth " ; the feminines are regularly
formed by suffixing 5.
" Eleventh" is j^f t/^-*
" Twelfth " to " Nineteenth " are formed by adding " ten "
to the ordinals, as : ^» ^lj* "twelfth."
(3) — Distributives. The only measure (of three) found in
f ~? f , f
Urdu is JU*t as : &Jt> (in Urdu SM/OS) " by threes."
(4) — Multiplicatives : —
f t,j>
" Single " is *,** (Pass. Part, of IV Stem). The rest are of
•$" f
the measure of the Pass. Part, of II Stem, as : ^^i* rausanwa
*^f
" double, a duplicate"; -iJU^ rawsaZfow"11 "threefold, triple.
(•$>,?
three-sided " ; gj^o murabba'** " fourfold, square."
(5) — Fractions are : —
f O f <s? »ff
" Half " ^A>. Third to Tenth are on the measure J*» o
/ of f tj> f(,t f fs fi,y
as : t±J> or ^li' " third " ; & or £»; " fourth " ;
" tenth."
1 Fern. *#(> . <»jjlj . iiwf; etc., etc.
1 In Urdu and Persian, ahad 'ashar, hadt 'cwfutr, jam 'a*/wr, etc
3 In Urdu and Persian, *ul», rub'jfushr, etc.
APPENDIX E. 321
t.
f ^,
The measure of the plural is jUil.
(?) — (1) Some nouns are used in Arabic with a following
genitive, where in English an adjective is used, as : Jl* ^L*\*
? ' "
" rich" (lit. possessed of property).
Other words giving the idea of possession and companion-
* s> j> s> j> / „
ship, are: j'^zu1 masc., ot i fem.,^!1 \du nom.pl.; v'
£/ ^o jfo
•'father"; (*! * ''mother"; e>?]';son"; oJj "daughter";
Jf ^ > 0> x ^^ f
^•f4 "brother"; o^la "sister." Examples: JJUV' 3 2ti
Ox >" x
'l-jalal " possessor of glory, glorious " ; v^^l **t«i 2»P 'l-jamb
fstj*, 9 s
(in Urdu, masc.) " pleurisy" : *)+*)] e»l<i za^" l-'amud '; being
xO^, ^ >
in the perpendicular " ; p*^ ^jl ulu 'l-'azm " ambitious, reso-
'J -9- sJ> J>
lute"; v1/3^' or v'y^ "father of dust, i.e. dusty" (a
'
1 Before the article al, zu is shortened in pronunciation to zu.
j> ^
The first vowel of ^Jy is always short (ulu) and hence is sometimes
f f
written ^Jf. Note the shortening of the second vowel also for the
article al.
fs &J>
2 Compounds with if except one or two in the plural (ikhwan), /*T
4 0>
and o>^-f, do not seem to be used in Urdu. Akh.-l " my brother,"
however, occurs in Urdu.
3 Note this shortening of the vowel u before the article al. Simi-
larly with t5», as : a'UaJ) ^ fi 'Irjumlah.
21
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
nickname given to 'All by Muhammad); ^-xaeuJt^j bu 'l-'ajab
"wonderful"; <_rj*-'t t> &# 'l-hawas "capricious, sensual";
te\ rl " mother of cities" (i.e. Makkah) ; >iJUsJ| pi wmm"
** > o
'l-khaba*is " the mother of vices" (i.e. wine) ; Jtf-Jf cHl ^^u
0^0.0^0
'5 l-sabil " son of the road" (i.e. traveller) ; v^l vrtl " a G>°d
knows who, a parvenu, an upstart " ; ^>\^\ ol> bint* 'l-'inab
(feni in Urdu because shardb is fern.) "daughter of the
,-$*> 9 , o
grape" (i.e. wine); &\*ji'< iy!^J ikhwan* 'z*-zamdn (m.)
" contemporaries/'
Remark. — There appears to be no rule for the use or omis-
> .<o *j
sion of the article Jf after ji and *_,'. It is usual after ^Jy,
but in the Qiir*an there are several instances of its omission .
j>
(2) — The gen. sing, of ji is ^<: 2»4; the gen. and ace. of
9 * ' /
yy the pi., is (.5^ zawi or ^\ tilt.
Remark I. — Persians and Indians ignore case and number.
as : £}> (^ " animate " ; ,>|i>*l-.| ^i " capable " ; ;(«x£jilll <^)<?
'l-iqtidar •• powerful" ; £>*J| ^Jjl uU 'l-'azm- ^\ J)\ :
\ utt 'l-'ilm "the learned."
1 When the article al precedes any dental, liquid, or sibilant letter,
it is assimilated with it and the letter is doubled by way of compensa.
t ion,. -is: as-sabil for nl-sabll. Those 14 "solar lottors " aro: o, >1>
^, ^. ;, 3. u-, oi, u", u«, •*», £, J, c^.
* The aec. I ^ za is not found in Urdu.
APPENDIX E. 323
They even prefix ^i to Persian words, as : tj*. ^& " wise " ;
-i "intelligent."
Remark II. — The Persian sahib-mansab " officer " (Pers. pi.
j>
sahib -mansabari) is apparently the Arabic construction «_^U>
^ Ox
V^>i*> "possessor of rank" ; so too in sdhib-dil, though dil
is Persian. Sahib-i lakhi "king" is the equivalent Persian
construction. This would account for the frequent omission
of the izafat after sahib and explain why such terms as sahib-
jamal and sahib-i jamal "beautiful" are both correct Per-
sian.
fstss fs
Remark III. — After the Arabic words »_>tJ>t (pi. of k_>;); and
$ Ox
J*f "people." etc.. the izafat is always used in Persian and
Urdu, as : arbab-i nishat "dancers, singers, etc."; arbab-i
ma'ni1 "spiritual persons"; ahl-i mazaq "people of good
taste"; ahl-i zaban "people of the mother tongue, those
whose mother-tongue the language is."
For Ar. ma'ny.
APPENDIX F.
GENDER OF NOUNS.1
(a) — Nouns denoting males are masculine, those .denoting
females are feminine.
Exception. Masculine words such as qabila " tribe," khandan and
gharana "lineage, household," and certain other words, remain mas-
culine even when used in the sense of " wife."
(6)— MASCULINE are :—
(i) Hindi nouns in a, as : him "diamond"; aid "coarse
flour" ; (jhard '• a globular earthen pot."
Exceptions are, diminutives in -it/5, as: chiriya "small bird."
Vide (c) (ii) p. 327.
(ii) All abstract Hindi nouns in -d,o, as: chirkd,o " sprink-
ling" (from chirkdnd, tr.) ; bacJid.o " defence" ; bhd,o " price
current " ; and bhd,o ' flowing."
^lost other nouns in u or o, as : dlu, P.. " potato " ; jddu.
P. " magic " ; pahlu P. '• side " ; ItasJiw or hashv, vulg. kasho.
Ar. "stuffing" (also in Rhetoric 'tautology"); bdzu P.
" arm " ; bichchhu, H. " scorpion " ; bijju or bijjo " the In-
dian badger."
Exceptions. Balu, H. " sand" ; daru, P. H. " medicine, spirituous
liquor, gun-powder " : rohu, H. (a large river fish) ; no,o, H. " boat " :
hajw, vulg. hajo, Ar. "a satire, lampoon": abrH, P. "honour";
arzu, P. " wish " ; few or bo, P. " smell " : tarazii, P. " scales " ; jo, jTi
•'streamlet"; feio or i&u "nature, disposition." There are other
exceptions.
(iii) Nouns ending in silent h, as: banda (»*V) "slave";
*t
(«^) " anger " ; qissa " story, tale."
1 Taken from Platts.
APPENDIX F. 325
Remark. — If, however, the h (is) of an Arabic word be
changed to t in Urdu (and Persian), the word is feminine,
thus *l>vo, AT. becomes in Urdu manzila, m., or manzilat,1 f.
Exceptions. Banafsha "violet"; tawba "repentance": daf'a
" time, section " ; sarfa " expenditure " ; fakMa " the Bar-tailed Tree
Dove"; feminine also are such Arabic feminines as are formed by
adding the feminine termination g to the masculine, as: malika
"queen" (malik "king"); walida "mother" (walid "father"):
shikra2 " the female of the Indian sparrow-hawk."
Remark I.—Lasha " corpse" appears to follow the regular rule and
to be masculine, but lash is feminine. The plural in common use is
lashe.
Remark //.—The final silent h of masculines is sometimes changed
to a and vice versa, as : gharana *J|^f " household " for gharana 1*1^4? ;
raja iA\) for raja la.|j
(iv) All (abstract) nouns in -pan, as : larak-pan ;; child-
hood " and "childishness"; kamlna-pan (^ *'**+?} "mean-
ness."
f sO
(v) Arabic verbal nouns of the measure JUJl if'alu* '6 as :
"beneficence"; iqbal "good fortune"; iqrar
" avowal " : inkar " denial " ; isbat " proving, confirming."
Exceptions. Ijlas ^SL*.^ "sitting, session"; idbar "turning
back, decline of fortune" (opp. to iqbal); islah " correction, improve-
ment"; ikrah "aversion"; ilhah "importunity"; imdad " assist-
1 Manzil, also, is feminine.
2 The male or tiercel is called chippak or chippakh. Many of the
females of the hawks are incorrectly masculine in the dictionaries.
Shikra seems to be a corruption from the Persian shikara " a bird of
prey."
* Vide Appendix E.
326 HINDUSTANI MANUAL
ing" ; trad " citing." Also a few more words of this measure ending
in t o and 5 I.
(vi) Arabic verbals of the measure cUftj tafa"ulnn, as :
takabbur " haughtiness" ; taraddud "going to and fro, vacil-
lation."
Exceptions. Tawajjuh A^y "regard"; tawazzu yi£ "performing
the Muslim ablution"; tatvaqqu' "expectation": tamannaii+J (for
Ar. .*i*i) "desire." Also all nouns of this measure ending in t, as:
<*>x "
lasalll (>rUJ "consolation": taraqql " promotion."
(vii) Verbals of the measure d*lA» to/a'?//**, as : taddruk
9 „
I^J|A> ''punishment, remedy"; tafdivui o>li3 "difference.
interval."
^xx
Exceptions. Tawazu ^«(y "civility." Also nouns of this measure
ending in -t, as: ^-ilxu tahaahi (vulg. for ,^1x6 /oAa^/K?). m. and f.
" standing apart, taking exception to."
^ x O
(viii) Verbals of the* measure Jl*ii| infi'dl**. as : insirnm
" ending " ; in^a/ " decision."
e , <,
(ix) Verbals of the measure Jl*i»] t//t'5Z*". as : ikhtisnr
'' abridgment " ; iliimds " petition."
Exceptions. Ihtiyaj "necessity"; ihtiyak "care": isf.ilah "con-
ventional term, phrase, idiom"; ittila' "announcement"; i'tiraz
" objection." Also a few words of this measure ending in 5 and t.
as: ibtida " beginning" ; iltifat " attention."
i , <,
(x) Arabic verbals of the measure Jti»**-J isti'fdl**, as:
" asking forgiveness " ; isti'mal " use."
APPENDIX F. 327
Exceptions. Isti'dad "capacity"; istikrah "aversion"; iatimdad
" asking help " ; istid'a " supplicating" ; istirza " seeking to please."
(xi) The Arabic Noun of Time and Place,, measure
maj-alu* or maf'il"*,1 as: masdar "source" (also the Infini-
tive) ; maskan '' habitation " ; maqam •• place of standing or
halting, a place, etc." ; makan " dwelling" ; mashriq "place
of rising, the East" ; mag&rib '•' place of setting, the West."
Exceptions. Majal " scope, power " ; mahsliar " place of gathering,
the Day of Judgment "; mahfil " place o ' meeting, assembly " ; majlis
"place of sitting, assembly "; matjid "mosque"; manzil " a stage,
halting place."
(xii) The Arabic Noun of Instrument, measure
mij'CLl**. as: misqal " any instrument for polishing metal."
* .°
Exception. Minkhar ^s^o " nostril."
(c)— FEMININE are:—
(i) Most Arabic nouns ending in a, as: baqa •perma-
nence" ; bald :i calamity."
A few, however, are masculine.
(ii) All Hindi diminutives in -iyd, as: chiriyd "small
bird"; dibiyd " small box''; phuriyd "pimple (small boil).
Vide also (6) (i) Exceptions p 324. and L. 53 (h).
(iii) Arabic nouns ending in o t, as : ulfat cJ^ " famili-
arity " ; 'izzat " honour."
Exceptions. §ubiit " confirmation, proof "; sharbat "a draught.
any fruit syrup," eau awre" ; wogt " time " [but the br. pi. awqat is
fern.] ; khil'at " robe of honour" ; yaqut " ruby."
1 Sometimes an js is suffixed to these measures as in madrasa, m.
college"; maqbara, m. " mausoleum."
328 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
(iv) Those Persian abstract nouns in t that are formed by
dropping the n of the Infinitive, as: raft " going" (from
raftan ;i to go ") ; guft " speaking " (guftan " to speak ").
(v) Hindi abstract nouns terminating in -aJiat or -awal,
as : ghabrahat " perturbation " ; bandwat " fabrication."
(vi) Persian abstract nouns in -ish. as : ddnish " wisdom " ;
nalish " complaint."
(vii) Abstract nouns formed by suffixing an -t, as : Mul-
tdnl "the Multan dialect" (but Multanl "a p'erson of Mul-
tan," is com. gen.); zardi "yellowness" (zard. P. "yel-
low"); la.mba,t '"length"; bandagl "slavery" (banda
" slave ").
Many other nouns in -i are also feminine, as : roll
••bread": surdki ' gugglet. a water-vessel with long thin
neck" ; haddl " bone."
Remark I. — Numerous Hindi masculines in -5 form feminines or
diminutives by changing -5 into -t, as: ghorl "mare" (ghora, m.);
rassl " rope, cord " (rassa " cable ").
Remark II. — Many nouns in -i are masculine, as : halhi " elephant " ;
jt "life"; dahl "curds"; molt "pearl"; ght "clarified butter":
mull " a Hindu gardener "; >lh'>h~> "washerman"; bhazan-chl "trea-
surer " ; baiour-chl " cook."
(viii) Hindi verbals formed by dropping the termination
-na of the Infinitive, as : mar " beating" ; lut '• plunder" ;
samajh " understanding."
Exceptions. Khel "play"; noch "a plucking out";
dhakel " push, shove " ; nichor " extract " ; nach " dance " ;
rang "colour." There are some others.
(ix) Arabic verbals of the measure J^niS to/'t/"", as : tar-
ib "incentive"; taslan "assuaging, tranquillizing":
APPENDIX F. 329
ta'mil executing, carrying into effect " ; ta'Km " instruction,
education."
Exception. Ta'wiz ^^ " amulet."
f s <J
(x) The Arabic Noun of Instrument, measure Jl*i* w/i'-
-dlun, as: miqraz -'scissors, shears"; minkar "beak";
mizdn •'• scales."
Exception. Minshar " hand-saw "; mismar " nail, peg ": mi'yar
(d) — Twenty-one of the letters of the alphabet are femi-
nine.
(e) — Generic nouns are either masculine or feminine arid
include both sexes, as: billi, f. ;a cat" (billd masc.) ; chil.
f. ''a kite" (the bird) ; gidar, m. ;:a jackal " (c/idarm, f.) ;
haran, m. (harm, f.) " the Indian antelope."
Remark — The words nar and mada may be added to distinguish
sex, as : nar-ga,o " bull " ; mada fll or fil-i mada " female elephant"
= hathnl.
APPENDIX G.
NAGARI ALPHABET.
Hindi, like Sanskrit, employs the Deva-nagari or Ndgari
alphabet, which is written from left to right. The alpha-
betical order, is the order of the organs of utterance, begin-
ning with the throat and ending with the lips. The follow-
ing is the alphabet, with a transliteration : —
Votcds (Initial Form).
Nagari ^^T*t<s«W* tj^fr^ft
Roman a a
Urdu t T
t * ka
Gutturals
I u u ri el
ai4 os aw*
>\ 1 ri j il'
jf * y s y *
Consonants.
V kha 9 ga w gha
»na6
1 In the Arabic alphabet there is no e sound ; the method of trans-
literating this vowel in the Arabic and Persian character is a mere
makeshift.
a The Hindi diphthong ai has, in the Arabic character, to be trans-
literated ay.
'* There is no o sound in Arabic. The method of transliterating this
vowel in the Arabic and Persian character is a makeshift.
* The Hindi diphthong au has to be transliterated aw in the Arabic
character.
& It will be noticed that the four letters n, as well as the Aruuwar
or nasal symbol mentioned later, have all, in Urdu, to be transliter-
ated &.
Palatals .
APPENDIX o.
cha w chh m ja if jha *f na '
331
Cerebrals
or Linguals
ta 3 tha * da * dha
Dentals .
to *J tha
dha «r
Labials . .
Semi vow-
els
6a
V «i v
ya T ra W /
o" ; J
Sibilants. .
Aspirate . .
To the above must be added the nasal symbol Anuswar1
( ' ) or nasal n, and the weak aspiration Visarg ( : ). The
1 It will be noticed that the four letters n, as well as the Anuswar
or nasal symbol mentioned later, have all, in Urdu, to be transliter-
ated ^.
* The distinction between Anuswar ( ' ) and Anunasik ( & ) may
be ignored. Before b, v, and p, anuswar is often pronounced like TO.
In Urdu, anuswar or nasal n is transliterated &, but when it is final
some writers omit the dot. In the Roman character, it is usually
transliterated n or — . It is common after a long, but rare after a
short, vowel. This nasalization of a vowel by amiswar practically
adds another letter to the alphabet. There is no nasal n in Persian
and Arabic : it is incorrect to write qqref .for
332 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
latter is rare in Hindi: it is sometimes used to transliterate
the Persian final silent h.
The numeral ^ after a word indicates that it is repeated.
The mark ° indicates that a word is abbreviated, as docs
a full stop in English.
The vowel <t a is inherent in each consonant when no
other vowel is written, thus qix = nagar. The final short a
is not usually pronounced except in poetry. It is, however.
generally pronounced after a final y or a final compound
letter, as: ftn tiya "woman," ^|^{ chandr* "moon." and
also in a few monosyllables as H n "not" and w cJiJi a
"six."
To denote the absence of the inherent vowel a, the symbol
viram or 'pause' (jazm or sukun in Urdu) may be written
under a consonant, thus * = & (and not kd).
[Sanskrit has three vowels and one consonant in addition
to those given, viz. : <t fl, « Ifi, and ^ In (vowels) and
oj la. They may all be ignored].
The initial form of the vowels given above, is only used
to begin a word or a syllable. It thus performs one of the
offices of hamzah in Urdu, corresponding to a hyphen in Eng-
lish : thus **fc fd-ida is
The following indicates the medial and final forms of the
vowels : —
Vowels following a Consonant.
bad bad bid bid bud bud
APPENDIX G. 333
6a
It will be seen from the above that the secondary (medial
or final) form of i, viz. f , is written before (but sounded after)
its consonant.
The vowels u and u ( and ), when in combination with
f (T), are written * (ru), and ^ or T (ru) ; while the vowel
ri ( __ ) joined to h (^), is written ^.
When two or more consonants occur together without an
inherent a, they should, strictly speaking, be united and
written as one compound letter. These compounds are
formed : (1) by writing one letter above the other, as : qj kk-
5 tt ; and (2) by writing one after the other, omitting th e
upright stroke of the first, as : «^ bd, «l tth.
The form ^"TSfT " to hear " is preferable to 551, as the root
of a verb practically terminates a word.
A few compounds change the original form, as : fj ksh (also
written gr) =^ + 1. pronounced like x in fluxion, and in Urdu
' In Hindi, words are found beginning with two or more consonants.
According to Arab Grammarians, no word begins with two consonants.
2 There is no e sound in the Arabic character. The employment
of weak consonants, j (initial) and A (medial), to represent this vowel,
is a makeshift.
* In the Arabic alphabet, the Hindi diphthong ai has to be trans-
literated ay.
*• There is no o sound in the Arabic alphabet. This employment of
the weak consonant j to represent the Hindi vowel o, is a makeshift.
& In the Arabic character, the Hindi diphthong au has to be trans-
literated aw.
334 HINDUSTANI MANUAL
oftener transliterated «». than ^ ; and w= «r + «f, but pro-
nounced hard like gy, as in ^rf (or i^Tf) = o^ " knowledge."
The letter r (X) is common in compounds and has then
several forms : ( 1 ) Initial ( * ) as in ^q sury* (colloquially
suraj fiscal) ', •' the sun " ; note that this r is written over
and at the end of the compound letter ; but if the compound
is followed by a vowel, the r is written after the vowel, as :
*H?f dharmi " religious " ; (2) when the r immediately follows
another consonant, it is a short stroke as in vniT Agra, and
if^W grahan '• eclipse (of sun or moon)."
The compound letters are chiefly confined to MSS. and to
Sanskrit works.
The following are examples of some of the commoner com-
pound letters : —
Some Compounds Letters
n W ^ U ^ror* «i IT w
kt ky kkh gn r.hchh ' jj tt tth '
In
tm
ly tw
dd
ddh}
dm, dy
dw
nt
nn nh
pt
py
ps bd
bhy
II sht ' shth ' 8_hn ' st sn ss hm hy
Each element of a compound must be distinctty enunci-
ated, whether these letters are different or the same, as:
^m pat-td si leaf" and mi* pat-thar* 4i stone."
1 Note that in Hindi, these are two letters only.
2 Note that in Urdu, the tashdid doubles the first letter only of a
Hindi compound; (hus in pat-thar qu^ . it is the t that is doubled
•* v
and in ach-chha ^fT , it is the ch that is doubled
APPENDIX G. 335
Compounds of three letters are very rare. They usually
consist of a semi- vowel (* * <«r or *) with a double compound,
as : -^ ntr, m pty. ^ sty. Compounds of four letters may
be ignored.
Pro nunc iation.
The orthography of Hindi is somewhat erratic. The
popular way of spelling a word is not always correct.
The vowels are pronounced as in Urdu, vide Introduction,
page xxvi (20). In theory only does the vowel ri (m) differ
from ri (ft) ; thus am kripa " compassion " is also written
faniT. Colloquially, too. ri is pronounced — and even written —
ir ; thus %T*n and faqi
The letters ^ d and ^ dh. if written with a dot under them.
(^-V) are pronounced r ( j ) and rh (AJ). For the pronuncia-
tion of these hard letters, viz. "Z t, f d, ^ r. and their aspirated
forms, vide Introduction, page xxiii (5) and (6).
'f n is a cerebral nasal and is pronounced like the above
hard letters by touching the back of the palate with the tip
of the tongue while enunciating n. as : nfiftl gamt " counted."
It is pure Sanskrit. In ordinary Hindi, it is generally writ-
ten and pronounced «f (o).
«= na is a guttural nasal as in thing or England. It is only
found immediately before a guttural. In modern Hindi,
the anuswar* is substituted for it ; thus ^1T danga " tumult."
is, in Hindi. ^JTT daga (&&).
^T is a palatal nasal as n in the English pinch or in the
French magnifique. In Hindi this is usually changed into
anuswar*.
* n (o) is often pronounced as in the English not. It is
properly more dental than the English n. It is occasionally
interchangeable with - as : ^TT or ^^TT " the world."
336 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Pincott says: "The pronunciation of the four n's need
cause no trouble. When conjoined as compounds with other
consonants, their sounds are determined by the letters which
immediately follow them ; thus, in pronouncing the words
qrT ank- ^W nitch. *w ""'/- Wfl ant it is impossible to avoid
giving to each n its proper pronunciation."
The letters ar and ~ are common, the other letters n are
rare.
^ y (csO usually pronounced as y in English, but occasion-
ally as j ; thus *r* yug " an Age " is often written and pro-
nounced 5T« jug ; so too ^J sury* (tJ)j»») " sun," is usually
written and pronounced j^r^r suraj. [In Urdu f| is often
turned into ^J. It is frequently substituted for the diph-
thong at; thus <5*?tr samay "time, season," is erroneously
often written w samai ; and also tt same (<*?»), wf sama,i
\<jL+~»), and even WT sama,i, so too, JITC ga,e " cow " is often
written JITW, *t, and even are.
T r ( ) ) must be rolled or trilled, something like the French
r. It is a distinct lingual.
^r v or w ( ) )• It is often interchangeable with w b : thus
TO or TO " jungle, forest." Note that w (1^*) is also writ-
ten **T.'
H sh (<Ji) is a lingual as in shut or the ss in session.
l |A ( c4 or 4> ) is palatal, but often does not differ from
H . It is often sounded and even written kh ; thus «jfa dosh
or dokh " fault" ; «T1T bhasha or wr^I bluikha " speech, ver-
nacular." '
l In Marwarl q = b, and ^ = v; ^ takes the place of *» ; and q
is the only sibilant.
APPENDIX O. 337
^ s (<j» i is a dental sibilant. It is sometimes pronounced
like *C ; thus mmasa or <UT*n asha " hope." The general ten-
dency is to substitute 9 for the other sibilants.'
^1 ph (4$) is vulgarly pronounced like /.
When a word ends in a compound letter, the final a is col-
loquially transferred ; thus l^i murkha " fool" is incorrectly
pronounced murakh.
When a termination, beginning with a vowel, is added to
a root of two syllables, as in such a verbtfis nikal-na, the
vowel a of the root is discarded ; thus, the Preterite is nikla
and not, as might be expected, nikal-a!1 So too the plural
of magar, " crocodile." is magro (ka) and not magaro (ka).
[n words like ilfr^T pyara. an i is often inserted between
the first two letters ; thus fq^TTT piyard. but the first form is
considered the more chaste.'2
Consonants are sometimes interchanged ; thus €fa^ ' mud "
is often ^fanc.8
Corruptions such as *Nn paiya for «|f%^i pahiya " wheel,"
explain themselves.
The Urdu conjunction W is usually transliterated as in the
Roman, viz. f% ki.
Words like risht wf*T m. "a sage," are transliterated ^.
The fern, m^ rishi, " the wife of a rishi" is also ^;.
1 In Marwari q=b, and *=v : ^r takes the place of w: and ^
is the only sibilant.
2 This applies to Urdu also. A similar euphonic change occurs in the
plural of jagah, ' vide' L. 53 (k) and bahan. Such a change is some-
times incorrectly made in Persian words.
3 Uneducated Hindus sometimes change syllables in foreign words.
The name Prendergast is generally Gastpender.
22
338 HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Those Arabic letters that have no equivalent sound in
Nagarl, are usually distinguished by having a dot under the
nearest Nagarl equivalent ; thus, ± l = q ; j, j, a, and £ = ai ;
u* and «£* = «; =*: = ; t3 = *» «•*=*» = *; and
or T (thus *w 6o'rf may be written W^3, WT^, or f^l^), or
the vowel with which • is pointed is written with a dot un-
der it, as : fie =T« ; j+e =w . Note that *W* is a better
transliteration & «*i; rt^'a than either *«*!* or ^*^ or **i^
Indians are careless about transliteration of any kind.
Hindi is written in three other alphabets besides the Deva-
ndgarl.
1 And also rarely as z
< Ae already stated, the symbol . may be used for the final silent h
of Urdu and Persian.
INDEX.
[Unless otherwise stated, the figures indicate the number of the Lest
4,=silent h, vide silent h.
A, final, inflected in compounds
53 (d) Rem.
Ab and abhi, difference in use 51 (/).
Abtak, with Pres and Past tense =
still, 51 (e) Note.
About to be, 20 (6), 54 (g), 57
(6). Vide Begin.
Abstract nouns in I and t, if from
AT. are fern., p. 1 (a).
Accent, in verb, p. 8 (a).
Active or trans, verb, arrangement
of sentence formed by, 10 (6).
Acquisitives, 18 (a).
Adh, last ex. in 9 (b), and p. 44,
3rd ex.
Adjectives and Degrees of Com-
parison, 3 (a), (b) ; in — ana spe-
cially adverbial, p. 11 (i); posi-
tion of, p. 4 (a) ; terminations
of, p. 4 (b) ; that are in decl., p.
4 (a) ; intensive, 3 (a) (2) ; qual.
subj. to pi. verb, must be pi., 16
(d) footnote ; two subs, for subs.
and adj., 48 (e) ; used as ad-
verbs, p. 10 (e) ; used as preposi-
tions, 56 (h); ending in nasal
n, 53 (c) (2) and App. A (c) ;
in silent h, 53 (/) ; when they
do not agree with their nouns,
32 (i) and 84 (d); intensive, 3
(a) (2) (3), and 48 (b) (2), and 64
1st and 2nd ex.
Adverbs, different forms of, pp.
10-11; examples of, 61 (c) ; as
correlative, 55 (a) (3).
Adverbial part., 59 (d) and last
ex. in 60 (/).
Agar and jab, idiomatically omit-
ted, p. 193, footnote 2, and 57
(/); 52 (e) (4), of footnote 2.
Agency, verbal noun of, 57 (6):
inf. with ko= verbal noun of, 54
(g).
Agent case, 13 (a).
Aisa, etc., 35 (a), (c) and (i).
A-jana, = unexpectedly, p. 139,
footnote 1 .
Aksar, as adv., 61 (c) (5).
Alphabet, Urdu, p. xvii : Nagri
App. G.
Already, =chukna, 16 (a).
Ana, idiomatic uses of 14 (a) ; in
compounds gen. retains its pro-
per signification, 23 (e).
And, frequently omitted 58 (6).
Annas (ana), and per cent., 45 (e).
Antepenultimate, short, 53 (h),
footnote 2.
Aorist, =to a Pres. Subjunctive, 7
(a) ; Respect, and Impers. Aor.
(or Resp. Impera.), 7 (6) (2), p.
37.
.4p,=self and Your Honour, p.
8 (/) and 31 (a), (6); other
_ words like, Ap, p. 8 (/) (2).
Apa, in certain phrases, 27 (b).
Apas, recip. pron. , p. 8 (g) and p.
151, footnote 3.
Apna, possess, adj., construction
and significations, 27 (a) ; accu-
satives of 27 (a) Rem. ; exam-
ples of, 27 (c).
Appositives, 48 (b), and 61 (/).
Arabic, Measures, App. E ; subs.
in ace. =adverb, p. 11 (h).
Article, def. and indef. , pp. 1 and
12 (a), (c), (d).
As soon as, how expressed, 51 (at.
Aur, both a conjunc. and a
pronom. adj., 3 (c) ; expresses
contrast, surprise, or simul-
taneity, 43 (6) ; often prefixed
to a second ya or no, 35 (d), (e).
340
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Aur bhi,=ziyada, 3 (a).
Auxiliary tenses, p. 9.
Ay a, ' vide ' Whether.
Az bag ki, significations of, place
now taken by cAtln ki, 52 (c).
Bachna, examples of, 31 (c).
Badan, omission of, p. 75, foot-
note 4, and 20 (e) (4) Rem..
and 60 (e) (2).
Ba-daulat, 60 (d) (2).
Badle, prep., 60 (e).
Ba-nhair, 63 (c).
Bahin, pi. of, 53 (k) ; voc. of, 59
(c) (6).
Bahut, " many, noun in sing, or
pi. ; its pi. 4 (a).
Bai thrui, in compounds, Perf.
tenses and past part., 23 (a)
Note.
Baithe-bithaye, adv., p. 185, foot-
note 1.
Bala ka, idioms with, 14 (b), and
p. 76.
Balki, "but" meaning "instead
of," how rendered 12 (b), foot-
note 1 ; enhansive, 60 (c).
Banda, p. 8 (/) (3) : nouns like,
ending in silent h masc. , p. 16,
footnote 3, and 19 (c), footnote
2 ; fern, of, 53 (/) (2).
Bandagi, L. 32 (/).
Bandl and laudi, 53 (/) (2).
Bamya, how inflected, 53 (c).
Banna, examples, p. 144-5.
Barely, how expressed, 51 (6).
Barha, with past tense only, 61
(6) (5).
Barhiya, adj., not inflected, 57
(h).
Barhkar, adv , 18 (d) (2), and p.
24, line 2.
Baz-e, 8 (6) (I).
Be 'and bin, prep., p. 12 (e), (/),
and 63 (c) ; p. 224, footnote 1 .
Became and was, ' vide ' Hu,a.
Before, vide Just.
Begin, chalna, 40 (6) (2). Vide
Lagna, and About to be.
Bhaga-jana and bhage-jana, 63 (b).
Bha,l, voc. of, 59 (c) (6).
Bhar, 13 (g).
Bhauorbhd, 59 (c) (11).
Bhi, "also, even," p 19, foot-
note 1 , and 3 (d) ; unlike nlz ,
cannot begin sentence, 57 (c) (2).
Bhule se for bhiil se, p. 26 foot-
note.
Bih-tar, Pros, comparative, 3 (a).
Bin and bina. ' Vide ' Be.
Bila, 63 (c).
Bu and bo, fern., pi. of, 59 c) (7).
Burhiya, pi. of, 53 (h).
But, if enhansive, not exceptive,
vide Balki.
Cardinal numbers, App. A. (a) :
nouns preceded by either sing,
or pi., 32 (g) (1): sing, with
nouns of manner, 32 (g) (2).
Causal verbs, examples, 44 (6), (c),
(d), (g); of tutna, 44 (c) (2); of
phutna, p. 164.
Cent per, App. A (g), and 45 (e).
Chacha, 69 (c) (1).
Chahe-chahe, whether — or (exclu-
sive), 35 (/).
C'hahiye, examples, pp. 122-3:
used impersonally, 19 (b) ; with
na or nahi; with dat. of person
or followed by Aor., preceded
by past part. 32 (c) ; 20 (6).
Chahiye tha, p. 123. 1st ex. and
32 (c).
Chahiye, 32 (c).
Chahna, 19 (o) and 20 (a), (b), (c).
Chala-jana, 40 (6), and 63 (b).
Chalrdena, intr., 22 (o).
Chale-jana, [ ' vide ' " Stumbling-
Blocks," p. 85], and 63 (6).
Chalna. 40 (6); examples, 41 (o).
Charhna, constructions with. 11
(d).
Chiriya, pi. of, 53 (h).
Chhorna, in compounds, 23 (</);
added to trans, is more forcible
than -tena, 23 (g) ; p. 164.
Chhutna, examples. 36 (»).
INDEX.
341
Chukria, how constructed, 15 (a) ;
=already, 16 (a); with Pret. is
ironical, 16 (c).
Chunki, begins, etc., a causal
clause, 52 (a).
Collective numbers, App Aid) (2)
Collocation, 63 (d), '
Common gender, 57 (g).
Comparison, degrees of. 3 (a);
Persian, 61 (k).
Completives, vide Chukria.
Compound nouns of different gen-
ders usually follow gender of
last portion of compound, 56
(&) ; semi-compound nouns,
gender of, 20 (g).
Compound verbs, formation of,
45 (a) ; object of, 45 (&); idioma-
tic examples of, 46 (a) : differ-
ent construction in Act. and
Pass., 45 (c); intensive com-
pounds, vide Intensives.
Concord of verb, 56 (c), (d), (e),(f) :
of adjectives, vide Adjectives.
Conjunctive Participle, significa-
tion and use, 55 (d) • combines
two or more sentences into one,
18 (6); adverbial use of, p. 11
(/); and L. 18 (d) ; shortened
form indicates haste, 26 (c) and
footnote 1 ; repeated, p. 184,
footnote 2 and p. 1 86, footnote 1.
Correlative, vide Relative,
D.
Dada, optionally inflected, 59 (c)
(2).
Dalna, as a servile verb, 22 (/).
Dana, inflection of, 59 (c) (1).
Da,o, inflected of, 59 (c) (12).
Darya, inflection of, 59 (c) (1).
Data and de,ota, inflection of, 59
Day, of Hindus and Muslims,
App. B (a).
Days of the week, App. A (j).
Declamatory negative, simple
verb must be used, 23 (h).
Declension, p. 2 (6), (c), (d).
Degrees of comparison, vide Com-
parison.
Dena, to allow, 18 (a) ; some com
pounds with, regarded as in-
transitive, 22 (a) ; Irnperf. = to
offer, 22 (a) Rem ; dena and
leria in Intensive compounds,
Desideratives, 20 (a), (6), (c).
DevanSgari, vide Alphabet.
Dhu,a, how inflected, 53 (c).
Diminutives, 53 (h).
Direct narration, generally used
in Hindustani, 36 (a); classes
of verbs usually followed by
the direct narration, 36 (c) ; a
direct narration sometimes oc-
curs within a direct narration,
36 (e), footnote 2.
Dissyllables, pi. of, 53 (k) and
footnote 5.
Double postpositions, examples
of, 6') (a), (b), (f).
Dramatic present, examples of,
p. 151, 3rd ex. and footnote 1.
Dub-jaria, dub-mama, dubke mar-
ria, differences in signification
of, 23 (c).
Dur and dur ka, distinction be-
tween, 37 (c).
E.
Each other, 13 (/).
Ek, as indef. article ; after a num-
ber=about ; emphatic, 8 (e)and
p. 1.
Ek adh, 8 (e).
Emphasis, the same word repeated
for, 48 (a) ; expressed by a syno-
nym or appositive, 48 (&), (c),
(d),(e); vide also 64.
Emphatic particle hi, 51 (e) and
50 !&); examples, 51 (/) ; occa-
sionally omitted after Adv.
Part., 59 (d). For to, 'vide'
under To.
Enclitic particle hi, 51 (e) and 50
(b) ; enclitic to, ' vide ' under
To.
342
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Euphemisms, common, App. B
(6), (c).
Euphony, affecting concord of
subjects and verb, 30 (c) (2).
Even though, how expressed, 50
(d).
Except and besides, how ex
pressed, 59 (6).
Exactly, 56 (a) (3) last ex.
Extremely, 3 (a) (2).
of, 14 (b) and p 76 examples 6
to 8. ' Vide ' Bate.
U&ulam,=yonr humble servant, p.
8 (/) (3). 'Vide' Banda and
Fidwi.
Girna, conjug. of the neuter or in-
transitive verb, 7 (a) ; difference
between girna and parna, p. 87
[and "Stumbling-Blocks"].
Gum, Pers. adj., 47 (b) Rem.
Farmana, when substituted for
karna, 45 (a) (2).
Feminine, Ar. derivatives in-/,
irrational nouns in -*, Persian
nouns in -iah , p. 1 ; femininee in u
or o, pi. of, 53 (/) and 59 (c) (7) ;
how formed from masculines,
24 (6) to (d). Vide Gender
For, expressed by dekhkar, 40 (e)
and footnote.
Formative plural of certain num-
bers, etc., below a hundred,
used as nominatives, 32 (h) ;
formative termination usually
added to last of a series of
nouns, 61 (d) (1).
Fractional numbers, 47 (e) and
App. A (e).
Frequentatives, 19 (a).
Future, pros, tense used for im-
mediate future, p. 194, footnote
1; Put. Impera., 7 (b) (1), p.
37; Fut. Precative, 7 (b) (3),
p. 37. 'Vide' Jab.
Go, e and &-5.0, 59(c)(10).
Ga,d, how declined, 59 (c) (10).
Gander of substantives, p. 1 (a)
and App. F ; common gender,
57 (g) ; of compound nouns 56
(6) and 20 (g).
Genitive, with ka, ke, kl, p. 4 (c).
Ghabrana, tr. and intr., 44 (e).
Gha,o, declension of, 59 (c) (8).
Qhazab ka, idiomatic significations
H, silent, vide silent // ; aspirated
53 (fir).
Hai, difference between hai and
hota hai, 2 (a); examples of
hota hai, 2 (d).
Haiga,=}iai, p. 9, footnote, and
p. 36, footnote 2.
Hal-an-ki, 52 (d).
Hamara, in Lucknow and Delhi
meru is substituted, p. 18, foot-
note 2.
Hamrah,=8ath, p. 12 ; differs from
samet, p. 12 (d).
Hamzah, note on, App. D.
Ha, ' vide' Yaha.
Hardly, how expressed, 51 (6).
Harna, 64 (e).
Have, how expressed, 20 (e).
Hawale, 60 (e).
Hazar , = " although ' ' and ' • a
great deal," p. 194, footnote 5.
Hazir, difference between maw-
jSd and ; idiomatic uses 9 (a).
Help to, expressed by causal verb,
vide note p. 166, end of L. 44.
HI, emphatic, 51 (e) and 50 (6):
examples of use of, 51 (/) ; oc-
casionally omitted after Adv.
Part., 59 (d).
Hindi Alphabet, Appen. G.
Historical Present, example, p.
151, line 5 and footnote 1.
Hoga,=must, 8 (d).
Ho-jata hai, more forcible than
hota hai, p. 20, footnote 1.
Ho-lena, no ne, 22 (a), footnote 1.
Hona, to be, conjugation of neu-
ter verb, 7 (d).
INDEX.
343
Ho-rahna, significations of, 23 (d)
However much, how expressed 9
(6), p. 45, andL. 50 (c).
How much the less, how ex-
pressed, 50 <g), (h).
How much the more, how ex-
pressed, 50 (/).
Hu,a and tha, difference between
2(6).
I.
If, ' vide ' Agar and Whether.
Immediate Future, expressed by
Pres. tense, p. 194, footnote 1.
Imperative Future, 7 (b) 1 ; In-
finitive used as a Future Im-
perative, 54 (/) ; Respectful Im-
perative, 7 (b) (2).
Inasmuch as, how expressed, 52
(c).
Inceptives, 18 (a).
Indirect narration, usual after
verbs of telling or ordering, p.
136 (e).
Infinitive, always masc. when ob-
ject has ko, 54 (a) (2); with ko
= the noun of agency, 54 (<?) :
occasionally used in the pi. , 54
(a), (1) and 55 (c) ; used as a
noun, p. 28, footnote 3 and L
54 (e); as a Fut. Impera., 54
(/); as a Fut. Impera. is less
imperious than the Impera. as
a Pres. Impera. is polite, p. 84,
footnote 1, and L. 32 (d); tr.
for pass, or intr. L. 38 (c) ; col-
loquially used for the Aor. 54
(h) (2); concord of, 54 (b), (c),
(d) ; gen. of inf. expressing in-
tention, used in neg. only, 32
(e) ; idiomatic use of, 54 (h) (1),
(3) ; colloquially used for noun
of agency, 54 (h) (3); inflected
before verbs of motion, 54 (i)
and 58 (a), 1st ex.; is either a
verb or a subs., 54 (a) (1); can
be used as a subs, in any case,
54 (a) (1) ; expresses obligation.
32 (a) ; trans inf. can be used
as a passive, 38 (c) and 54 (a)
(3); inflected before sakna, is
vulgar, 18 (/) ; certain verbs
(inceptive, permissive, acquisi-
tive) govern an inflected infini-
tive, 18 (a).
Intend to, expressed, by the in-
finitive and Noun of Agency 54
(ff)-
Intensive adjectives, 3 (a) (2), and
48 (6) (2).
Intensive (compound) verbs, how-
formed, 21 (a).
Interjections, some examples, p.
12 ; no at end of inten. sentence
43 (a).
Interrogation, expressed by tone
of voice, 5 («); often expresses
strong negation, 5 (c).
Interrogates, 5 (a); examples,
6; interr. pronouns are both
substantives and adjectives, 5
(6) : kaun and kya, used in di-
rect and indirect questions, 5
(d) ; kya, used with sing, and
pi., p. 8 (e); oblique cases of
kya, those of kaun, usually sub-
stituted, p. 8 (e) ; as both object
and subject, 55 (a) (2) ; na at
end of interr. sentence, 43 (a),
Intransitive verb, conjugation of,
7 (a) ; indicates an action was
done by accident, 36 (g) ; pas-
sive of, 47 (d).
Isko and usko,=him, it, 12 (g).
Is liye, correlative of chunki, 52
(a).
Iteration, vide Repetition.
Itna, 35 (a) and (c).
Ittifaq-an, ace. Ar. subs., used as
adv., p. 11 (h).
Izafat, use and signification of, 61
•c,>.
Jab, introducing a future condi-
tion followed by Aor, or Fut.,
35 (g) ; jab and jab jakar idio-
matic, for tab, 57 (e) ; with Pres.
tense = " whenever," with Aor
="when," p. 69, footnote 1:
frequently omitted 57 (/);
' vide ' Agar ; not followed by
a past tense, 61 (b).
344
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Jab tak, meaning yaha tak Id, re-
quires a negative verb, but
meaning "whilst" an affirma-
tive verb, 38 (6) ; not followed
by a past tense, 61 (6).
Jagah, pi. of. 53 (ifc).
Jaha, for relative, 55 (a) (3).
Jaisa, 35 (a) (c), and 55 (a) (3).
Jakar and jake, ' vide' Jab.
Jan and apnl jan, difference be-
tween, p. 138. footnote 1.
Jana, in compounds, significa-
tions of, 23 (c); prefixed to
Pres. Part, expresses progres-
sion, 26, (a) (1); idiomatic use
of, p. 245 and footnote 2. and
64(6).
Jan ke lale, parna, 28 (;).
Janna, no ne, 63 (e).
Jata-rahna, literal and idiomatic
meanings of, 26 (2) and Re-
mark.
Jay a. Past Part, of jana, when
used, 19 (a), footnote 5 and 47
(d) (2).
Jitna 35 (a) (c), and 65 (o) (3).
Jo ki, for cfcun ki, 52 (6).
Jo ko,i, has a double inflection,
p. 8 (h).
Joru, pis. of, 53 (/) (2).
K.
Kab, signifying great contrast,
38 (e).
Kaha expressing contrast, 38
(d) ; in indirect questions, 5
(d).
Kaha (=kya) nom form of kahe,
used in Braj dialect of Hindi,
p. 31, footnote 1.
Kahl, =1 fear lest, 34 (o) ; =far
(in comparison) L. 3 (o) (2) :
other meanings of, 39 (a).
Kahlana, tr. and intr., 44 (6) Re-
mark.
Kahna and bolna, 11 (a) : causal
of, 44 (6) Remark. ' Vide '
Kahlana.
Ka,l, must be followed by a noun
8 (6) (1); really distinct from
feo,t, 8 (6), footnote 1.
Kaka, 59 (c) ( 1 ).
Kam dena, tr, 22 (a).
Kama, (=to be in the habit of)
often governs a past part., 19
(a) : indicating habitual action
is intransitive, 20 (d) and 20
(h) 4th ex.
Kaun, 5 (6), (d), (h) ; not inflected
before sa, se ; si, kaun sa, how
it differs from kaun, 28 (d) ;
used in direct and indirect ques-
tions, 5 (d).
Kin inn. alone does not mean
" house " except in Persian con-
structions, p. 41, and footnote
Khanzaman (vulg. kjiansama),
how inflected, 59 (c) (13).
Khass-kar, adv., "especially," 18
'
Khud=Ap, p. 180, last line.
Khwah-bhtpah, " whether — or," is
exclusive, 35 (/).
Ki, for jo or joki, 35 (6) ; =balki,
52 (e) (7), footnote 1 ; = taki 52
(e) (9); other significations of,
52; often pleonastic, 52(e) (13)
Remark.
Kis liye, vulgar for is liye, 52 (6).
Kis waste, vulgar for is waste,
52 (b).
Ko, generally added when object
is definite, 12 (o), (c), (d);
added to indefinite nouns, 12
(«) ; ko of dative of motion
generally omitted. 12 (») Re-
mark ; examples of the ko of
the indirect object, 12 (i) ; can
not occur twice in the same
clause, 12 (/) (1) and p. 220,
2nd ex. and foot note 2 ; other
rules regarding use or omission
of ko, 12; destroys concord, 54
(d) ; ta,l=ko, p. 4 (d) Remark.
Ko,t, declension of, p. 8 (h) ; when
=" about," is not inflected, 8
(6) (1); requires the noun and
verb to be in the sing., 8 (6)
(2) ; examples of use of, 9 (6) :
= the indefinite article " a," 8
(6) (3) and p. 1.
345
Kuchh, sometimes used before
persons, 8 (c) ; examples of
uses of, 9 (6).
Kya, difference between kya and
kaun, 5 (6) ; used in direct and
indirect questions, 5 (d) ; =
"rather", 5 (c); spelling and
pronunciation to be noted and
distinguished from leiya, p. 20 .
footnote 1. 'Vide' Kyu.
Kyarkya, "whether — or," is in-
clusive, 35 (/).
Kyu, for kya in a question, 5 (/).
Kyukar, and kyukar nahl, 3(> (d).
Kyuki, when used, 52 (a).
Lagna, to begin, 18 (a) ; takes the
place of the subjunctive, 18 (c)
(2) ; idiomatic significations of,
18 (g) ; =offered, 22 (a), p. 88,
footnote 1.
Lakh, and hazar — " although "
and " a great deal," p. 194,
footnote 5.
Lala, "Schoolmaster," 59 (c) (1).
Lana, causal of , p. 163.
Lasha, pi. of, 53 (e).
Lena, in intensive compounds, 22
(c) (1); other meanings, 22 (c)
(7) ; causal of, p. 164.
Le-parna, ' vide ' Parna.
Less, vide Much less.
Lest, how expressed, 52 (e) *, and
footnote 2, and 34 (a); mat,
vulg. 53 (a), p. 199.
Let alone, how expressed, 50 (h).
Logical subject, when infinitive is
transitive or passive, 38 (c).
Liwana, causal lena, p. 164.
Liwa-lana, caus. of lana, p. 163.
Log, to form pis., 13 (e).
Lo,=tak in Hindi, p. 4 (d) Remark.
M.
Majara, 59 (c) (4).
Ma'lum hai &nd=hota hai, 2 (a),
Note.
Ma, pi., of. 59 (c)( 11).
Ma,l, vocative, 59 (c) (6).
Mamnun, obliged to, 32 (/)
Manind, prep., before and after
a noun, p. 11 (c).
Marajana, ) difference in signi-
Mar khana, ] fication between,
22 (/), footnote, p. 90.
M ar parna and mara-parna, 28 (j).
Mama, with and without ko,
significations of, 12 (/).
Masculine, tendency of verb to
agree with, 56 (c).
Mat, difference in use of mat, na,
and nahl, 1 (c), p. 37; = " lest"
(vulgar). 53 (a), p. 199.
Ma/a, pi. of, 53 (i).
Maujud, and hazir, difference be-
tween, 9 (a).
Meaningless appositives, 48 (c).
Measures, Arabic, App. E.
Me, in some common expressions.
40 (d).
Mera, used in Lucknow and Delhi
instead of hamara, 2 (d), foot-
note 2, p. 18.
Milna, with se and ko, different
significations, of 28 (i).
Misrelated Participle, 18 (d).
Miya and Sahib, as terms of res-
pect require a pi. verb, 16 (d).
Months, Arabic names, App. A
(fc); Hindi names, App. A (I).
More, the, 50 (e) to (h).
Motion to, ' vide' Pas.
Much, less, how expressed, 50 (e)
to (h).
Must, 'vide' Chahiye, Hoga and
Parega.
N.
Na, for " no" vulgar, p. 51, foot-
note 1 ; at end of an interroga-
tive sentence indicates affirm-
ative answer, 43 (a); differ-
ence in use between it and nahi
ormat,l(c),p. 37; withchahiye,
32 (c) Remark.
^a_na, neither— nor, 35 (d); na
—aurna, 35 (d) ; idiomatically
the first na may be omitted . 35
(d).
Nagarl, alphabet, App. G.
346
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Naht, difference in use between
it sad mat or na, 1 (c) ; inserted
between aakna and its verb, Iti
(6); with chahiye, 32 (c) Re-
mark.
Nak me dam karria and ana, idiom ,
p. 78, footnote 2.
Na.o, Na.d, pi. of, 59 (c) (9) and
(12).
Narration, direct and indirect, 36
(a), (c), (d), (/), (g).
Nasha, 59 (c) (4).
Ne, 13(o); omitted with certain
compounds of dena, 22 (a) ;
omitted when any part of a
compound intensive verb is in-
transitive, 22 (/), footnote 1,
p. 91; not used with bolna, 13
(c) (1 ) ; with some transifeives, ne
is omitted, with others it is op-
tional, 13 (c) (3) ; formerly not
used with lifeless subjects, 13
(c) (4) ; use and omission with
chahna, 20 (a); omitted with
pana " to be allowed," 18 (a).
'Vide' Chal-dena, Kam dena,
and Sath dena.
Nearly, how expressed, p. 182,
ex. 13, and last ex. 58 (d), p.
223. Vide About to be.
Negative, in declamatory nega-
tive simple verb must be used,
23 (h) (1), (2); substantive verb
omitted in negative sentence,
18 (e); position of negatives,
16 (6) and 57 (i). Vide Na,
Nahl, and Mat.
Nikalna, Pret. of 53 (ifc), footnote 5.
Niz,=&\so, can begin a sentence
(but bhl cannot), 57 (c) (2).
No matter how, how expressed,
50 (c).
Nominative absolute, often used
before a relative, 61 (e).
No sooner than, how expressed,
51 (a).
Not only — but also, how ex-
pressed, 61 (c).
Not quite, how expressed, 51 (6).
Nouns, formative pi. of certain
nouns below a hundred used as
a nominative, 33 (h) ; of num-
ber, weight, measure, quantity,
length, etc., put in apposition,
61 (/); preceded by numerals
may bo sing, or pi., 32 (g) ;
second only of two nouns
usually inflected, 61 (d); ending
in nasal A ( ~ ), how inflected,
53 (c) ; masculines in silent h,
53 (d); in final a, inflected in
compounds, 53 (d) (1) Remark ;
masculines on -ya optionally
change y to hamzah, 53 (d) (2) ;
feminines in silent h, 53 (e):
nouns not used in the pi., 53 (e)
(2) and Remark ; in final aspi-
rated h, 53 (g) ; feminines in
-iya, 53 (h) ; two nouns for noun
and adj., 48 (c); as adverbs,
p. 11 (h); feminine, in u or o,
53 (?) ; masculines in u or o, pi.
of, 59 (c) (5) ; Hindi nouns of
agency in -ya, 57 (i) (2).
Noun of Time, Place, Instrument,
App. E, p. 300.
Numerals, cardinal and ordinal,
App. A. (a) and (c) ; cardinals
followed by a sing, or pi. noun,
32 (g).
Numerical figures, the ten, App.
O.
Offer, to, 22 (a), Rem. and foot-
note 1.
One another, 13 (/).
Ordinals, App. A (c).
Ought, 'vide' Chahiye, Hoga,
and Parega.
P.
Pale porno, 28 (/).
Pan, all nouns ending in, are
masc. , L. 1 , footnote 2.
Pana, to be allowed, no ne. 18
(o); 5 l(o) (6).
Pa.d, declension of, 59 (c) (12).
Paradigms of verbs, 7 (a) and
(c).
INDEX.
347
Par eg a, 32 (a).
Pa'rhna and slkhna, p. 161, foot-
note 1.
Parna, difference between and
girna, 21 (b), p. 87; examples
of, 24 (a) ; in intensive com
pounds, 22 (d) ; tut-parna, sig-
nification of, 22 (d) (3) ; rah-
parna, ban-parna, le-parna, 22
(d) (2) ; some idioms with par-
no, 28 (/).
Participles, Present, Past and
Conjunctive, 55 (d) (1); error
of misrelated participle, 18 (d)
(1) ; used as adverbs, 18 (d) (2) ;
shortened form of Conj. Part,
indicates haste, 26 (c) and foot-
note 1 ; Conj. Part, repeated,
p. 184, footnote 2, and p. 186,
footnote 1 ; Adv. Part., subject
and object of, 59 (d) and last
ex. 60; Past Partc. of trans,
and of a few intransitives can
be combined with the verbs
" to be " and " to become," 55
(d) (2) ; Parts, and state or con-
dition, 63 and 55 (d) and foot-
note (2) ; Past Part, repeated ,
pp. 185 and 187; Pres. Part,
repeated, 48 (a) (?>) and 55 (d),
footnote 3 ; Pres. Part, agrees
with its subj., 55 (d), footnote 2.
Pas, with hona = to have, 20 (e) ;
indicates motion towards things
that cannot be entered, 20 (/}.
Pasand, 47 (6) Remark.
Passive, may indicate that an ac-
tion was done on purpose, 36
(g) ; without an agent also ex-
presses impossibility, 36 (h) and
47 (d) ; grammatical passive,
how formed, 47 (a) (1); its
agent, how expressed, (2); sub-
ject of, sometimes in the ac-
cusative, 47 (c) ; neuter verbs
used in the passive, 36 («') and
47 (d) (1), (2) and Remark;
idiomatic substitutes for, 47
(6 ) ; may be more respectful
than the active, 47 (/), last ex.,
p. 178.
Past Participle, verbs governing
the past part, of another verb,
19 (a) (6) ; repeated, p. 185 and
p. 187: can be combined with
the verbs " to be " and " to be-
come," 55 (d) (2) ; parts, and
state or condition 63 and 55 (d)
(2) ; Pres. Past, and Conj. parts
55 (d) (1). Vide also under
Participles and State.
Per cent., how expressed, App.
A (g) and 45 (e) ; examples of
saikre, 46 (6).
Permissives, 18 (o).
Persian constructions, 61 (g).
Personal pronouns, when omitted,
7 (6) (5), p. 37.
Persons, priority of, 30 (c).
Phasi parna, idiom, 28 (;).
Pharna, tr. of phatna, meanings,
p. 162.
Phatna, tr. of pharna, meanings,
p.' 162.
Phorna, tr. of phutna, meanings.
p. 164.
Phutna, intr. of phorna, mean-
ings, p. 164.
Pictihe parna, idiom, 28 (/).
Pita, how' declined, 59 (c) (1).
Please, how expressed, zarra. p.
14, line 7.
Plural, of respect, 56 (/); pre-
dicating noun sing, or pi. 56 (g) ;
certain numbers in formative
pi., 32 (h); Pers. pi., 61 (h) ;
Ar. reg.pl., 61 (») and (/).
Plurality, expressed by synonym,
48 (6) (1) ; expressed by mean-
ingless appositive, 48 (c); of
action expressed by Reiter-
ative, 48 (d), and p. 77 line 4.
footnote 2, L. 48 (a) (5), and
examples, p. 171-7.
Possession, 20 (e). Vide Have.
Postpositions, added even to ad-
verbs, 61 (c) (4); sometimes
two used with one noun, 60 (a)
(1); sometimes omitted 60 (a)
(2).
Potentials, 'vide ' Sakna.
Precative Future 7 (6) (3).
348
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Predicating noun, number of, 56
(9).
Present participle, prefixed to
rahna = continually, 30 (6) ; =
karna with the past part., .'!0
(b) ; repeated and inflected =
continuity, 4S(a) (5) and 55 (d),
footnote 3; Pres., Past, and
Conj. participles 55 (d) (1);
agrees with its subject, 55 (d),
footnote (2).
Present tense, for immediate
future, p. 194, footnote 1.
Progressives, 26 (a).
Pronominal adjectives, also used
as adverbs, 35 (c).
Pronouns, personal, form of, when
in apposition in oblique cases,
p. 6, footnote 1 : compound,
p. 8 (t) ; not repeated in sen
tence unless subject changes,
40 (c) ( 1 ) ; omitted where sub-
ject or object is obvious, 40 (c)
(2) ; declension of pronouns ,
pp. 5 — 7 ; if ambiguous, sub-
stitute proper name, 36 (/).
Proper name, requires kot 12 (d)
(2): to be substituted for a
pronoun in (direct) narration,
36 (g).
Puchhna with se. and ko.
Q.
Questions, 'vide' Kyukar, In-
terrogation.
Quite, =hi, 51 (/), 2nd example.
Rahna, suffixed to a Pres. Part. =
continually, 30 (b) ; future of
rahna with intr. verb indicates
indefinite time. 23 (d) (2) ; in
intensive compounds suffixed
to intransitives, may indicate
purpose or intention, 23 (d) (1) ;
suffixed to roots signifies unin-
terrupted continuance, 23 (d)(3) :
in Pret. signification of both
verbs retained, 23 (d) (3) Note :
with Conj. Part.=to do after
effort 23 (d) (4) ; jata-rahna to
bo completely lost, 23 (d) (5) ;
some significations of , 64 (b) (2).
Rah-jana, preceded by a pres.
part, signifies ineffectiveness,
26 fa) (1) and (3).
Raha-saha, 57 (d).
Rah-parna, ' vide' Parna.
Rahta-hai and hota hai, 2 (a).
Raja, how declined, 59 (c), (1)
and (3).
Rakhna, in intensive compound =
to do beforehand, 23 (/) (.);
utharakhna, 23 (/) (2); kar-
rakhna, and karna, difference
between, 23 (/) (3).
Ranj aur gharri, no pi., = variety,
p. 16, footnoote 1.
Rather than, how expressed, 51
(d) and 52 (e) (14).
Reciprocity , how expressed , 1 3 (/).
Reiteratives, 48 (d).
Relative and correlative, con-
struction, of 35 (a) and (6) ;
strictly speaking no fol. pron.
in Hindustani, 35 (a) ; as both
subj. and obj. in same sentence.
55 (a) (1); adverbs may take
the place of, 55 (a) (3); rela-
tive sentences, 63 (d) (3).
Repetition, of adjective. 48 (a),
(2): last example in 4 (6), p. 28
and footnote 4, and last ex-
ample in 11 (e), p. 62; repetition
of words 48 (a), (b), (c), (d), (e).
Examples of 48 (/) and 64 ;
repetition expressing repeated
action, vide Participles, Conj
and Present.
Rom, ' vide ' Riia.
Roots, Arabic, App. E.
Ru,d, how inflected, 53 (c).
Rupaya, etc., and rupai, how in-
flected, 53 (d) (3); expressing
per cent, 45 (e).
B.
Sa, se, si, 28 (a), (c),(d),(e), (/).
(g). ' Vide ' Kaun.
Sab, when declinable, p 8 (h).
INDEX.
349
Sab ko,l, = sab log, vulgar, p. 45,
footnote 1.
Sethi; dramatic particle, 57 (d) ;
examples, 58 (d).
Sahib and Miyan, require pi. verb,
16 (d).
Sahra, 59 (c) (1).
Saikra, per cent, App. A (g) ; ex-
amples 46 (b).
Sakna, to be able, 15 (a).
Samajhna, no ne, p. 64 (6) and
footnote 2.
Same, the,=w>ttftt, 3 (d).
Samet and sath, difference in
meaning, p. 12 (d). 'Vide'
Hamrah.
Salh, ' vido ' Samet.
Sath dena, tr., 22 (a) Remark.
Scarcely, vide Hardly.
Se or ko, with kahna and bolna,
26 (b); se or m§, 40 (d) ; se=
than used with comparative
degree, 3 (a) (1); used with
superlative, 3 (a) (1).
Self, Selves, p. 8 (/).
Servile verbs, in intensive com-
pounds lay aside their prima-
tive meaning, 21 (a) ; how they
affect the first verb, 22 (b).
Servile letters, App. E. (a).
Should, 'vide' Chahiye and 18
(c) (2) and 32 (c).
Shukr, specially = thanks to God.
32 (/).
Sikhna ' vide ' Parhria.
Silent h, inflected, etc., 53 (d) ;
fern, nouns in, 53 (e) (1); adjec-
tives in, 53(/).
So, correlative of jo, rare, 34 (a),
p. 126, footnote 1 ; =therefore,
35 (h).
Solar letters, App. E.
Sdh, 59 (c), (11).
Soon as, 51 (a).
State or condition , how expressed,
55 (d) and 63 (b) (1).
Still, ab tak. 51 («) Note.
Subject, vide Passive verb.
Substantives, vide Nouns.
Substantive verb, often omitted
in negative sentence, 18 (e).
Superlative degree, 3 (a), (1), (2).
(3).
Synonymous adjectives, force of,
48 (6), (2).
Synonyms, repetition by, 48 (6).
T.
Tab, jab used for tab, 57 (e).
< Vide ' Jab.
Taha, correlative of jaha, old, p.
126, footnote 2; Jala taha, p.
129, footnote 1.
Ta,l, in Hindi=ito, p. 4 (d) Re-
mark.
Taisa, correlative of jaisa, obso-
lete, p. 126, footnote 1.
Tak, "even" not a postposition,
60 (6).
Talak, =tak, p. 4 (d) Remark.
Tanwin, App. E.
Tal ne, and tal hi ne vulgar for
tu ne, etc., p. 192, footnote 2.
Taraf, pi. of, 53 (fc).
Tasllm and mamntin, etc , thanks.
32 (/).
Tera, in Delhi for children and
menial servants, in Lucknow in
poetry only or for the deity, 2
(d), p. 18, footnote 2.
Terminations, Arabic, Persian
and Sanskrit adjectives in -5
not always subject to inflection,
p. 3 (2) and 59 (c) (1) ; abstract
nouns in -t fern., p. 1 (a); cer-
tain nouns in -I masc , p. 1
(a); in -I, if from Ar. roots
fern., p. 1 (a).
Tha and hu,a, difference between.
2 (b)
Than, 52 (d) (14). Vide also
Comparative degree.
Thanks, how expressed, 32 (/).
The more— the more, how ex
pressed, 50 (e).
Time, vide Day.
To, enclitic, 2 (c) ; and o7 (c);
as a correlative, 57 (c).
To be, the verb, p. 9 and 7 (d),
p. 38.
To say nothing of. how expressed.
50 (h).
350
HINDUSTANI MANUAL.
Too before an adjective, no word,
3 (6).
Tori, p. 4 (d) Remark.
To'rna, tr. of tutna, 44 (c) (2).
Transitive verbs, indication the
action was done on purpose, 36
(g) ; the use of in tenses formed
from the past part., 13 (a);
trans, inf. can be substituted
for intr. or pass. , 38 (c) and 54
(a) (3).
Try, expressed by chahna, q.v .
also by " about to — " q.v.
Tu.ne, tal ne vulgar for, p. 192,
footnote 2.
Unhd ne. 56 (/).
Unne, old form of u* ne, sing..
56 (/) Remark.
Us ko, ' vide' la ko.
Ulhna=parn& in intensive com-
pounds, 22 (e) ; utha-rakhna to
postpone, 22 (e) Note.
Utna, 35 (a) and (c).
V.
Verb, concord with subject, p. 9
(6) and 56 (c) ; compound verbs,
45 (a), (6); construction with,
45 (c); examples of, 46; in-
tensive compound verbs, 21 (a),
22(6), (c), (d), (e), (/), 23 (a).
(6), (c), (d), (e), (/), (g), (h);
when several roots, etc., follow
in the same construction the
finite verb is added to the last
only, 58 (a), some verbs both
trans, and intrans., 44 (e), 63
(e); trans, and causal, how
formed, 44 (a). (6); paradigm
of girna and hona, 1.
Verbal noun of agency, partly
verb partly noun, 57 (b) (1);
=a future particle, 57 (6) (2).
Verbal , roots which are also nouns ,
usually fern., p. 64, footnote 3.
Vocabulary of additional useful
words, App. C.
Vocative, pi. always ends in o, p.
2 (c) : Voc. sing, can be used
with sing, or pi. verb, 13 (h):
Pers. voc., 61 (e).
W.
Wa'da karna and teno,=trans. and
caus., 44(/).
Waisa, 35 (c) and («').
Wah and wa, p. 237 and footnote.
Wala, added to subs, and not to
adjecs.,57 (b) (3).
Wanted, when expressed by chulii-
i/e the negative must be naln.
and not no, 32 (c) Remark.
Was, 'vide' Hu,a.
We, old pi. of wuh, 5 (g).
When, requires Aor. or Fut.. 3.")
(g) : fct=when, denoting sud-
denness, p. 215. footnote 4.
Whenever, with Aor. or Fnt., 1st
ex., p. 133.
Whereas, how expressed, 52 (d).
Whether, how expressed, 52 (e)
(4) and footnote 2.
With, sing, and pi. nom. 5 (g);
used for def. article, p. 1.
Ya—ua, either— or, 35 (e) (I);
= whereas, 35 (e) (2).
Yaha, 20 (e) and 64 (c) (3).
Yaha tok ki, does not itself admit
of negative verb, 38 (b).
Ye, old pi. of wuh, 5 (g).
Year, the Muslim, App. A (k):
the Hindu, App. A (I).
Yih and wuh, sing, and pi. nom.,
5 (g) ; demonstrative pronouns
can be used for the definite
article, p. 1 ; =aiaa, 35 (/).
Z.
Zarra, when used as an adjective
is pronounced sara. p. 14. line
6; =" please" and "just," p.
14, line 6.
Zarl'a, 60 (c).
Zl, App. E.
gimme, GO (e).
Zu, App. E.
_!£ SOOTHERN_REGIPNAL LIBRARY FACILITY
A 000018540 5
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11